Full text of "Graphic presentation"

GRAPHIC
PRESENTATION

WILLARD C. 8RINTON

1939

From the collection of the

o Prepiger
^ JUibrary

t P

San Francisco, California
2008

<e. $.''>i''*^

C^-A

^ Unitid Sutci

^^^^^H America

]

«
•<

■llllimrMg

^■■UM*-VM

■^^^^^l Gcnnanjr

J Dcomark

Portug'al

^■^"'"■■iiiiil ^B

Flandcn

Han* Town*

Venice Ic
Genoa

1 ' ^^

Spain

Co«...n..nopl.

w *
z K

Alexandria

Rome

Canhag^e

Uraellr Jttda

Greece

1 Tyra.fid**

•nd Kino<olur«

AMlrian Emf ir*.

' Egypt

III'

C c <

«
E

1 ,
1 1

1 1

1 J

\ i

1 1^
U4^

M
5 5

tjse

1U4 Ymmrt

From Frontispiece of Book by WILLIAM PLAYFAIR, An Inquiry Into the
Permanent Causes of the Dechne and Fall of Powerful and Wealthy Nations,

London, 1805.

Dedicated

IN HONOR
of

WILLIAM PLAYFAIR

FIRST EXPONENT OF GRAPHIC CHARTS
FOR GENERAL USE

Born at Benvie, Scotland, 1 759
Died in London, England, 1823

DRAFTSMAN-ENGINEER With James Watt 1780

MANUFACTURER

AUTHOR:

THE COMMERCIAL AND POLITICAL ATLAS. 1st ed., 1786; 2nd ed.,
1787; 3rd ed., 1801

TABLEAUX D'ARITHMETIQUE LINEAIRE DU COMMERCE, 1789

LINEAL ARITHMETIC, 1798

STATISTICAL BREVIARY, 1801

AN INQUIRY INTO THE PERMANENT CAUSES OF THE
DECLINE AND FALL OF POWERFUL AND WEALTHY NATIONS.
1st ed, 1805; 2nd ed., 1807

STATISTICAL ACCOUNT OF THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA
By D. F. DONNANT. Translated From the French By WILLIAM
PLAYFAIR. Chart and Preface Also By WILLIAM PLAYFAIR. 1805

A LETTER ON OUR AGRICULTURAL DISTRESSES, 1st ed., 1821;
2nd ed., 1822; 3rd ed., 1822

CAN THIS CONTINUE?, 1822

The above titles by William Playfair are all, thus far
located, which contain graphic charts. The total number
of books by William Playfair is perhaps one hundred.

TOPICAL INDEX (1st Half) J '

Place rif^ht thumb on triangle, finders inside back cover.
Spin pa^es to desired chapter. ,

9-15 Preface — 1- —

16-23 1. Introduction

25- 32 2. Graphic Narrative
33- 42 3. Tabulation

43- 52 4. Classification Charts

53- 58 5. Geneology and Genetics Charts

59- 67 6. Organization Charts

68-72 7. Relationship Charts

73- 80 8. Flow Charts

81- 91 9. Sector Charts

92- 97 10. 100% Bar Charts

98-105 11. Comparison of 100% Bar Charts
106-114 12. Multiple Bar Charts

115-120 13. Contrasting Bar Charts —

121-131 14. Pictorial Unit Bar Charts

132-141 15. Comparison of Component Bar Charts

142-148 16. Bilateral Bar Charts

149-152 17. Area Bar Charts

1 53-1 60 18. General Use of Maps

1 61 -1 69 19. Guide and Route Maps

170-177 20. Relief and Aerial Maps

178-186 21. Crosshatched and Colored Maps

187-193 22. Dot and Pin Maps

194-199 23. Maps with Circles and Sector Charts
200-207 24. Maps with Bar Charts

208-210 25. Maps with Curve Charts

211-215 26. Maps with Symbols

216-230 27. Flow Maps

231-237 28. Contour Maps

238-242 29. Distorted Maps

243-246 30. Rating Charts

(For 2nd Half of TOPICAL INDEX, See Page 247)

MAGIC IN GRAPHS

■■■HERE is a magic in graphs. The profile of a curve reveals in
"J "J a flash a whole situation — the life history of an epidemic, a
Mfelp^nic, or an era of prosperity. The curve informs the mind,
awakens the imagination, convinces.

Graphs carry the message home. A universal language, graphs
convey information directly to the mind. Without complexity
there is imaged to the eye a magnitude to be remembered. Words
have wings, but graphs interpret. Graphs are pure quantity,
stripped of verbal sham, reduced to dimension, vivid, unescapable.

Graphs are all inclusive. No fact is too slight or too great to
plot to a scale suited to the eye. Graphs may record the path of an
ion or the orbit of the sun, the rise of a civilization, or the accelera-
tion of a bullet, the climate of a century or the varying pressure of
a heart beat, the growth of a business, or the nerve reactions of a
child.

The graphic art depicts magnitudes to the eye. It does more.
It compels the seeing of relations. We may portray by simple
graphic methods whole masses of intricate routine, the organization
of an enterprise, or the plan of a campaign. Graphs serve as storm
signals for the manager, statesman, engineer; as potent narratives
for the actuary, statist, naturalist; and as forceful engines of
research for science, technology and industry. They display
results. They disclose new facts and laws. They reveal discov-
eries as the bud unfolds the flower.

The graphic language is modern. We are learning its alphabet.
That it will develop a lexicon and a literature marvelous for its
vividness and the variety of application is inevitable.

Graphs are dynamic, dramatic. They may epitomize an epoch,
each dot a fact, each slope an event, each curve a history. Wher-
ever there are data to record, inferences to draw, or facts to tell,
graphs furnish the unrivalled means whose power we are just be-
ginning to realize and to apply.

HENRY D. HUBBARD

National Bureau of Standards
Washington, D. C.

GRAPHIC
PRESENTATION

WILLARD COPE BRINTON, S. B.

Consulting Engineer

Member, American Society of Mechanical Engineers; Organizer and Chair-
man, Joint Committee on Standards for Graphic Presentation, Formed 1914
Through Am.Soc.M.E., as Sponsor. Fellow, American Statistical Associa-
tion; Vice President, 1919. Author Graphic Methods for Presenting Facta,
1914, McGraw-Hill Book Company, Inc.

^VWx^. Q,, \\^^

BRINTON ASSOCIATES

New York City
1939

This book was planned with the hope of inspiring more and
better factual presentation. If proper credits are given, any rea-
sonable portion of this book may be quoted without further
consent. However, to copy any materials here credited to
others, care must be exercised to secure permission from the
original sources.

Also by Willard C. Brinton

GRAPHIC METHODS FOR PRESENTING FACTS. 1914

Published by McGraw-Hill Book Company, Inc.

New York City

Printed in the United States of America

TABLE OF CONTENTS

When a chapter name or number is given as a reference, turn to
the Topical Index, either on Page 1 or Page 247, and spin pages to
the desired chapter.

Chapter Page

Preface 9

1. Introduction 16

Brief History of Development of Graphic Methods.

2. Graphic Narrative 25

Early Drawings. Picture Comparisons. Sequence Pictures. Pro-
cedure Charts. Sports Stories. Basic English.

3. Tabulation 33

Tallying. Methods of Tabulating. Graphic Tabulation. Machine
Tabulation.

4. Classification Charts 43

Use of Arrows and Brackets in Classification. Time-Period Clas-
sification. Block Classification.

5. Genealogy and Genetics Charts 53

Standard Symbols. Trait-Tracing Charts. Family Tree. Pedigree
Charts. Genealogical Chart Sheets. Other Uses for Genealogy
Charts.

6. Organization Charts 59

Geographical Divisions. Government and Business Organization.
Functional Charts.

7. Relationship Charts 68

Interrelations.

8. Flow Charts 73

Source and Distribution Chart. Traffic Chart. Activity Chart.
Cost-Accounting Chart. Cosmograph.

9. Sector Charts 81

Area and Angle Comparisons. Subdivided Sector Charts. Cumu-
lative Charts. Charts Showing Assets and Liabilities.

10. 100% Bar Charts 92

Single Bars. Bar Chart Stamp. Percentage Distributions.
Cumulative Charts.

11. Comparison of 100% Bar Charts 98

Groups of Bars. Distribution and Percentage Comparisons.

12. Multiple Bar Charts 106

Value Comparisons. Bars on an Illustration.

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

Chapter P««e

13. Contrasting Bar Charts 115

Variation in Shadings. Crosshatchings, and Colors. Optical
Illusion.

14. Pictorial Unit Bar Charts 121

Rows of Figures. Visual Captions.

15. Comparison of Component Bar Charts 132

Divided Bars Comparing Values. Comparison of 100% Bars and
Component Bar Charts. Stair Charts.

16. Bilateral Bar Charts 142

Profit and Loss Data. Deviations from Normal.

17. Area Bar Charts 149

Area Comparisons. 100% Square.

18. General Use of Maps 153

Source of Maps. Base Maps. Map Projection. Borgia Map.
Orange-Peel Map.

19. Guide and Route Maps 161

Proposed Routes. Transmission Lines. Maps Showing Sourcfe of
Materials. Geographic Organization Charts. Comparisons of
Geographic Areas. Pictorial Maps.

20. Relief and Aerial Maps 170

Oldest Known Map. Bird's-Eye View Maps. Diagram Maps.
Statistical Relief Maps. Block Diagrams. Azimuthal Projection.

21. Crosshatched and Colored Maps 178

Comparison of Ben Day Shadings and Colors. Sampling Maps.
Density Maps. Mechanical Intensity Shading Map.

22. Dot and Pin Maps 187

Map Marking Devices. Slave Maps. Bell System Map.

23. Maps With Circles and Sector Charts 194

Scales for Areas of Circles. Census Data. Distribution. Migration.

24. Maps With Bar Charts 200

Traffic Charts. Historical Maps. Map from New York World's
Fair, 1939.

25. Maps With Curve Charts 208

Moving Averages. Precipitation.

26. Maps With Symbols 211

Quantitative and Qualitati«ve Data. Pictorial Units.

27. Flow Maps 216

Flow of Goods. TrafRc Maps. Weather Maps. Hurricane Maps.
Traffic Time.-Zones Map. Chart by M. Minard.

28. Contour Maps 231

Topographic Maps. Weather Maps. Before and After Comparisons.

29. Distorted Maps 238

Rectangular Maps. Population.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Chapter Page

30. Rating Charts 243

Tabulation Form. Mental Development. Safety Records.

31. Chronology Charts 248

Time Analysis and Time Studies. Chart for Assigning Vacations.

32. Progress Charts 256

Time Studies. Material Control Board. Production Progress
Chart. Gantt Charts.

33. Curve Charts 263

One Curve on a Grid. Visual Captions. Historical Labels. Stair
Charts. Deviation from Normal.

34. Comparison With Two Curves 275

Cumulative Curves. Causal Relationships. High-Low Curves.
Lag.

35. Comparisons With Curves 286

Progressive Average and Moving Average Curves. Normal Trend.

36. Component Parts Shown by Curves 294

Component Parts in Curve Form. Percentage Charts. Band
Charts. Use of Brackets.

37. Index Numbers Shown by Curves 301

Comparison of Index Charts with Numerical Value Charts. Mul-
tiple Axis Graph.

38. Frequency Charts 310

Frequency Distribution. Bell-Curve Chart. Distribution in a
Circle. Optical Illusion.

39. Correlation Charts 320

Relationships Between Variables. Scatter Charts. Standard
Deviation. Break-Even Charts.

40. Ogive and Lorenz Charts 331

Probability Paper Charts.

41. Ratio Charts 339

Comparison of Ratio and Arithmetic Scale. Key for Selecting
Ratio Scale. Method of Ruling Ratio Paper. Index Numbers
Curves. Cumulative Curves.

42. Three-Dimensional Methods 354

Models. Perspective Drawings. Photographs. Isometric Block
Diagram. Isometric Protractor. Trilinear Chart.

43. Composite Charts 360

Methods of Combining Various Types of Charts.

44. Suggestions for Making a Chart 367

Helpful Techniques. Sources of Materials. Methods of Lettering.
Ink Colors. Crayons. Colored Papers.

45. Standards for Time Series Charts 381

Abstracts from Time Series Charts. A Manual of Design and
Construction, 1938, Prepared by Committee on Standards for
Graphic Presentation, under Procedure of American Statistical

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

Chapter Page

Association, with the American Society of Mechanical Engineers
as Sponsor Body.

46. The Camera and Its Use 397

Photographic Effects. Color Photography. Photomontage.

47. Lantern Slides 405

Projectors. Slides. Screens. Suggestions for Placing Charts on
Slides. Microfilm.

48. Preparation of Illustrations 410

Types of Illustrations. Preparation of Copy. Reproduction
Media for Art Work. Handling Photographs. Shading Mediums
and Shading Films. Halftone Screen Tints. Colors Used in This
Book.

49. Color and Its Use 423

Discussion of Hue, Value, Chroma. Color Top. How Colors
Appear to the Color Blind.

50. Methods of Reproducing 429

Gelatine Process Duplicating Machines. Blue Prints. Photostats.
Mimeograph Process. Fluid Process Duplicator. Lithoprints.
Multilith.

51. Methods of Printing 435

Relief, Planographic, and Intaglio Printing. Typesetting. Type
Sizes and Styles. Photoengraving, Electrotyping, and Line Plates.
Proofreaders' Marks.

52. Selection of Paper 443

Types of Paper. Considerations in the Selection of Paper. Bulk-
ink Table.

53. Binding Techniques 449

Types of Binding. Binding Specifications. Imposition.

54. Graphic Charts in Advertising 454

Various Types of Graphic Charts in Advertising Material.

55. Quantitative Cartoons 464

Various Types of Graphic Charts in Cartoons.

56. Quantitative Posters 475

Various Types of Charts in Poster Form. Magazine Covers.

57. Displays and Exhibits 486

Mechanical Exhibits. Scale Models. Display Fixtures. Turn-
tables. New York World's Fair Exhibits.

58. Dioramas 494

Dioramas in Process of Construction. Dissolving Diorama
Exhibit. New York World's Fair Exhibits.

59. Graphic Charts in Conference Rooms 497

Board Rooms. Use of Projectors in Conference Rooms.

60. Glossary 501

Graphic Methods Vocabulary.

Index 506

PREFACE

TWENTY-FIVE years have passed since the publication of Graphic
Methods for Presenting Facts in 1914. The continuing demand for
Graphic Methods without revisions in a quarter century now incites curiosity
as to the causes of that demand. So many excellent works relating to graphic
charts or containing chapters on graphic presentation have appeared since
1914 that I had felt the field well covered without another book from me.
This, in spite of the fact that I have published nothing regarding activities of
my own relating to the 1914-1918 World War period.

Probably the feverish demand for prompt and reliable data during war
times did more to stimulate the use of graphic chart technique than anything
that has happened since 1920. Without realizing what was happening as the
war flared, I found myself advising the executives of large corporations, gov-
ernment departments, etc. World trade was disorganized, and the uncertainty
of material supply
required quick anal-
ysis of all available
data. For instance,
in 1916, a New York
silk manufacturer
and I went to China
and back again on
the same steamer to
determine the feasi-
bility of building a
new plant in Shang-
hai to employ five thousand.

For one of my age at that time, it was a great privilege to have the oppor-
tunity to develop some theories and put them in practice day by day with
experienced executives whose decisions were so vital in those hectic war years.
Establishing, in a Broadway office building, control methods for quicker
"tum-arounds" of eighty-five ships chartered by the Belgian Relief Commis-
sion had little relation to strategy in the president's office of a steel company
with twenty thousand employees in Pittsburgh, or scheduling, at New Haven,
Connecticut, two thousand tool makers scattered in shops throughout New
England to assist in producing the light Browning machine gun by a company
already working twenty-two thousand employees at the New Haven plant.
During that period "Z" chart methods and unit card curve records were

^^^^ v/ay/zz^yy?

Signature of William Piayfair from a Letter to Thomas
Jefferson Dated March 20, 1791

■I"

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

developed for use in fields much more specialized than would be of interest
here. Also short map pins with spherical heads were created and placed on a
quantity production basis. Through all the research of the World War period,
the need was constantly evident for standardization so that graphic charts
could be made and interpreted without possibility of misunderstanding. For
general use, graphic charts must be simple. It is not, however, always easy
to determine what is the utmost simplicity. Much depends on the method
of approach. A semi-logarithmic chart may not be puzzling if you call it a
ratio chart and make no
mention of mathematics.

Since the close of the
World War, other activi-
ties have crowded into
the background my in-
terest in graphic charts
and human reactions to
them. It was impossible,
however, to resist tearing
from magazines and
newspapers thousands of
examples of particularly
interesting or especially
erratic graphic charts.
These were added to ex-
amples which had come,
in what Hollywood would
call "fan mail," from
readers of Graphic
Methods. As recently as
twenty months ago there
was still no expectation
of my ever writing an-
other book on the sub-
ject.

Although I had been
in Los Angeles many
times and had passed the
Huntington Library on John Playfair, the Brother of William Playfair

numerous occasions, I in his Inquiry, 1805, William Playfair stated that his

had never found time to brother taught him "that whatever can be ex-

visit it Then after pressed in numbers, may be expressed by lines."

,, / . . , J To the "best and most affectionate of brothers,"

months of mtensive study ,,,.„. ™ , .

William Playfair owed "the invention of these

Charts."

ill

■I"

PREFACE

of some problems in Los Angeles in which graphic presentation had proved
particularly effective in crystallizing opinion on a complex situation. I visited
the Huntington Library on the last day before starting North and East.
While observing some unusually fine types of early bookbinding and the
repairs made to the bindings on some of the Library's most precious volumes,
it occurred to me to ask the Librarian, Dr. Leslie Bliss, what books the
library had by William Playfair, to whom this book is dedicated. In a few
minutes there was brought to us the only one they had listed under William
Playfair:

STATISTICAL ACCOUNT OF THE
UNITED STATES OF AMERICA

by D. F. DoNNANT

•

Translated from the French
by William Playfair

With an Addition on the Trade to America,

For the Use of Commercial Men,

By the Sanie.

•

London
1805

As we looked through this book, I exclaimed to Dr. Bliss, "Here is the
earliest example of a sector chart," and then noticed beneath the one illustra-
tion the inscription, "This Newly invented Method is intended to shew the
Proportions between the divisions in a Striking Manner." See Page 81.

I was also much struck by the fact that the subject matter of the book
referred to industry, commerce, and finance in the United States, that the
preface by William Playfair mentioned conversations between himself and
Thomas Jefferson, that the book was inscribed to Jefferson, and that twenty-
five copies had been sent to him.

When I wrote Graphic Methods in 1914. I had never heard of William
Playfair. Two years later a friend in Pittsburgh sent me a marked catalogue
of a London bookseller listing a book Lineal Arithmetic, 1798, by William

ill

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

Playfair. Out of curiosity. I wrote asking that the book be reserved and that
a price quotation be sent. A few weeks later, upon returning from out of the
city, I was astonished to find the EngHsh book seller's bill for ten shillings,
six pence. Elsewhere in my accumulated mail was the book itself. On the
title page the publisher's price is printed, "Price 10s. 6d." Neither the New
York Public Library nor the Library of Congress had this book. Each of
these libraries has since photostatted my volume for inclusion with the few
examples of other Playfair works which they own. About 1916, I had various
photostats made from these Playfair books, but had never followed up clues
on Playfair, the man. The Playfair search has widened since the chance
inquiry made at the Huntington Library a year ago. Questions still continue.

With all that Playfair did to show the effectiveness of graphic chart
methods from his first book, published in 1786 at the age of twenty-seven,
till his death in 1823, why have not graphic charts become more thoroughly
established as a universal language? Another interest was aroused as to the
part which engineers have played in the development of the graphic lan-
guage, since I noted in California that William Playfair was apprenticed in
Scotland as a machinist and later became a draftsman for James Watt before
writing on a wide variety of subjects. There are about 100 titles by Playfair
on record. The story of William Playfair, still developing, may yet have large
gaps. Location of those writings relating to graphic charts, however, appears
to be fairly well completed.

This book is another contribution from the engineering profession, although
written for general use rather than the technical field, on much the same
general ideas as expressed in Graphic Methods in 1914. The 1914 book was
written largely to disclose some of the fallacies that occur when graphic
charts are used loosely without the basis of accuracy essentially associated
with the work of people with an engineering background.

Until the last decade or so, the use of graphic charts seemed to be progress-
ing sanely and fairly rapidly with no more guidance than resulted from the
extremely brief preliminary report of the Joint Committee on Standards for
Graphic Presentation, published in 1915. In recent years, some weeds seem
to have sprung up to retard the growth of the more cultivated graphics which
had been developing strongly with numerous offshoots since the World War
stimulus. As in a garden where there is sometimes the policy of deciding in
the early stages which are weeds and which are plants that will be productive,
it has not been easy to find a method for defining good graphic charts as
compared with poor or downright obnoxious charts. What is believed to be
a satisfactory method was found in the old story of the blind men who
reported on the characteristics of an elephant. Good graphic presentation
should be susceptible to only one interpretation.

Recently even official government documents have been using a type of
graphics which found its first major use in European countries having a low

PREFACE

percentage of literacy. When the same European methods have been pushed
on a commerciaHzed basis in America, little attempt has been made to follow
existing American standards or trends toward the development of an ultimate
universal language. The tendency has been to use stock symbols over and
over again because they are cheaper to reproduce than special drawings
designed for each particular problem of presentation.

The first part of this book up through page 366 deals with "How to Read a
Chart." The section from page 366 to page 452 treating the subject "How to
Make a Chart," is necessarily condensed, and gives suggestions rather than
detailed instructions.

The illustrations in this book have been selected from the standpoint of
interesting subject matter as well as to show representative types of graphic

AND All h^ere in the ivrong!

Good Presentafion Should Be Susceptible to Only One interpretation

It was six men of Indostan The Fourth (knee) "Is very like a tree!"
To learning much inclined,

Who went to see the Elephant
(Though all of them were blind.)

That each by observation
Might satisfy his mind.

The Fifth (ear) "Is mighty like a fan!"

The Sixth (tail) "Is very like a rope!"

The First (side) "Is very like a wall!"

The Second (tusk) "Is very like a spear!"

The Third (trunk) "Is very like a snake!"

And so these men of Indostan

Disputed loud and long,
Each in his own opinion

Exceeding stiff and strong
Though each was partly in the right.

And all were in the wrong!

From John Godfrey Saxr. "The Blind Men and the Elephant". CIrvrr Slnrin nl Many Natir>n> R^-ndrred
in Rhime. 1865.

■I"

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

charts. Words are carefully studied before they are qualified for admittance
in a dictionary. No one knows how many distinct types of graphic charts are
already in established use.

Beneath the majority of the illustrations included here, there is a notation
of "SCALE" to indicate the percentage reproduction of the original. In judg-
ing the effectiveness of any presentation it should be clearly kept in mind
that, as here reduced, the illustration can not be as effective as in the size
originally published. Also in the process of photographing, particularly in
those charts taken from newsprint paper, the illustration is less clear. Half-
tones which here appear too black have been photographed from previously
printed halftones rather than from original photographs.

If the subject matter of any illustration is of special interest to the user of
this book, a reading glass may be used to enlarge the detail.

Because a frame around the chart may be interpreted falsely as a zero line,
or base line, the liberty has been taken to remove frames from many illustra-
tions. Changes have also been made in lettering or other details, when neces-
sary, for reproduction in reduced sizes.

It should be clearly understood that this book would not have been feasible
except for the photo offset process of reproduction and color printing.

The use of color has been a gamble— many of the charts here shown in
color were originally black and white. It was impossible to foresee results
obtained from hundreds of lay-outs sent to the printer. Changes may seem
obvious in the final printed form.

Designs at the top and bottom of color pages may appear incongruous
with some of the color combinations in the body of the page. Varied color
designs were inserted with the thought that the user of this book might gain
from our experiments and select certain effects appropriate for his own par-
ticular problem.

In order to test whether color is worth while in graphic presentation, color
has here been literally splashed on. In folding printed sheets for sewing into
bookbinders' signatures, every other pair of pages evolve from one side of the
printed sheet of paper. Thus, if color is printed on only one side, a reader
finds color on every other pair of pages in the book. In this way it is possible
for the reader of this book to judge the effect of color on the varied types of
charts shown in the 60 chapters simply by turning the pages two at a time. It
is believed the evidence is conclusive that to get maximum results in graphic
presentation the question is not "Can one afford to use color?" but "Can one
afford to omit color.?"

This book Graphic Presentation results from the work of many people. It
would not have been possible except for the charts produced by the indi-
viduals and organizations to whom credit is given under many of the 676
illustrations. The illustrations were selected from thousands of clippings

■■■

PREFACE

which I could not resist saving during the 25 years that have elapsed since
publication of Graphic Methods for Presenting Facts in 1914.

The chapter on selection of paper was prepared by Mr. W. B. Gibson, of
the Mead Sales Corporation, in consultation with officers of various trade
associations. My wife, Laura M. Brinton, did practically all the work in
preparation of Chapter 46, "The Camera and Its Use"; Chapter 47, "Lantern
Slides," and Chapter 49, "Color and Its Use." Miss Audrey W. Zeigler, of
Newburgh. New York, made all the drawings used as the headings of chap-
ters. Mr. R. R. Lutz, of the National Industrial Conference Board, made
valuable suggestions in the early stages of planning the book, particularly
regarding the possibilities for the use of color. Mr. Roy S. McElwee, and
numerous others read manuscript and contributed suggestions as the book
progressed. In planning the printing, many helpful ideas were given by Mr.
Edward N. Mayer, Jr., of Gray Photo Offset Corporation. The cooperation
of the entire staff of that organization is appreciated. Personally I regret that
frequent absences from the city have prevented that close contact which I
should have preferred to give to such fascinating subject matter.

Methods of graphic presentation and new types of charts will continue to
evolve through processes of human ingenuity as need arises. There is need
for classification and comparison of types noting the advantage of each type
and making all types available for general use internationally. Nomenclature
alone is deserving of careful attention far beyond the range of any one indi-
vidual.

In the discussion of these matters in Washington, D. C, during the past
year the Honorable Kent E. Keller, member of the House of Representatives
from Illinois, and Chairman of the House Committee on the Library of Con-
gress, has been of great assistance in exploring the possibilities. Mr. Keller's
unusual range of knowledge and experience in education, medicine, law,
engineering, publishing, and mining, coupled with residence in Europe and
Mexico, served in determining potentialities for not only a central file of
graphic charts by types, but also a comprehensive file of graphic material
arranged for quick reference and classified according to subject matter.

William Playfair, from his first book in 1786 throughout his writings to his
death in 1823, mentioned the possibility that a graphic language could be an
international language assisting in better relations between nations of different
tongues. As this is written, with international conditions throughout the
world unsettled and getting worse, there seems more than ever before a need
for such a common graphic language as William Playfair envisioned.

WILLARD COPE BRINTON.
New York City
Sept. 6, 1939

1 16

Chapter 1
INTRODUCTION

hy have graphic methods been so tardy in developing?
Three things in combination are necessary before visual methods
of presentation can be adequately used.

1. Accurate factual data readily available.

2. Competent drafting talent to chart the data on a standard-
ized basis.

3. Equipment and organization for reproducing the charted
data at a cost not too high compared to the printed word.

Until mankind developed reasonably cheap paper, there was no
convenient method for preserving quantitative data. The study

"One hundred rumors are not comparable to one look."

An Old Chinese Inscription

of statistical records and the developing of policies from facts had
to wait until records gradually accumulated. The making of paper
and the preserving of records developed rapidly after the invention
of loose-type printing about 1450.

At the time William Playfair wrote his first book on graphics in
1786, the word "statistics" had not come into general use. The word
itself is derived from "state." The state first had to keep records
of tax rolls, collections, and various government activities. Playfair
lamented the inadequacy of historical data in a number of his
writings; for instance, in Commercial and Political Atlas of 1801:
"Had our ancestors represented the gradual increase of their com-
merce and expenditures, if it had not been an object of utility, it would

INTRODUCTION

at least have been one of curiosity; but had records, written in this sort
of shape [plotted curves] and speaking a language that all the world
understands, existed at this day, of the commerce and revenue of
ancient nations, what a real acquisition would it not have been to our
stock of knowledge! In place of which, a few detached facts are col-
lected and brought forward as the only criterion from which we can
judge of the manners and wealth of the ancient world.

"It is not only of importance that this species of information should
be handed down, but also that it should go down in such a form and
manner as that any person might, even though a native of another
country, understand the nature of the business delineated.

". . . If we could have a copy of the custom-house books of Carth-
age or Tyre for a hundred years, what value might not be set on them!
These charts [Playfair's] will be for future nations the same thing that
the ancient records we so much desire would be for us now. . . ."

If we search into the past for factual data, we naturally think
of libraries. If we could now examine the libraries as they existed
at intervals of one hundred years, say one, two, three or four cen-
turies back, what would we find? Probably very little factual

Courtesy of American Chicle Company — Makers of Dentyne Gum

The First Agricultural Report

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

information. Even books in our grandfathers' attics, if classified,
would be short on factual material and long on abstruse discussion
of theories, most of which were of a religious nature or perhaps
vaguely astronomic or otherwise theoretical considerations of the
universe.

The development of printing and the gradual cheapening of
paper resulted in people of Europe and this country being exposed
not to pictures but to more and more words, words not only from
the printed page but from ministers of the gospel who, being of
the educated class and able to read, obtained their inspiration from
the printed material which came to them.

Let us consider bookmaking in the early days from the stand-
point of cost. There would seem to be little reason why illustra-
tions should not be generally used. Books were made from wooden
blocks even before the use of movable metal type. Illuminated
manuscripts and early books of similar pattern used illustrative
methods which today we would think prohibitive from the cost
standpoint. Labor must have been relatively cheap, especially in
monasteries or other religious institutions which in those days pro-
duced so much of the literary output. Probably there was nothing
whatever to prevent the development of illuminated graph charts
long before the days of William Playfair except lack of reliable
factual data from which to make the charts. People of those days
must have found out, just as we find out so often now, that if we
start to chart our facts, we are frequently stopped by the startling
insufficiency of the data, the annoyance that the data may have
a single gap in its continuity, or that the data have not been kept
on a uniform basis over the period of time under consideration.

Organization of data on a rectangular field would appear to be
so obvious that it might have been done fairly early by scholars
in different countries, if they had had much data to study. The
printed page with its lines of words proceeding from left to right
is in itself a coordinate field, the lay-out of which required careful
thought from those who produced the illuminated manuscripts or
books which are so fascinating to us now. Descartes in 1637 pub-
lished his works on geometry which firmly established the method
of rectangular coordinates when used for mathematical formulas.
Those who are interested in the history of graphic presentation
will find the sequences well brought out in a paper of one hundred
and thirty- five pages by H. Gray Funkhouser, published in Osiris,
Volume Three, Part One, 1937, available through the Carnegie
Institution of Washington, D. C. Funkhouser dates the use of the
coordinate field to astronomers and surveyors as far back as 140

:fBWK?!W5r.«

INTRODUCTION

B.C. when points in the earth's surface were located by means of
their longitudes and latitudes. Oresme in 1350 in his Tractitus de
Latitudinibus Formarum endeavored to represent graphically how
an empirical curve might behave. As Funkhouser states, "If a
pioneering contemporary had collected some data and presented
Oresme with some facts to work on, we might have had statistical
graphs four hundred years before Playfair."

Leonardo da Vinci antedated Descartes 77 years. Leonardo's
genius in the natural sciences and as an engineer was so far in
advance of his time that it would seem that he might have been
familiar with rectangular coordinates. Recent examinations of his

notebooks, though not very con-
clusive, seem to indicate that in his
experiments regarding gravitation,
his records of the velocity of fall-
ing bodies were analyzed on a
rectangular coordinate basis. See
Volume M, Verso 40, Manuscripts
of the Institute of France. He used
horizontal distances to express
time and vertical distances to show
the space covered by falling balls
when two were dropped together
or one following the other. Leon-
ardo, however, left no group to
carry on his engineering works,
which were little understood by
his immediate contemporaries and
successors.
The American Statistical Association, formed in 1839, now cele-
brating its one hundredth anniversary, is the earliest specialized
scientific organization in this country. The American Philosophical
Society, organized by Benjamin Franklin in Philadelphia, was, of
course, earlier but its activities cover such a wide field as to put it
in a different class. The American Society of Civil Engineers
founded in 1876, was followed by the American Society of
Mechanical Engineers in 1880 and then by numerous other en-
gineering and scientific societies. The presentation of their papers
in edited transactions has resulted in rapid advance in varied chart
techniques.

In spite of all that Playfair pointed out a century and a half
ago, and the interest shown by a few college instructors during
recent years, there is still insignificant use of graphic presentation

Early Work on Books Was Done
Monasteries

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

methods in the field of education. Educators themselves do rela-
tively little to analyze the methods for transmitting facts and ideas.

At present most educators are graphically illiterate. An educator,
or person with a message to give is referred to as : lecturer, speaker,
orator, preacher, narrator, reciter, etc. These words generally imply
the conveyance of a message through the ear without reference
to the eye. Until the cinema was equipped with sound there was
a move to use the word "optience" instead of "audience." Although
the moving picture now combines perception through both the eye
and the ear, the messages generally conveyed today by the motion
picture are descriptive rather than quantitative. The moving pic-
ture projector has not thus far been a great influence for intro-
ducing the type of graphic presentation indicated in this book.
Lantern slides, and more recently, slide films, have been important
factors.

There are interesting possibilities if educational institutions
would seriously study the methods for presenting ideas and facts,
and then, as their instructors qualified in the new technique,
designate each by the term "Presentor." In a similar way, a student
might be called a "Perceivor." Each of these terms implies re-

•iiSf'45

H. Gray Punkhouser. "A Note on a Tenth Century Graph." OSIRIS. Vol. I. 1936.

A Tenth Century Graph That Forms a Part of a Manuscript Discovered by Sigmund
Sunther in 1877

According to the article by Dr. Funkhouscr, from which this illustration was taken, the
graph was meant to represent a plot of the inclinations of the planetary orbits as
a function of the time.

INTRODUCTION

sponsibility for results. These terms are not limited in their scope
to the field of education. Anyone planning a conference, conven-
tion, committee, discussion, assembly, council, etc., might do well
to consider the method for presenting the subject matter. How
many of these meetings today are just talk? If each participant
would consider himself as a Presentor of data or ideas that he is
especially qualified to contribute to the group, there would be less
misunderstanding and more conclusive action.

We are still expressing ourselves in meetings by the traditional
methods the old patriarchs used to pass on the folklore of the tribe
— by word of mouth. While the newspaper, the movie and the
radio are being used to present descriptive material to secure
public approval, quantitative presentations are relatively rare in
publicity campaigns. The introduction of quantitative expression
in every phase of life can lend itself to great future progress. There
has been some discussion of the effectiveness of graphic methods
to convey facts and ideas, but no comprehensive analysis has thus

Rene Descartes, 1596-1650

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

DEATH AFTER DARK

)930 1931 1932 1933 1934 1935 1936 1937

25.000
24.000
23.000
22.000
21.000
20.000
19.000
)6.000
17.000
16.000
15.000
14.000
13.000

j/- —

-^^^

^^^^

' — "

^^'^^

DAYLIGHT

How Charts Ought Not to Be Made

The omission of the zero line in this chart gives a false impression of the relative
values of the number of accidents during the hours of darkness and

during daylight.

far been made measuring results from organized material carefully
prepared and presented graphically.

The question is sometimes raised as to how you can present in
graphic chart form, abstruse ideas which have not yet been reduced
to words. Engineers and other people who are accustomed to using
graphic methods are likely to approach the problem thinking
graphically. They are apt to list the factors involved and then try
different types of organization charts, etc., to work out the rela-
tions and size of the different factors.

■m}ft^?i(:i'f'WfS!i:iii,-m

INTRODUCTION

1911 l*M !«• l«tO I9tl l»ll IttS IM4 Ittt l»t« t*tl Its* I9I* I«SO t«SI t«9t 1993 19S4 I99S t9SS I9S1

Ratio Chart Showing Prices of Non-Ferrous Metals in the United States fronts 1917
to 1937.

The above chart was reduced from one transmitted by Western Union automatic telegraph,
showing that, as machines are installed, graphic charts may be sent from one city
to another. Service is now available only in New York, Buffalo, and Chicago. Other
cities will be added.

Graphic charts present unusually comprehensive data in con-
densed form for analysis and interpretation. Major libraries should
contain a division of graphic charts. Filing most of the material
could be easily done by placing material in the usual letter vertical
files. Provision should, of course, be made for cross references.
Probably it would be desirable to have two sections, one for sci-
entific and technical data, the other to contain all other material.
To aid those studying graphic presentations, larger libraries would
do well to have a separate file classified according to types of
graphic charts, irrespective of the subject matter.

.a!(«K«««sws-^AS '.j'Sa

GENERAL REFERENCES

HISTORY OF GRAPHIC METHODS

Funkhouser, H. Gray, "Historical Development of the Graph-
ical Representation of Statistical Data," Osiris, Vol. Ill, Part
I, 1937

Walker, Helen M., Studies in the History of Statistical Method,
Williams & Wilkins Co., Baltimore, Md., 1929

GRAPHIC METHODS

Arkin, Herbert, and Raymond R. Colton, Graphs: How to Make
and Use Them, Harper & Brothers, New York City, 1936

Brinton, Willard C, Graphic Methods for Presenting Facts. Mc-
Graw-Hill Book Co., Inc., New York City, 1914

Brown, Theodore H., Richmond F. Bingham, and V. A. Tem-
nomeroff. Laboratory Handbook of Statistical Methods, Mc-
Graw-Hill Book Company, Inc., New York, 1931

Chaddock, R. E., Principles and Methods of Statistics, Hough-
ton Mifflin Co., New York City, 1935

Croxton, Frederick E., and Dudley J. Cowden, Applied General
Statistics, Prentice Hall, Inc., New York, 1939

Crum, William L., Alson C. Patton, and Arthur R. Tebbutt, In-
troduction to Economics Statistics, McGraw-Hill Book Co.,
Inc., New York City, 1938

Haskell, Allan C, Graphic Charts in Business, Codex Book Co.,
Norwood, Mass., 1928

Karsten, Karl G., Charts and Graphs, Prentice Hall, Inc., New
York City, 1923

Riggleman, John R., and Ira N. Frisbee, Business Statistics, Mc-
Graw-Hill Book Co., Inc., New York City, 1938

Riggleman, John R., Graphic Methods for Presenting Business
Statistics, McGraw-Hill Book Co., Inc., New York City, 1936

PREPARATION OF ANNUAL REPORTS

Selvage, James P., and Morris M. Lee, Making the Annual
Report Speak for Industry, Compiled by National Association
of Manufacturers, McGraw-Hill Book Company, Inc., New
York City, December 1938.

Chapter 2
GRAPHIC NARRATIVE

Oynonyms for graphic narrative are: ideographic drawings, pic-
tograms, figurative symbols, pictographic charts, and hieroglyphs.
Graphic narrative may involve the keeping of records, quality of
materials, time, or quantities.

Walker Engraving Corporation, New York. SCALE .7

A Stone Age Man's Painting of a Bison.

1. Long before a written language had evolved, man recorded his actions and accom-

plishments in stone carvings and paintings.

2. Although it is not certain that the picture above is one of a bison which the painter

has slain, it is probable.

3. This early recognition of the value of a painting in preference to a verbal description

is the forerunner of the use of illustrations in modern textbooks.

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

CHARACTERISTICS OF GRAPHIC NARRATIVE CHARTS

1. A picture is more universally understood than a word de-
scription.

2. Graphic narrative is adaptable for poster use and has a great
deal of popular appeal.

3. There are few rules for, or restrictions on, the use of graphic
narratives.

4. Quantitative data may be shown or suggested in graphic
narrative form. The picture may stand alone or may be
accompanied by comments of explanation.

BASIC ENGLISH

Basic English is a system of 850 words and five simple rules for
putting them together, which was the invention of Mr. C. K. Ogden
of the Orthological Institute, Cambridge, England. It will do the
work of 20,000 words of English for the normal purposes of trade,
science, and everyday living. Special lists for general science and
for any special science put the number of words up to 1,000, with

Liberty Magazine, April 13, 1929.

SCALE .9

The Pig Woman's Story of Her Movements and Observations on the Night of the
Hall-Mills Murder.

This form of graphic narrative may be used to accompany fiction as well as fact. It is
very simple in idea — it gives the story in time sequence.

GRAPHIC NARRATIVE

the addition of which the international signs of chemistry, for ex-
ample, may be made to do their work at the expert level. Its
interest for the writer of this book is that graphics — the interna-
tional language of the eye — may be made completely international
if Basic English is used where any words are necessary.

Basic may be learned in a month by a quick learner, working
privately, or in a year or less in school. To the eye and ear it is not
different from normal English, and it takes only a very short time
to get the trick of writing and talking in it.

Of 1,500 living languages, only seven are used by more than sixty
million persons. Of these seven, English is by far the commonest.
It is the natural, or government language of six hundred million,
it has for a long time been the second language of the Far East,
and is now learned in schools in all parts of the earth. It is the lan-
guage of the seas, of trade, to a great degree of science, of the mov-
ing pictures and radio. Basic English is an international form of
this most international of living tongues.

This account of the system is in Basic English.

Further facts about Basic English may be had from the Payne
Fund, 1 Madison Avenue, New York City, or the Orthological
Institute, Cambridge, England.

THE TEXTILE COMMUNITY -

occupies 880,000 homes

owns 700.000 automobiles

spends $3,000,000 on movies annually

owns 300,000 mechanical refrigerators
eats 3,500,000 tons of food annually

Textile World. October m38, Part of an Editorial on Public Relations Entitled "Textiles a Source of
Purchasing Power."

An Analysis of the Textile Community.

Without representing the pictorial items quantitatively, this form of graphic picture gives
a concise analysis of the textile community. It was used effectively as an illus-
tration for a public relations editorial.

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

l900rn^pT1T

"STREAMLINED STANDARDS OF LIVING
CREATED BY MACHINE TOOL INDUSTRY

United States News, Washington, D. C, June 20, 1938. SCALE .6

A. The Story of American Efficiency in the Machine Tool Industry.

Here is a vivid story of the changes that have taken place in history. It is purely a quali-
tative analysis: — the wagon has been replaced by the truck; the broom by the
vacuum cleaner.

THREE-FOURTHS OF PIGS GO TO MARKET BY TRUCK

/^^^•kLi^

Automobile Manufacturers Association "Automobile Facts!' September l').}8

B. A Graphic Presentation of the Fact That Three-Fourths of the Pigs in the United
States Go to Market by Truck.

The use of pictures to represent 3 out of 4 or 7 out of 10 or 4 out of 5 has been used for
many years. It is still an effective method of presenting percentage analysis.

GRAPHIC NARRATIVE

Opponents

mAHHATTAn'S
REVERSE Run

no3 <><ksscs s*t.L

TO NO* art FAKt
SPIN

Nrw York Journnl and American. SCALE S

A. Famous Football Plays: Manhat-
tan College Reverse Run.

An explanation of a football play, either
before a game or after a game, is
a well-known form of graphic nar-
rative. Players on each side are
indicated by squares, circles, or
other distinctive symbols, and the
movements of the various players
are indicated by arrows.

The HHarvard-Yale Game of 1937.
The Score Was 13 to 6 in Favor
of Harvard.

After the "game," spectators often
would like to have a picture of
the various plays before them so
that any confusion as to what
actually did occur may be seen
at a glance.

The work sheets from which the above
chart was made were of heavy
cardboard and easy to handle at
the game. It may be possible that
standards for this type of chart
will evolve in the future.

FIRST HALF

O lO 20 30 40 so 40 30 ZO 10 G

SECOND HALF

« ID 20 30 40 so 40 30 20 lO G

■V^-N ^^^ v•^^ Sk^sJs/V«

ff^fcf <L

^-^

^fH'i

««l

f<ZAP><

(oity

• MA(?VARO O YALE CfOc^JH
Victor O Jones, Sports Editor, Boston Globe.

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

Compare the charts in this chapter With those in "Pictorial Unit
Bar Charts," pages 121-131.

Redrawn from Fortune Magazine, February 1932.

The Use of Segments of Fruit to Represent Quantities.

With the modern emphasis on novelty, the use of segments of fruit to represent quantities
should be an effective one. A quarter segment of a lemon to represent the produc-
tion by the United States of a fourth of the world's lemons, or a half segment of
grapefruit to represent the production by the United States of half the world's
grapefruit, vi\>uld be much more vivid than the same information presented in
verbal form or even bar-chart form.

GRAPHIC NARRATIVE

^f'^m-'^intn

V** cl»*«t* *k« ^l«f tm4 pl*m fm want t«w ■••k • I«*a- . . . TK« l<

. TK« l*fld»f. miwrvd. pr«.i4*t (K« <

FHA tpptmwti k «i<*ii il rMf .•!«•«• h
Ymc Wwm mitt* fMmtm t% •M«iili«l

®-

Tk« ^nifn mnl b« .'ck.lK)»f<ll, ••u«<l riadil, uUabU

How to get an FHA-insiired
mortgage — f^raphically told
in words, pictures and charts

T1i« coMtrw«t*eM fiiMt b« 90«d. r««titi»9 w*«rh«r «nd t

T>.« pi»f m^n* b« prcctic*! (I«ft). not

*****,

Eqwpivivnt mwit b« appropriat* to kcuM a^d na>9kb«r^o«d

Hou»f and Garden, June 1938 SCALE 6

The Procedure for Securing a Federal Housing Adnninisfration-lnsured Mortgage in
the United States in 1938.

Stories have been told by pictures since prehistoric times. Here the story was told
graphically but the verbal narrative was also included. The pictures attract atten-
tion; the words make sure that the picture is understood; and the combination
of the two results in the reader remembering the procedure for securing an
FHA-insured mortgage.

^^ GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

Transparent material on which pictures and words may be
printed has made possible a new type of book. It is literally a
book, but a book that builds up a given idea, subject, or problem
step by step as the pages are turned. By the use of transparent
pages and an ingenious pictorial scheme, a complete story is spread
out before the individual as a complete whole. The book is planned
so that it can be read from front to back or back to front with the
story differing according to which way the book is read. After the
subject is built up, it may be reversed from the other angle. Since
the page is transparent, the subject matter is carried through the
page, presenting the other side of the same material.

Educators, advertisers, science, and industry may use this new
tool to unfold an object, lesson, or product in a practical, pictorial
manner where the spoken or written word is often misinterpreted
or misunderstood. It greatly simplifies the presentation of any
object, and produces a vivid mental picture which is easily retained.
Sources:

Offset Gravure Corporation, Long Island City, New York
S. Theo Jonas, 10 West Jackson Boulevard, Chicago, Illinois

When You're mil/N^lAlO/\/C-
Think About '-^LOlLINf; OU£R/

25 Miles an Hour

50 Miles an Hour

'^ ■-'wi..X-'i--''--'-"--t'^^

75 Miles an Hour

Travelers Insurance Co., Hartford, Conn.

Graphic Presentation of the "Turnability" of an Automobile Traveling at Three
Rates of Speed.

Chapter 3
TABULATION

ATTRACTIVENESS can be a characteristic of statistical tables.
, Adherence to certain simple suggestions will improve their
appearance. Designing is an integral part of every table and should
be carefully planned. The actual form which any table takes
depends upon the data to be presented.

For suggestions relative to setting up tabulation for reproduc-
tion, see the Vari-typer in Chapter 44 and the material about type-
setting in Chapter 51.

CLASSIFICATION

TOTAL
COUNT

Engines

Coal Cars

Mail Cars

///

Baggage Cars

nil

Coaches

•HU II

Diners

III

Pullmans

-HUI

Observations

III

A Simple Method of Tallying.

1. The above method of tallying, while simple, lends itself to practically all counting pro-

cedures.

2. Often, rather than count everything there is to count, one "sample" count or several are

taken. The average of the total of these samples, if chosen according to a logical
plan, will give the same result as would be obtained if all were counted.

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

REFERENCES

Day, E. E., "Standardization of the Construction of Statistical
Tables." Journal of the American Statistical Association, Vol.
17, March 1920. This issue of the Journal is so limited that
the American Statistical Association cannot sell it. However,
it is available in most libraries.

/.UJ P.m.

/■ J.? P. M..

t.j.9-r>»t. J_^ f.j j-fi^ j /Ljw '"•t J" '/.'i i7^«<. y.j.rP.H

UJ^U^

wmmm

.AjlE<JJL*jlJ^ / tt*.U*.uXZ. -V' AkAM«^«^ . £ — c / *. J-*f

4. /3"a. /«.

Hi'

7.10

■wtmmm

M— ■■■■■— —M—W

£'

CU»,^L,4^^ / ¥-^ / f30- /^t<-»^<^

_3>J!L/c ,.j,\t~ .^w>-«^u.> -a-cAaa*.4-^^/v ■«*. ' .. <. C »y «.».^^r 5t»-C~

/«.rr/.t

■IBMI

1 1

Three Methods of Tallying the Barking of Dogs. Data for Use in a Lawsuit, scale s

Since intelligent planning preceded the tallying of this information, there was no need to
record it in the form of tables.

TABULATION

Mudgett, Bruce D., Statistical Tables and Graphs, Houghton
Mifflin Company, Boston, Mass., 1930

U. S. Department of Agriculture, Bureau of Agricultural Eco-
nomics, The Preparation of Statistical Tables, 1937. A
pamphlet distributed free of charge.

Walker, Helen and Walter Durost, Statistical Tables: Their
Structure and Use (Bureau of Publications), Teachers Col-
lege, Columbia University, New York City, 1936

/■d;>uIii«oii

WMhingt.m. D. C..' 486,860

Clicvy CliMc, Mil 8,000

Takoiim I'ark, Md 6,415

Silver Spring. M<1 5,000

UyalUville, M.l 4,264

Mt. Rainier, M«l 3,832

Ktlovatt-hourt <

1929 354,9.32,330

1930 400. 20S, 431

1931 43.S, 360. 3S1

1932 - 464, 108,604

1933 495,013,756

1934 . 602, 832,609

I r.nmj tfiienii-l for th« Wtshlnrloo Railway A Klntrlc ComiMDy
b D<it inclu<Jcd Id IheM n^ros.

Federal Power Commission. National Power Sur-
vey, Cost of Distribution of Electricity 1936.

SCALE .7

A. Population of the Principal Cities
Served by the Potonnac Electric
Power Company in 1934, and
Trend. of Service Growth from
1929 to 1934.

These are simple tables arranged accord-
ing to magnitudes and chronologi-
cally. Note that the arrangement
is from the top down.

MAINE

IN
SEPT.

THE
NATION
IN NOV.

1900

1904

1908

1912

1916

1920

1924

B. As Maine Goes So Goes the Na-
tion?

This diagram shows that Maine, the state
which had its election first, fore-
casted the result of the presidential
election with approximate accu-
racy. The forecast has been
"wrong" three times up through
1936. In 1940, however. Maine
will hold its election at the same
time as the other states.

Adapted from The Philadelphia Evening Bulletin.

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

MANUFACTURES.

Tabls M.-DrrAILBD eTATKMBirT FOB TIB TmiTBD ■TATm.

< m lunrMPm

'sm

■Mi. i.

■ ^UJi ' "

GENERAL TABLBB.

BT OBOOIUPHIO DIYIBIOirS AND BTATK8: lilt

TtSii,
•uu.

•Mfftf

Table 53-

- Dktaiixd Statemkmt

roa THB Unitxd Statb

Di.nin.

Num.

•■■

■tiM-n

PuMun Emuun m tltiiur^cTVdiia lii»ovf«ia |

ToUl

rravncton utd OAruli

Ann«r NubIim o( W.|e Bwwi

CkrL

.Hr.

~ l«U Dkr W - ~ 1

Tutd

Pre-

Pir.

ricl
cm irf
pura-

Uxt-

Mu-

•4im

Mak

T>UI

ud onr

Vmia l«

M«lk

Italk

M*k

U»k

Mali

■ab

BT GEooRAPiiir Divisions and States: I9I0.

Capital

F.mpaMa

Valwo<
Pk4>c4>

Vai»

AiMad

MaMlK-
tan

Salanr< an.l Wa«r<

Par
CoKlrart

Wurk

R^'nl and Jam

ParMaltTiah

OCnab

Clrrki.
rlr.

Earnfn

Rral
Parlarj

Taw.,
Prrtrral.
Slalr.

Co..tr.

aKi
LonI

TaUl

Pri.npal
Malwtab

Pwl
aad

■mIW
Pbmt

Bruce D. Mudgett. "Statistical Tables & Graphs," Houghton Mifflin Co., 1030. SCALE .7

Two Methods of Boxing to Show Coordinate and Subordinate Relationships.

1. The use of single and double lines, as shown in the two upper tables, fails to maintain

coordinate and subordinate distinctions. The width of line in the lower two tables
reinforces the boxing arrangement to show coordinate and subordinate relationships.

2. The caption headings have also been changed to aid reading.

TABULATION

■Value of VtiUic-lluildinn and HifihtvayConatrtution Awards Financed
If holly From Slate Funds '

Otocraphio division

All divisions.

New Kii?liinil

Middle .Mliintir

K.Bst North ('nntral..
West Niirtli Oiitral.
South .Mliiiitu-

East South rentral..
West South Central.

Mountain

Pacific

Value of awards for public building '

June 1038 May 1U38 June 1037

$1. 70^748

I0:<.8II

v:»y. 1177

431. 47'.'

:is. us.')

29. 15(i

15l»,853
6,500

$U3M. Jll

4. J.-.-i

4;ti.(i:i7

■«.M.i):t2

i.r.'io

lOS. 471'

23, (HM)
IS, 02.5

$<..'.02,4fi7

H74

4.1. .'.;:<

3S4. i'2H
:t77. 401

3. '.tiy

402. (KK)
lO'.i. OGU
9.'. -.112
8:i, 800

Value of awards for highway con-
struction

June 1938 May 1038 June 1037

tl2,230,009

$13,571,006

42J.t.71

3. 7.14, 975

2. 930, "t-H

074.012

920.816

l,(m. 135

1,303. 3V4

4. 147

2. 4.S3, 148

18,621,883

614,837
1.821.320
2,479.513
1,008.710

388. 732

191. 2J2

876, .143

161. 123

1. 079. 853

' Preliminary, subject to revision.

' Data for building projects which were located in the cities reporting to the Bureau are included also in
tables 1, 2,3,5, 7, 9, and II.

U. S. Def)artment of Labor, Bureau of Labor Statistics.

A. A Tabulation Showing the Total for All Divisions as the First Item Rather Than
As the Last.

1. The total of a column may be put at the top of a table, as shown here, instead of at the

bottom.

2. The use of notes to clarify box headings should be encouraged.

SUMMARY OF MEN DISPATCHED FROM CENTRAL HALL

REGISTERED MEN DISPATCHEC

NONREGISTEREO MEN DISPATCHED

Loo,.

Tnidun

ToMi

PcrC*nl

Longshoremen

Trucker*

Truck.

CoiMlt

FlMten

Casualt

Floatera

No.

Par
Cent
of

Loncih

Per

Cant

Lon(in

Par
Cant
of

Truck

Par

Cant

T.w.ck

1Q7J

55.070
70.663
74.724
74.992
84.705
87,304
89.425
96.496
85.475
80.271
60.965
72.508

25.210
29.702
31.248
33.044
34.467
32.033
39.442
39,424
31,146
24,798
21,505
22.289

80.280
100,365
105,972
108,036
119.172
119.337
128.867
135.920
116.621
105.069
82.470
94.797

'69

1923

70 30

71 29
69 31
71 29
73 27

1924

\i.6

14.6
5.7
2.4
2.2
4.2

1925

1926 .

1927

1928

1929

1930

1931

1932.

1933

69
71
73
76
74
76

29
27
24
26
24

2.886

5.912
2.743
1.237
339
1,075

3.2
6.1
3.3
15
6
1.5

492
472
160

35
6

.55
.49
.19
.04
.01
.09

4.894

5.746

1.785

602

469

929

2.976

1.955

708

255

7.5
5.0
2.5

,:1

6 Year
Average---

80.856

29.767

110.623

2.365

2.9

204

.25

2.404

8.1

995

3.3

F. P. Foisie. "Decasualizing Longshore Labor and The Seattle Experience," Waterfront Einployers of
Seattle. Feb. 1, 1934. SCALE .7

B. A Tabulation Showing the Sunnnnary of Longshore Labor Dispatched from the
Central Hiring Hall in Seattle from 1922 Through 1933.

1. The good points of this tabulation are that the lettering is clear and easy to read, and

the figures are distinct.

2. It might have been better to use wide lines to maintain the various divisions rather than

the double lines. See 36.

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

Af >Kcir Avcroqc Hourly Woqcs J

AMfftlCAN

BELGIAN
I6«

GERMAN
29<

ENGLISH
34)4*

JSI^M 18

Minulo

156

Minutes

M.nutal

jljrf^^

116

t^y\h

244

116

EoorliJ

236

120

MilKIOH

5u40r.|lk

-J

IbtalAboM

858

430

230

American Iron and Steel Institute, "Ste«l Facts,"
May 1P37. SCALE .7

A. A Tabulation of the Length of Time
American and Foreign Steel
Employees Must Work to Buy
the Same Amount of Typical
Foods.

lit

TOTAl. POPULATIOM

mtntat oul-v

«» atPfTlDUlY

TOT«i. MO MCms

•UVCO

CCHeUfPTOU

COM»Ui»TlOM

CITv(CauMTV

»rr

i^.OOO

SIM

117

ei.ioe

4M.0O0

MCI

ll»

04.67?

^o^.«9S

SSI9

II?

87.829

1390

517,674

II&

90.08?

IMI

^74.&0»

^7J0

K»

80,888

S27,40l

S4 7S

104

88.707

nas

S28.SM

34 70

90,M?

A30.2I6

»7.406

loe

91.9%

»i7.000

^s.^67

101

94.651

1936

^i^ 978

4» ^0

96.746

City of Cincinnati, "Municipal Activities." 1Q36.

SCALE .5

B. Water Consumption of the City
of Cincinnati from 1927
through 1936.

The only difference between this and
straight tabulation is that the stub
headings are presented pictorially
as well as verbally.

CONSUMER BUTING HABITS AT BEAVER DAN, WISCONSIN

Of r»u % rk. ;.

rw /. WIm,

|.^ Thul$Wlmt

Tku 1, rw.

irkr,Tki,a,

rmmw.0.

lii

-H-fab Colv." 0.

ra*rtirvWt(b

J
1

i
2

i
1

i
i

AiTTD Scmiu

i< •

M 1

U 1

M 9

a s

U 4

so s

71 S

IS 4

SO T

u s

GaocwH

« •

II 1

II t

M 1

•0 «

•0

100

II S

IMt

Lmna

> •

n 1

10 1

14 T

100

IS 7

loe

Da DM

U 1

>7 1

a 1

l« s

S7 1

n 1

lOO

14 S

IM S

HasowaU

II 1

M 1

a 1

H 7

10 >

SO s

DsT Goon

M •

17 1

M a

77 1

a s

Jkwblbt

« •

•7 1

II 1

r s

100

II 4

100 S

ZiMtmic^L GooM

II >

M 1

•9 •

•7 S

SS 9

so 7

10 4

100

U S

ZlMC RBf«MnUT\<«

fl i

100

•>

too

Ramo

• 1

SS s

so 7

SS 9

so 7

TS S

Mbm-* Cumnto

M 9

7S 4

10 I

100

so 1

W S

Caiu>'* CLanmQ

U t

II 1

14 1

»4 I

19 S

47 1

SI s

SS S

Womsm's CurrmtmQ

M ;

M •

n 1

•1 1

II 7
II I

10 7

•> 4

n 1

•1 I

IT 7
II 1

41 4
U 1

04 4

100

4 4

M
II 4

TO S

T« 4

W 1
M S

BfMMT

10 t

M I

41 1

• I

a 4

41 1

71 4

14 1

14 I

li 4

SO u

Nurcbnai

II 7

15 1

1 1

t 7

I i

100

47 1

IS I

IS 7

H S

14 i

Sum AMD Pud

7 •

M I

IS 9

u s

44 4

IS 7

100

S 1

ISO

Poutrma

II 1

>l 7

W S

u s

n I

400

44 S

SS s

American Business, May 1Q38. SCALE .6

C. An Analysis of Consumer Buying Habits at Beaver Dam, Wisconsin, in 1937.
The wide lines between the boxes emphasize the relationships among the various columns.

TABULATION

r*uiiv BUDcrrs

CMUMf ink) Mid f Ml

U 1 Siil

I76< II7« }7«
14% 13X iK
Kjv« to t)u<ff»t •»« Kv n*c »tt>t«\ Kjw« mof* Itfl tor

32 7*

^^^

■1

1*1

UNirco

rRANCE

INCIANO

IIAIY

ROLAND

f,r MWor IV».rf.

109

1 7(14

■ V

■ ^

■

Miairro/'/Wpl.

UNIItD

SIAItS

OtNMARK
6

UNHID
KINGDOM

RUSSIA
90

BULGARIA
354

■ V

■ ^

■

UNIKD

STATtS

DENMARK
10

UNITED

KINGDOM

FRANCE
33

RUSSIA
200

WATtB CONSUMPTION ,:.. , . ,.,■ ,,r-r,n ,.. H.,,

142

43 38

CAW';

LONMN B{Rli" AMSTIBWU |

•FkilSr»nlu<«coi

ninm

Literary EHgrst. AuRUSt 29. 1936.

SCALE .5

A. A Comparison of Living Standards of the United States and Foreign Nations in
1936.

The use of visual titles in tabulating material to be read by all nations is an almost sure
guarantee that the tabulation will be understood. Although this graph was published
in an American magazine, it would be equally comprehensible to people of other
nations.

Table 1 : Temperatures

Temp.
Fahr.

Pressure
lbs. Atmos

Sp.Vol.
cu. ft.
per lb.

Density
lbs. per
cu. ft.

Heat
of the
liquid

Latent Total
heat of heat of
evap. steam

Internal Energy

B. t. u.
Evap. Steam

Entropy
Water Evap. Steam

Temp.
Fahr.

—

V or s

i/»

h or q

Lorr H

1 or p E

n or « 1/ T or r/ T N or "^

280°

49.18

3.347

8.64

0.1157

249.0

924.3 1173.3

845.9 1094.8

0.4098 1.24% 1.6594

280'

?.«1

49.97

3.401

8.51

0.1174

250.1

923.5 1173.6

845.1 1095.0

0.4112 1.2470 1.6582

281

50.77

3.455

8.38

0.1192

251.1

922.8 1173.9

844.3 1095.2

0.4126 1.2443 1.6569

282

283

51.58

3.510

8.26

0.1210

252.1

922.1 1174.2

843.5 1095.4

0.4140 1.2416 1.6556

2a3

284

52.40

3.566

8.14

0.1228

253.1

921.3 1174.4

842.7 1095.6

0.4154 1.2389 1.6543

284

285^

53.24

3.623

8.02

0.1246

254.2

920.5 1174.7

841.9 1095.9

0.4168 1.2363 1.6531

286°

286

54.08

3.680

7.90

0.1264

255.2

919.8 1175.0

841.1 1096.1

0.4181 1.2337 1.6518

286

287

54.93

3.738

7.79

0.1283

256.2

919.1 1175.3

840.3 10%.3

0.4195 1.2311 1.6506

287

288

55.79

3.797

7.68

0.1302

257.2

918.4 1175.6

839.5 1096.5

0.4209 1.2284 1.6493

288

289

56.67

3.856

7.57

0.1322

258.3

917.6 1175.9

838.6 10%.7

0.4222 1.2258 1.6480

289

290'

57.55

3.916

7.46

0.1341

259.3

916.9 1176.2

837.8 1097.0.

0.4235 1.2232 1.6467

290'

291

58.44

3.977

7.35

0.1360

260.3

916.2 1176.5

837.0 1097.2

0.4249 1.2205 1.6454

291

292

59.34

4.038

7.24

0.1380

261.3

915.4 1176.8

836.2 1097.4

0.4262 1.2179 1.6441

292

293

60.26

4.100

7.14

0.1400

262.4

914.7 1177.1

835.4 1097.6

0.4276 1.2153 1.6429

293

294

61.19

4.163

7.(H

0.1421

263.4

914.0 1177.4

834.6 1097.8

0.4290 1.2127 1.6417

294

oncl S Marks and H
Suptrhcatcd Steam

arvcy

." Lon

N. Davis, "Tables and Diagrams of the Thermal Properties of Saturated anc
gmanj. Green and Co., 1909.

B. A Tabular Arrangennent.

Note the grouping of the rows of figures into fives. The type was selected to aid the reading
of the figures. These two improvements have, according to the authors, made the
tables much more legible than they were in previous editions.

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

MACHINE TABULATION

Punched card tabulating machines have proved a great aid in
sorting and accumulating data. The information need not be
purely statistical. Cards such as the one shown below are the basis
of the punched card plan. Each card is a general-purpose record
for one item, one customer, one salesman, or one person, etc.

Holes are first punched in pre-determined positions on the cards
according to the data registered.

A sorting machine is used to group the cards according to the
information punched in them. The cards are guided automatically
into receiving pockets according to the position of the punched
holes in the vertical columns. The automatic sorting is made on
one column at a time. It is apparent, therefore, that to arrange a
group of cards in numerical sequence according to the data
punched in a three-column field, the group of cards is passed
through the sorting machine three times.

The third step in mechanical tabulation is the automatic com-
pilation of the punched data. This is done in the tabulator. In
a non-printing tabulator, the information is merely accumulated
in dials. In another type of machine, the data may be automatic-
ally added and printed.

Machines for mechanical tabulation are built by International
Business Machines Company, New York City, and Remfngton
Rand, Inc., New York City. Tabulating work is done on a service
basis in various cities throughout the country.

s«ns tmittis c«n

International Business Machine Co., New York City.

Punched Card for Use in Machine Tabulation.

1. Tabulating cards arc made of paper stock carefully processed to permit of extremely

rapid actuation of all three machines — the punch, the sorter, and the tabulator.
The card size is 7W x 3'/i".

2. Cards may be punched for each item or classification on a customer's invoice show-

ing, for example, customer number, salesman, district or territory, trade class,
complete item identification, and amount.

3. All cards may be balanced to a control and at any time can be sorted and tabulated

to prepare various analyses.

TABULATION

»^nti— —— ■*w«i lis • IL.

a;
ff5

CO — =^r::

^ mm:?:^

■^nr

-X

^^\n

« ili'.lilll

liiiiii

lil]

t ' - 1 ,

■tt

11 ji

^^iliSiii

imi

BBUhhiHF

•-"irx

ifi-H

WWE

'H-L

niiii.

Jill!

llilll

:;±tLS:

til',
ili

III

iljii

iL'Uii

•€

o
c

•a

e
o

0> n

- C7»

2 *^

K E

i! <

2 >

2 -c

^ o

c 5 o-
-5 ^ li

a: '^ ■:;

(0 —

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

MILES ri5 ^ 35 ' 45 ^ si ^ 65

PER HOUR. JMILES PfR HOUR MllfS PER HOUR MILES PER HOUR MILES P£R HOUR MILES PER HOUR

D.u.'s (/DM.) , (2D.aj (3DMJ (5auj , (vau.)

Vi QT.
.13^

IQT
.25<

l%QTs 3QTs AViQVs
43^ i .75C i $1.13

50 GAIS. 55 GALS. 60 GALS. 69 GALS. 80 GALS.

GASOLINE

$8.75

$9.63 i $10.50

$I2.08

♦14.00

$1.50 ' $3.00 H.50 i $7.50 $10.50

TIRES

MAI NTf NANCE
TOTAL COST

COST
PER MILE

$4.00 $500 i6.60 $10.00 $13.00

$14.38 $17.88
\A^4 \ U9ff

$22.03 $30.33 $38.63
2.2 fi 3j03^ 386^

S/>eec/ //jc/iease

Coffper/OOOm^

7/meSaye(/

Chs//)erMfurSoyei/

35 to 45

$4.15

6.4 Hours

$.65

35 io 55

$12.45

10.4 Hours

$l.20

35 to 65

$20.75

13.2 Hours

$1.57

45 to 55

$8.30

4.0 Hours

$2.08

45 to 65

$16.60

6.8 Hours

^2.44

55 to 65

$8.30

2.8 Hours

$2.96

The Travelers Insurance Company, Hartford, Connecticut. "Lest We Regret," 1939. SCALE .9

Graphic Tabulation Showing the High Cost of Speeding in the United States.

This table is based on a 1000-mile journey, with an average car, average roads, and an
average driver. It does not include the economic cost of accidents, which rises in
proportion to the speed at which the car is traveling.

Chapter 4
CLASSinCATION CHARTS

IN a Classification chart the facts, data, etc., are arranged so
that the place of each in relation to all others is readily seen.
Quantities need not be given, although a quantitative analysis
adds to the value of a classification chart. Brackets and arrows are
effective tools to use in a classification chart.

REFERENCES

Karsten, Karl G., Charts and Graphs, Prentice-Hall, Inc., New

York City, 1923.
Riggleman, John R., and Ira N. Frisbee, Business Statistics, 2nd
edition, 1938, McGraw-Hill Book Co., Inc., New York City.

Man o" War

WAR ADMIRAL, br. c, 1934

Fair Play T , c

■^ I * Fair

Mahubah

y Gold

ftrushup

Hard TacW

{» Rock Sand
♦ Merry Token

e /Ben Brush

Sweep 1 n- 1 n

'^ IPink Domino

» »k 1/ J Harry of Hereford
i * Bathinq birl

Swing On

{

5EABISCUIT, b. c, 4933

f w ■ vA/ / Pair Play

I Man War A .. , .1

J IManubab

It a L / * Rock Sane
U"^'""'^ I Teas Over

/ Broomsl
I Audicnci

{

Wiskbroom
2d

Balance

ick

belais
Balancoire

• Imported.

War Admiral bred by SO Riddle
Scabiscuit bred by Wheailey Stable,
(Mrs H.C. Phipps).

The Pedigrees of the Race Horses
War Admiral and Seabiscuit.

1. This chart shows the use of brackets

in classification of data. The orig-
inal was in newsprint.

2. The subject matter of this chart is the

geneology of two race horses. (The
pedigrees of War Admiral and
Seabiscuit show that they are both
descendants of Fair Play and also
of Rock Sand.)

Redrawn from New York Herald Tribune, Nov.
1, 1938.

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

ilttAtlAMt AMO PATMMt

lOucAnoMAi

OtAAMlZATlTMl

otMta aTa»«

IMfttfMU O* Cmc AMD OTMH *tOUP|

U. S. Department of Interior, Office of Education, "School Life," February. 1938. SCALE .6

The Office of Education in the United States and Its Relationships.

This chart is especially interesting because it shows graphically that to study one section
of the myriad of groups in the government of the United States, that area must be
"magnified."

CLASSIFICATION CHARTS

-♦-

-O

-^
'E

c
a>

>
Jli >

•^ _
i! <«

III *^ *r

9- IS

Z o

« c

c '^

§ E
— «

— • c
o

'•^ o

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

—— IllMENIAIr OnTftlCT

JUNIO« HIGH SCMOd WSIKICT

ffift ilEMENTAHV SCHOOL

n ■ ■ I II JUNIO* HIGH SCHOOL

fP^ UNIOII HIGH SCHOOL

I^P?I JUNIO« COllEGi

WHO WOdltS

THROUGH KrAKTMENT HtAOS.

miNCIfALS.ANO TtACHtKS

U. S. Dcpartmrnt of Interior, Office of Education, "School Life," February, 1938. SCALE .6

An Organized City or County School System in the United States in 1937.

Arrows emphasize and here show the relationship between the "people" and the school
system.

CLASSIFICATION CHARTS

r—4

llfOITt

W»rl4 l**af>

Aff*<llil«

food
IXrODTS

W«rl4 l«*iitf

AffoctUf
food

IMrORTS

H94

IMPOITt

t41l.4ll.(M

Normal

Rra War

Rtrtod

M14,HI.0M

..-uj

Docttotod

We>W Woi Sloftt

WoridWarSnm

Www

War

tl.lM.tU.OM

Wo. 0.<i..i

Worid War

Rorwd

$7*(.t27.l>00

«»-.

LJH^^ Rwilion Ravotwi'on

Irtcomo Toi Modt I090I ■■
S EolOrtWo. J.I..

Anmlko-Wo. Endi

Aimilho - Wo. Endl

I8lh Amtndmont v— w
Rtconilruction loom f '^
10 Eu>op« I j ,

{w«Op«OA
RvCOAIIVVCtiOII

-U S FM4<Wa<W
$I,779,IJ14M

Ewopo tur> U i 'oodi

' US
Real Wo.

(^^^^^1 iMOAttruction

..Ui

Boom
l1.M2.Ut.0OO

«..y

U S foil Wor
O.p.,..ion

{•}$.077.0OO

RvpOfotioni
Poymvntt

U S. To.iH loc.ooiod ■!

Notisal
r<Mt War

SM7.f23.aM

U. S. Roil Wo.

Sacondor/

'Boom

tl.122.443,000

G«rinan Inflation

Gorman InflatioA

MS-.

or.

'«.,,.

J»J*.

PoHci«i ttvdwc*

f urop*an Purrhnimr)

Slock Morkot Oath

Worid

rcfiod
S2U.3UMe

Engkiftd OH Gold
Jopon Takci Manchuria

Europton Banks Fail

ShangKai Wor

U S ToriH Inciooitd

u s

D«p.tswon

SSM.23t.000

Englaod OH Cold
Eufopeon Bonht Foil

British Empire Trod* M
AgrecmenI H
U S Banki Foil - a:
U S OH Gold. Crop Control
AAA Proccilinq Toi
Repeal

^*^M Naticnot Sociolitm

Procoiting Toi Invokd ***•
AAA In.olid Q

u s

Recovery
SM2.4t7.000

U $ t«<ipfocol TfodeTreot)«t
Spontjh R«b«ll>on

Wmld Trod« Increoio ^*

Sr">bol Colo.
LEGEND: ^p Eipom B^ Ro» food Malet.uli

f j Impom 1 1 Manufocluixl Food

Food Industries. October, 1938, Part of an Editorial on Public Relations Entitled, "World Trade Makes
Food Prices." SCALE .6

Analysis of Food Expor+s and Impor+s of the United States from 1910 to 1936.

1. The years presented in this chart are divided into 5 world time-periods and 7 United

States time-periods with notations of historical events.

2. The analysis of exports and imports shows a comparison of our exports and imports for

any one time-period, the percentage distribution of the imports for any one time-
period into raw food materials and manufactured food products, and the same for
total exports for any one time-period.

3. In the original copy the sections labelled "raw food materials" were orange in color.

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

Hailway

hxjUlPMENT

Division

Tank
Link

Order and Shipping
Division

( >p»TBUon .

I Maintenance. .4

rHocords

J ( ",Hr mil«Mjge and equaliralion accounts

C StHllslicB
I ( '.Hr distribution
I Ix-asing of cars

Equipmpnt and force
Miscdlaneous upkeep
I'ainting
Home shops ^ fOutJet valves

J Safety valves
I Air brakes
I Car tanks

{

Tests

Railroad
repairs.

CK. \\. K. interchange rules
I A. IV A. lank car specifications
• ( )wniTs deft'cUs
I Carriers liability
I Railroad repair bills

Stock supplies at U^rniinaLs. bulk plants, and warehoasos
Allocation of orders for shipment of sUxk from and to refineries

Buy-out points, terminals, bulk stations, warchoasus, etc.
Designation of mode of transportation— Rail, water, truck, et*-.
( 'onsolidat<- or pool orders

Tariff and Hati.
Division

( IliNKllAL am>
\dmimsthativi;

DiMSION

.\verage demurrage, credit, and weight agrwenents
Claims — Overcharge, loss, and damage
Diversion and reconsignmcnt
Freight bills — checking and revising

rMarkcting territories
Rate surveys. .« Plant lo<-ations

^Competitive comparisons
Male adjustments — Informally with railroads
Rule iinil route tables
I. C. C. practice and procedure
Routing (technical, applicable rates, etc.)
Servici- -c|uol)ilions to sales and purchasing departments
Tariir and cliLssilicalion lilcs
'rru<'king and marine arrangements (local)
Tracing and cx|)editing

Voduction
1 ■ . .u I Purchasing
encral servK-.- U, other J M„„„f„,.if.ring
departmenU 1 /Whol.-sale

^saies. ^^^^^^^^

Diilact with trade and traflic iLs.so<'iatioiis
iMipcrution with carrier ollicials
i PrrsoillK'l ^

'Distribution of stinks (physical)
Rureaii of exi)lusiM's regulations
Clearance rules
Misi I'lliineoiis 4 Railroad leases, side-track agreements, etc.

'rriins|M)rl .ser\ ill — rail, water, truck, etc.

Riiutiiig - DLstribiiliiin iiml allotment of trallic as lM>twe<-ii carriers
Pas.srnger trans|Kirta(i(iii \ ia rail, air, and water

Metropolitan Life Iniurance Company, "Functiont of the Traffic Manaier," 193 7.

SCALE .6

Traffic Department of a Large Company.

The brackets in this classification were retouched. Since the important thing in such a
presentation is to show relationships, the tool used, that is, the brackets, should be
emphasized. Otherwise, the purpose is lost.

CLASSIFICATION CHARTS

I WASHINGTON

z MAi&ftCHusrrw

3 NEW NORK
A CflLIPORNtA

5 COOJECncUT
b OHIO

7 NtW JERStY

6 tLLINOli

9 COLORADO

10 iNDtANA

1 1 RHooe. l6uv^i0

12 VEPMONT

CMIL- |6CK>0i.|tynMK
K(N IN PLANT PtP
SOWOlI ICMltD

r;;;/^^;^///^i

\yyyyyy/A\

\Vyy///AV/////A\

II w/////Ay//////AVAy//A\ \mmy///m

13 WCW HAMRSHIRE ^

14 UTAH W^^//AV/////AV;y//A^AV/////AV/////AV/yy//A\

15 OREGON
10 MONTANA
17 MICHIGAN
« N DAKOTA
19 IDAHO

TO Minnesota

21 IOWA

IZ MAINE.

d3 PENNSYLVANIA

« KAN6A5

\/M^,m\y//'-^/, \y/y///A\w/jr//A ^/

V//////At

\yjy///Ay//////xmw^/A

is, NEBPA5KA
2b 5 DAKOTA
ex NEVADA
28 Wi6CON^lM
IS> WYOMING

30 ARIZONA

31 OKLAHOMA
52 MISSOURI
35 W VIRGINIA

34 FLORIDA

35 DELAWARE

36 MAFTTLAND

37 TENNESSEE

38 TEXAS

39 LDUt5LANA

40 NEW MEXICO

41 VIRGINIA

42 KEKfTUCKY
A5 ARKAN6A&

44 GEORGIA

45 MI&^'-^^PP'

46 Nl CARCXINA
^ 6. CAROL\NA
48 ALABAMA

Brinton, "Graphic Methodi," McGraw-Hill, 1914.

Rank of Each of the United States in Ten Educational Features in 1910.

i\ \yArAM\y/x////.\

I |.v;%^/// \y//////.\

\^/M/-/A' ■- W///M\

Wiv/ ^:\:mf^'\^;>m^\

I I V4y////A

\m;m/A/. -//

YMf^/^W/Z/M

\/Y./m\

I \W>.yM\

SCALE .9

1. In making a block classification chart it is important that shadings ranging from white

(or light) to black are chosen to correspond to correct gradations of value.

2. The states are arranged according to their total ranking in all twelve educational

features; thus Washington State which ranked among the first 12 states in all but
one feature is listed first, and Alabama which ranked among the lowest 12 states in
all 12 features is listed last.

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

METALS

DAYS EXPOSURE

MICH TEST

GASOLINE

LOW TEST

CASOLINE

BENZOL

91^. HKIM TEST

9% ANTI-KNOCK
«4» LOW TEST
16% ANTI-KNOCK
97% HIGH TEST

]% ANTI- KNOCK
S0% HIGH TEST
50% BENZa
ANTI -KNOCK

1 1

ALUMINUM

ZINC HATE

SHEET STEEL JTERNEPLAIll TIN PLATE <SHaT OOPPOtl SHEET BAASSlcOOOVEAfUTE

1 1

SPIEOELITl I

145

15 |57|l45|l5 57|l45il5 !57|u5]l5 IS7

145

I5|57|I45J15|57|m5

.5|57

145

wm m H

Ir-^ H-L

/'JBl rr

1-- ! B -

r ^ . WT

I ^i B '

^^1 HH 1 1 ^H

!J>i B! '

k-UU-i -: ■ ' il

mum !■ .

zoni . . Ebi

■■■■ H .

^t^Sm^ ■■■BW ^^

-^T'S ■■ 1 ' ■■■■"■ ^ 1

Fj NOT AFFECTED ^p SOMEWHAT AftKIEO ^| BAOLT AFFCCTtO

Automotive Industries, March 23, 1922.

SCALE 8

A. The Effect of "Doped Fuels" Upon fhe Fuel System of an Engine in the Presence
of Moisture.

Here again a block chart is used to present a gradation classification. It is based on the
results of an investigation made by the Material Section of the Engineering Divi-
sion, War Department, Air Service, McCook Field in Dayton, Ohio. It may be
observed that the metals which stood up better than the others are aluminum and
zinc plate.

Standard Statistics, Inr , N. Y. C. SCALE .9

B. Raw Material Resources of the Leading Countries of the World in 1936.

1. The value of this type of chart is that a quantitative analysis which is not actually

shown on the chart can be compared with other analyses. That such an analysis
was made is shown in the titles of the four classifications at the bottom.

2. Compare this chart with 51.

CLASSIFICATION CHARTS

.Su

T3 S

IB 1

1 1

1 f • : - 1 r 1 : •

■
1

■

1 ' 1 1 • 1

— o

o o

Q- Q.

^ E

<D —
0) -•-

•G 2

E£ ^

^ i£

^"^

M X

2 XI .t:

*- C
(9

cK .a

■5 *

H Z

C-— CO
T3 ^

►5 w <

t-i »* fO

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

2 .

3 ^

4 :

DT CHART CF

. „., . ^. ATOMS -nK'h^

TIm AiMM Cnmfi Acraram« l« tW NumWot oI OuUr I V*Imk* I ClKlroM PWntUry i Ii lIi mi

I II III V Vi Vi^ ym::it"T^tt4->7

Z2 997HU4.}^IK. 2&97|H ZtUX IB :il U2 «§[ J106 , ■ 3J.45? 39S-i4H 'I^J _:_ -

Cui

37 IT |77 iT^ I Wo QM. D i'lluiT?h(|rPd|

JLpQ »IM.UZ-<' ift ll4.76llll&.oT^ 12I76|| 1276l|l26S2 , . 11U_M t^,:; i'^
' Kb I 223^ ■l226-> ■22a' ■l2W ■ 2JI ■tzj&e? ■

2 8 i<j!a

'i>K 71 lUr* E>r«W

II 40131

|lSa43Bh I62X> ■

|l^ IklWa ll i<24i(|i r63j||KU4||. l«M|tl7XM ||- 17l«|

11 Wilri> «li.1 », I

Compiled by Henry D. Hubbard of the U. S. Bureau of Standards; Publiihed by W. M. Welch Manu-
facturing Company, Chicago. SCALE: Greatly Reduced

A. Chart of the Atoms.

Concise information on atomic structure as well as 40 different characteristics of the atoms
is given in this chart. The original is lithographed in six colors, and all routine
information is printed in large type. It can be obtained in two sizes, 42" x 64" and
22" X 30".

Compiled by Henry D. Hubbard of the U. S. Bureau of Standards; Published by W. M. Welch Manu-
facturing Company, Chicago.

B. A Reproduction of One Unit of the Chart of the Atonns, and the Key Used fo
Interpret All of the Graphic Illustrations on 52A.

The right side is a reproduction, in one color only, of the unit which represents the element
Potassium. The left side appears as a key at the lower right of each chart.

Chapter 5
GENEOLOGY AND GENETICS CHARTS

eneology and Genetics Charts are known chiefly as means for
tracing ancestors. Synonyms for geneology and genetics charts
are: pedigree charts, genealogical charts, ancestral charts.

SAMPLE PCOieRCE CHART SHOWINO THE MANNER OF CONSTRUCTION, AND THE USE
OF STANDARD AND SPECIAL SYMBOLS.

iCir6 6

_ _ if i * 6' 6irik' 6 d ti iikd^ x

K tXPLAWATKIII Of ITMIOLI

D'MQle,- O'^e""!!*; 0'3tT\n\ln>owi\., A-StiU-biiiW or M>scoima^e,X"CKi\irtT\— numbtr oi\4 sex -unVnown; OO'TwmSj

Roman SnuTT's v> \h». U^V mditoX*. (^mtrotionv l\rQkM ^^urti \oca\e miwidMois, (\V«u4 ffl.T i» tt\« >\ovit\^ mon m \V«. >*iir4
qtntTo\ion who mornti >u^ countx).

31« ^oWtwnnfl Vttttr*, p\ate<i in or anMnd W»t i»dr(\4ua\') vtdv^rti S'^mbd), or* i\oi\4or4. ^or ttrtQ\r\ \roi\» R. a^toVvolit; B, blm4i
ttdtaS. E. epi>«^ic, F, VtiWemmitdj I, \T»ant, Mj[m'\qr(i\ritou^;N,'norwa\ nv rtStrnvc* \t XmM Mtv4tr tQt\v4«ro.\xOT»j Nt, T»wrdl\t;
P. pQr<i\x\>C; ^T, ^txuaAA)^ \mmort^, S.VtThMiC/ X tubtrtu\ouV H wanitrtr.

■ 9* 5«cct%iSu\ \to4«ri \n pa)M^c^■ O© • Ei\Ta tt\>onD on rM^W hani. Ul'H\<)hV\^ ^«^.t^^Su\ ou^Hor. L.s "VjIRt or no oMWi^
in \>)tr«r\^ iS<or1«,. ■#'^ui)Cr\or m volo\ »nuvt. B© » Mtdmrrv oWoinmenV. m MOtoV wuvc.

To Vit \ti* fiar\>cJar SaR«\^ on4 Xro\\» (wHt>h«r pht^vtal.intntat or Uinp»Tamin*o\; qoo4 ftrVxkd) un4tr tOivMitroV^jn, vn««nt
?ptcio\ Sumbol^. or ^t\ti:\ ^ptooN \««iri(\rv adi\>nn No \rvan* ^«n4ar<lii«A \in4«T (oi obwtl \ft bi '^AUti vnS'nm or ntar VWt.
paHiiuloT tn4lM^4uo\'^ p*4iv<t ^>(>>M, W in4ico\c p«T<icu\or \rovti an4 Vtwr dtt^rce a\ dtvOeprntnt-

SCALE .9

Eugenic* Record Office, Cold Spring Harbor, Long Island, N. Y.

Pedigree Chart ShowIr>g the Manner of Construction and the Use of Standard and
Special Symbols.

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

•'tf
, 4rd 6 d e' D* ti d o' □"

-. i Jo' rf Cf4'd do* n'b'da d'ei'd B'dV J^'Jd'a o"

■ dddddddd'ddn'dn'd'DdB'^d'ddoy'ed'Hd

d ^.

/ ^/ *^m tmtJmm C* Um^'l, nw%_^ W.

Eugenics Record Office, Cold Spring Harbor. Long Island, N. Y. SCALE .7

A. A Geneology Chart Showing the Actual Pedigree of Pre-Senile Lamellar
Cataract.

1. Following the practice of tracing only one trait on one pedigree chart, this chart traces

the trait of pre-scnile lamellar cataract. All individuals of the family tree are
plotted even though all do not show the trait.

2. It would be fairly easy to construct a chart tracing the family distribution of a trait

by following the principles exemplified in the above diagram.

■ • Wh.K Forclotk

DO Nc Wh.H FcfloiK

I 1 1

V ■ • o

fy^ ^ ^

9-r9

OB D D O

« 7 S « 10

II. the firii recorded ancestor liavinn a white forelock. H-l, liis son inherited the while fore-
lock And married a woman without it. ill. of their five sons three inlierited tlic white torek>ck
and two did not. IV. ««howinn the four daug-hters of one son, III-J, tliree ilaiiRhters havinn
inherited the white forelock and one lias not. V. sliowinf; the children of these four daugliters
who married men without a white forelock : some of the cliildren of each of the three mothers
possessing the white forelock have inlierited it but none of the children of the other tuotlier not
possessing it have the white forehnk.

Lyle Fitch "Inheritance of a White Forelock," The Journal of Heredity, Novemtwr, 193 7, American
Genetic Auociation, Washington, D. C. SCALE .9

B. Five Successive Generations Showing Donninant Inheritance of a White Forelock
in the Logsdon Family.

Explanations below a geneology chart are helpful and should be used frequently.

GENEOLOGY AND GENETICS CHARTS

< o

In several places in this cliart the inheritance sinuilates tliat of a sex-linked dominant charac-
ter, but tlie pedigree as a whole proves that the apparent association with sex is purely fortuitous.
The largest sector in which sex-linked inheritance is suggested is bracketed with a dotted line.

Mablr R. Walter. "Five Grnrrations of Short DiRits," The Journal of Heredity, April, IQ38, American
Genetics Association, Washington. D. C.

Pedigree Chart Showing Five Generations of Short Digits.

1. Deformed individuals are represented by solid symbols.

2. The use of a circular heredity chart is helpful when the number of persons in the fourth

or fifth generation would necessitate too long a chart.

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

Codex Book Co., Inc., Norwood, Mats.

A. A Genealogical Charf Sheef.

1. This sheet is 8'/2" x 11" and its purpose is to show graphically the genealogy of a

person or the pedigree of an animal. In the central space numbered "1," the name
of the individual is written. In the spaces of the concentric bands, the names of
the ancestors are placed, each band representing a generation. The figures in the
spaces may be used as reference numbers.

2. The fan-shaped pedigree chart, while it eliminates the difficulty of spreading over too

much space, is less easy to read than 57.

Theories of
sound " finance

Desires of rentiers
with &xed money in-
comes

Poor
harvest.^

Undue pessi-
mism of busi-
ness men

Seasonal
depression

Foreign
tariffs

E>eflation

f'r

Trade de-
pression

Rigid wages
and prices

Other (e.g.

banking)
conditions

constant

More unemployment

Fall in

the

(money)

cost of

living

Rise in

pnce of

fixed

interest

securities

More poor relief Higher insurance contributions

Higher rates and taxes

Additional public loans

p. Sargrnt Florrnce, "Thr Statistical Method in Economics and Political Science," 1929, Krgan Paul fli
Co., London.

B. Genealogical Presentation of the Theory of Unennploynnent.

1. The lines in the original of this chart were undoubtedly set in type, not drawn. The

lines have been retouched and thickened.

2. This chart illustrates the point that there is more than one reason for unemployment.

GENEOLOGY AND GENETICS CHARTS

Ancestral Publuhing H Supply Co., Chicago, 111.

A Columnar Anceitral Chart.

The left to right rather than top to bottom arrangement makes it possible to get in a great
deal of information. The horizontal rather than circular arrangement makes the
chart easy to read. Compare this form with 56 A

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

EIrctronicsi Octobrr, 1938. Part of an Editorial on Public Relations for Industry.

The Family Tree of the Thermionic Tubes.

SCALE .7

Although the term "family tree" does not necessarily mean a '■tree." the "tree" form of
heredity or family chart is a well-known one. The "tree" here presented is in reality
a chronological statement of events, all of which have contributed to the existence
of the "thermionic tubes."

Chapter 6
ORGANIZATION CHARTS

I'krsonnki.

DiRECTOn

SuptTvisor of Technical
Kmploymcnt and Training

Medical
Director

SuptTvisor of
Traitiinp

Supervisor of
Insurance and Benefits

Supervisor of
Research

Metropolitan Life Insurance Company, •Functions of the Personnel Director," 193 7.

A. Organization Chart of the Headquarters Staff of a Personnel Director Whose
Company Has Units in Various Parts of the Country,

.^Ji

Personnrl
Director

Supervisor of
Employment

Supervisor of
Compensation

Supervisor of
Sales Personnel

Supervisor of
Training

Supervisor of
Employee
Helations

Supervisor of

Manufacturing

Personnel

Supervisor of
OITice Personnel

Metropolitan Life Insurance Company, "Functions of the Personnel Director," 193 7.

B. An Organization Chart Showing That an Organization Which is Engaged in
Manufacturing Also Has Special Staff Men for Both Functional and Depart-
mental Problems.

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

z •
E

'il

Mil

' IMlill

mrz

^Hl

-f

•I

mwwm

'ii!'ji'ilii!'L

jii

3 O

S t

. o

u. o

c c
j< 2

s -s

^ C

HI c o

c y

jj c

^ o ^

I o ;

> — o

O jC

2 H

z ir ^

ORGANIZATION CHARTS

A. Diagram of the Organization of
the CCC made by President
Roosevelt in 1933.

The most complex and widespread organi-
zations may begin from just such
crude drawings as this one.

<^//i:,

[a^ \u^

?/j, p^ ^' ^"^ ^ «

Newtr>aper of the Civilian Coniervation Corpt,
"Happy Dayt." April 2, 1938. SCALE .4

PURCHASING

ZIZ

PLANTATION
(Owner or Generol Monoger)

MARKETINC
(0«n«r O' Monog»r)

STORE OR
COMMISSARY

(S><yt w fvm U4O

CONNECTION
*1TM CREDIT
INSTITUTIONS

(O.ntf)

Ode

*tNiN' fAQMS

WPA. Diviaion of Social Rrtearch, "Landlord and Tenant on the Cotton Plantation," 1936.

SCALE .6

B. Organization of Enterprises on the Large and Closely Supervised Cotton Plan-
tation in the United States.

The organization chart starting with the top and then branching downward to small division
at the bottom is perhaps the best known form of organization chart. How the
branching will be done depends a great deal upon the organization.

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

I. Ho O«0£raphlcal
SobdlTlBlons

ovrici

ill rincera

II.

Centnllied Geographical
SubdiTlBlone

Short Arms
Long Fingers

The Field

III.

Decentralized Geo-
graphical SubdlTlfllons

Long irns
Short Fingers

The Field

Luther Gulick and L. Urwick, "Papcri on the Science of Administration." Institute of Public Administra-
tion. N. Y. C. 1937. SCALE .6

Three Types of Geographical Division of Work.

The practical application of these forms of organization may be found in government.
A detailed explanation of each is in the book from which this chart was taken.

ORGANIZATION CHARTS

NATWMAL fcLlCTRIC
POWtR COMPAffY

«»% ^ fft-ff

■■■ MOtfUl* COWMWr

■^^^ oftttrrmt co—P«Ht
j < M rix*o tMOf* /v r ' •

Hew York Times, Dccrmhrr H, 1QJ2.

JlRliY Antral

NWt«»ll«NTCO

<C JllIB^

tetrrtt M»MO¥t»

StABiARD
fUMKUtVICtCt

: "J

loetHiiftnjnfft
in MU>mms

24 COMMNII i
ftte B)

IU1I0NALPU5IIC

srtvict cow

MUHICIHL
)ttvic| COM

Kfsiufiimmo

a COMMMitS

(31 e 0)
SCALE .6

A. An Organization Chart Showing How Holdings of the Eastern Insull Utilities
Were Pledged.

In order to differentiate, cross hatchings and shadings may be used effectively in an organi-
zation chart. A variety of shapes as well as shadings distinguishes the divisions.

I V-

1 1

—

\m{

— 1

'."7

c_,..,.

T JU,

— 1

IT.

*'rSl..''

__J

'"""

Induttrial Managcmrnt, June, 1917.

SCALE 1

B. Organization Chart of the Shell Plant in Erie, Pennsylvania, of the American
Brake Shoe and Foundry Company.

A circular form is seldom used in organization hierarchy, probably because it is difficult
to indicate hierarchy in a circle.

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

if i >ih

^ METER OIV.

J^!.^

SWITCHGEAR OIV.
2441

ADVERTISING
16

SALES /| ENGINEERING SI
2098 // 304

MINISTRATION I ACCOUNT

15» 1519

OFFICERS

riNG

DIRECTORS
16

Wettinuhouif Electric & ManufacturinR Co . PittsburRh, Pa.. 'WestiiiRhousc Industrial Relations." 1937.

The Westinghouse Family Tree in 1937.

This is an effective and leKitimate use of the structure of a tree. It is an organization chart
superimposed upon a "family tree." Compare this form with 58.

ORGANIZATION CHARTS

( ELECTORS )

/^PUBLIC SAFETY^
DIRECTOR

POLICE- FIRE -BUILDINGS
WELFARE & W0RKMCXJ5E
MARKETS, WEIGHTS &

V MEASURES J

^ LAW ^

DIRECTOR

LESI5LATI0N-ASSES3MENTS
LEGAL COUNSEL-REAL ESTATE
MUNICIPAL COURT ;

f PUBLIC WORKS A

DIRECTOR

HIGHWAYS • SEWERS RE CORDS
MUNICIPAL GARASEPBOPERTV
acHIGMWAY MAINTENANCE
v^WASTE COLLECTION J

/^PUBLIC UTILITIES^

DIRECTOR

TRANSPORTATION TRAFnC

STREET LISHTIN6
^v AIRPORT

'water works^

SUPERlNTCNPgNT

DISTRIBUTION

SUPPLY
COMMERCIAL

1. Nine members elected bi-annually.

2. Selected by Council from its membership.

3. Appointed by Council.

4. Appointed by the Mayor.

5. Three members — 1 each appointed by the Mayor, Board of Education,
and University Directors.

6. Five members — 3 appointed by the Mayor, and 1 each by the Board of
Education and the Park Board.

Annual Report of the City Manager, Cincinnati, Ohio. 1937.

Organization Chart of the City of Cincinnati.

SCALE .9

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

THE ELECTORATE

S§^

CITY
ATTORNEY

POLICE
COURT

CITY
PROStXUTOR

SPECIAL

AUDITOR

m LEGI SLAT IVE IL

^uQARO or CJZS^AlBC^XDB^Ij

1 GENERAL GOVERNMENT

CIT Y
CONTROLLER

CITY
TREASURER

ASSESSOR

PURCHASES
4 SUPPLIES

PUBLIC
BVILPINQ^

EMPLOYMENT

BUREAU

, PROTECTION TO PERSONS k PROPERTY

POLICE OEPT

BUILDING
DEIPT

FIRE DEPT

EMERGENCY

HOSPITAL

BOARD
OF REVIEW

MISCELLANEOUS

PRINTING
DEPT

CIVIC
AUDITORIUM

CROWN CITY
RANCH

SANITATION k CLCANLINESS

ENGR, DEPT
REFUSE DiSPQSAU

ENGR.DEPT
LOT CLEANING

5EWAGC
THEATMDfT PLANT

STREETS « HIGHWAYS ''

ENGR.DEPT
STS. A. HIGHWAYS

STREET

LIGHTING

RELIEF k SOCIAL SERVCE

1 PARKS k RECREATION |

PARIV DEPT

DEPT OF
RtCPEATION

PUBLIC UTILITIES

LIGHT & POWERF

WATER

HEALTH DEPT.

Annual Report of the City Manager, Paiadena, California, 1937.

Organization Chart of the City of Pasadena.

Compare this type of organization chart of a city-manager form of government with 65.

ORGANIZATION CHARTS

4»

-♦-

•

-♦-

*♦-

Chapter 7
RELATIONSHIP CHARTS

A "RELATIONSHIP CHART" is a diagram in which facts, in-
formation, etc., are arranged to emphasize their relation. It
differs from a classification chart in that relationships may be
shown without any classification of the material used.

GEOGRAOhfy

i^iuoootooy;

.V^vif O (?

CCONOM>CS

From "An Outline of the Principle! of Geology"
by R. M. Field, Copyright 1938. Used by
Permitiion of the Publithert, Barne* & Noble,
Inc. SCALE .6

A. The Relations of Geology To and
Its Interrelations With Other
Divisions of Knowledge.

1. This diagram suggests that geology is

not an isolated thing, but is bound
up with many branches of study.

2. The divisions immediately adjacent to

the center of this chart are the
ones most closely related to the
science of geology. Those divisions
on the outer edges are related to
geology through the intermediate
subjects.

From "An Outline of the Natural Re»ource» of
the United State*" by R. M. Field, Copyright
1936. Used by Permission of the Publishers,
Barnes H Noble, Inc. SCALE .6

B. Relation of Natural Resources to
Hunnan Activities and Interre-
lations With Other Branches of
Study.

Although similar to the preceding chart,
this diagram differs in that rela-
tionships around the circle are in-
dicated as well as from the center
outward.

RELATIONSHIP CHARTS

SPECIAL W*R WORK ON—

MILITARY MAPPING

Making progr«itiv« miliUry indei map of United States
SURVEY OF SITES.

Balloon fields

Ordnance proving grounds

Artillery sites

Areas near cantonments

Aviation fields

ROUTE MAPS.

Airplane routes.

Motor truck routes
ENGINEER REGIMENTS.

Contributing 110 officers.

Contributing 164 men.

Training officers and enlisted men

Training school for topographers.

PURCHASE AND SHIPMENT OF INSTRUMENTS

NEW AIRPLANE CAMERA.

CONFIDENTIAL MILITARY DATA.

Orientation manual.

GENERAL TOPOGRAPHIC INFORMATION.
TOPOGRAPHIC DRAFTING.

Artillery instruction maps.

Danger poster for hydroplane.

French conventional signs.

Base maps to scale for miscellaneous surveys

'.^

>^'

C'^v\\'vv'>V

CONTRIBUTED TO-

WAR DEPARTMENT.

' General SUff.
Corps of Engineers.
> Ordnance.

'^' . Artillery.

IcT .-V-:'

. Quartermaster.

' Signal Corps.

■ Aviation.

'Surgeon General's Office.
I Departmental commanders.
' Any officers requesting.
, NAVY DEPARTMENT.

■ Marine Corps.

.COUNCIL OF NATIONAL DEFENSE.

■ FRENCH MISSION.

U. S. Department of Interior. "Thirty-ninth Annual Report of the U. S. Geological Survey." 1918.

SCALE .8

Relationship Chart Showing the Contributions to War Service by the Topographic
Branch of the U. S. Geological Survey.

1. In this chart, the fact that one government department cooperates extensively with

others is brought out with force.

2. It would not be wise to use this form to show too many interrelationships, however, as

all detail would be lost.

LajL

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

Pl'RPOSE AND PROCESS SLBDI\ ISIONS |\ 0R(;ANIZATI0N

PrIVBi* ••crstarlac

lh4««k off lear
AaeottBtut*

r^fiifcMlM •ttumr

•vitebboa^ operator

Hoiorlt*d ••mo«

g 'I

^ r

AfttilMii •BBarlaMaAaali

Pr|v«t« ••er«tart««

ni* clvrkt
Cl«rk*

1>«««I offte«r

Laboratory aoilvtaatt

Olaoorocs %oaeb*r»
•paelal toactaora
LlkTarlaaa
taeroatlOB laWlar*
Plufgroaad mparrlat

traffle auporvlaor

ftvlkabbeard oparator

UoiorlMd aarrli

PCLia nvanar

AcolitoAl Chlof*

frtvaia oacroiarlaa
Itaaecrapbaro
ril* elarko
CTarka
Haoiawart

la4cat off 1 oar
iCoouniaBto
^rehaali^ effioar

CrUa laboratoT7 ataff
Pellea •ehooj ttaff

Valtormmd tore*

Traffle foraa
Jail ttaff
Hountad feroa

Hotorisad Borrloa

iattotMt Ot^loctoM

Prlvata ■aeratarla
llaaecraptera
nia elorka
Clortt

BBd«at effioar
ipcoulaate

fttfcha«t4C off
•tatlttlclMU

rill

iBClMara

irehltact*
Laadacapa otaff
Bapalr forea
Jaaltora

Plaat laboratory ataff

Traffic foroa

lae staff

Tatarlaarlaa
•vitebbeard operator

Heterliad aarrlea

IS 3

RlaiL nriwork - Puipoer dt-panmrnu
RrtI network - Fiiicm drparlinrnu

Luther Gulick and L. Urwick, "Papers on the Science of AdminUtration," Iiwtitute of Public Adminiitra-
tion, N. Y. C, 1937. SCALE .6

The Interrelationships of the Purpose and Process Subdivisions in Organization.

Four sample city departments are presented vertically, each divided into its functions and
workers. A considerable number of workers are common to all or to several depart-
ments. These are indicated by the horizontal red network. Thus when an organiza-
tion has both purpose and process departments, interrelationships are essential, in
fact, impossible to escape.

RELATIONSHIP CHARTS

Sue^raArta

Paooucra

1 Acofakior\y&g

Acit taldal\yd9

t Acof>c actd

Acatic odd

X Ac«fOOC9ttC ocU

Acefoacvflc add

4. Acorona

Acaton»

4 AC9fon^<iicorbojeylic ocni

Aceton« -dicorbayrllc odd

C Acmtyl citrbmot

Acetyl carblnol

7. Acarjflmvrhjfl corbinol

Acolylmolhyl corblr>ol

* Aery loldahjrde

Acryloldohyde

9. Outyl olcoho/

Butyl alcohol

KX 3,3-bufjHenr glycol

2,3butylon» glycol

II. butyric ocid

Butyric acid

IZ. Caproic octd

Coproic odd

IX Coprylx: odd

Capryhc Ofld

M Carbon diotido

Carbon diOMldw

IS. Cirric acid

Citric odd

le. Oihydrtuy ocefone

Oihydrojry acotonv

IT Cthyl alcohol

Ctl\yl alcohol

/a. ethylene glycol

Cthylenv glycol

IS. rormic acid

Formic add

20. fumorlc acid

rumaric acid

21. Gluconic ocid

Gluconic ocid

22. Clyceroldohyde'

Glyccroldehyde

?3 Glyceric acid

Olycoric ocid

24. Clyce-rol

Glycerol

2S Clycolaldtr^hyde

Gly c ololdo hydo

2C Glycolllc Odd

Olycollic add

27 Olycuror>,c ockI

Glycuronic acid

2& ClyOMylic acid

OlyOJrylic acid

29 Hydro^m

Hydrogen

yO f3 hydroiry butyric oCd

^-hydroxy butyric odd

31 laobulyr'c ocid

laobutyrlc add

32. Isopropyl o/cohol

laopropyl alcohol

33 Kero -g/ucoriic ocid

Hefo- gluconic acid

34 Lactic acid

Lactic acid

35 Molic ocKi

Malic ocid

3€ Molornc ocid

Malonic acid

37 Mandelic ocid

Mondelic ocid

3& Mtrthyl glyoral

t^ethtyl glyojrol

39 Ouialooftic acid

Oxolace-t'C ocid

4Q Ojralic acid

OjroliC oc id

41. Propioriic Odd

Propionic acid

41 Propyl okohol

Propyl olcol^ot

43 Propylene glycol

^^^

Propylene glycol

44 Pyruvic acid

Pyruvic acid

45 Succinic odd

Succinic acid

4C Tarfor/c ocid

Tartaric acid

47 Trimefhylcnc glycol

Trimethylene glycol

4& Volvric ocid

Valeric ocid

Industrial and Engineering Chemistry, November, 1930.

SCALE .8

The Fermentative Interrelationships of the Micro-Biological Dissimilation Products of
the Carbohydrates.

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

— T3

O ^

o> °

^ •)

E «

o «i

"U o

SI E

> w»

0) u

o o

4) _c

t .5

Q. C

■- V

« 5

u *^

** C

£ -

« C
O u

a <c

a „

0) jy

'5 ■«

Chapter 8
FLOW CHARTS

low charts present a graphic explanation of the movement of
materials, printed forms, etc., through an organization or struc-
ture. "Cosmograph" is the trade name for a type of flow chart
presenting numerical information or percentages by means of
black and white strips of paper, showing source contrasted with
destination.

Materials From the Wide-world

For A World-wide Product

Electric Storage Battery Co. Philadelphia, "Ezide-IroocUd Topic*." May. 1933.

SCALE .5

How Charf Showing Source of Materials for Manufacture and Distribution of the
Completed Product.

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

Month of MovCMeiR
-1919-

bastd upon Ovfbound Ship Tonnajt. 1913. 1 * J

Jamet R. Bibbins and Bion J. Arnold, "Our National Transportation System," Proceedings of New York
Railroad Club, April, 1923. SCALE .9

A. Railroad Traffic Flow Diagram.

The similarity between this flow chart and a simple balance sheet with "amopnts received"
and "amounts paid out" is quite pronounced. Compare with 79.

M«nufK~1urui|[ IVpanmrn

Uiion DvptnmctiL

Weekly Average Net Paid Circulation 1,910.282

Drawn Under the Direction of Willard C. Brinton in Consultation with a Firm of Certified Public
Accountants. SCALE .5

B. Method of Displaying Proof of the Circulation for a Weekly Magazine.

This chart resulted from a survey made by a firm of certified public accountants. Since the
formation of the Audit Bureau of Circulations in Chicago, any survey like this would
not be necessary.

FLOW CHARTS

COOPERATING AG&NCIES

I'MTONAt. COOfctT NinvCt

STATt ( INTtRMATt

UI4MMI/AV COMWIVMON

COUNTY 4 Rt&IOMAL

COUNTY PlANNINKi OTX
PArjK BOARD -COOPtn-
ATIN& WITH STAT6 AND
CITY PLANNING BOAROl

LOCAL 1
METROPOLITAN

CITY Pl.ANNINfc COMMIIMON

Planning tbCTiONt Of-

PARK 4 ICUOOL BOAAOS

NATOMAIPADK tCQVCL
NATtONAL COntST »tffV>C4
U > QiCXO&CAt luRVtV

CONitnvATON COMM

MIGUWAV COMMltMON

COOPtrJATiNG LCX.AL

ACtNOtJ

JL_1

COUNTY PAPlC BOARD

BOAfJDOC lUPtaviKDni

CCX)PtOATIN& LOCAL

ACCNCitS

CITV PARK BOAAO
AND PATJIt DtPTV
iCWOOL BOAaD\

NATIONAL PARK itOVCt
NATIONAL COQtlT VtnVKt

u s BOLO&tCAL iuavtv

VTATl CONitUVAnON COM

CON\taVATlON COMM
WlGUWAY COMMimON
CCX)PCr5ATiNG LOCAL

A&ENCiES

COUNTY

PAn< ooAnD\

PAHK DtPAnTMtNT»
ICMOOL OOAnOi
ntCRtATlON COMM.

ECDCnAL AGtNClCSTO
CONTROL AND PntJtnvt
AntAS Ot NATONAL
IMPOOTXiMCt

PQiMtVAL AQ^At
ntttAfXU AOtAS
NATONAL POntJT}
NATIONAL PAJIICV
WilLDLlCt MANGMTAQtAt

HiiTonictAncw. htk^

iCCNC AOCA^
M^-NVAV^ AND PARKW/tt^

iTATt AGtNCitS TO ACQUint
DtVtLOPAND MAINTAJN
CAClLlTltS TO ADCQUATt-
LY MttT RtQuiRtMtNTi
Of iTi PtOPLQ COO iN\Plf>
ATOKNATunt tDUCATON
AND ACTIVt OtCntATION
NOTOTHtTNI/Ht PnOvlDCD
ITATt fOQESTS
JTATt PAnnS
r»EStr3VATlC5N\
<WLD LIFt nCFUGtS
ROADSIDt DtVtLDPMtNTJ
PARitWAVS
LAHtS AND nnEAMS
GAMl MANAClMlNTAAlAt
WliTCniCiCtNC lOthfTlfIC

DtVtLOPMCNT AND OPCn-
ATlON Of ATJtAS AND
PROJtCTS OEVOND THE
JCOPt OP LCXAL UNIT^
NOT WIDESPREAD ENOUGH
TO JUlTltY HATt
CONTROL

COUNTY PARK.S

PARKWAYS

PRESERVES

LAICtS

PAIRGROUNDS

tTC

^r^

LOCAL AGtNCItS TO
ACQUIRE, DEVELOP AND
MAINTAIN PAClLlTltS
PRIMARILY POR LOCAL
UiE

NtlGWDOnwOOO AND

SCWOOL PLAYGROUNDS

PLAYPlELDS

NEIGWBORMOOD AND

•IN TOWN* PARICS

LARGE PARKS

PRESERVES

PARK. WAYS

ETC

PUBLIC RtCRtATION PACILITICS
POR ALL TM& PEOPLE

National RctourcFt Board, "State Planning," 1Q35.

A Plan for Public Recreation In Iowa.

SCALE .8

The arrows indicate the "flow" of activity from four groups of cooperating agencies towards
the attainment of public recreation facilities for "all the people."

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

Ooial SJcpmno*

J» h t v J m* tMt6o iitrm* atLJUM futttlr,

Ufi* CQsi of m4tititiit'^ /^e slor^
in s cond't/ot of rutjintii Kr jjas
Cf^e nni» ittmt of ttpttta it ilot
cUuificition art Rani. fu*l. Inter
f%i on ii>u»»/m»mi Dtfirecntion on
frxrurn a»a e^uipmmnl. rvpaira, a por-
tion ofuj*9f dfoiud io —sinttnnnce

LfA* cos^ of iiouM^ m*itAan^)n tkru
/Ac processti of tkt biainrss CSt^wd
tr)d itlliJici) <yf» IO*'* itmms ofttp%u»
mUiii cUm trt. fioti cf U* itUrm*
andimjiai, Aavrlnmd, daiirtr^
ofiantlioni. supplimt, Mywioae

Oitt codt/ tk, credit function.
<Ji* m*m tAmtatj or egp mt $» it
ikii cUsjificthon art oH» coni of
account ltd or boaikaaputd, coIk/xn

ntinienAnce itd rfovemenc
aown into kuK) smaller pooli

LKpensc <«re cjitn broken,
on the diffarenl haaes of-

DiMct3iMoc*iiam.

WmtDt^.

jhtie pools art Chnrocd li.
IKt liemi sola— *

"yiiis poof /a cliar^md to tht ittt
on th^ basis of dollars cjf a*ks.

jftii pool on
the 6dsis of
an cilaiJishtd
doJIar mainlen ■
ance etpensrper
JolLrcl iJti pro
n/rt^d to ittms

iMrtct //lis pool on
the t)Jiisaf the
ai>0rade muentory
inuescme/ir in the
/naiYidual item
in the drrxcri/
cJtt*artmtnt

Zfhesc pools gre chardecf fo inn>4
On the l>isis of frt^^ncif of mslu

U. S. Department of Commerce, Bureau of Foreign and Domestic Commerce, March, 1934.

SCALE .9

The Commodity Cost Accounting Method Employed in a Survey Made by the
Domestic Commerce Division of the U. S. Bureau of Foreign and Domestic
Commerce.

1. Flow charts to indicate accounting methods are well known.

2. Similar charts are used to indicate terminology to be applied to certain classifications.

For example, in a foreign trade chart cf this type, it could be indicated by means of
boxes and arrows that the term "domestic imports" applies to those products which
are exported by ut in raw material form and then imported in another form.

FLOW CHARTS

MRVATI MAWI10WCI

PUMX MMMTOVI

MIMIC MAMTINANO
AND ■•TAW*

t«M,eM,Me

lailroo^f, StTMt ^1^3.
Railwoyt ft Subwoyt
(400.000 000

Pip* lin*f. (Ml •!
tl5.000.000

o* Production
>d Oittribution
(75.000.000

ghwoyt ft lrld9*l
.315.000.000

T*l«phono ft T«l*9
$145,000,000

CONSTIUCTION coiiv*m privat* tavia^t into pro4o<tlv« strwrtvrct and witfc public Mvinqi raitvt commaiilty
«tM<«rd i •< liviaq. It pr«d»c»» tk* >tr»ct»r«i that pravidc our tkclter. traiiip*rtatieii, cemnmBicotioii, drf«BM,
p«w(r. li^t. k*«t. water, watt* di>p«>«l. rocrratioa, coairrvatiea and dcvclopmeirt of ewr aatioiial re>ourc*<.

Bngineerinc Newi Record, October, 1938, Part of an Editorial on "The Conatniction Indiutry, What It i»—
What It Doe*.- SCALE .7

The Wide Range of Construction in the United States.

Here again is a simple balance sheet, with the emphasis on the places from which the money
for construction came, and the places to which it went.

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

International Butineti Machines Corp., N. Y. C.

A. The Use of a Cosmograph to Make a Flow Chart.

1. The "Cosmograph" is a flow chart made by using the device shown above. One thousand

strips of paper are set on edge to represent 100%, and are separated into com-
ponent parts of 100%.

2. These two illustrations give two steps in making a "Cosmograph." The first shows the

process of locating and firmly clamping the strips of paper into position. The second
shows wedge spacers and bar spacers being inserted between groups of strips of
paper.

Tha Ant Of nagoliva phottMlohc prim
of Ih* Cotmogroph M(-up ot tho lofl.

International Butinrts Machines Corp., N. Y. C.

B. The Completed Cosmograph.

1. Border guides are placed in position to block out excess ends of the paper strips and the

Cosmograph is ready for photostatting.

2. The negative photostatic print appears at the right. Note that all black portions of the

device fail to reproduce. Of the one thousand strips of paper, twenty are red and
are set at each 5% mark. In the negative photostat, these red strips of paper repro-
duce as white.

FLOW CHARTS

o
o

z
g

m
a.

</)

111

o
u

§ 8

*- .o

:5 1 i n

E -^ v2

E .2 «

tS J 8

^ o

.!! « ii

O ^ «

0» a -

c -f •»

i - =

O c

< H

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

International Butinest Machine* Corp., N. Y. C.

SCALE .6

A. Cosmograph Showing Distribution of German Reparation Payments.

1. The left side of the chart shows the total amount of reparations, and the countries by

which they were received. The center of the chart shows the amounts retained by
each country, indicated by the broken portions of the branches. The right side of
the chart shows the amounts paid in turn by the several countries to the United
States. The extreme right shows the total amount received by the United States.

2. The effect of the broken branches is obtained by sliding the paper strips backward until

their ends lie at the center of the chart. The remaining strips are held in position
at the center by the insertion of wedges.

ll'TTtUit

International Butineti Machines Corp., N. Y. C. SCALE .6

B. Cosmograph Showing Simple Income and Outgo.

1. In setting up such a chart, the center trunk is clamped in the usual manner. The income

side of the chart is set up and clamped, the board is turned and the expenditure
side is arranged and clamped.

2. A short strip of black paper is pasted across the trunk to provide a white block on the

negative photostatic print. The total money value is noted in type on this white
block.

Chapter 9
SECTOR CHARTS

A SECTOR chart presents data in the form of a circle. The
circle is divided along its radii so that the angle of each sec-
tion is proportional to the factual data it represents. Other terms
used for sector chart are: pie chart, divided circle. In practically
every instance in which material is presented in a sector chart, the
same information might also be presented in bar charts. See
Chapters 10 and 12.

From D. P. Donnant, "StatUtical Account of the United State* of America," 1805, Oeeenland Ai Nofria,
London. The Chart Wa« Made by William Playfair. SCALE .5

Statistical Representation of the United States of America in 1805.

1. This, so far as is known, was one of the first sector charts. William Playfair, the man

who invented the method, called it a "divided circle."

2. In Statiatical Breviary, 1801, William Playfair presented a group of circles whose areas

were equal to the areas of the countries they represented. The circle representing
the Turkish Empire was divided into 3 sections. Since this preceded the illustration
above in point of time, it may have been the first sector chart.

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

A. Employment and Unemploymenf
Experience of 129 Displaced
Hand Cigar Makers in Man-
chester, N. Y., as Recorded
Five Years After the Lay-off.

1. Divisions within divisions are possible

in the sector chart. Here two cate-
gories, employed and unemployed,
are further divided so that the
circle is in reality divided into
four parts.

2. Shading pieces of the sector chart

makes the chart easier to read.

Works Progress Administration, National Re-
search Project, "Summary of Findings to
Date," March, 1938. SCALE .5

INTEREST, RENTS. OTMER
SMALL SOURCES
il3.SS2,T85,000

DIVIDENDS FROM OTHER
CORPORATIONS
$2.a9C,041.000
(1%)

Factory Management and Maintenance, October, 1938, Part of an Editorial on Public Relations Entitled,
"How a Company Can Make Simple Reports to Its Employees." SCALE .8

B. Sources of the Total Income of Manufacturing Industries for the Period 1929-
1935. Total $330,709,960,000.

The sector chart gives an angle and area comparison. The relative merits of the sector chart
and the 100% bar chart in presenting the same facts arc disputed.

SECTOR CHARTS

TO EMfLOYCCS IN SALARIES

(mt inclu^in^ ttltrm •( cMsptny •ffici

% 11.034,050,000

(1«.5%)

TO OWNERS AS DIVIDENDS

i U,904.C02,000

(19 2'/.)

TO MANAGEMENT

talirits of company offictri

$ «,209. STC.OOO

(8V.)

Factory Managrmrnt and Maintenance, October, 1Q38, Part of an Editorial on Public Relations Entitled,
"How Much Employee!, Management, and Owners Got." SCALE .6

A. Total Paid Employees, Management, and Owners for the Period 1929-1935 in
Manufacturing Industries.

1. In all three of the sector charts presented , the largest component part has been

placed on the top section of the circle. For artistic balance and eye appeal this may
be the preferred practice. But to aid in making comparisons between any two of
these, it probably would have been better to arrange the sections as shown in 88B.

2. Expenditures and income of the manufacturing industries are shown in this chart and

83B.

SNNT
F*r Mirctt and Rant

tt.in,a:.o««
(i.«%)

SffNT
I «f PiMt aMt ^ylplMIlt
S<1.«*«.TS«,0M

Far T»«a
}t.4«0,IM.SS0

AVAILABLE
Far EmploYtti, Manaqamcnt, Ownara

i7e.M2,)*4.«e«

(tl.2%)

Factory Management and Maintenance, October, 1938, Part of an Editorial on Public Relations Entitled,
"How a Company Can Make Simple Reports to Its Employees." SCALE .6

B. Disposition of Total Income of Manufacturing Industries for the Period 1929-
1935. Total $330,709,960,000.

1. When it is impossible to place the titles for the compyonent parts of a sector chart in a

horizontal position within the section, the above method exemplifies good practice.

2. Expenditures and income of the manufacturing industries are shown in this chart and

83A.

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

1927

1930

$787,000,000
1932

$850,000,000
1934

$699,000,000

Real
estate

Personal
property

Gasoline

$608,000,000

Automobile f -^others
licenses

U. 8. Department of Agriculture, Bureau of Agricultural Economics.

Sources of the Farm-Tax Dollar in the United States for the Years 1927, 1930, 1932,
and 1934.

The general rule regarding the arrangement of the component parts of a sector chart is that
the divisions should be arranged according to magnitudes clockwise with the 12
o'clock mark as the starting point. This rule, however, is a flexible one. It should
be noted that the 192 7 circle follows the general rule and establishes the arrange-
ment of shadings which is adhered to in the other circles.

SECTOR CHARTS

MIDNIGHT

A. Comparison of Crimes Against
Persons By Time Periods in Cin-
cinnati in 1937.

This is a comparison of areas rather than
angles as can easily be seen by
comparing the section labelled
18.3% with 9.9%. a ratio of about
2 to 1. The distance along the
radius for each does not appear to
be as 2 is to 1.

(M^OOW

Cincinnati, Ohio, "Municipal Activitiet." 1037.

SCALE .5

1888

1938

Carpantsr

HOURS WORKED
A.M. ,1 J^i P.M.

HOURS WORKED
A.M. uJL\ PM.

Bricklayar

II " 1

Common Laboror

uj^

Shovel Operator

Engineering New* Record, October. 1938. Part of an Editorial on Public Relations Entitled, "The Con-
struction Industry, What It Is — What It Does." SCALE .9

B. A Comparison of the Hours Worked in New York City on Various Construction
Jobs in 1888 and 1938.

The average number of hours worked in each of the two years, 1888 and 1938, is actually
plotted on a clock so that not only the number of hours but the time of day involved
can be seen. For instance, in 1888, an hour was allotted for lunch. In two categories
in 1938 only half an hour is allotted for lunch.

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

scanrr rtvo — St

M«rr) OrVAJC
>WTtfm»

CnrvrnM

Leonard P. Ayrci. "The War With Germany,"
Government Printing OflFice, 1919.

A. Deaths of American Soldiers by
Principal Diseases in the World
War.

This chart illustrates the position of a
miscellaneous item when compo-
nent parts are presented. Although
the percentage of soldiers who died
from diseases other than those
listed is second to the percentage
of those who died from pneumonia,
it is placed last in the clockwise
arrangement.

Power. October. 1938, Part of an Editorial on
Public Relations Entitled "Man's Power Part-
ner." SCALE .8

B. Distribution of Industry's Dollar in
1937.

1. One distinctive feature about this chart

is the use of a black background
which emphasizes both the grey
and blue sections.

2. By alternating light and dark, it is

possible to make two colors do
the work of four.
Jnrrrtm^ifomi rtotocutrwi

v^Tmow 'iimtac

U. S. Department of Labor, Bureau of Labor StatUtict, "Labor Information Bulletin," October, 1936.

SCALE .4

C. Total Cost of Direct Labor and Materials on PWA Construction Projects, 1933-
1936.

1. The use of many circles and the arrangement of each one makes this an interesting

group of charts.

2. In order to aid in comparing one circle with another, it might have been better to have

a common starting point, that is, to have the black section of each circle start at
the top center as in 84.

3. Note that the numbers beneath the circle give the amount of money spent for each

purpose, but have no bearing on the size of the circles.

SECTOR CHARTS

SALES DOLLAR

INVESTED DOLLAR

4.3« Profit

During the period 1923-1934 (latest figures available) the average
profit in the manufacturing industries was equal to 4.2$ for each
sales dollar, or 4.3( for each invested dollar

Factory Management and. Maintenance. October, 1938, Part of an Editorial on Public Relationt Entitled,
"A Program for Public-Relation*."

Percentage of Profit from a Sales Dollar and an Invested Dollar.

1. The use of a dollar or other coin in place of a circle adds to the effectiveness of a sector

chart.

2. It might have been better to place the section labelled "Profit" at the 12 o'clock mark.

The difTcrence between 4.2 and 4.3 is so slight that the eye has difficulty in noting
it. Because the sections are centered on the 6 o'clock mark, it is even more difficult
to sec the difTcrence.

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

NET IMPORTS

NET EXPORTS

U. S. Department of Agriculture, Bureau of Agricultural Economics.

SCALE .7

A. Average World Trade in Apples by Countries for the Five Year Period from
1928 to 1932.

1. The lettering on this chart, the method of division, and the arrangement of the sections

should be commended. Although labels usually are kept on a horizontal plane, the
small size of the sections may make it impossible to follow this method even by the
use of arrows.

2. These data might be more clearly shown by a 100% bar chart.

I9I0-I9I4

1924-1929

AV. PRODUCTION

2,614,000,000 BUS.

AV. PRODUCTION

2,610,000,000 BUS.

U. S. Department of Agriculture, Bureau of Agricultural Economic*. SCALE .7

B. Distribution of Corn in the United States for the Two Periods 19 10- 1 9 14 and
1924-1929.

1. This chart presents the best method of dividing the circle and labelling its parts.

2. The chart is marked clockwise in magnitudes with the first line beginning at 12 o'clock.

3. The lettering of the sections is on a horizontal plane so that it is not necessary to turn

the chart to read the labels.

SECTOR CHARTS

American Society of Mechanical Engineers, N. Y. C, "Mechanical Engineering," February, 1921.

SCALE .5

A. Average Annual Net Expenditure of the Federal Governnnent During the Period
1910 to 1919, and for the Same Period Exclusive of War Cost.

1. If you think of this type of chart as two sector charts, one larger than the other with

the smaller on top, it is much easier to understand.

2. It would have been impossible to put the titles of the segments on a horizontal plane

in this sector chart. Care has been taken, however, to make the lettering clear.

American Atiociation of State Highway Official!, 'American Highway*." April. 1938. SCALE .5

B. Distribution of the Total Federal Budget for 1937 and 1939,

Since the budget for highways was the point of emphasis, public works, of which it ia «
part, was placed at the center top. Note that public works only was subdivides) to
allow for this emphasis.

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

A. Assets and Liabilities of the Elgin
National Watch Company in
1937.

This differs from the sector chart below
in that the dividing line between
the assets and liabilities is a ver-
tical one rather than a horizontal
one.

LIAMLITICS

Elgin National Watch Co.. Elgin, Illinois, "Let's
Look at the Record of 1937."

South Manchuria Railway Co., "Contemporary Manchuria," a Bimonthly Magazine, Japan, September,
1938.

B. Distribution of Assets and Liabilities of the South Manchuria Railway Company
in 1938.

Half of this circle represents the assets of the South Manchuria Railway Company and the
other half the liabilities. Each half equals 100%.

SECTOR CHARTS

M Oc
in l»l«

7.0e
in ISIC

IS.Ic
in 19IC

S.Sc

in l»IS

4.4c

in 1916

l.lc
in ISIC

U.»c
in 1»I6

For Labor

For Locofnotiv* Fuel

For other Matariali and S

For Loat and Danrtafe, Injuri**
to Parsons, Insurancs, Pensions,
Ospraciation and Retirements

For Tax

For Equipnrtcnt and Joint
Facility Rentals

Balance Rentaininf (Net
I Operating Income) as
on the Capital Invested
Property

For each Dollar of Operating Revenues Received, the Railways
had $4.90 Invested in their Properties in 1916 and $6.37 in 1936.

S.9056
in 1916

When the foregoinf Pannies of
Net Railway Operating Income
were divided among the Dollars of
Investment, each Dollar received
this Return

J.S956

in I93C

Committee on Public Relations of the Eastern Railroad. N. Y. C, "A Yearbook of Railroad Informa-
tion." 1937.

A Comparison of the Distribution of the Average Dollar of Operating Revenues
Received by Class I Railways in 1916 and 1936.

This might be called a cumulative sector chart. Note that in each circle the total of all
that has been presented above it is represented by a shaded section, while the part
to be added is in black.

Chapter 10
100% BAR CHARTS

one hundred per cent bar chart is one in which a single bar
represents 100% and the divisions of the bar represent percentages
of the whole. Synonyms for 100% bar chart are: percentage bar
chart, relative bar chart, component parts bar chart.

CHARACTERISTICS OF A 100% BAR CHART:

1. A straight bar is easy to divide into parts representing ap-
proximate percentages, and is more convenient to use than a
sector chart.

2. The sections may be shaded or colored for contrast.

3. Groupings of the parts are possible by using brackets or
engineering dimension lines.

4. A percentage scale outside the bar is more easily read.

5. To aid in using the chart for reference purposes, the actual
value of the bar and its component parts should be given.

6. To eliminate any need for turning the bar, the labels should
read from left to right horizontally wherever possible.

7. The bar should be wide enough to allow for differentiation,
and yet not so wide that the facts presented are distorted.

I T p i T T ;i >l H I I I H I T I I I M t H I ' 1 I [ I I I I [ ' I I H I I I I I H I I I I I I H ' I I I I I I I H I I I I I I I T I |l r ' ' [I I I I I I I I n I M n

%e lO to >0 40 M CO 10 to M ioo%

A 100% Bar Chart Stamp. scale .8

1. A rubber stamp in the form of a 100% bar chart with the percentages marked may be

secured from stores handling graphic chart material or from makers of rubber
stamps.

2. When a bar chart is wanted in a report, all that is necessary is to allow two inches

height and six inches length in the manuscript. The chart may then be placed in
this space.

3. These rubber stamps may be secured in other sizes, but they are usually six inches

long. Paper on which five 100% bars have been printed is also available. This illus-
tration may be used as copy for making a rubber stamp.

100% BAR CHARTS

ALL RAILWAYS

WATERWAYS

HI6HWAY9 flPCLINES

MILLIONS OF TONS

"The Ffdcral Chart Book." Prepared by the Central Statistical Board arid National Reiource* Committee,
January, 1Q38. SCALE .8

A. Estimated Tonnage in the United States Originated by Principal Types of Car-
riers in 1932.

1. In this chart a comparison of weights is given rather than amounts or percentages, and

the scale is separated from the 100% bar.

2. The value of this chart would have been increased if the tonnage for each of the four

divisions had been given.

3. The choice of shadings was unfortunate, since at the point where the two sections,

"waterways" and "highways," meet, the bar seems to sag.

4. The Federal Chart Book is an experimental publication and does not stand as a docu-

ment for general use. As a result, the illustrations are in a tentative and not neces-
sarily final form.

HEART DISEASE

NFUJIH2A a TUKI- I LoiABCTES MELLITUS
PMUMONU CmOSS l-AUTOMOeiLE ACCIDENTS

AtL OT

"The Federal Chart Book." Prepared by th^ Central Statistical Board and National Resources Committee,
January. 1938. SCALE .6

B. Percentage Distribution by Selected Causes of Deaths in the United States in
1935.

1. The 100% bar chart is a classification chart with percentages graphically presented. It

gives the component parts of the total along a straight line. By making the line a
bar, the component parts are more easily identified and compared.

2. Note that the percentage for each of the seven divisions is given within each section.

3. The use of connecting lines to identify small sections of a 100% bar chart with its title

is here demonstrated.

OCPAXTHCNT

40% 00% aoX noX

-FOOO STO«£S

Z0%

40%

GEN MERCHANDISE
STORES

' AUTOMOTIVE
GROUP

•OX

■ All otmcr stores

"The Federal Chart Book," Prepared by the Central Statistical Board and National Reaoureca Committee,
January. J 938. SCALE .7

C. Distribution of Sales by Types of Retailers in the United States in 1935.

1. The use of brackets or engineering dimension lines to show groupings of the parts of a

100% bar chart is often useful. In this chart the titles of the individual sections
are given above the bar, while the titles of the groupings indicated by brackets are
given below the chart.

2. The inclusion of the percentages within each section is a decided advantage.

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

^neTaxe3-2ai^A

^rantportation
«nd Marketing

WioninaRefi"''^

Costs-zaz*/'

Automobile Manufacturers Association, ' Auto-
mobile Facts and Figures," 1938.

A. Distribution of the Cost of Gaso-
line in the United States in
1936.

The use of objects which can be divided
into percentages is a common
practice. In this chart, a gallon
can is very appropriate to illus-
trate the distribution of the cost
of gasoline.

B. Cost of a Ton of Finished Sheet
Steel at a Lake Port in the
United States in 1931.

1. The amounts to the left of the bar

are cumulative: each one is a
total of all those below it on the
right hand side.

2. It might have been better to include

either a percentage scale or per-
centages within each division. As
it is now, percentages of the total
may be computed, though they
are not given.

ib0 65— I
24 Gauge
Sheet Cost

before
Interest or
Depreciation

♦26.65—1
Sheet &ar
Cost

^20 15 —
Ingot Cost

^14.15 -

Pig Iron

Co»t

iiilM

(t:^

SEE

■^^

iiiivh'rui

Drprcciation
$4.00

Interest on

Investment

6.00

Scrap Loss

Fuel Supplies

Overhead

3.00

Repairs and

Maintenance
4.00

Direct and

Indirect Labor

15.00

Scrap Lo«

•y>

Rolling Sheet Bar

1.50

Scrap Lots

•v>

Rolling BiUet

1.00

Scrap Lots

1.50

Rolling Bloom

1.50

Fluxes Alloys

1.00

Opcn-Hcarth

Operation

5.00

Blast Furnace Operation

I.JO

IJmestonc

•45

Coal -Coke

450

Iron Ore
8.00

Fortune Magazine, September, 1931. SCALE .8

100% BAR CHARTS

o
o

»-
z

a.
S

•

>-
(/>
o

z
<
to

o
a
a

o
o
o

_i
u.

»-
o

D
K

(-
W

Z
O

>
o

H
U
UJ

-»
o
a:
a.

bJ
1—

(T
O

a.
a

u
o

<
z

u
o

(£

»-

z
a.
<
o

z
«x

z
o

(T
O

<
*

-1
_i
o
o

ffi

K-

-J

tf)

Ift

■

•

♦

■n

•n

.£ .§
8 •£

C <J

O m

« .2

*-> >

o "*■ -
_0 V 2

o
O

■

E
o
O

£ M

•o »-

CQ .Jic

K °

- 2
a Z

« a

C2 J=
c

cc tJ

u U

O —

a V

E •£

o %

Z c
o

t >

O .2

^ < ^5

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

Wage ossistonce - 29 9 %-■

Emergency relief -65 3%-

Cotegoficol relief - 4 8 %■

Oih«r Works Program vogM

W.PA WOflM

Civil Works WOQM

CCC wogts ond subsistence

Emergency work relief

Soeciol progrom relief

Direct emergency relief

Aid to the oged, to the blind,
and to dependent children

$5,375,000,000

WPA, Division of Social Research, "Trends in Relief Expenditure," 1937.

A. Percentage Disfribution of Total Expenditures for Public Relief and Wage As-
sistance in the United States for the Years 1933-35.

1. The vertical 100% bar when divided into small sections is much easier to label than if it

were horizontal.

2. It also lends itself readily to grouping by sets of brackets to show such items as total

fixed charges, total operating expenses, etc.

100% BAR CHARTS

lUM ntANSmssiON

"CCtlvlHO SUSSrtTlON

Prderal Power Commiition, "National Power Survey," 1936.

SCALE .7

Elements of Costs in the Supply of Electricity to Residential Customers In the United
States in 1935.

1. By illustrating each of the elements of cost in the supply of electricity to residential

customers in the United States, meaning is given to such terms as "utilization
expense" and "return on investment." This form of chart would be appropriate for
an annual report.

2. In this illustration, no figures are shown. When a chart is to be used in a report, figures

should be given and correct relative proportions maintained.

Chapter 11
COMPARISON OF 100% BAR CHARTS

THE CHARTS in this chapter are the same type as those shown
in the preceding chapter. The 100% bars are grouped for com-
parison purposes.

1. Since it is difficult to determine the approximate height or
length of any one of the sections of a bar, it might be better
to put the percentage scale at both left and right, or top and
bottom.

2. The shadings should follow the general rule that when no one
thing is to be emphasized, the darker shadings should be next

100%

All Ort.«r

t Uso ure as

, rOttMr Loons
and
Discounts

Savings
Ranks

Loon ond A||

ComlJo'n... B<'"'*»
13,116,830 ^57,24^131

100%

n-7

AllOthflf
Asstfhs

Policy
Loana

oblicUtilHy
&ond«

vemnwnt
Bonds

rorm ond
Oth«r

Railrood
ondt and

18-^

6.5

dS^

LiF* Injuranc* ComponiM
4 20. 7501 OOa 000

T,f,lAsitft.C>0c3l,l932

American Aasociation of Automobile Manufacturer!, New York City.

SCALE ,8

Percentage of Total Resources or Assets of Banks and Life Insurance Companies in
the United States Invested in Various Types of Securities, Loans, or Other
Assets in 1932.

COMPARISON OF 100% BAR CHARTS

to the zero line. A section to be emphasized should be the
darkest shade.

3. Connecting lines from one bar to the next aid the reader.

1909
TOTAL 949,338

1919
993,597

1929
951,015

WPA. National Research Project, "Summary of Findings to Date." March, 1938.

Percentage Distribution of Wage Earners Employed in the Mineral Industries In the
United States in 1909. 1919, 1929, and 1935.

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

49 MILLION

ANNUAL

TOTAL

INCOMES

PCRSONS

IN DOLLARS

93 BILUON DOLLARS
TOTAL
INCOME

>IOOO AND UNDER

•I000TO2000

'2000TO5000

.5000 TO )5000

•ABOVE I5000<

S. S. Wycr, "LivinR Together in a Power Age," Association Pres^, New York, 1936. 8CALK .9

Distribution of the Income of the People in the United States in 1929.

1. The method of reading this chart is as follows: the people in the United States whose

incomes are $1000 or under comprised 40% of the population and contributed 12%
of the total national income in 1929; the people in the United States whose incomes
are from $1000 to $2000 conrprised 40% of the population and contributed 31% of
the total national income in 1929.

2. The use of arrows and distinctive gradations of shadings aid in reading this chart.

COMPARISON OF 100% BAR CHARTS

101

CHARACTERISTICS OF BAR CHARTS:

1. Bar charts may be adapted to fit almost any application.

2. The height of each bar is easily compared.

3. There should be some order for arrangement:

a. Time-series

b. Magnitudes

c. Geographical

d. Alphabetical

4. The actual amount which each bar represents should be
given.

ITEMS

ORDERS

ORDERED ONCE
IN A SIX
MONTHS
PERIOD

ORDERED MORE
THAN ONCE BUT
LESS THAN 10
TIMES

ORDERED 10-24
TIMES

ORDERED 25-50
TIMES

ORDERED more:
THAN 50 TIMES

Redrawn from a Chart by U. S. D«partmrnt of ARriculture, Bureau of Agricultural Economicf.

Frequency of Orders of Ten Selected Candy Plants in the United States in 1930.

When none of the various shading films arc available to provide cross hatchings on a chart,
rulings such as these may easily be put in by hand. Care should be taken not to
create weird effects such as those in 93A and 115A.

102

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

Tolol
wiuia cMioi

Untli>ll«4

■Hi Vtoffting ^ u*uol toc*o-«conomic Oo\t

p^^ Worlitng M 0IA«f thon utuol ucio-«conom*c ctOH

Ptfccnl
20 40 «0

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 r

::;:.::::.::-:.xx.:v::::::::v:vX^^^^

ii /mrTT» » I

■r^ I ■ ' >

:S±2iS2±S5^

---^-'-■^^ I

fEMAUE WORKERS
Totol

Wh.lt COllOf
SkillM
Scm.tlitlltd

WPA, Division of Social Research, "Urban Workers on Relief," 1936. SCALE .6

A. Proportion of Employed Workers on Relief in Jobs of Their Usual Socio-Economic
Class in the United States in May, 1934.

The inclusion of the "total" bar in each of the two classifications adds to the value of this
chart.

PERCI

100 r

= NT

r-1

m i

««1

n — r

T"- — r

T 1

PER

CENT

n 100

90 -

--^-

—

/ $751-1000

^ — '

- -

«o -

7ft -

""^^

/~1TT

^$501-73

—

00
7ft

CA -

/-^

;g==

--=

.— '

500 •

\ -

— .

DKft &

50
- dn

40 -
30 -

:-:=.

=-T-

)

~ Ukl

10 -
-

10
.

1925 1926 1927 1928 1929 1930 1931 1932 1933 1934 1935 1936 1937

Automobile Manufacturer! Association, "Automobile Facts and Figures," 1938.

B. Percentage Distribution of the Wholesale Price of Cars in the United States fronn
1925 to 1937.

1. Connecting lines facilitate the reading of this chart.

2. When percentages for each section of each bar are not given, it is better to put the per-

centage scale on both sides of the series.

COMPARISON OF 100% BAR CHARTS

103

A. Average Migratory, Employment,
and OfF-Season Periods of 500
Migratory-Casual Workers in
the United States for 1933 and
1934.

Each of these bars represents one year or
52 weeks. As a result, "weeks"
arc used for the scale, rather than
percentages.

All. «0>«fM

_uiiiii

WPA. Division of Social Research. "The Mi-
gratory-Casual Worker." 1937. SCALE .6

PCHC£NT
100

PERCENT
100

IturuiTlO ruu. TiMC

1037

NCUPVOTCO

WPA. National Research Project. "Recent Trends in Employment and Unemployment." December. 1Q37.

SCALE .7

B. Employment Status of Employable Persons As Revealed in the Philadelphia Un-
employment Sample for the Years 1929-1937.

Notice that the hachures are arranged according to relative darkness. See Chapter 9.

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

t " ' ] No emptoymen* Of public oid
t¥:»3 Relief ond o«her ♦
{■'■■'■■yj ReseHlemeni client

K*i?x^ Nonognculturol employment only
Aqriculturol employment only
Works Progrom end ott>«r **

lOOr

S 50

nlOO

MONTANA SOUTH WISCON
DAKOTA SIN

WEST NORTH GEORGIA
VIRGINIA CAROLINA

* Including tfiose wt>o hod relief only ond relief ** Including those with Works Progrom employment

combined with pnvote employment, but not including only, Works Program and private employment, orul
those with relief ond Works Progrom employment Works Progrom ond relief.

WPA. DivUion of Social RcMarch, "EfTectt of the Works ProKram on Rural Relief." 1938.

Relief and Employment Status of Heads of Rural Households In the United States,
in December, I 935.

When it is not possible to give complete information within the chart itself, footnotes similar
to these may be utilized. The footnotes here give a great deal more detail than
would have been possible in the legend itself.

COMPARISON OF 100% BAR CHARTS

105

Direct r«<ief

'■•'■ -•! work relief

Work relief

TOTAL

COLORADO

June
October

October

June

IOWA

October

June

KANSAS

October

June

MONTANA

October

June

NEBRASKA

October

NORTH DAKOTA

OKLAHOMA

SOUTH DAKOTA

October

June
October

October

WPA. Division of Social RcMarch. Relief and Rehabilitation in the Drought Area, 1937. SCALE Q

Types of Relief Granted by the Federal Emergency Relief Adnninistration in Eight
Drought States in June and October, 1935.

Here again is the application of the 100% bar chart to periods of time. Compare this with
103A.

106

Chapter 12
MULTIPLE BAR CHARTS

ach of the bars in the charts shown in the two preceding chap-
ters represent 100%. Another use of the bar form is to have the
length of the bars indicate values. The following are synonyms for
bar charts when they are in a vertical position: column chart,
"pipe-organ" chart, "pipe-of-Pan" chart. "flute-of-Pan" chart.

Federal Reserve Aeent. New York. "Monthly
Review," Sept. 1. 1935. SCALE .6

A. Estimafed Total Cash Income of
Farmers in the United States
from Agricultural Marketings
Including Payments by the Agri-
cultural Adjustment Administra-
tion, for the Years 1929-1935.

1. Simple comparisons are easily repre-

sented in bar form. The yearly
comparison is best when presented
in vertical form, the bars forming
a curve.

2. The addition of the actual amounts

which each bar represents would
facilitate the reading of the chart
and aid in its use for reference
purposes.

V ■vr.M - '/noooooto

■t?ff. n Prrcfnt
Iron *w Sfff ' 'Xf6. 900. 000

as ftrrctnf

><>.-« ^ry- t^Ji 700 000

7 flrrcenf

'-^3fxyftfw r^ifyryw' - 'Og 10(1000

l95Plrrcmt

/»nw«m«w - 'fSd, 000.000

U. S. Department of Labor. Bureau of Labor
Statiitics, "Labor Information Bulletin." Oc-
tober, 1936. SCALE .8

B. Value of Orders Placed for Mate-
rials Used on PWA Projects for
the Period 1933-1936.

1. The total of the lengths of all the bars

beneath the first one is equal to
its length.

2. It should be noted that there is no

difference between the width of
the "total" bar and the others.

MULTIPLE BAR CHARTS

107

WPA. "Report on ProgrcM of the Works Program." December, 1937. SCALE .7

A. Estimated Total Cost of Works Progress Administration Projects Placed in
Operation from May 6, 1935, Through September 30, 1937.

1. The material here is arranged arcording to the magnitude of the bars.

2. Its presentation horizontally eliminates the possibility of the eye seeing a curve which

would be undesirable.

3. Since stubs only are used in the vertical rulings, it might have been better to include

actual figures to facilitate reading the chart.

$ PER UNIT

800
700
600
500
400
300
200
100

♦ 702

«SS7

■■■ -

^426

" ^ "

DEC. I9S7

'AVtRAGE

1S79^

AiT«

— »S44--

4l9«

o
z

♦ 113

♦mi

OLOtK
MODELS

\<tv

l<)S2

19U 1934

-YEAR, MODEL -

1435

1936

^ PER UNIT
800

700

600
500
400
300
200
100

1937

Automobile Manufacturers Association, "Automobile Facts and Figures," 1938.

B. The Average Used Car Price in the United States in 1937,

The method of reading this chart is as follows: the selling price of a used car, 1930 model,
in December 1937 was $113. while the selling price of a used car. 1935 model, was
$426. The average price of all used cars in December 1937 was $379.

108

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

No schooling

Partial grade school only

Completed grode schoo< only

Portiol high school only

Completed high school only

College

Percent
30

total of alt bars • 100%

WPA, Division of Social Research, "Farmers on Relief and Rehabilitation," 193 7.

A. Grade AHalnment of Heads of Open Country Households on Relief In the
United States. October, 1935.

As is indicated, the total of all the bars in this chart equals 100%. Compare this chart
with 106A and I08B.

17.4
7.9

12.0
9.8
3.8
5.3
3.4
7.2
1.1
.9

SI. a

AUTOMOTIVE

:itiiii»n:w

RAILROADS

METAL CONTAINERS

MACHINERY

OIL, GAS, MINING
AGRICULTURE

HIGHWAYS
SHIPBUILDING

ALL OTHERS

5 10 15

17S7 DI3TBIBUTION OF nNISHED STEEL PBODUCCO IN THE U. S., BT CONSUMING CBOUPS

The American RolIinB Mill Company, Middletown, Ohio, "37th Annual Report," 1937. SCALE .8

B. Distribution by Consuming Groups of Finished Steel Produced in the United
States in 1937.

Probably for variety, the titles of these bars were placed within the bars and the per-
centages were placed to the left. This arrangement aids in ascertaining whether or
not the total was 100%.

MULTIPLE BAR CHARTS

109

C o

o ^

c £ SI

V a

&£

.2 •>

u «g O
a > «

^ £

13 2

c b

*3 <J

C 3

c C S

a a>

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

Georgio
New Mexico
South Ookoto
Maine
Utah
Montane

Woshington

Maryland

Arizona

Idaho

Connecticut

New HarDpshire

Vermont

Oregon

Rhode Island

Wyonning

Delowore

Nevodo

WPA, Diviiion of Social Research. 'Rural Youth on Relief," 1937.

Estimated Number of Rural Youth on Relief in the United States in October. 1935.
Compare with 109.

MULTIPLE BAR CHARTS

111

WAGES AS ftR CfNT Of VAi ui 0> runn

AAILAOAO R[»Ain SHOPS, STIAM
FOUNDAltS

Mositny

LUMBCM AND T1MMK MIOOUCTS

BOOTS ANO SHOES

FUDNITURt •

CLASS -

WOOLtN WOVCN cooos _—..... — .

PMINTINC ANO PUBLISHING, BOOK ANO JOB-
COTTON MANUfACTUMCS

CLOTHING. MEN'S, YOUTHS', ANO BOYS*

MACHINE SHOPS

STIEL WORKS ANO MOLLINC MILLS

MACHINERY

AGRICULTURAL IMPLEMENTS

MOTOR-VEHICLE BODIES ANO PARTS

ELECTRICAL MACHINERY. APPARATUS, ETC

BREAD ANO BAKERY PRODUCTS

WORSTED WOVEN GOODS

DRESSES, WOMEN'S

NONFERROUS METAL ALLOYS AND PRODUCTS

LEATHER. TANNED AND FINISHED

REFRIGERATORS —

RUBBER TIRES AND INNER TUBES—

BOXES. PAPER

COATS AND SUITS. WOMEN'S. ETC.

PRINTING ANO PUBLISHING. NEWSPAPER. ETC.

PAPER

CONFECTIONERY - -

LIQUORS, MALT -

CHEMICALS

CANNED AND DRIED FRUITS . VEGETABLES, ETC.

TIN CANS AND OTHER TINWARE--

MOTOR vtHrCLES

COKE-OVEN PRODUCTS

CAS. MANUFACTURED -

PAINTS AND VARNISHES -

DRUGS AND MEDICINES --

PETROLEUM REFINING ~

MEAT PACKING, WHOLESALE

FOOD PREPARATIONS

BLAST-FURNACE PRODUCTS "

FEEDS. PREPARED

SUGAR REFINING. CANE- -

BUTTER -

FLOUR ANO GRAIN-MILL PRODUCTS

COPPER. SMELTING ANO REFINING

CIGARETTES - -

SHORTENINGS (OTHER THAN LARD), OILS. ETC

I2.0|
I0.«|

ALL MANUFACTURING
INDUSTRIES. 1899-1935

National Induitrial Conference Board. Inc., February 18, 1938. SCALE 7

The Percentage of Value of Products Which Is Expended for Labor in \A(ages in Fifty
Leading Manufacturing Industries in the United States in 1935.

The inclusion of the value at the end of each bar, while it eliminates the necessity for two
eye movements, visually decreases the length of the bars. It might have been better
to put the values in a column on the left.

112

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

Woshmglon, D C
New York, N Y
Scronlon, Po
Peono, III
Stou« Foils, S Doh

Milwoukee Wis
St Louis, Mo
Son Froncisco, Coht
Boston, Moss
Minneopoiis, Mmn

Nework, N J
Cincinnoli, Ohio
Atlonlo, Go
Pittsburgh, Po
Chicago, III

Philodelphio, Po
Omoho, Nebr
Norfolk, Vo
Richmond, Vo
Bridgeport, Conn

Cieveiond, Ohio
Albuquerque, N Me«
Boltimore, Md
Binghomton, N Y
Rochester, N Y

Detroit, Mich
Foil River, Moss
Memphis, Tenn
Tucson, Ariz
Dollos, Tex

Providence, R I
Buffolo, N Y
Butte, Mont
Houston, Tex
Louisville, Ky
Wmston-Solem, N C
Knoxville, Tenn
Oklohomo City, Okia
Denver, Colo
Portlond, Mome

Cedor Ropids, lowo
Indionopolis, Ind
Columbia, S C
Jocksonville, Flo
Konsos City, Mo

Los Anqeles, Co lit
New Orleons, La
El Poso, Tex
Solt Loke City, Utoh
Clorksburg, W Vo

Columbus, Ohio
Monchester, N H
Little Rock, Ark
Spokone, Wosh
Seattle, Wosh
Birminghom, Alo
Wichita, Kons
Mobile, Alo
Portlond, Oreg

Percent
80

100

120

140 160

-ZML

^=3

■=:f

WPA, Division of Social Research, "Intercity Difference* in Cost of Living — 59 Cities," March, 1935.

Relative Rents for a 4-Person Manual Worker's Family in Each of 59 Cities in the
United States, March, 1935.

1. The 100% line here gives a good measuring rod for comparisons.

2. The chart would be read as follows: the four cities, Detroit, Michigan, Fall River, Massa-

chusetts, Memphis, Tennessee, and Tucson, Arizona, may be described as average
cities so far as rent for a 4-person manual worker's family is concerned. Rents are
relatively much higher in Washington, D. C, and New York City, and relatively
much lower in Mobile, Alabama, and Portland, Oregon.

MULTIPLE BAR CHARTS

113

Abstracts from Time Series Charts. A Manual of Design and
Construction. 1938, prepared by Committee on Standards for
Graphic Presentation, under procedure of American Standards
Association, with The American Society of Mechanical Engineers
as sponsor body.

TIMC-SniES CCXUAAN CHAHn

A. DCFINITION Column choti art graphic prnaniotions wh«r*in
fHiffl«ncol values or* r«pr«j«nt9d by lh« length ol vertical bars or
caluemt.

6. THE COIUMN CHART IS PART1CULA81Y EFFECTIVE,

I. To emphobie comparisons ol amounts in o single time series.

2 For popular presentation.

3 To show components lor o rekjtivelv few lolols.

4 To picture "penod' doto as ogomst "point" doNi.

5 For s>iowir^ o rar>ge of volues or deviations from a normal or
bogey.

C THE COIUMN CHART IS NOT THE BEST FORM:

1. For comporing several times senes

2. For lime series over an eilended period with many plottings

1. LAYOUT AND DESIGN A chon consisting of o few columns should
generoify be higher than wide, for more than a few columns a wider-
thon-high chort is preferoble

2 GRIDS. T)>e field or grid used for column charts may be a completely
ruted coordirtote surfoca. Usuolly. however, il is not necessary to
lrtd<ose all the rulirigs which would normally be shown on o line
chon. A complete grid outline is usually not reauired The columns
It^ew s ehre s generally moke vertKol rulings unnecessory. Moreover,
(ewer )>ori2ontol rulings may be needed since column chorts ore more
gerwrally used for popular presentation thon are line chorts. Often
horizontal rulir>gs may be incomplete, being extended through only
that portion of the field occup«d by the columns.

3. SCAIE SELECTION In column chorts the interest is generolly in a
comparison between amounts os of different dotes. These amounts
ore proportionote to the height of the columns This means Ihot the
zero line, when it is ifie prir>cipot hne of reference, should olwoys be
iTKluded in a column chort. It follows, too, that the omouni scoles should
no* be broken, but mode continuous from the reference Ime. While
normoffy the full length of the column should be shown, when it rep-
resents on abr<ormally lorge value the column may be broken at the
lop ond ttie omount irKitcoted.

Columns should be spoced occording to their proper position on the
time scale. SVhen time intervals between volues are not equal, columns
should be spoced occordingfy.

4. SCALE DESIGNATIONS Ptocmg of scole numerals ond captions on
coKimn chorts is less conventior^olized than on line charts. As the grid
rulings ore ohen irKomplete, the verticol scole volues generally are
ploced on the s*de where tfie rulif^gs ore complete (For exomple, if
the tollesi columns ore at the right, the scole designations moy be
shown on the righihond SKie only |

Tifite Scale Desigrxitions are nornHslly centered ur>der tf>e columns,
reodtng fiorizontally . in column chorts for popular presentotion fttfier
or both omount and time designations may be ploced obove the
columns

& COLUMNS The eAeclive appeoronce of o column chart requires
ipecol core m the design of the columns When there are only a lew
cohrmrts H<ev should be norrower thon tl<e white spoce between, when
there ore mony cohniuu the reverse should be trve

COLUMN DESIGNATIONS It is generally more difTKult to lobcl
segmented or grouped columns than curves because tfie columns
themselves take up so much more of the spoce Segment labels should
be placed ocross several columns il procticobte However, the space
about labels should be reduced as much as possible and too much
controst with the tone of the column ovoided so os not to distort the
impression of the relative lengths of the columns ond segments Where
labels cannot be placed on the columns, orrows may be used A
key or legend should be used only when improcticoble to lobel
directly.

COIUMN CHART DESIGNATIONS Column chart titles con often
be ploced most effectively occordmg to the distribution of the columns
rather than in a fixed position ol the top Ithe usual cose with line
chortsl.

Not* An •mpir<ol rtloliOns^'P b*»w—n column ond ipoc* it IXtMAtsd in

ih« Chon b*iow. boMd on on octuoJ )Mt o( cHom qI root-two propofttont

ond vOf'Ovi numb«f| o* columns, onm Ml wndOf -thon-hioh ond onoHlV
high«r -than- wtd«.

To space columns equoHv dong the titne scale, divide the ovoikibte
horizontal spoce mio twice as mony spaces os there ore to be columns.
Then center the columns on every other division mark begmnirtg with
the First from either end.

114

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

— _

ItiATIONAI IKirOMFl

frn

(

6)6

r.au"C» «» or dcc 3> 1

Magazine of Wall Street, January 29, 1938.

SCALE .5

A. National Income of the United States in Billions of Dollars from 1929 Through
1937.

When superimposing a bar chart upon a picture, care should be taken to choose a picture
which does not have smokestacks or other such buildings which take on the appear-
ance of a bar. The eye automatically compares heights. Superimposing when done
correctly is very effective.

PASSENGER CARS MOTOR TRUCKS

iOO 99

1928 '30 "31 32 '33 '34 '35 '36

Federal Re»erve Agent, New York, "Monthly Review

•29 '30 '31 '32 '33 '34 '35 'S*
October 1. 1936.

A. Production of Passenger Cars and Motor Trucks in the United States During the
First Eight Months of 1928-1936. The First Eight Months of 1929 Equal One
Hundred Per Cent.

1. The time series comparison of index numbers in bar form is here supplemented by

actual figures. Thus anyone consulting it is able to quote figures without computing
the various heights.

2. However, the figures placed at the top of each bar add to its visual length, resulting in

a false visual comparison. A better position for the figures would be between the
date and the bottom of the bar, or in the form of a data table below the chart.

3. For explanation of index numbers, see 30 1 A

115

Chapter 13
CONTRASTING BAR CHARTS

ONE VARIATION of the type of bar chart shown in Chapter
12 is to differentiate the bars by using hachures. or shadings.
Charts in which this technique is used are called contrasting bar

charts.

Green Giant brand peas

Other Peas

1937

Green Giant pack
increased 400%
over 1930.

Selling price ot
Green Giants de-
creased 12 1/3%
since 1930. 1932

Advertising cost on
Green Giants per
case decreased 29%
since 1930.

Minnrtota Valley Canning Company, Beaver
Dam , Wis., "Annual Report for the Fiscal
Year Ended March 31, 1938."

A. A Comparison of the Shipmenf of
One Brand of Peas and the
Shipment of All Others by the
Minnesota Valley Canning
Company in the Years 1932
and 1937.

The reason for including this chart is to
illustrate an optical illusion which
is seldom seen and which should
be avoided. Note how the bars
are distorted to the left because
of the cross hatchings.

OISAIUNC INJURKS

p r

MAN- HOURS WORKIO

FRCQUiNCY RATCS

r r

WPA, "Report on Progress of The Works Pro-
gram," December. 193 7. SCALE .5

B. Relation of Man-hours Worked to
Disabling Injuries Incurred in
Works Progress Administration
Project Work for 1936 and
1937.

1. Bar charts with contrasting units are

used chiefly to differentiate vari-
ous bars. Here one type of hachure
is used for the year 1937 in each
of three charts and another for
1936.

2. Since neither complete vertical rulings

nor numerous stubs are used, it
might have been better to include
the actual figures.

3. Note that in horizontal bars the latest

year is usually at the bottom so
that the reader looks down from
the top rather than up from the
bottom.

116

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

Abstracts from Time Series Charts. A Manual of Design and
Construction, 1938, prepared by Committee on Standards for
Graphic Presentation, under procedure of American Standards
Association, with The American Society of Mechanical Engineers
as sponsor body.

Specific column designs or shadings ore recommended os follows:

Id) Black IsolidI for general use for narrow columns. However, a
series of long narrow columns filled in solid may cause an un-
pleasant optical effect. In segmented column charts, black is
good for the bottom segments if they are not too large.

(b| Vertical Line Shading is recommended for general use as pleasing
In appearance and easy to construct.

Id Diogonal Line Shading is useful only in small segments as optical
illusion results if any appreciable length of column is shaded with
this design, as illustrated at the right.

Idl Horizontal Line Shading has limited usefulness and is not generolly
recommended.

(el Crosshatch Shading (diagonal! is recommended in place of
black for wide columns. Crosshatch shading mode by crossing
verticol and horizontal lines is not recommended.

If) Dotted Shading (pebbled or stippled) is sometimes effective for
columns of medium width and particularly for small segments for
charts in which a third or fourth distinguishing shading is needed.

(g) Hollow columns, if distinctly wider or narrower than the space
between and outlined with a heavy line.

Columns may present undesirable optical illusions unless slight cor-
rectives are applied. A white or lightly shaded segment on top of a
column may appear to spread unless the column outline is tapered
about the width of a line; a block segment may appear more narrow
than the rest of the column unless it is widened about the width of
o line; a tall column may appear to be thinner in the middle unless
the lines ore bowed out slightly.

ftl

i-|l

OIACONAL SMAOINC

MAT 'KNO' iXADINO MAT AfFCCT

TMC COLUMNS APPAACHT WIDTH

Effscts of improper use of shoding

£20

^B SIIF MflNOCNT
EZ3 Of KNMNT

\WTm

^_L

CUtMNT
lAININCS

SAVINCS
SICMITin

SOCIAL
OTHII SICUdTT

ifsouica ACT

OTHII

SOCIAL rillNDS ot

AdNCIIS (ILATIVIS

Dun't Review, June, 1938.

A. Means of Support of Persons 65 Years of Age or Older Living in the United
States in April. 1937.

CONTRASTING BAR CHARTS

117

Dun's Review, April, 1938.

A. Adver+ising Expenditures for Newspapers, Magazines, and Radio in the United
States from 1929 to 1937.

1. It might have been better to include actual figures in this chart.

2. Note the groupings, the spacing between groupings, and the narrowness of the bars.

134.8%

Iwlcz of PriCM*

Indcs of M«l( Hourly £«nuii(i

1929 - 100%

Armstrong Cork Company, Lancester, Pa., "Annual Report," December 31, 1937.

B. A Comparison of Weighted Average Selling Prices of All Armstrong Cork
Company Products and Average Male Hourly Earnings in the Company for
the Years 1929. 1936, and 1937.

Rather than merely state that the year 1929 was equal to 100%, this chart visually repre-
sents both index of prices and index of male hourly earnings as 100% bars.

118

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

FREQUENCY RATES

SEVERITY RATES

Dliabhnq iniurlci

1 per 1.000.000 man h

All Indu.»r,.»

^H i3es

Tobocco

1 7. IS

C*m«n4

1 -

laundry

1 662

T«»+.le

1 7.67

StMl

1 651

Print and Pub

III Q.IO

Nonftrroui M«tal fbbricofing

PI ''^8

Rubber

■ 9.}e

Class

■1 9.77

Chemical

■ 10.73

Automobile

■ I0.S7

Public UtHity

In 11.04

Mochinery

■11 11.70

Electro. Refining

H 11.34

Quarry

■ 11.77

Tanning and ItotHer

^1 17 68

Non-metal Mining

WM 17.44

Nonterrous Smtlting

^H 13.04

Petroleum

■Pl '^^0

Ore Milling

|H I5.2S

Sheet Metal

■11 '^'^^

Misc. Metal Products

Im 16.07

Tronsit

■B 16.36

Food

^H 16.79

Metol Mining

pHI 1667

Wood Working

■B iroe

Paper and Pulp

PH 16.45

Marine

HB 1977

Cloy Products

■■■ 7106

Construction

^^1 71.96

Foundry

■■■ 7S.63

Meot Pocking

■■■ 76.79

Refrigeration

■BH ^^^''

Bituminous Cool

^HHI 3777

lumbering

Anthrocite

Dayi loil per 1.000 man hourt

All Industries

m 1 ^6

Tobacco

1 007

Laundry

1 040

Textile

1 0S7

Print, ond Pub.

1 O.M

Gloss

|0.b7

Automobile

1 0.74

Tanning and leother

|o.e7

Mochinery

1 094

Wood Working

■ I.OB

Sheet Metal

1 1.17

Misc Metol Products

■ i.is

Cloy Products

1 1.19

Rubber

■ 1.70

Tronsit

■ 1.71

Food

■ 1-74

Chemicol

■ 1.79

Meot Pocking

■ 1.39

Non ferrous Metol Fobncoting

■ •.S3

Foundry

B '-^^

Petroleum

B '<>''

Public Utility

■ l.71

Poper Pulp

!■ 1.97

Retrigerotion

■i 703

Steel

^1 707

Construction

■■ 7S1

Quorry

|BB 7.60

Non-ferrous Smelting

^Hi 7 91

Morine

■■ 3.11

Cement

)BM 2<4

Electro Retining

pHH 3.70

Ore Milling

^HIH 4.S9

Lumbering

PBiM ^ <>^

Metal Mining

I776

Bituminous Cool

■ 690

Non metol Mining

H 900

Anthrocite

EnginrerinK and Mininn Journal, Octobrr, 1938, Part of an Editorial on Public Relations Entitled, "What
Mining Means to the United States." SCALE .7

Frequency Rates and Severity Rates of Industrial Accidents in the United States with
Special Reference to Certain Ones.

The bars in blue arc the "special reference" industries. The magazine in which this chart
appeared was interested chiefly in those bars colored blue, and used the simple
method of color for emphasis.

CONTRASTING BAR CHARTS

119

COST OF LIVING

INOCX NUMBCRS. l«2« • 100

UMiTtO IMNGOOW

rilANCE (PAKiS

JA^AN (TOi>»0

MHO 5TATIS

SWlTZtBLAMO

WHOLESALE PRICES

INOO NUMBOS. i«;< = 100

"■'• . ^"X

UNiriD STATtS

UNITED niNCOOM

CZtCMOSLOVAr

NCTMtRLAND-

National Induitrial Conftrence Board, Inc., October 23, 1936.

Cost of Living and Wholesale Prices in the United States and Specified Foreign
Countries for 1929 and 1936.

Compare this method of presenting two groups of facts with 144 A.

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

0«n«ri ^^^^ Ttnonli

Hundrtd doHors

United States

New England
Middle Atlantic
East North Central
West Nortti Central
Soutti Atlantic
Eost Soutti Central
West Soutti Central
Mountain
Pacific

Seven Cotton States
Alobamo
Arkonsos
Georgia
Louisiana
Mississippi
Nortti Carolina
Soutti Carolina

WPA. Diviiion of Social Research, "Landlord and Tenant on the Cotton Plantation," 1936. SCALE ,9

Median Value of Farm Dwellings by Tenure in the United Sta+es in 1930.

Divisions and subdivisions are possible in the bar chart as demonstrated in this one. The
median value for the United States as a whole is first given, then for each of nine geograph-
ical divisions, and finally a separation of the "Seven Cotton States" is made.

121

Chapter 14
PICTORIAL UNIT BAR CHARTS

IN A pictorial unit bar chart comparisons are made by using a
number of symbols, each of which represents a specific value.
Synonyms for pictorial unit bar charts are pictogram, pictograph.
The advantage of the pictorial unit chart over a chart in which large
and small units are used is that there is a variation in one dimen-
sion only.

One R9«ire-2,000 Mi K owitm

mmmmimm -•'

1929

in2

7.738

1933

1934

1935

1934

iiii

iumm

8.072
8.000

A Millionaire Is
Defined Here as a

Person WHt) an
Annual Income of
$50,000 or More

10.502

18.196

Chicago Tribune. The 1038 Chart Book."

Number of Millionaires in the United States in Selected Years.

1. The reason for classifying this as a bar chart is readily seen. The rows of men create

bars.

2. Since fractions are difficult to present in this form, the numerical value of each row of

figures is given.

3. It might have been better to leave more space between the 1929 row and the 1932 row,

since all the others are consecutive years.

4. As it appeared in the original, the 1936 row was at the top and the 1929 row at the

bottom. Because it is general practice to read years from the top down, the rows
were reversed.

122

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

SEPTEMBER
5251

OCTOBER
6618

NOVEMBER
6360

OECEMBEP
4967

JANUARY
3372

FEBRUARY
2631

MARCH
2524

APRIL
2768

MAY
2702

JUNE
1918

JULY
1059

AUGUST
1023

m
m

EACH FIGURE REPRESENTS
250 HEN

W. Sanford Evans. "Statistical Examination — GrorKian Bay Canal." Ottawa, Canada, 1916. SCALE ,9

Maximum Number of Trainmen and Yardmen Employed on Grain Trains on the Mani-
toba, Saskatchewan and Alberta Divisions of the Canadian Pacific Railway
in Each Month of the Crop Year I9I3-I9I4.

1. This was one of the first pictorial unit bar charts to appear,

2. Note that the numerical value of each row is given directly beneath the month. Com-

pare this form with 121, 123B, and 124A.

PICTORIAL UNIT BAR CHARTS

123

IN
1913

IN
1916

14 AUTOMOBILES I30 HOUSES
56 AUTOMOBILES 63 HOIkSES

From '"Humaniiinf the Greater City'i Charity" by Bertrand Brown, Department of Public Charities, City
of New York. 1017.

A. Comparison of the Means of Transporfation Used in the Department of Public
Charities of New York City in 1913 with 1916.

1. The distinctive feature of this chart is that it is a 100% bar chart. Each row represents

100% and each figure represents 12'/^%.

2. It would be read as follows: in 1913 one out of eight, or 12V2%, of the transportation

used in the Department of Public Charities in New York City, was by automobile
and the rest by horses. In 1916, four out of eight, or 50% of the transportation,
was by automobile and 50% was by horses.

Number of

TRACTORS

per one thousand farm families

Number per
1000 farms

Successful
Farming Families

357

"Heart"
Farmers

246

u s

Farmers

138

Meredith Publithing Co.. Des Moines, Iowa, "Successful Farming."

SCALE 5

B, A Comparison of the Number of Tractors Per One Thousand Farm Families in
Three Groups of Farmers in the United States.

1. The "heart" referred to in this chart means a group of states that form the heart of the

farming industry, as estimated by the Meredith Publishing Company.

2. The date to which this comparison applies is not definite: the sources listed for the

information given were dated 1930 and 1935.

124

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

-ooo I4.59I.OOO
•*" ONE MILE

1911

32.837,000
ONE MILE

TT'TT'TT'TT'TT'7T'7t'7T"7T'7T'7T'7TTT7T7T"7v'7^'Tr

Brinton. "Graphic Methods," McGraw-Hill, 1914.

SCALE .9

A. Comparison of fhe Average Number of Passengers Carried Per Mile on United
States Railroads in 1899 and 1911.

1. The theory behind pictorial unit bar charts is that there are more or less units rather

than larger or smaller units. A pictorial unit bar chart consists of rows of symbols
rather than large and small symbols.

2. In this chart, each figure represents 2000 passengers.

NOPOmCdAISED

6.128 LBS OF POWC HAISED

ni6 _ =.==„„^

IZm LBS OF POR.K. RAISED

From "HumanizifiK the Greater City'i Charity" by Bertrand Brown, Department of Public Charitie*, City
of New York, 1917.

B. Increase in Poric Production at the Sea View Farms fThe New York City Farin
Colony) from 1913 to 1916.

Apparently the basis on which the pigs were placed inside the fences was this: one pig
was added for each 6000 pounds of pork raised.

CHARACTERISTICS OF PICTORIAL
UNIT BAR CHARTS:

1. They are effective for popular presentation of educational
matter.

2. They are effective to attract attention, and for publicity, ad-
vertising, and propaganda.

PICTORIAL UNIT BAR CHARTS

125

A. Fire Losses in the City of Cincin-
nati from 1927 to 1936.

1. This is a unique and cfTective form in

which to present fire statistics.

2. The inclusion of the numerical values

adds to its usefulness.

FIRE L055E5

— ^"S^

^^ ...

City of Cincinnati, "Municipal Activitiet," 1936.

SCALE .6

If Our Ptopl0-And Thtirs- Should Pack Up And Hovt By Molor Car, Tomorrow —
How Many Would Havt To Walk?

ITALY

1 MIOCS.aO WALK

BERMANY

I RIOCS.IOVAtR

ussw.

1 RIOCt.lSO ••LN

ALL moc

d^^^^B^ Jf^^^^B^ ^^u^^^ ^^^^^^

tart Ma. fclaat. 10 »..al» Walfclaa

Tht Flaurtt lucluit »m»*% » Truclit

From "Our Country, Our People, and Their*" by M. E. Tracy, 1938. By Permittion of The Macmillan
Company, Publi»her«. N. Y. C. SCALE .5

B. A Picture of Automotive Transport Facilities in Italy, Germany, Russia, and the
United States in 1935 and 1936.

It should be noted that although each man afoot represents ten people walking, each figure
in the automobile represents one person.

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

Relative Size of Oceangoing Vessels from the "Savannah" in 1819 to the "Super-
Cunard" in 1935.

1. The universality of the graphic chart language is here illustrated. This chart was taken

from a French magazine.

2. Compare with 13 IB.

PICTORIAL UNIT BAR CHARTS

127

fAITII TUINOVII IIINOI MOII ftOMI ON ADVIITIIIO tlANOI

^-^ rr?:?

iflT;-'^

TC '■'

Sale* ManoRcmfnt. Oct. 1, 103 7.

SCALE 6

A. Comparison of Stock Turnover for Advertised and Unadvertised Brands of Goods
in the United States in 1936.

According to this chart, people in the United States are influenced more by advertisements
for headache cures than they are by food advertisements, and are influenced by
advertising in proportion to the unfamiliarity of the product advertised.

National Re«ources Board, "State Planning," 1935 SCALE .7

B. The Growth in Number of Hunters and Fishermen in Missouri from 1910 to 1934.

1. Although the height of the man and the size of the state may not represent the exact

numerical value of each, the fact that there were too many hunters and fishermen
in 1934 for the size of Missouri is quite apparent.

2. This chart illustrates the point made in 124 Al relative to larger units or more units.

128

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

A. Adaptability to Training of 2,031
Patients Examined at the New
York City Children's Hospital
and School in October 1916.

This is not a true pictorial unit bar chart,
but is rather two 100% bar charts
filled in with drawings of people.

1UIMU MTINIS

OiSKXM. BOUHlfliat
WUTi IKTONHB

From "Humanizing the Greater City't Charity"
by Bertrand Brown, Department of Pubhc
Charitiet, City of New York. 1917.

A Dou.A«'s WORTH Of Milk
Feb is. 1029

hmmmL
mmNs

A Doijjms WORTH Of PtJ>n Bttr

res a, 1029

FEaiS.1933

rcB ie.i937

<^^..^^^^

<^^-^

A DOIXAWS WORTH Of BUTTCR |

fee IS. 1929

«ff^^ d^^

rtB 14.1933

rtB I«.I937

rulS.1938

Retail Food Phici3. 1929-38

BOB.AAS or Lams 9rj(rxmc«

Rttproduo«d tiom "Labor Inroraatlon

BuIlatlB", April 199. Dspftrtsftnt

of L«bor, WaahlnctOD, 0. C.

ADOIXAR^S WORTH Of /^wrofj ]

mi5.S29

^ f .?

ru.is.i933

f f f f

rcBMie37

f f

res IS. 1938

t f f 1

A Dot-LAirs WORTH or Bmcao

rcais.Msak^

A Doll

rCB IS. 1929

Kvn WORTH Of Corrce

ftB IS 1933

@@@s

rcB )e.is37

@s@@

FIB IS,l93e

@ @^ 3

A OoLLARTs Worth or Cesi 1

re* 1^1039

■9 »eitm

rulMS33

mmmm

, 4^ tettm

Fca le.iesT

mmm

rcB is.i93a

mmmm?

U. S. Department of Commerce, Bureau of Foreign and Domestic Commerce, "Domestic Commerce." June
10, 1938. SCALE .6

B. A Comparison of How Much a Dollar Will Buy in Terms of Retail Food Prices
in the United States for the Years 1929. 1933. 1937, and 1938.

1. The pictorial unit bar chart is of particular value for popular appeal. It attracts atten-

tion even when it does not convey facts.

2. The inclusion of the actual amounts below each row of items in this series of charts

makes it valuable not only as a poster but also for research and reference purposes.

PICTORIAL UNIT BAR CHARTS

129

PROVIDKD

SI'KNT

«/•

FlHf

HloMII

toiCAtlOli

1/1

Pouci

1/1

HiCHWAVt OD

t/«

Srwrak *m> Stw«ci
UisrosAL

1/»

»>l»tlC HiALTH AKO

So.rAL Siitictt

t/T

HUUMN

1/1

riiiLK

AsSISTASCt

t/1

Apmin

5TIAT10W

Oiiifi

Sxivicu

IM.

County Boroueh of Reading, England, Borough Accountant's Dept., "General Statistics and Epitome of
the Corporation's Accounts," 1935.

How Each Pound Was Provided and Spent in the British Sovernnrient During the
Year Ended March 31, 1935.

1. Bar charts with visual captions may be our salvation from the preponderance of "little

men" charts.

2. The pictorial caption aids in making them universally understood.

3. They have a popular appeal, and yet present facts as clearly and accurately as possible.

130

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

E.X«»tNOITU»«t PL« CAPITA PtR WEEK IN CENTS
40 60 80_ 100

MISCELLANEOUS
FOODS

U. S Department of Labor, Burcnu of Lat>or Statistics, "Labor Information Bulletin," July 1938.

Food Expenditures of Wage Earners and Lower-Salaried Clerical Workers af Suc-
cessive Economic Levels in New York City for the Winter Quarter of 1934-
1936.

This would be much more informative if the total annual income at each economic
level had been given.

PICTORIAL UNIT BAR CHARTS

67%

^ r. )

CITIES OVER*
10.000^ POPULATION

RURAL AND CITIES
UNDER 10,000 POPULATION

PfOESTRlAN

OTHER
AAOTOR VEHICLE

OTHER VEHICLE

llNClvDmO MM TM*IM\
\ C STMtCT CAM I

NON-
COUISION

Automobile Manufacturers Aitociation, "Automobile Facts and Figures," 1938.

A. Types of Motor Vehicle Deaths in the United States In 1937.

Pictures representing rural and urban districts are fairly well understood. The few strokes of
the pen which were necessary to create these two captions were well worth the time.

-n — ^1 1 1 '•^f 1 1 1^1 1 1 1^1 1 1 r'l 1 1 r'l 1 1 1"

III 1

1 M 'Tl 1 1 iTl 1 1 'T' 1 1 \\

J^ii-L.l.i — -

IJ^:-I

■iPiiMii^^

^^-" L_ «

Q-iTf "i

H
«

J-t \U- J i l"'

;>,

' • IM ' ^KV : 7

. .1. •. J (JJii. ^.^

i 1 W \ i\' AA II ' ^ -

2 * S _^ 15 -^

i 1 i.. . , . /l* - '^''JsIS, ^ . at i . '' if.^

ixil ?- 1«

'^t-— i--i

111 w ^ ^Jp U r J L ' ta

5 '^-

■ ■ ■ t * ■ ■ ' « "1 : . .

» ». - * * * ** -i

^-■==5.._.,^___ Z%

. . " t ■ . .

" J

' . 1 ' ■ ! i ! •' •

^ "

• L I '

fi .,

: X -_ -I- I '\

■ t~. ^ »

7 ,

It j !_:!.:"-:=_ ±± i!

> „

^ I

i1 ■

1 1

"" • ~- '3

i» _

i '. 1

" »

1 _^

_ - 3

.1 > . ..... 1 . . 1 i I ..

: ___±:_: :_:?

>IacElwee 8s Crandall. Inc . N Y C SCALE .4

B. The Trend In Length, Breadth, and Draft of North Atlantic Passenger Ships from
1830 to 1940.

1. The purpose of this chart was to determine the trend in length, breadth, and draft of

passenger ships so that docking facilities might be planned for the future.

2. As the newer ships were placed upon the chart, it was found that the calculation of the

trend was unbelievably accurate.

132

Chapter 15
COMPARISON OF COMPONENT BAR CHARTS

X he term "component bar" may refer to any bar which has been
divided into parts. The charts in Chapters 10 and 11 are com-
ponent bars in which each bar represents 100%, and the compari-
son of the component parts is the important item. In this chapter,
divisions of the bars are made without reducing all bars to the same
length.

Of DOtXARS

pueuic WORK

PRIVATE WORf

Federal Reserve Agent, New York, "Monthly
Review," Feb. 1, 1937. SCALE .7

A. Total Value of Building and Engi-
neering Contracts in Thirty-
seven of the United States,
Showing the Proportion of Pri-
vate and Public Construction
from 1932 to 1936.

1. Here the component parts arc labelled

in percentages, facilitating the
reading of the chart.

2. Since there are so few horizontal rul-

ings, it might have been better to
give the numerical values of each
bar.

Federal Reserve Agent, New York, "Monthly
Review," Nov. 1, 1936. SCALE .8

B. Comparison of the Gold Holdings
of the Central Banks and Gov-
ernments of 51 Other Countries
and the United States in July
1931. and October 1936.

1. To prevent the reading of the top

figures as the items for the 51
other countries, there should be a
third set of figures placed in a
position similar to the item for
the United States.

2. Since both the vertical scale and the

labels are put to the left of the
bars, it may be more difficult to
read the chart than if one or the
other were placed to the right.

COMPARISON OF COMPONENT BAR CHARTS

133

torAt,

(hAMUo IN oMOcn or size or socio economic cmout in itso)

ill

^ MEN
m WOMCN

'^ "i III i

nil

iii

ill

StUISKILLED

CLERICAL

SKILLED

UNSKILLED

DOMESTIC

PROPRIETX)RS.

PROFESSIONAL

VirORKERS

WORKERS

SERVANTS

MANAGERS

PERSONS

WPA, Nationnl Research Project. "Recent Trends in Employment and Unemployment in Philadelphia."
December IQJ?. SCALE .7

A. Ex+ent and Character of Changes in fhe Types of Employment In Philadelphia for
the Years 1910. 1920. and 1930.

Since there are no horizontal rulings, it might have been better to include the value of
each bar as well as percentages of each component part.

^555,077,000

^96 0,227.4^5

^525,770 795 '278,999,555

Expended for public schools in 1914.

Increase over 1914 chargeable to decrease in purchasing power of dollar.

||H||jll||!l[y| Increase over 1914 chargeable to increased attendance.
I I Increase over 1914 chargeable to increased services.

National Education Association. Washington. D. C "Research Bulletin," May 1038.

B. Estimated Causes of Increase in School Costs in the United States from 1914
to 1930.

This simple classification of reasons for the increase in school costs shows a great deal of
study and forethought. A verbal statement would not have been half so effective.

134

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

MILLION
10 IS

URBAN

RURAL NON-FARM

— \ 1 1 1 — 1

TOTAL 24 1

^^^H 1930 POPULATION

TOTAL 9 8

^^^^ '930 TO 1955 INCREASE
^^^^^ (ESTIMATED)

WMM

V^H 1955 TOTAL

RURAL FARM

TOTAL 14
WPA and U. S. Bureau of Agricultural Economics, "Rural Poverty." February 1938.

SCALE 7

A. Estimafed Increase in Male Population fronn 18 to 65 Years of Age by 1955 in
fhe United States.

The inclusion of practically all the data in the chart makes it useful for research and refer-
ence purposes.

WAGES AND SALARIES

COMPANY
OFFICERS'
SALARIES

DIVIDENDS

SURPLUS

■ 4.r
lor

•Shows percenloge o/ lolol expended lot woqes so/ones, and drvidends thai hod ro be wiihdrown Irom surp/us

Factory Manacrmrnt and Maintenance. October 1938. Part of an Editorial on Public Relations Entitled
A Program for Public Relationi." SCALE .9

B. Distribution of Income of the Manufacturing Industries in the United States from
1929 to 1935.

1. The chief significance of this chart lies in the arrangement of component parts of the

bars so that there is a common starting point for each classification.

2. The omission of a scale or some indication of the numerical value of each row of bars

was unfortunate.

COMPARISON OF COMPONENT BAR CHARTS

135

FOR tVtRY tlOO SPtNT BY FAMILIES IN THE MEDIAN
(tl ?40 »l.«t») INCOME GROUP OTHER GROUPS SPEND

INCOME GROUP

$^00- $ 749 PER YEAR

MIOIAN

BAtI

roODS

)

4i«

CLOTMINC

111

»U«Nr$MlNO»

»UtOMO«IL(

IIT

Pf nSONALCADf

)•

••IC«t»110N

& ^

1.500- 1.749

1.750- 1,999
2,000-2 499

rOCD CLOTHING

Salrt Managrmrnt, Feb. 1, 1438.

A. Comparison of the Disfribution of the Income of People in the United States on
Seven Income Levels in 1936.

This chart should be read as follows: while the median group spends one dollar for food,
the income group receiving from $500 to $749 per year spends sixty-two cents, and
tK» tonno to $2400 group spends $1.23.

SCALE .6

POUNDS

(MILLIONS)

150

QUANTITY or TOBACCO RETAINED FOR
HOME CONSUMPTION

100

1919

1921

1923 I92S 1927 1929 1931 1933 1935 1937

U. S. Department of ARriculturc, Bureau of Agricultural Economics.

SCALE .5

B. A Comparison by Sources of the Amount of Tobacco Consumed in the United
Kingdom from 1919 to 1937.

1. Because basically this chart seems to be a series of bar charts whose vertical rulings have

been eliminated, it can present slight differences which would not have been ap-
parent had the "staircase" been plotted as a curve.

2. Charts of this type are occasionally useful to give variety.

136

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

Oollors
600 800

1000 1200

1400

Wo»hington, C. »I4I4?4

Soo FroflCijco, Calif 1389 87

Minmopohs, Minn. 1367 79

NtwYork. NY. 1375.13

Cbicogo, 1 11
Milwoukce.Wis.
Boston, Moss
Ciev*lond, Ohio
St Louis, Mo.

Detroit, Micti.
Scronton, Po.
Cincinnoti, Otiio
Piltsburgti, Po
Los Angeles, Colif.

Nework, N J.
Baltimore, Md.
Albuquerque, N Me«
Phiiodelptiio, Po
Bridgeport, Conn.

Sioui Foils, S Ook
Roctiester, NY.
Tucson, Ariz.
Butte, Mont.
Portlond, Maine

Peofio.lll
Foil River, Mass.
Atlcnto, Go
Rictimond, Vo.
Buftolo, NY.

Averoge, 59 cities

Omoho, Nebr
Monchester, N. H.
Norfolk, Vo
Denver, Colo.
Konsos City, Mo.

Providence, R I
Binghomton, N Y.
Soil Loke City, Utoh
Seattle, Wosh.
New Orleans, Lo.

Spokone, Wosh.
Winston- Solem, N C
Portlond, Oreg
Memphis, Tenn.
Louisville, Ky.

Oklahoma City, Okia
Jacksonville, Flo
Houston, Ten
Indionopolis, Ind.
Coltmbio, S C.

Clorksburg, W.Vo.
Dallas, Te«.
Cedar Rapids, lowo
Columbus, Ohio
Birmingham, Alo.

KnoKville, Tenn.
El Poso. Te. ■
Little Rock, Ark.
Wichita, Kons.
Mobile. Alo

Food Clolhing, Housing Household Miscel-

clolhing upkeep, operation loneous

ond personal core

WPA. Division of Social Research, "Intercity Difference* in Costs of Living — 59 Cities, " March 1935.

Annual Costs of Living, by Mdjor Budqet Groups, of a 4-Person Manual Worker's
Fannily in Each of 59 Cities in the United States in March 1935.

Note the inclusion of the numerical values of the bars in the column at the left and the
inclusion of the average for the 59 cities enumerated in this chart.

COMPARISON OF COMPONENT BAR CHARTS

137

cl Jon Apr

1933 1934

WPA. Division of Socinl Research. "TrpnHs in Rrlicf Ex()fn(liturfs

Oct Jon Apf Jul Ocl Dec
1935

SCALE .7

A. Percentage Distribution of Monthly Expenditures for Public Relief and Wage
Assistance in the United States for the Period fronn January 1933 to Decem-
ber 1935.

1. This chart and 137B present the same information, except that this gives percentages

while 137B gives numerical values.

2. When component parts are given in a chart, the information should be presented in both

these forms if possible.

■ Works Progr om

in operation

WPA. Division of Social Rcsfarch. "Trends in Relief Expenditures," 1Q37.

SCALE .7

B. Trend of Monthly Expenditures for Public Relief and Wage Assistance in the
United States for the Period fronn January 1933 to December 1935.

138

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

NATIONAL INCOME
PHODDCED AND PAID OUT

INCOME PRODUCED AND PAID OUT
MINING AND QUARRYING

I9W (950 1951 I9J2 I95J I9i4

INCOME PRODUCED AND PAID OUT
METAL MINING

INCOME PRODUCED AND PAID OUT
NON-METAL MINING

19J0 1951

INCOHr
PAID OUT

ETI3

BUSINESS SAVINGS

NEGATIVE
BUSINESS SAVINGS

EnRincrrinR and MininE Journnl. Ortobrr 1038, Part of an Editorial on Public Rrlationt Entitled "What
MiimiK Mfani to the United Slates." SCALE .8

Income Produced and Paid Out in the United States with Special Reference to Cer-
tain Industries from 1929 to 1934.

The classification "negative business savings" means, no doubt, "losses."

COMPARISON OF COMPONENT BAR CHARTS

139

roannnc nsHMC «no mmmc

JM^aiCULTURC

U. S. Dppartmfnt of Commerce. Bureau of Foreign and Domestic Commerce, "Construction Activity in
the United States 1915-1937." 1938.

A. Percentage Distribution of Gainful Workers in the United States by Occupations
from 1870 to 1930.

This chart is a scries of 100% bar charts, but is included here because of its relation to
139B.

H(CM«MCAi. Dcusnacs

rooo AMO Aixco MOusmcs

OMniucnoM M>u$T*«s

U. S. Department of Commerce. Bureau of Foreign and Domestic Commerce, "Construction Activity in
the United States 1915-1937," 1938.

B. Percentage Distribution of Gainful Workers in Manufacturing, Mechanical, and
Construction Industries in the United States from 1870 to 1930.

Note that in 139A above, the division at the very top is labelled "Manufacturing, Mechani-
cal and Construction." This chart is a further break-down of that one component.
In the same way each of the component parts of 139A could be divided.

140

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

— LEG END —

I I Unshaded areas show supplemental KVAXVVj Available watar for soil havioq

■ ' water re^uirod Kr/ii\wiiM nfiltration capoci^Y o* OS ifKh per do^

IHHH "^ter required- laches permoolh. t^^t^y>^ Do liocb per day

I. ./' "l Actual roirifoll t '.'/.tS'/W^ Oo 1 5 inches per day

National Resources Board, "Report of Water Planning Committee, Part III," 1Q34.

SCALE .7

Supplemental Water Required to Provide 18 Inches Total Water for Crop Use Per
Day from May to October on Soils Having Various Infiltration Capacities in
Atlanta, Georgia, and Bismarck, North Dakota, from 1930 to 1932.

1. These cities were only two of several for which this analysis was made.

2. The necessity for reservoirs and dams is clearly shown in an effective form.

COMPARISON OF COMPONENT BAR CHARTS

141

•^te

...» \i, ^

-S

I-

1.-"

1-3

M.OCM TOTAL

<«t*g r^wLT wCDwt wa howtw

O iliOO'lt ntClaT«4i 0> BIT

AytBAti rAKLY Mirr h» womtm

$SI •«

Land Utilization Comiriittfp. New York Building Congress, Arthur C. HoUlfn, Chairman. SCALE .8

Sources of Income and Ratio of Rent to Income for Families in Block 2007 in New
York City in 1936.

1. Seldom does one find a chart in which so much information is given. While it may seem

formidable at first glance, the key at the right simplifies it.

2. This amount of information in words and figures only would require many pages of text

and could not make evident the interrelations clearly shown in chart form.

CHARACTERISTICS

1. Both actual amounts and percentages should be given.

2. When there is one bar to represent the total of all the others,
it should be the same width as the others.

3. The amount scale may be placed at both the left and the right
of the chart, or it may be placed on the side of greater sig-
nificance.

142

Chapter 16
BILATERAL BAR CHARTS

■HE TERM bilateral may refer to a curve or line chart as well
as to a bar chart. In a bilateral bar chart the bars extend
both up and down or both to the left and to the right of a
common line.

This results in a comparison of the distances from the line to the
ends of the bars rather than from the bottom or line at the left.

Bilateral bar charts are especially adapted to the presentation of
profit and loss data or of deviations from normal.

The following are synonyms for bilateral bar charts: two-way
bar chart, two-directional bar chart.

CLASS 1
RAILROAOS

oenciT 12

l»J9-32 39 36

I92« 32 -ii -36

ia2a -32 3i

IS29 32 3» -36

l92«-32 -15 -36

19M 32 -35 -36

l«2« 32 '3i -J«

CHCMICAL
& ORUC

FOOD k
FOOD PRODUCTS

OIL

STORES

TOBACCO
108

ALL
INDUSTRIALS

UTILITIES
EXCEPT TEL COS.

Federal Rcstrve ARrnt at New York, "Monthly Review." April 1, 1Q37.

SCALE .7

Annual Net Profits or Deficits of 727 United States Industrial and Mercantile Con-
cerns, Class I Railroads, and 62 Public Utility Companies Other Than Tele-
phone Connpanies, During 1929, 1932, 1935. and 1936. 1929 Equals 100%.

1. In a bilateral bar chart, the zero line while still a base line is not the bottom line.

2. In this chart the bars below the zero line are a minus quantity and those above are a

plus quantity.

3. It should be noted that in each group of bars, the 100% bar is always the same height.

4. It might have been better not to have the numbers at the end of each bar, since the

bar is lengthened and the visual differences are decreased.

BILATERAL BAR CHARTS

143

1 PMr«t« i >ll«r»«t.

Cav^aj lalai

Dun's Rrvicw, April 1Q38.

SCALE .5

Hypothetical Use of the Regional
Trade Barometer of Dun's Re-
view in a Comparison of In-
creases or Decreases of a Com-
pany's Sales from Month to
Month in Each Sales District.

Trade Barometers for 29 Regions
in the United States in Which
the Indexes of November 1938
Are Compared With the In-
dexes of November 1937 in
Percentage Reductions or In-
creases.

21 SAN FtANCISCO
29 LOS ANCCLtS

Dun's Review. February 1939.

SCALE .7

144

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

PRESENT

RECOMMENDED

I 1 1 1

1 PBIVATC {IM0U5T«,AL|

1,1 '

1 PRIVATE (rAKM WOODl •.NOI

^H^m^mm-

1 1 rEOERA:_

^^H^^^^^H^tf"^""*

5TOTM
1

I
STA- •

COUNTY

MUNICIPAL

:rwi3E accounted for

300 2S0 ZOO

loo so o so lOO

MILLIONS or ACRES

ISO zoo 2 SO 300

From "An Outline of the Natural Resources of the United States" by R. M. Field, Copyright 1936.
Used by the Permission of the Publishers, Barnes 6t Noble. Inc., N. Y. C.

A. Ownership of Forest Land in the United States in 1934 and as Reconnnnended
by the National Resources Board.

1. This chart does not present plus and minus quantities, but is, however, in bilateral bar
chart form.
It should be noted that the sum of the lengths of the bars on one side of the zero line
is equal to the sum of the lengths of the bars on the other side. As a result, the
scale might represent either percentages or "millions of acres."

Percent

40 20 20 40 60 80 100

1929
1930
1931
1932
1933
1934

.^^

%%%%%W?ft«???J*??J9X"i'

y!Vj»!%»Iwt»X«l«*»!%'!«t*t«WS?5Tl*X*^

l%*:!l:$:$:$:«:»:

Speciol
ollowonces

1935

Privote I General public

WPA. Division of Social Research. "Trends in Relief Exix'nditures," 1Q3 7.

B. Percentage Distribution of Relief Expenditures from Public and Private Funds In
120 Urban Areas in the United States fronn 1929 to 1935.

The total length of each bar if measured on the per cent scale would be 100%. Thus
this chart is merely a rearrangement of 100% bar charts. The reason for presenting
it in this way was to emphasize the relation between public and private relief.
Compare with 102 A and 14 SA.

BILATERAL BAR CHARTS

145

1929 I9K)

Dun's Review. April 1Q38.

193$

A. Profit-and-Dividend Status of 348 Corporations in the United States for the
Period from 1929 to 1935.

Here again is a group of 100% bar charts.

Note that the two types of crosshatchtngs below the zero line are in the classification
"unprofitable" while the two above the zero line are in the classification "profitable."
The zero line might well be heavier to emphasize this division.

Typical

1. Paring knives
priced at
^ 0.72 per
doz. Right

66 ITEMS

TOO HIGH 4-

y//

Jy^

y/A

E.R.P.

f7//<

y///A

y//A

y///A

y/j^

y/M

y///A

y///y

V/Z^

Wf^.

y/z^

iT^

V/Z/a

v//^

f^ -TOO LOW

Z////r

'^^

Price was

2. Carving sets:
^7.bO each. Right
Price was ^6.00

Churchill EnKinrrrinK Corporation. N. Y. C.

B. The Distortion in Prevailing Prices of Sixty-Six Itenns of Cutlery Manufactured
by One Company as Determined by the Churchill Engineering Corporation.

E.R.P. in this chart means "Economic Right Prices." Fifty of sixty-six items analyzed,
according to this corporation, were below E.R.P., while sixteen were above.

146

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

•ILLIONS or OOLLAMS

INVESTMeNTS

0. i coy,
OTHER DIReCT LOANS

TOTAL INVISTMCHTS 0«uC iMf ON SCCUKITIIS

• I

S.«

LOANS

COMMJRCIAL

LOAMS

RIAL
tSTATt

LOANS

TOTAL
Zt.I

12 «

a. 2

•NOC«

NUUSlKi

i»«><oa

^^^^^^^^^^^^^M

2.S

I92« l«30 1931 1932 1933 1934 I93i 1929 1930 1931 1932 1933 1934 1933

LOANS INVESTMENTS

National Industrial Conference Board, Inc., N. Y. C, February 7, 1936.

SCALE .7

Loans and Investments of the Member Banks of the Federal Reserve System from
1929 to 1935.

1. The insertion of figures in each of the component parts facilitates the reading of the

chart.

2. The curves which supplement the chart give a great deal more detail than could be given

in one form of chart alone.

BILATERAL BAR CHARTS

147

MILES OF LINE

NET INCOME PER Mil

«».t*«

lft.49*

it^»»

»>,ieo

B SWEDEN

S4,tt4

IaustraliaH

I -fa

DEFICIT PER MILE OF LINE

'■■■l ISTATt, ^$296

M,M*

INDIA
I93i*

I
I

a»,Me

*fiiC*L rt*ti

NationnI lndM«lri.il Coiifrrrnce BonrH. \nc . N Y C . April 22. 19.18.

SCALE .7

Net Income or Deficit of Governmentally Owned or Operated Railways for Various
Foreign Countries in 1935 or 1936.

1. The point of interest in this chart is the net income or deficit of the various railroads.

Tlic number of miles of line were probably included to show that there is no evi-
dent relationship between the length of the railroad and profit or loss.

2. The dividing line between the two groups of bars in this chart is not a zero line with

plus and minus quantities to right and left, since miles are the quantity on one
side and dollars the quantity on the other.

3. Thus the arrangement of the bars alone makes this a bilateral bar chart.

148

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

Female

Percent
60 50 40 30 20 10

I 1 1 \ 1 r

Agriculture
Forestry and Fishing

Extraction of Minerals

Manufacturing and
Mechanical Industries

Transportation and
Communication

Trade
Public Service

Professional Service

Domestic ond
Personal Service

Clericol Occupotions

Male

Percent
20 30 40 50 60

Relief 1934
Census 1930

WPA, Division of Social Rcsr.-irch, "Urban Workrrs on Rclirf." 1036.

Usual Occupation of Unemployed Workers on Relief in 1934 and Gainful Workers
in 1930 in the United States.

The method of reading tfiis chart is as follows: according to the 1930 census about 42%
of male gainful workers were in the manufacturing and mechanical industries. In
1934 about 52% of the men on relief designated manufacturing and mechanical
industries as their former place of employment. This latter fact does not seem so
startling in view of the first statement.

149

Chapter 17
AREA BAR CHARTS

THE BASIS of comparison in an area bar chart is the area of the
bar rather than the length of the bar. Other terms appHed to
this type of chart are, 100% square; 100% block.

M CXNTt Nl HCMM

AVIMAM BUIIIIIi g a
IN CINIt ff« MOU*

AVCMASC FOa AU TYKt

KKSKT Of TOTAL HOUK OH WMKM MTMCKT WAS tAUD
lOO % s I, *7*, 000,000 HOUM

WPA. "Report on Progrpss of the Worki Program." December 1937.

Average Hourly Earnings of Persons Ennployed on Works Progress Administration
Projects, by Types of Projects for the Period from January through October
1937.

1. As both the percentage of the total number of hours and the earnings per hour are

given, it is possible to compute from this chart the actual amount of expenditure
for each type of project.

2. The chart indicates without computation in which projects earnings are above the

average and which ones fall below.

150

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

•f 140
•f 110

•f I to

♦ MO

••> I 00

-♦-9

+ 00

•♦• 70

•♦• 60

-♦■ SO

•(- 40

•(- 10

•I- 20

+ I
J.R.H. CORP.

».

••RIGHT PRICE'*

- I

- «0

- 10

- 40

- 50

PRI

:vAi

UNC

PRIC

ES TOO HIGH

11^

J.R.H. CORP.

■IHIIIII

!■

"RIGHT PRICE**

«....-

IpREVAILING PRICES TOOLOw|

10 20 10 40 SO 60 70 80 90 100

PERCENT OF SALES VOLUME

Churchill EnginrrrinK Corporation, N. Y. C.

The Distortion in Prevailing Prices of Seventeen Itenns of Roofing Products Manu-
factured by One Connpany in the United States as Determined by the
Churchill Engineering Corporation.

Weighting the bars by showing volume as well as price gives a more accurate picture than
a simple bilateral chart would Rive. However, a representation of volume is not
always necessary.

AREA BAR CHARTS

151

CHARACTERISTICS OF AREA BAR CHARTS:

1. Useful in presentinj; material which ^ivcs parts of a total.

2. They show in one view two independent {groups of facts.

■(M"M

foci

'•L

U«NU>^*C TURING

&N0 UCCHANICAL 29 4
INOUSTBll J

INOUSTBUS

AND scnviccs

TDANSPOATATION
ANO
COMMUNICATION

OOMISTIC
AND PCDSONAL

scnvicc

acbicoltuhe.
fisminc, and
^oblic siBvice

M.»

4t.4

91.*

National Industrial Confcrcncr Board, Inc. N Y. C, February 11. 1937 SCALE 7

Proportion of the Working Population Covered by the Old Age Provisions of the
Social Security Act in the United States, Using the Distribution of Occupa-
tions of the 1930 Census.

1. Not only the percentage covered or not covered by old-age provisions of the Social

Security Act is presented, but also the percentage of the total working force of each
of the types of labor.

2. If only the percentage covered in each type of industry were given, the representation

would be obviously false.

152

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

Massachusrtts Institute of TechnoloRy, "The. Technology Review." February 1933.

Occupational Distribution in 1930 of 134 MIT Graduates of the Classes of 1917 to
1929 Inclusive.

1. This chart is in reality a group of 100% bar charts. It was placed in this chapter

because of its resemblance to the preceding charts.

2. The emphasis on the area for "Major Executive" tends to make the comparison a

vertical one, resulting in area comparison.

CHARACTERISTICS OF AREA BARCHARTS:

Area bar charts may take one of two forms:

a. They may have one dimension in percentages of a total
and the second dimension in numerical values.

b. They may have both dimensions in percentages of two
different totals. They then become 100% squares or
blocks.

153

Chapter 18
GENERAL USE OF MAPS

DOTS, circles, bars, curves, symbols, etc., may be placed on a
base map to give the geographic location of statistical data.
When used in this way, the general term "statistical map" may be
applied. Synonyms for statistical map are cartogram, map chart.

GENERAL REFERENCES

Paullin, Charles O., Atlas of the Historical Geography of the
United States, Carnegie Institute of Washington and Ameri-
can Geographical Society of New York, 1932

Raisz, Erwin, General Cartography, McGraw-Hill Book Co.,
Inc., New York City, 1938

Encyclopedia Americana.

Outline Sketch of Borgia Map of the Fifteenth Century, A. D.

1. Man's earliest maps consisted of simple drawings. The map shown above is in a more

advanced form.

2. Long before the Christian era, people living in Egypt and Mesopotamia constructed

maps. For an early Mesopotamian map, see 170.

154

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

Encyclopedia Americana.

Maps Drawn on Orthographic and S+ereographic Projection on the Plane of a
Horizon,

1. When the discovery was made that the earth was round, map-makers were faced with

the problem of how to present on a plane a picture which was best presented by a
globe.

2. This involved transforming the lines of latitude and longitude on the earth into planer

magnitudes.

3. The projections above illustrate two of many solutions to this problem.

BASE MAPS

Base maps to be used for presenting quantitative data may be
secured from the following companies:

American Map Co., New York, N. Y.

Educational Exhibition Co., Providence, R. I.

C. S. Hammond ^^ Co., New York, N. Y.

Rand-McNally Co., New York, Chicago, Washington, D. C,
San Francisco, and Los Angeles

Maps may be ordered in many different forms: paper; cloth-
mounted; sized surface; washable surface; wooden rollers; spring-
roller case; pin-map board; cork carpet for pins; framed and
braced.

In making graphic representations of different sections of a city,
it is often difficult to secure base maps of a suitable scale. Fre-
quently maps can be obtained from the various city departments,
or from public utility companies covering the area of special
interest.

GENERAL USE OF MAPS

155

""^JjENERAL information about United States government
^^^m maps may be secured from Map Information Office, North
H^H Interior Department Building, Washington, D. C. Aerial
photographs are card-indexed, as well as other maps. This enables
the Map Information Office generally to state whether or not an
area has been photographed, and if so. from what source prints
are procurable. The following are important government mapping
agencies from which maps may be obtained directly:

Geological Survey, U. S. Department of Interior. Basic topo-
graphic maps of approximately one-half the United States. Key

wo* 160* wo* 120* lOO' 80* 60* *0 20' o" 20* 40* 60* 80* ICO* 120* 1*0' 160' l«0*

-«*— — ■ J<7C/P L/NtS JHOV¥ ACTUAL POSmONS Of IamO Af^O iVArCff A^fAS.

^^A-^ Dotrco Aff£AS Sffotv rne posfrio»fs Acco/foiMC ro MefrcATOffS MAPOf /SM.

Encyclopedia A.nfricana.

A Map Drawn on Mercator Projection, A "Developed" Projection.

1. The term "developed" is derived from' the method: a cylindrical or conical surface is

substituted for the plane of projection and then is "developed" or rolled out in a
plane. The two types of projection most commonly used today are the Mercator
and the polyconic.

2. The Mercator projection was first introduced in 1568 by Gerardus Mercator. a Flemish

lecturer on geography and astronomy. In the Mercator projection a tangent
cylinder is employed. The meridians and parallels of latitude cut each other at
right angles and are represented by straight lines.

3. The polyconic projection employs an infinite number of tangent cones. The starting

point for these cones is at the middle parallel or latitude of the area mapped.

4. See 267.

^^^ GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

Kcuffel H Essrr Co , New York City.

Map Measuring Device.

This instrument is used to measure lines and distances on a map. The small wheel follows
the line and the distance is recorded on the dial in inches or centimeters.

maps made for individual states and distributed without charge
are used in ordering specific sections. Geologic maps for many
sections of the United States and Alaska.

Coast and Geodetic Survey, U. S. Department of Commerce.
Navigational charts of the coasts of the United States and its pos-
sessions. Air route maps covering the entire United States.

General Land Office, U. S. Department of Interior. Wall map
of the United States showing the national parks, national monu-
ments, and other useful information. Maps of the 29 public-land
states, Alaska, and Hawaii.

Hydrograpfiic Office, Bureau of Navigation, U. S. Department
of ttie Navy. Maps and charts required in navigation in foreign
waters and on high seas.

Corps of Engineers, U. S. Army, Engineer Reproduction Plant,
Fort Humpfireys, D. C. Special topographic maps of areas of mili-
tary importance. Some topographic maps not covered by the
Geological Survey.

Forest Service, U. S. Department of Agriculture. Geographic
maps of national forests. Topographic maps of portions of them.

Bureau of Reclamation, U. S. Department of Interior. Topo-
graphic maps of many federal irrigation projects.

Office of Indian Affairs, U. S. Department of Interior. Portions
of the Indian reservations.

Mississippi River Commission, Vicksburg, Missisippi. Profile
of the river and topography along the shores.

International (United States-Alaska-Canada) Boundary Com-
mission, Washiington, D. C. Topographic maps of the United
States-Canada boundary line and east boundary of Alaska

Lake Survey, Patrol of Lakes and Coasts, U. S. Department of
Commerce. Hydrographic charts of Great Lakes.

See 160

GENERAL USE OF MAPS

157

a>
u

«^

c
o

-C

I'J^

■^

-♦-

•>

o»

■^

-D

"«

158

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

S t

^ 2

GENERAL USE OF MAPS

159

Courtesy of Commission of the Government of the Commonwealth of Australia From Exhibit at New
York Worlds Fair, 193Q

Inclined Rotating Globe So Balanced That Only Support Is Half-Inch Tube Contain-
ing Electric Wires.

1. Land with the exception of the British Empire is shown in brilliant blue celluloid, raised

above the aluminum surface. The British Empire is in red celluloid with the area
for Australia cut out and illuminated from within so that the red of Australia
shows more brilliantly than the rest of the British Empire. The sphere is over six
feet in diameter, made from individual discs of plate aluminum, about 30 inches in
diameter, spun to the correct spherical curvature. Discs were cut and welded to
build up a continuous surface, the joints practically invisible.

2. Special feature of this globe is that it is supported by a half-inch diameter tube and rotated

by internal mechanism so balanced that the axis of the earth is inclined in the
proper relation. Celluloid of Australia is removable as a man-hole cover so that
a small workman may go inside if necpssary. Mirror below assists in accenting the
southern polar region relative to Australia.

160

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

Ford Motor Compnny.

Globe Used in the Ford Exhibit in the Rotunda Building in Dearborn, Michigan.

This relief globe docs not Rive the names of countries or cities, hut the character of the
land and its relation to sources of supply and distribution of product are strikingly
shown.

See 155 and 156

Bureau of Chemistry and Soils, U. S. Department of Agriculture.
Maps showing the character of soils.

Soil Conservation Service, U. S. Department of Agriculture.
Maps compiled from aerial photographs.

Bureau of Public Roads, U. S. Department of Agriculture. Maps
of the United States showing the federal aid system of highways.
Maps of some of the states.

Bureau of Agricultural Economics, U. S. Department of Agri-
culture. Various maps relating to agricultural economics.

161

Chapter 19
GUIDE AND ROUTE MAPS

ne purpose of guide and route maps is to show details which
might be helpful in planning moves from one point to another. The
form of guide and route maps is well known, and may be used for
classifications as well as for routes.

REFERENCES

National Resources Committee, Suggested Symbols for Plans,
Maps and Charts, Washington, D. C. A free pamphlet, sent
on request.

U. S. Geological Survey, "Standard Symbols Adopted by the
Board of Surveys and Mays," a sheet 18^" x 30". Price 40c
from U. S. Geological Survey, Washington, D. C.

Map Printed on a Posf Card +o Show
by a Dotted Line the Advan-
tage of a Parkway Crossing
Croton Dam in Westchester
County, New York.

1. This map in convenient form was of

great assistance in securing adop-
tion of the route now called the
Briarcliffe - Peekskill Parkway
which includes 2300 acres of forest
reserve.

2. The line of dashes, purposely made

heavy, indicates a direct route
which is the natural extension of
the Sawmill Valley Parkway.

3. Words alone would have presented a

less striking argument.

-*r

Orisinal at Pror>otcd by Willard C. Brinton in
1921. SCALE .7

162

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

|C=

'"^

IkM

1^2

A B

A. Anatolia and Arabia Superinnposed
on the United States to Illus-
trate Their Relative Areas.

Seldom is a verbal explanation of the
difference in area of two countries
satisfactory. Presented in this
form, the difference is readily
seen.

Itsiah Bowman, "The New World," World Book
Co.. N. Y. C. 1930. SCALE .7

, 4

1 lOSONlO

J- HARBOUB

Toronto Indiutriiil Commi'ision. "Cnii.idn** National Market," IQ.'^S.

SCALE .9

B. Transportation Facilities of Toronto, Canada, in 1937.

The inclusion of a detail of a large map clarifies and explains. In this map, the detail in
the lower right corner made it possible to designate the city Toronto merely as a
circle in the larger map.

JuguSStmi

GUIDE AND ROUTE MAPS

163

Eastern Air Lines. N. Y. C.

SCALE .8

A. A Comparison of the Air Line Routes in 1928 and in 1938 of What Is Now the
Eastern Air Lines in the United States.

1. A "then" and "now" comparison is easily made on two maps.

2. Note that a great deal of black ink was used and that as a result the routes and the

names of the cities are easily seen.

SCALE .8

B. Connparison of the Areas of the United States and Europe.
Compare the effectiveness of this with 162 A.

164

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

National Rrsourcrs Board. "Rrnort of the Watrr PlanniiiR Committrf, Part III," 1934.

Main Electric Transmission Lines in the United States in 1933.

1. In the original of this map. the whole of the United States was given.

2. In order not to reduce the map and thus lose much of its detail, a section only is

reproduced.

GUIDE AND ROUTE MAPS

^^-^N^"^

5 t

*E
2

M- ><

o
a.

-3
a
C
e

CO Xi

■^ E

.2 o

0) "O

::; *

I -D

-O

;

o
o

C ♦- *;

C .2 o

t; s

H H

166

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

..., iJCCUTU> QOUTU

Nnlional Rt-sourcc» Board. "Statf PlanninR." 1035. SCALE .5

A. Existing Routes of Midwestern Airways and Routes Suggested by the Iowa State
Planning Board.

1. Because its state planning board prepared this map, Iowa is emphasized.

2. The inclusion of states other than Iowa makes it clear why the new air routes are

suggested.

EnginrrririK Nrw« Record. October 1Q38. Part of an Editorial on Public Relations for Industry. SCALE .6

B. States from Which Materials and Equipnrient for the Construction of Boulder
Dam Were Secured.

This type of map, whether it includes one continent or the whole world, is effective in
explaining the interdependence of peoples. For the construction of Boulder Dam,
materials had to be secured from forty-six states.

GUIDE AND ROUTE MAPS

167

American Aviation. May 1. 1Q38.

Pictorial Map of the Route of Eastern Air Lines In 1938.

1. A pictorial map attracts and teaches.

2. Compare this with 163A.

SCALE 6

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

Kit A en U»l T T <

■ffljnf C/imfiinf
uiamondmU *^

National Rrsourcrs Board, "State Planning," 1935.

Recreation Facilities of the State of Rhode Island In 1935.

SCALE .7

By means of numerous line drawings, a base map could easily be converted into a pictorial
map similar to the one shown above.

GUIDE AND ROUTE MAPS

169

. t|li»E)S{£Si»SI|§l<||

ill I! in!
lilllllHllili " ■

-a
o

& •=

170

Chapter 20
RELIEF AND AERIAL MAPS

AERIAL MAPS, whether actual photographs, drawings, or
photographs of models give a bird's-eye view of buildings,
roads, trees, mountains, cities, etc. Relief maps are best
known for their use in showing elevations and surface undulations
of a country, but may be used effectively also in presenting statis-
tical data.

Talley, Capt. B. B., Engineering Applications of Aerial fir* Ter-
restrial Photogrammetry , Pitman Publishing Company, New
York City

The Amrricnn SrhooU of Oririitnl Rcicnrch. Nfw Havrn. Connrcticut.

Clay Map from Mesopotamia, Dated About 2500 B. C.

This is perhaps the oldest known map. On it are marked positions of cities, indicated by
circles; mountains, indicated by scales; and rivers, indicated by wavy lines.

RELIEF AND AERIAL MAPS

171

REFERENCES ON MAP PROJECTION

Hinks. A. R., Map Projections, Cambridge University Press,
England. 1922

Wnrrrn H ManniiiK. A National Plan Study Brief." Landsca()« Architecture. July 1923. American
A»iociation of Land»cape Architects. Cambridge. Mass.

Relief Map of the United States.

1. The purpose of this type of relief map is to aid the study of the geographical features of

the nation.

2. Relief maps emphasize rivers, lakes and harbors. They are therefore especially effective

for depicting facilities for water transportation.

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

S "^

>.
a.

-*-

-♦-

« 4)

u
_o

RELIEF AND AERIAL MAPS

173

Salei Managrmrnt. N. Y. C.

SCALE .4

A. A Relief Map Showing How the United States Would Look If Each State Were
on a Level Proportionate to 1937 Federal Tax Collections.

1. The percentage of the total which each state contributes to the federal government is

indicated on each state.

2. Such things as population density, sales density, and wealth density can be presented

in this form.

Federal Power Commission, National Power Survey, "Cost of Distribution of Electrkily," l'J35 SCALE .5

B. Essential Parts of a Complete Electric Power System.

1. In this diagram of the essential parts of a complete electric power system, a hypothetical

land lay-out is used, since the important point is to include the information in the
smallest possible space.

2. An attempt was made in this drawing to give the effect of a "bird's-eye view"

174

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

9. I ?«

t: o

^ ji

w W &£

'E Ql .5

E — -f^

< ^

*-^

-♦-

v»-

*-■

•D

a
&

•*-
•a

•4-

a.
C

K _

.2 ^

Z Q.

RELIEF AND AERIAL MAPS

175

N.-ition;.! Rc^ourrri Board. -State Hlaiiiimi; 1 '7 t -. SCALE .7

Bird's-Eye View of the Passamoquoddy Tidal Power Project in the State of Maine.

1. This is an example of a pictorial map suggesting contours and character of the region

represented.

2. For popular presentation, this combines the qualities of the pictorial and relief types

of map.

176

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

yHwr\j

f AKHIC* ^

Ht^lxi

SOUTH %^

AMERICA /

l(hi

.i^'iiiJ'Jtiiii'i

.Pi/ftillf
.MiitP.ilts

Iiliia|l«ii(a

'JsnlaC'KJ

9'«

SCALE .7

.;^^

SCALE .5

A Map Drawn on Azimu+hal Projection with New York as the Central Point.

RELIEF AND AERIAL MAPS

177

WPA. Division of Social Research. "Landlord and Tenant on the Cotton Plantation." 1936. SCALE .7

A. The Average Cotton Plantation in 1934,

Even the most elementary sketches are more effective than none at all. No attempt is
made in this drawing to make it appear real, yet a clear idea of an average cotton
plantation is obtained.

Reprinted by Permission of the Editors of "Fortune."

B. Diagram of Large Scale Logging Operations.

Here again the drawing is hypothetical. Compare with 173B.

SCALE .6

Chapter 21
CROSSHATCHED AND COLORED MAPS

X he variety of cross hatchings available and the use of several
colors are great aids in making statistical maps. Cross hatched and
colored maps are especially adaptable to the presentation of fre-
quency distribution data. For suggestions relative to the use of
gradations of cross hatchings and colors, see Chapter 44, "Sugges-
tions for Making a Chart."

Not* Connecticut ond Motsoctiustttt
lompltd by townships

WPA. Division of Social Research, 'Trends in Rrlicf Expenditures," 1037. SCALE .7

Distribution of 385 Sample Counties and Townships Represented in the Rural-Town
Relief Study in the United States.

This map accompanied a very extensive study on rural-town relief. The validity of the
conclusions drawn from that study may depend upon its method of sampling.

CROSSHATCHED AND COLORED MAPS

Courtesy of The Pint National Bank of Boston. Mass . August 1Q.18.

SCALE .8

A. Federal Expenditures for 1929 and 1937 Represented as Inconne of Two-Thirds
of the Population of California and as Income of Thirteen States, Respectively,

1. Although federal expenditures have increased vastly since 1929, the presentation of that

information in this form distorts the facts.

2. The basis for coloring the states was according to the income of the population of those

states. Since the income in the United States is not distributed uniformly through-
out the United States, an area comparison is not valid.

3. This would be a true presentation of facts only if the area of each of the states were

in uniform proportion to its wealth.

LEGEND

■ Proporuon of Municipal
area lax delinQuent for
one or more years

□ Balance of Kjiral Land

■i urban area < not covered
by survey i

[S No information

Note Tax aeiiooueni lono
include} DCHn orcxJerty (Win-
oueni (or one a more veors
ano property xM lor laxei
wim tax iifns (liner puciictv
or privBieiv new

New Jersey State Planning Board, "Rural Tax Delinquency in New Jersey," 1938. SCALE .6

B. Tax Delinquent Rural Land in a Section of New Jersey as of January, 1936.

1. There are many kinds and types of cross hatchings and shadings. In this map, three

very simple types are used.

2. In choosing shadings be sure they are distinctive.

180

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

•J

•o

<■

■9

■«->

*»«

—

bfl

•"•

.2
"5

a»

'**

•«^

•o

c
o

•o

«A

•0

r/)

!*-

•V

•

•1

a -o

5 V

G bO
V C

"2 s . u

."t vz op

13 3

o
JO

K ■*-

cB .2?

a: ~

^ -5

o 5.

•5 -O
U3 OB

o ■"

c -a

V —

3 3

CROSSHATCHED AND COLORED MAPS

181

1810

NUMBER OF

PEOPLE PER

SQUARE MILE

E2a Under Z

^2-6

Over 6

U S Department of Agriculture, Bureau of Agricultural Economic*.

Population of a Section of the United States in 1810 and 1920.

1. A comparison of these two maps shows at a glance the sections in which the greatest

growth of population had taken place in a period of 110 years.

2. In view of the 1920 map, see 179A.

182i

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

\5< Bev

National Association of Motor Bus Operators, Washington, D. C, "Bus Facts for 1938."

A. Rafes of Gasoline Tax Per Gallon in the Various States as of January I, 1938.

Compare this method of presenting gasoline tax information with the method used in
195A.

WPA, Division of Social Research,

Dollors
CD Less Ihon20
^20-30
■130-40
40 ond more

'Landlord and Tenant on the Cotton Plantation," 1936.

Per Capita Amount of Obligation Incurred by Each of the States for Ennergency
Relief for Thirty-three Months — January 1933 to Septennber 1935.

The appearance of this map indicates that it was made on a "mechanical" intensity
shading map, a device developed by the graphics section of the Works Progress
Administration. "State pieces" of the desired shading are placed in "state compart-
ments" of an aluminum base map of the United States. These state pieces are
interchangeable, and there are six sets of shadings from which to choose.

The time required to prepare such a density map, photographing included, is about one
hour, compared with eight hours if the shading had been done by a draftsman.

CROSSHATCHED AND COLORED MAPS

183

N Y
New York Hrrald Tribune, September 20, 1938.

A. Racial Minorities in Western Czechoslovakia in 1938.

SCALE .7

The variety of shadings given in this map is particularly interesting, as well as the
arrangement of the legend.

jAPAMtse rftmrogv

The Seattle Star, March 4, 1938.

B. The Division of the Pacific

SCALE .6

This chart shows a good device in enclosing within black and shaded lines the minutely
visible territorial possessions of the United States and Japan respectively.

184

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

National Rriourm Board. "Statf Planning, '" 1935. SCALE .7

Regional Plan for Washington, D. C, and Its Environs.

As a plan for Washington, D. C, and the surrounding country, this map ncccsarily includes
a great deal of information. Its value here lies not as a map for study, but rather
as an example of what can be done on a map in the way of regional planning.

CROSSMATCHED AND COLORED MAPS

185

U-: O

r= H

o E

o •£

2 >

O bfl

T3 «

•^

Si)

-o

rzi

C .= w

<9 "

•i: « 3

C ♦'

It o -jg ii S -

2 — >

1861

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

MOKSt

Povvr... ^

7.000.000 -

4.000.000 -

7.000.000

t.ooo.ooo -

«.OOOjOOO

tooo.ooo -

t.ooo.ooo

•oo.ooo -

1.000.000

tso.ooo -

900.000

1 oo.ooo -

iso.ooo

50.000 -

100,000

LESS THAN

9AO0

SCALE .7
Brinton, "Graphic Methods," McGraw-Hill Book Co., Inc., New York City, 1914.

1. This is an example of the contrasts in shading made possible by the Ben Day me-

chanical processes of engraving. Nine contrasting shades increasing in darkness are
used here with absolute distinctness. The small numbers in the circles are used to
identify the shadings.

2. The illustration below presents the same information in color.

HO»«f
7.000.000 -

.owr« \

t.oooooo'

4.ooo,eoo —

7.000,0

t.ooo.ooo —

4.000^000

t.000.000 -

1.000.000

Mo.oeo -

i.ooeooo

tM.ooo -

»ooooo

IC^OOO -

ISAOM

•o.oeo -

•eoioo*

LtM THAN

».—•

Potential Water Power in the Different States of the United States, as Estimated
in 1914.

187

Chapter 22
DOT AND PIN MAPS

ne well known use of dot and pin maps is to present geo-
graphic distribution data. In this form, the dots or pins represent
numerical values and effectively show geographic location. The
placing of the dots is an important item. If the exact geographic
distribution of the data is known, the placing of the dots is no
problem. However, when the data is in the form of general geo-
graphic distribution, such as data for an entire state, the dots are
distributed throughout the whole state although one section may
have contributed the total amount.

Each dot

represents

one plantation

WPA, Diviaion of Social Rrscarch, "Landlord and Tenant on the Cotton Plantation," 1936.

Distribution of the Plantations Which Were Enumerated in the Study of the Cotton
Plantation Made by the Works Progress Administration.

When the number of samples is small, the location of each may be shown on a map as was
done here. Compare with 178.

188

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

WPA. National Rrtearch Project, "ChanRcs in Technology and Lalx)r Requirements in Crop Production —
Potatoes," 1938. SCALE .8

A. Potatoes Produced for Sale in the United States in 1929.

1. In a dot map it is important to know whether the dot has been placed in its exact

geographical position or whether the dots are distributed within a county or state
irrespective of the exact location.

2. In this case, there is little doubt but that the dots were placed where the potatoes were

produced.

WPA. Division of Social Research. 'Rural Youth on Relief." 1037.

SCALE 8

B. Rural Rehabilitation Cases Receiving Advances of Capital or Goods in the
United States in 1935.

1. Note the square of dots in the state of South Dakota, as well as in other states. This

indicates that the distribution of the dots was by counties; that is, statistics for each
county were secured and the dots were distributed in each county irrespective of
the exact geographical location.

2. Compare with A above.

DOT AND PIN MAPS

189

Eoch dot represents $ 1,000 or fraction ttiereof

WPA. Divition of Social Rctfarch, "Landlord and Tenant on the Cotton Plantation," 1936.

Amount of Emergency Crop and Feed Loans Extended by the Farm Credit Admin-
istration, by Counties in the United States in 1932 and 1933.

1. The distribution of the dots in this chart is definitely by counties.

2. The shift from the Dakotas in the one year period is quite pronounced.

190

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

Sidewalk

-f

PRIVj

Private
driveway

A. Graphic Distribution of Position
at the Time of the Accident of
50 Pedestrians Who Were Hit
by Automobiles in Hartford,
Connecticut, During the First
Six Months of 1927.

This chart should be read as follows: in
Hartford, Connecticut, during the
first six months of 1927, 30 per-
sons were hit by automobiles at
street intersections, 17 were hit
while crossing the street in the
middle of the block, and 3 were
hit by cars coming out of private
driveways.

National Automobile Chamber of Commerce,
1927. SCALE .7

Toronto Infliistri.il Commission. "Canada's National Market." 10.T8.

SCALE .6

B. Concentration of Buying Power of Canada's National Market Within a Radius
of 100 Miles of Toronto.

1. Although no key accompanied this chart, according to another map in the same pam-

phlet, the dots represent population. The numerical value of each dot was not
given.

2. The important feature about this map is the use of color to emphasize the circle around

Toronto.

DOT AND PIN MAPS

191

U. S. Department of Af(riculturr. Bureau of Aftricultural Economics.

Number of Slaves In the United States In 1790 and In I860.

SCALE 8

1. These two maps are the first and last of a group of six. Space does not allow all six

to be shown here.

2. The use of these two maps in a history lesson would clarify and simplify the slave

problem of 1860. This material in tabulated or verbal form would be formidable.

3. Only a section of each map is reproduced here.

192

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

Brll Telephone Laboratories. Inc., New York City.

A. Exhibit of the Bell System at the New York World's Fair, 1939.

Brinton, "Graphic Mclhodi," McGraw-Hill, 1014.

B. Residence of the Men of the Class of 1907, Harvard University, Six Years After
Graduation. The Bead Wire for Boston Includes All Men Living Within Twen-
ty-five miles of the City Hall.

1. Rather than have a pin for each individual stuck in the map around the city in which

he Hved, a bead was put on a wire for each person in the same city.

2. Every tenth bead on a wire is white to aid in counting the beads.

DOT AND PIN MAPS

193

Series 1
500 I

Senes
600 I

®0

Seri«9|
5400

Series I
5000

The M o • I Kor < ionftrnlril
C'.onininn M<c Map* <ir rliiiriK
iiwit I* llilK mikI holriliiR KT- It fllH>ti III Ihi
oiihcrlrul lif:nl rliory or miii

|iln. roril In I'lnrr II niiinul roiiic ii\:\n

iim' Ihln |>lM. olT.

<ilaiiii Spot l-'nunirl Sp<ii

rin I hi' npoi or "KliiK I'lii "

■JlKil In rniim-

liciiil III Itic |ilii rli'fl

r li I N
mill llir iilii.'M
•|K>I |>ln |ilii>-
iiiRniiili nil a
rItiK.

Sorie si Special
5000 Workings

Knamrl Spot*
mil 1(0 ftir-
II I K h r (I hm n
I) A H H or
iltoss If <|i-
iilrrcl.

5eries4500

5ene3.,,.^55G Q

(iU Series 650

II.

oil WrII Pin. Shii|>o
rr»'nilil<-» oil woll ilrr-
rlrk ("iiii Im' Niiiipllril
wllh iwiHcolort'd lioiid

Map RInft. ('olori-<l
rilliilolil rlMK for sllii-
pliie ovrr hi-:iil of pin
lo Indlciilr aititllloii;il
f:ict.

PIni and Deads

Series I
6300

Series |
6100 I

Dnn

Series |
6400 I

6200

Trlanitular or Square Head |ilns arc iiso<l whorp Ihc IT.
rolorK do no! furnish siifflrlcnt varloly. They also help riilor-
bllnd users These plus show distlnollve shaiKSs when
pholoKraphed whereas sonic colors pholoRraph the same.

°ooo

BF.An.S are used lo show nrrumiilallun al
one iiolni. Nine eusiomern In or.e clly would
he Hhown as In Illustrations A or ('. Heads
are also used with the |ilns to show two fnels
at one iwilnt, as In the cut at the left. The
color of the heads shows one type of fact and
the color of the pin another. Thus;

Heads

Hed Machine No. I

(ireen Machine No. 2

Yellow Machine No. 3

Pins

Red Consumer

C'.rccn Retailer

Hlue Jobt>er

A red pin and n red bead mean that a No 1
machine was sold to a customer, etc. Where
several cuctomers are In one town or city
hulldlne. alternate lar>;e and small heads are
|ille<l on a lont; |iln. Sec Illustration (li).

Serlies
34.150

Glass Head Pins

Series
3900
Celluloid Tacki

Pins and Tacks with Writinit Surface. Rough surface claits head pins and roii(?h surface celluloid
lacks are convenient because you can write data on them with pencil or with India Ink. Pencil can be erased with
ordinary erasers and Ink washed off with water and a little soap, so that pins can be iLsed acaln and again.

Educatiotial Exhibition Co., Providence, Rhode Island.

Map Marking Devices.

1. A very effective method of using beads is to string them either on a long pin or on a

drill rod of small diameter, and then place them upright on a map. See 192B. In
selecting drill rods, the largest size that will go through the hole of the bead should
be chosen. Beads for this purpose may be obtained at any variety store.

2. Beads on pins have been used very effectively on a map showing intended civic improve-

ments. Red beads indicated assessed valuations on buildings, while green repre-
sented assessed valuations on land. Each bead represented a certain number of
dollars and each pin represented an individual property. The wide adaptability
of this material is evident.

■

194

Chapter 23
MAPS WITH CIRCLES AND SECTOR CHARTS

THE chief advantage of placing circles and sector charts on maps
is that the geographic location of the information is given. The
general rules for sector charts in Chapter 9 may be followed here
also.

1. A white line separating overlapping circles prevents any con-
fusion.

2. Actual amounts and percentages for each geographic division
should be given.

25,000

50,000

100,000

—

liJ

»-
bJ

THOUSANDS

200,000
350,000
500.000

/ /^ ^ \

750.000

1.000.000

1 /^ ^ ^

2,000,000

\\ ( (^ ^ ) //

3,000,000

^^^^^ ^iJ^

4,000,000

5,000,000

DIAMETER

Two Mefhods of Making a Scale to Indicate What the Area of a Circle Represents
by Measuring Its Dianneter.

Since it is difficult to determine the relative areas of circles, a very clear and concise scale
should be given. The two methods above give the measurement of the diameters
which would correspond to given area representations.

MAPS WITH CIRCLES AND SECTOR CHARTS

195

Each diac rapi

American Petroleum Institute, N. Y. C , "Petroleum Facts and Figures," 1937.

A. Gasoline Tax Rates in the United States as of Novennber I, 1937.

SCALE .7

Compare this as a method of presenting gasoline tax information with the method shown
in 182A.

IIMiatt. aao aooi pn

Nofs tnd pork
\C»iil: ctlvt
' b**/. and vaa/
-SAaap. /ani6«,
snd wool

U. S. Department of Agriculture. Bureau of Agricultural Economics.

SCALE .5

B. The Average Cash Income Received fronn Meat Aninnals. Meat, and Wool Sold
by Farmers in the United States in the Period from 1929 to 1933.

Two sets of data arc presented on this map. The percentage comparison of the sectors
shows the distribution of cash income among the three categories at the lower left.
The areas of the circles show the amount of cash income.

196

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

•2

5 *^

■0

**-

•*-

»♦-

]q.

•j

.£

c
o

I/)

>
an

•0

-D

-♦-

0£

—1

♦^

•"-

**^

■0
T3

—

u
3

*♦-

■•-

•0

^rt

-♦-

MAPS WITH CIRCLES AND SECTOR CHARTS

197

Migration From State COLORADO

1*10

Migration To State

1910

KANSAS

NEW MEXICO

I ILLINOIS
2UI530imi
lOHIO
4 INDIANA

WPA, Divition of Social Rtiearch, "The People of the Drought State*." March 193 7.

Study of Migration To and From Four Drought States, Based on Place of Residence
in 1910.

1. The four maps on the left show the states to which native white migrants have gone, and

the four maps on the right show the states from which residents of the four states in
1910 have come.

2. Although a general idea of the amount of migration to and from these four states is

obtained by glancing at the maps, to secure the actual amount would be quite a task.

198

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

/■•■ -\.'r^:

■#::;-^i.>^'-->

•^...--^

'1 .* ;

. ::^ ,

ncreate of to 30y,

?^ y Increase of 30% or More
■rr\ POPULATION SCALE

National Rciourcri Committcp. "Our Citift." June 103 7.

SCALE .7

Urban Places in the United States Which Have Had an Increase of to 30% and
of 30% or More in Population from 1920-1930.

A section only of the original map is shown to illustrate the method of putting a white
border around black circles which necessarily fall on top of each other.

MAPS W

ND SECTOR CHARTS

1Q9

♦^

_»

r")

»-

Z
X

<
o

o
o

i?^'

-Rj-*.'

.,.X

y 1

^''-

v.* »

LL C

2 «

C/3 S

•^ ID

V ? a

c "

£ —

ce -i:

c .2 "5 o

M *' p O

E _

U .£ aj -

2 c

2 - c4

200

Chapter 24
MAPS WITH BAR CHARTS

ars superimposed on a map allow a great many comparisons
not possible with one cross hatched map. Time-series bars may
be placed on a map. A comparison of several items rather than
the presentation of just one item may be obtained. The practices
commended in the chapters on bar charts, pages 92-152, should
be adhered to when bars are placed on a map.

"The Federal Chart Book," Prepared by the Central Statistical Board and National Resources Committee,
January 1938. SCALE .7

Geographical Shift in Cof+on Manufacturing in the United States from 1923 to 1937.

1. Bar charts may be used as effectively as sector charts in presenting information for

geographical divisions.

2. Note the method of outlining in black the section of the United States to which specific

groups of bars refer.

3. See 93 A 4.

MAPS WITH BAR CHARTS

201

"The Frdrral Chart Book," Prepared by the Central Statistical Board and National Resources Committee.
January 1938. SCALE .7

A. Population and Area of the United States by Regions in 1900, 1930, and 1935.

1. When the United States is divided in this way, the horizontal hars seem to fit into the

spaces very well.

2. See 93 A 4.

U. S. Department of Agriculture, Bureau of Agricultural Economics

SCALE .5

Percentage of All Farmers Buying Cooperatively in the Various States in 1919,
1924. and 1929.

1. All the various types of charts shown in the bar chart section are applicable to maps.

2. When it it impossible to put the bars on top of the state, such as is the case with Rhode

Island and New Jersey, arrows connecting the bars with the state aid in reading the
chart. Compare with 202A.

202

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

U. S. Department of Agriculture, Bureau of Agricultural Economics. SCALE .4

A. Average Sales Per Farm Through Cooperative Associations for Each of the
United States in 1919. 1924, and 1929.

1. While this same material could be presented in a series of groupings with a common

horizontal base, superimposing the bars upon a map not only condenses the
material but also gives the geographical distribution.

2. Note the use of arrows to connect tht bars with the states. Compare with 2 IB.

■ R«ilro>d5

I Rapid Transit

■ Trollei^kWhicIn

NuMeta or PensoMs

n )\

ikri:-

i-fl-i*

Regional Plan Attociation. Inc., N. Y. C. "Information Bulletin No. 11," Jan. 30. 1933. SCALE .6

B. The Number of Persons Crossing 59th Street South Bound in New York City, by
Railroads, Rapid Transit, Trolleys, and Vehicles for a Typical Business Day in
1932— (24-hour Period).

A traffic study of a particular street is perhaps best presented in this way rather than as
a flow map with the width of the lines proportional to the traffic.

MAPS WITH BAR CHARTS

203

LEGEM D

1924 Persons
^m 1932 Persons

TOTALS

1934 -2.217,353
1932 - 2.709430

556 556 16.1%

1.137.755-513%

1,384.555-51.1%

Regional Plan Aatociation, Inc.. N. Y. C, "Information Bulletin No. 11," Jan. 30, 1933.

Number of Persons Entering the Borough of Manhattan, New York City, During 24
Hours on a Typical Business Day in 1932 and in \91A.

1. The inclusion of numerical values and percentages in this map is particularly good.

2. Compare with 22 7.

204

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

EXPLANATION OF MILITARY HISTORY SFRIES

Bntrsh and Brftnh-Coionul forcn m Cokmal
W*n, UnKed SUtn lorcn x\ RmoMnnary,
1812. ind Mexiun Htn. Teuns m Tojn
Cimpaicns. 3nd Federals m On4 War

Frmdi and S(Mnali torctt « Cotonal Man;
Bntnii m RawlMtenan and 1112 Wrni.
Miucam n MaxcM Vnr and 1mm tei-
pH^; Coniadirato m Civd Wv.

Battta ...__..„_

■X

Drawn Battle

•

FHNnt oaup«d

•

F>oint occupied and later abandoned

Pouit taken against resistance

Unsuccessful ste(e

F^nt taken after ittft

■,..-

Blockade

%,,

H fl

Headquarters

HO.

rtO

Winter quarters

«»

Surrender

Evacuation

P (Starting point of military movement con- -^
~tJ I tinued Ifom preceding map of a series li

s Stege 5

«^^.. Approximate route. ma|or advance ^^^^

, Approximate route, minor advance ,

__«^ Approximate route, ma|or retirement .*»»•

Approximate route, minor retirement .^_

Dales ot tjatlles. etc . are shown in the colof of the suaesslul force, dates on which unsuccessful
siege operations tKgan m color of tiesieging torce and on which the siege was raised in color of
besieged tofce: dates o( evacuations m color of enemy of evacuating force.

Symtjols tor contemporary oi closely consecutive operations are connected.

for eiample. ^^ might show a siege initiated and abandoned by the United States force

whose line of march is indicated by the blue line Symbols representing earlier routes are broken
so as to appear to pass beneath those representing routes or other operations ol later date Successive
occupations, sieges etc . ol the same place are shown by concentric circles or semicircles, the inner
ones representing operations of earlier date For example

might snow place ili at first held by United Slates force. (21 later taken after siege by enemy
lofce B and i3i subsequently reoccupied by United States force "A"

Route symbols m general show approximate rather than precise routes and are sometimes arbitrarily
made to cross one another m order more graphically to bring out the sequence ot events

Charica O. PauUin. "Atlas of the Historical Geography of the United States," Carnegie Institute of Wash-
ington and American Geographical Society of New York, 1932.

Legend for the Two Maps on Page 2 5.

This legsnd was used for a series of military history maps, but it applies here only to the

two following maps on the Civil War.
The symbols of the original were in red and blue.

MAPS WITH BAR CHARTS

205

r^J

N' ifl64 1865

•M«<Mrl<aal y*'

JLJ).

Charlr« O. Paullin. "Atla* of the Hittorical Geography of the United States," CarncKie Institute of Wash-
ington and American Geographical Society of New York, 1932. SCALE .5

Two Historical Maps Showing the Progress of the Civil War from 1863 Through 1865
and a Resume of the Entire War.

The bars and war lines in the originals of these two maps were in red and blue.

206

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

•o

c
c

CD
(J

s
a
E

M
C

8
n

c
a

c
o

ii Ji

o
a.

E —

a A

■= E

•c -c

if .2 ^

2 c

S 6

t: T3

E s

^ H

MAPS WITH BAR CHARTS

207

Map of Great Britain's Merchant Marine at the New York World's Fair, 1939.

1. The models of the ships represent Great Britain's merchant marine.

2. The map and models are not built to the same scale.

In the Arctic Exploration Building of the U.S.S.R. at the New
York World's Fair, 1939, there is an exhibit in which the whole
Arctic region at the center of a hemispherical dome is painted with
luminous paint. As ultra-violet lights go on and off in short cycles,
the paint shows up routes of recent exploration.

mir

.gfaJMIiift&i^*

208

Chapter 25
MAPS WITH CURVE CHARTS

THE three statistical maps in this chapter, all of which deal with
precipitation, demonstrate the value of showing the location
of data for geographic regions. While other maps may show that
there was rainfall, these maps show the actual amount of precipa-
tation. See "Flow Maps," pages 216-230. Although curve charts
have not been discussed up to this point, maps with curve charts
are included here in order to keep the map section intact.

> -4 3 ^J.

^•Ht^^K^v"^!.:

LEGEND

Monthly Runoff for Maximum Year

Average Monthly Runoff for Period of
Record

Monthly Runoff for Minimum Year

Outline of Drainage Area tributary to
station for which hydrograph is
shown.

Ordinates show mean annual discharge for
maximum year, period of record, and mini-
mum year, respectively, in cubic feet per
second per square mile.

National Rfsoiirrcs Board, "Rci>ort of thr Watfr PlanninR Committee, Part III," 1034.

Characteristics of Runoff from Typical Drainage Areas in the United States.
Only a section of the original map is shown.

MAPS WITH CURVE CHARTS

209

0- 0)

o O

u «

0. .ii
. Q.

^ §

a O

to s

w 1-

2 5!

K <

_ a»

S .E

2 >

I I

210

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

T-^'"

r i

Z : I ^- —

4 s . '

t 5' ^

j: 1 f

\ ' 1

"^^ r, i

^ : .

S »'!

^-.-1......

J. ^^■

i-i —

i _;izzi

1 3

o
U

-o
o

I ^

o C

^ o

t ^

I .2

„ 3

O ^

Chapter 26 '''* ^"'"^ '*'°'''''' "■''

I93Q.

MAPS WITH SYMBOLS

QUANTITATIVE material may be presented in the form of
symbols by increasing the number of symbols as in "Pic-
torial Unit Bar Charts" on pages 121-131. A variation in the type
of symbol may also indicate a quantitative difference.

WPA, Divbioa of Social Rrtcarch. "The Micratory-Catual Worker," 1Q37.

SCALE .8

State of Principal Employment for 100 Migratory-Casual Workers in 1933 and 1934
in the United States.

1. From this map, it can be seen that certain states ofTer relatively more casual employ-

ment to the migratory worker than others.

2. Note the relationship between this map and 230.

212

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

•a/';

...lill"

fn'^

«li* '1)1,1'

A MJUOUC ROUC . N Ht •

CM4»L0TTt KC ,

"Ml

iiiiiiiiii,

"Mil

"llli ,

\, J

''"•Ill

^^ ,

ll '^Ill>""'>llllllll,, I

WPA. E>ivision of Social Research. "Urban Workers on Relief," 1936. SCALE .7

A. Principal Occupations in Selected Cities of the United States in 1936.

No quantitative data is presented in this map. It is merely a device to show the principal
occupations in certain cities of the United States.

.'X^-^'"'

Tropic of

C|c;

^^■^^ Hawaiian Islands

'*-,. r-al Standard t,-

I Equator \ ^ «> o

Endcrbury and
Canton Islands

E in CO •<* E „
injsij — — Q.^o ^

"^r,

^s ^

Beginning of total V- ^ • /2)^ ^ ./,,7^ / (^ (Q) (^ ^^ ^ End ofsjotal
Eclipse at Sunrise I- ► .. ' ■■ • '^ -iu- Eclipse at Sunset

- -^ \^. - I . Tropic of £^P£^'£2r- L-

AUSTR>LIA

New Zea

•SO

^--jfrnir of P^/T.r-^^

^<^/>

SOU/TH
AMERICA

<^J«^N

SCALE .6

The National Geographic Society. Washington. D. C. 1937.

B. Map of the Eclipse of the Sun June 9th and 8th. 1937.

By the use of symbols, a time-analysis of the eclipse of the sun is made. The "date line"
showing the change from Wednesday to Tuesday is particularly interesting.

MAPS WITH SYMBOLS

National Rrtourcr* Board, "State Planning." 193S. SCALE .7

Metallic Ores and Rare Minerals in Maine, August 1934.

The purpose of this symbol map is to show the geographic location of metallic ores and rare
minerals in Maine. No quantitative data is presented.

214

SSAPHfe^PSEgffiWATiw^

SCALE .8

National Rrtourcrt Board, "Statr Planning," 1935.

Industrial Distribution in the State of New Hampshire in 1932.

By increasing the size of the symbol, a quantitative as well as a location analysis is made.

215

Aekansas/T^nnessm.

\\\ \

\ ' AUADAAM< '

SCALE .6

American Iron and Stcrl Inititute, N. Y. C, 1937.

A. Steel Ingot and Finished Steel Capacity of the United States in 1937.

This combination of circles and squares gives a concise statement of two sets of data: steel
ingot capacity and finished steel capacity in the United States. A section only of
the original map is shown.

Alcmandcr Hamilton Institutr, Bureau of Butinesi Conditiont, "Butineti Conditions Weekly," July 33. 1938.

SCALE .5

B. Map of Credit and Sales Conditions in the United States in July 1938.

Since interest is chiefly in the "active-and-up" cities, the choice of a solid black symbol
to represent them was a logical one.

216

Chapter 27
FLOW MAPS

Jflow maps may be used to show both qualitative and quantita-
tive flow of goods, persons, automobiles, etc. When a flow map
is used to indicate the number of persons or automobiles on streets
and highways, it is generally called a traffic map.

See Cosmographs in "Flow
Charts" on pages 73-80. cy^ r'

i^*^^^

J^-./Cf"^

1 V-^^^t^^^-— B^!^

fn^

~M^^

V^l

National Resources Board. "Report of Water
Planning Committee, Part III," 1934.

SCALE .8

A. Generalized Spring and Autumn
Stornn Paths in the United
States.

1. Although spring and autumn storms

may not always follow these paths,
it is more than likely that they
will.

2. The use of a flow map to show the

path of a storm is not an uncom-
mon one.

3. The lines here show the center path

and the outlying borders. For com-
parison see 216B and 218.

American Mutual Liability Insurance Co., Bos-
ton, Mass., "Watch," 1939. SCALE .6

B. A Map of Hurricanes Which Have
Occurred Between September
16 and 30 During the Last Fifty
Years in the Eastern Part of the
United States.

1. During the half-century ten hurricanes

have struck inland in the latter
half of September.

2. Hurricanes usually originate off the

northern coast of South America,
move west from Africa, and travel
toward the West Indies and Flor-
ida, moving about 300 miles per
day.

3. The hurricane of 1938 moved 750 miles

in 12 hours from Cape Hatteras,
North Carolina, to Burlington,
Vermont.

FLOW MAPS

217

National Rftourcct Board. "Rfport of the Water Planning Committee, Part III," 1934. SCALE .8

A. Prevailing Winds in January and in July in the United States.

1. Arrows to show the course of the wind on a weather map are often seen in daily weather

repKJrts.

2. These two maps shows the prevailing winds for two months in the year.

vmoiNiA

National Re«ourcet Board, "State Planning," 193S.

B. Origin and Ports of Destination of Cargo Shipments of Bituminous Coal from
the Great Lakes in the United States in 1932.

The tonnage of the various shipments of coal is given at the end of each line.

218

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

American Telephone and Tflfgraph Company, N. Y. C. SCALE .6

Map Showing Where the Hurricane of I9?8 Hit Hardest in the United States.

This map of the path of the 1938 hurricane appeared in an advertisement of the Bell
Telephone. Compare with 216B.

FLOW MAPS

219

O
O

•
«

i*>

-D

•0

-D —

•c.E

•- e

3 ID

u
CB

4»-

CT>

<J ^

<<^

v»

c «

' 1_

E
"o

1_ *

5 M

E >•

*-•

0-5

■3

.E JS

c
c

f c

»-

«->

*«--j;

a
00

3 «

t- u

u::

l<5

3
O

« «

t—

.2
•
2

220

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

National Rrsourcrs Board. "State Planning," 193S. SCALE .5

A. Migration Into and fronn North Dakota for the Period from 1920 to 1930.

1. In the original of this map, the migration from North Dakota was indicated in red ink.

2. The two groups of figures in each state give the inflow and outflow. The top figure

represents the outflow to North Dakota, the bottom figure the inflow from North
Dakota.

3. While there is no scale to give the exact proportion of the width of the lines to the

number of people, the width of the lines gives some indication ot this.

Amrrican Petroleum Institute. N. Y. C, •Petroleum Factt and Figurei," 193 7. SCALE .8

B. Directional Flow Map of Crude Oil and Gasoline Pipe Lines in the United States
in 1936.

There is no quantity representation in this map. It is purely a directional flow.

FLOW MAPS

•0

?» E

^ 9.

f f

> 3

M V C

2 ^ i

I « «

O '-' O

I " ^

•i ® T3

» ^

M- ^ C

3 •£
S :h

a *

222

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

National Re«ourc«i Board, "State Planning," 1935.

SCALE 7

Average Daily Traffic on Michigan Trunk Line Highways Based on the Years 1930
and 1931.

1. The legend for this traffic map might have been better if a scale for the widths of

line had been given.

2. The inclusion of the names of the cities is an advantage.

FLOW MAPS

223

Jamct R. Bibbint and Bion J. Arnold, "Our National Transportation System," Proceedings of New York
Railroad Club, April 1923.

Flow Diagram Showing the Rush Hour Passenger Traffic Outbound fromi One-Mile
Zone on the Surface Lines in Chicago.

Because this was reproduced from a photostat, much of the detail is lost. The important
feature, the use of circles to show the mile zones, is effectively shown even in this
reduced scale.

224

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

J. R. Bibbint, and Bion J. Arnold, "Our National Transportation System," Proceedings of New Yoric
Railroad Club. April 1923. SCALE .6

B. Suburban Passenger Rush Hour

Car Movement to and from

Chicago Terminals from 5 to
6 p.m.

Comparison of the routes taken by two groups of passengers is made in these two traffic
maps.

A. Main Line Passenger Rush Hour

Car Movement to and from

Chicago Terminals from 7 to
8 a.m.

Each line represents 10 nrullion dollars' worth of petroleum products

American Petroleum Institute, N. Y. C, "Petroleum Facts and Figures," 1937.

C. Petroleum in United States Export Trade in 1936.

1. The representation of volume in this map is correct in that the general idea that Europe

receives most of the petroleum products of the United States is obtained.

2. As a method of graphic presentation it is incorrect in that two lines, or 20 million dollars,

is visually about three times as wide as one line, or 10 million dollars. The error is
greater when there are just a few lines.

FLOW MAPS

225

Q.
O

2 o

> P

o a o

H H

<-!«/) « (M

226

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

E <^

I »

< a>

m -^

o»

«J

tT>

^—

-a

^»

,„

•o ■;: ■;;

e E

H H

D ^ ^

FLOW MAPS

227

North Jersey Transit Commisiion, "Summary of 1926 Report, Rapid Transit for Northern New Jersey,"
January IS. 1926.

Diagram Showing Routing and Density of New Jersey Passenger Traffic to and in
New York City in 1924.

1. A great many people commute to New York City from New Jersey. Few persons

realize the number. Although this is a 1924 analysis, a later study has not
superseded it.

2. Note again 203.

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

►5 o

•>

u
O

V
w
BO

•a

c
o

•V

c
11

£>

— ^

•n

3
O

«J

>»-

•0

c
o

£8

•V

-C

O
en

c
o

c
0)

bfi

«>

•^

*-4

•-»-

•a

—1

•— >
u

V
in

be
c

w«

2 t

o c

« .5

B '^ -2 ti

FLOW MAPS

229

UMITOrttMC

uMTT ormc

LEGEND

— tS MMUn MWt ■WITT. -«UT5lOt LHWT OT ]

^ SOiMUTtzoMC-ftHAjQ-ovniOC LMwr or]

o«an t»— W T anc mu. Odnnca rwM sr*n mouoc.

Prom "A Report on the Street Traffic Control Problem of the City of Boston" Prepared under the Direc-
tion of the Mayor'* Street Traffic Advisory Board by Albert Russel Erskine Bureau of Harvard
Uaiveisity, 1928.

Time Zones on Seventeen Highway Routes to and from Corner Parle and Trennont
Streets in Boston During the Morning and Evening Rush Hours from June to
September 1927.

While most of the traffic maps give the amount of traffic, this map gives the length of time
it takes to get into Boston from outlying districts.

230

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

— JZ

u M- 3

>«

IXI

o»

•0

►-

•<f

o»

O
U

-♦-

231

Chapter 28
CONTOUR MAPS

_ ontour maps may be used to show lines of erosion, precipita-
tion, climatic conditions, as well as the topography of the land.
Gradations of shading and cross hatching may be used on contour
maps to differentiate. For suggestions relative to the arrangement
of shadings, see "Suggestions for Making a Chart," pages 367-380.

GENERAL REFERENCES

Raisz, Erwin, General Cartography, McGraw-Hill Book Co.,
Inc., New York City, 1938

Robert Waril. Cliiiiatts of tht Umtrcl States. " Ginn & Co., Boston and Nrw York, I'liS.

Average Annual Number of Rainy Days in the United States.

1. While the contour map is best known for its use in uivinn the topography of land, it may

also be used to show preci(>itation. temperatures, and erosion.

2. Since no key for the shadinus was nivin with this map. it is rather ditlicult to read

accurately.

232

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

Robert Ward. "Climates of the United States," Ginn St Co.. Boston and New York, 1925.

A. Average Annual Minimum Temperatures in the United States.

1. Because "contour" means "outline," lines may be used to outline the major temperature

sections of the United States.

2. Comparison with a topographic map would reveal no doubt, a relation between the

elevation of the land and the temperature.

if/mcM/

JEK

ieh:

The New York Timei, March 19, 1939. SCALE .6

B. Weather Map of the United States at 7:30 p.m. E.S.T. March 18. 1939.

1. The reports on this map arc for exactly the same time; that is, although it was 7:30 p.m.

Eastern standard time, it was several hours earlier by the clock on the Pacific Coast.

2. Compare this method of indicating rain with the method shown in 234A.

CONTOUR MAPS

233

National Resources Board. "State PlannioK." 1035.

A. Topographic Map of Colorado, Showing Contour Lines af Intervals of 2000
Feet.

The combination of a topographic map and a profile section makes this a valuable map.

MacElwee 8i Crandall. Inc.. N Y C.

SCALE .4

B. Connparative Dates on Which the Chance of Killing Frost Falls to Ten Per Cent
in the Spring in the United States.

234

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

ARROWS INOlCtrE WIND DIRECTION

OIC*TE PREClPITATlPH

—2 :us£^

National Resources Board, "Rejxjrt of Water Planning Committee Part III," 1934.

A. Weather Map for the United States at 8:00 a.m., February 2. 1934.

1. Weather reports rather than weather maps are most often consulted in daily newspapers.

However, for an over-all view of the United States, this type of weather map is
good.

2. Note particularly the use of shaded areas to indicate rain.

□ Erosion unimpo'toni,
•icept locolly

a Moderate sheei and gully erosion,
serious locoliy
k/)Si qii wind erosion,
tlUmode'Oie sheel ond gully erosion

■ Moderate to severe wind erosion,
some gullying locally
■ Moderate lo severe erosion includes
mesas, mountains, canyons ond bodlonds

^M Severe sheet and gully erosion
WPA, Division of Social Research. "Landlord and Tenant on the Cotton Plantation," 1936.

B. General Distribution of Erosion in the United States in 1936.

This map reveals that the South suffered as much from soil erosion as the mid-West.

CONTOUR MAPS

235

Original
forest regions

V ^ t>RE5ENT rORC3T ARl

10^^ 100 iOO S00MIH3

merci
timber

Warren H. ManninR. "A National Plan Study Brief." Special Supplement to Landscape Architecture,
July \m3, American Association of Landscape Architects. Cambridge. Mass.

Original and Present Forest Areas In the United States.

Before and after comparisons arc always interesting. These two maps tell the story of the
vanishing forest.

236

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

National Reiourcps Board, "State Planning." 1Q35. SCALE .7

Average Annual Precipitation in the State of Utah.

Since a key to the shadings is given in this map, it is much easier to read than 231.

CONTOUR MAPS

1870 1910

237

1890

1930

LEGEND

INHABITANTS PER SOUARC MILE

I I FEWER THAN 2 ^^ 2-5 JH 6 - 17 Q IS - 44 ((45-89

90 AND MORE

WPA, Division of Social Rrsrarrh, "The People of the DrouEht States." March 1037.

Density of Population in the Drought Area in the United States for the Years 1870,
1890. 1910, and 1930.

While the lines for 1870 and 1890 seem to follow natural contours, the lines for 1910 and
1930 are definitely county lines.

238

Chapter 29
DISTORTED MAPS

IN A distorted map, geographic location of data is maintained by-
making the area of states, countries, etc., proportional to the
quantitative data.

Distorted maps are sorhetimes called proportional maps.

GENERAL REFERENCES

Raisz, Erwin, General Cartography, McGraw-Hill Book Co.,
Inc., New York City, 1938

Litpr.iry Diurst. A|)ril 23, 1021.

Relative Size of Each of the United States If Based on Electrical Energy Sold for
Light and Power in 1921,

The theory beliind the construction of a distorted map is to represent the area of each
state as proportional in size to some value other than land area. Thus the geo-
Kraphical position of tlie state is maintained, and the new area values can be com-
pared.

DISTORTED MAPS

2A^)

SWEDEN NORWAY

Electrical Worki. January 6, 1Q23.

SCALE .7

A. Comparative Size of Leading Nations If Area Is Based on Total Amount of
Electrical Energy Consumed.

The form of this comparison map eliminates the greatest fault of the distorted map: that is,
changing the shape of the country, or state.

The Dartnell Corp.. ChicaKO. Ill . 1031. SCALE .4

B. The United States With the Area of the States Proportional to the Urban Population
of 1930.

This map represents a popular form of distorted map.

240

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

Power Plant Engineering, New York City, 1933.

A. Horsepower Map of the United States in 1933 With the Area of Each State
Drawn Proportional to the Amount of Horsepower Installed in the State.

Horsepower is one of many things which a distorted map may present.

'Mour\t«in Wost North Ewt North
4* $621/ Central C«nti»l

7.2^^ »3.Z78 31 7-».^ $14.383

Weat South East South

Central Central

4 2'. $1914 3 3*. $1,496

Buiine»» Week, June 12, 1937, New York City. SCALE .6

B. The United States With the Areas of the States Proportional to Their Manufac-
turing Output in 1935.

1. Rather than attempt to maintain a semblance of the map of the United States, this map

presents all the states in rectangular form. In so doing, it seems to lose some of
its attractiveness as a distorted map.

2. The inclusion of the percentages for each state and for each section as demonstrated

should be encouraged.

DISTORTED MAPS

241

niAL 0» L(y>N) AND ONANT^ iM ThC UNiTIO MIkTtS. (94. 926. 7*3

9yX)X TO H StATeS A* SMOWN OtlOW

H*^ tMAN IT. TO fACM O^OTMCa ^TATCS

t' B^K-.

Z 2 ot)

r *

< o

OKCG

T
E
X
A

MINN.

IOWA

MISSOURI

I Ml

1411,460

«1K

MICHIGAN

ll.730.4S6

ILL-

l.T»»

NEW YORK

• r? J2.e04

OHIO

3.B4t
12.676.247

NEBRASKA

33.77y.

131,919.572

KAN.

I 0'<'-*>

\7.7ir.

(1^303.300

KglklTUeWv^

TCNNCSSK

7.45V. ♦ 7,044.112

MISS.

ALABAWA
2.6?*/. ♦2.481 .7 2 b

,MJ

6A , _

VIRGINIA

I 7»%
«l.»kO.034

NORTH
CAROLINA

* 3.743.300

SOUTH
CAROUNA

9. 36'/.
♦ 8.852.000

FLORIDA

U0% il.i>«.<l5

Public Utilities Fortnightly, February 3, 1938, Washington, D. C.

How Each State Shared in PWA Allotments for Non-Federal Power Projects as of
July I, 1937.

Only a slight attempt was made to maintain the geographical location of each of the
states.

When a chapter name or number is given as a reference, turn to
the Topical Index, either on Page 1 or Page 247, and spin pages to
the desired chapter.

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

o
o
o

•^ c

u i

o f

-o 2

Q.
O

c t:

*> o

> a

o o

1^ a

-D

I 2

c:
I <

243

Chapter 30
RATING CHARTS

IN RATING charts, the "rank" of items is presented in graphic
form. The arrangement of the material is determined by the
quantitative value of each item.

^ SAFETY SCORE BOARD ik

1 . Tobacco

2, Comen-f
5. Laundry

Anirriran Iron & Steel Institute. New York City. 'Safety in Steel." Deiember 10.18.

The Safety-Record Rating of the Steel Industry In the United States Fronn 1934 to
1937.

The ratinK chart is a relatively sin-.ple kind of Rraphic chart and may take a variety of
forms. This chart merely i;ives the position of "Steel" on a safety score board in
1-2-3 order.

244

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

S H 3 i« Ti r n E( il T? iS

From "CoUtctcd Studies of the Dionne Quintuplets" by W. E. Blatr et al., St., George's School for Child
Study, University of Toronto, 1937. Reproduced by Permission of the Authors.

A. A Comparison of the Records of Each of the Dionne Quintuplets in Mental
Development From 12 to 35 Months of Age.

1. Converted into this form, the progress of each of the quintuplets in comparison with

the others is easily followed.

2. Compare this form with 243 and 245.

^0A

lilliiili

3
5

racocia — 1—

■■"

JMODOO —

4UU0U1 .

2 '

Vm jgg

i?7 - ^

aXBU

\ Tj "

SBCnD

1 '

~J 1

soon

xaa

;

A J A.

^UXIlt

tjf

* 1

...

•1

™ if

••l^

^'.A *'

j«

if^

/ti

«l

.fi .!

Jj^™^.

i.t

,r'i

■u!""

■n

f?n?^*>

mrnih

li U-UNITCO KING

yjA

Atl

(

i-e

■IT»

Automotive Industries, June 12, 1910.

SCALE .5

B. Pre-War Status of Automobile Shipments to Forty Principal Nations in the
World.

1. This tabulation-form of rating chart is not as clear as other forms.

2. It is read as follows: taking the column under Canada, the United States shipped over

8,000,000 automobiles to Canada, while the United Kingdom was the only other
country among the 40 principal nations that shipped any to Canada.

RATING CHARTS

245

wro

MoDtuia.
Idaho . .
DakoU. .
Arixuna..
Wyoming

Rank

• NrwYork
t Prno.

3 IlliniiU

4 Ohio

5 Miiiouri

• Trial
T Ma.t.
A Iniliaoa
9 Mi< hiftaa

10 I«wa

11 ('•rorfoa
It Krnturky

13 Witniniin

14 Trnnr^MT

15 N r»r<.lina

16 Nrw Jrrwy

17 Virginia
■A Alabama
!• Minnr«ota
>0 Miviisiippi
ai fBlifornia
21 KariMi

23 lyouMaoa

24 S. f arolin*
2B ArkaDsai

26 Mnrylaod

27 NVbraika
20 W Virginia
Z9 rnonrcticut

30 Maine

31 (olurado

32 Floriila

33 WHslimKton

34 Rhoh I^l'od
3B(>rrK'>n
3«N Hanipsb'e

37 S Dakuta

38 Oklahoma
3* Indian Ter.

40 Vermont

41 N. DakoU

42 Dut. di C.

43 I'Ub

44 Montans
4»N Mexico
4« Delaware
47 Idaho

40 Hawaii
40 Arizona
■eVN'yuming
Bl Alaaka

W. C. Brinton. "Graphic Methodi." McGraw-Hill. 1914.

SCALE 9

Rank of States and Territories in Population at Different Census Years From the
Civil War to the Beginning of the Twentieth Century.

The column at the left gives the key number for each state, while the column at the right
gives the rank of the state in 1900.

246

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

Share of

-5

3
3

«.
C
o

rruK'iB.v III exports of

in imports of

*
*

•

( 'oloiiibKi in exports of

ill imports of

•
•

Kpthcrlandfl in exports of

\V»^t Indips in imports of

•

•
*

Ii>'li:» in exports of

in imports of

*
♦

—

•
*

*
*

•

Spain in exports of

ill imports of

*
•

Swodon in exports of

in imports of

■1-

•

Nenezuclrx in exports of

ill imports of

*
*

•
■I-

•
*

DtrmiMrk in exports of

in imports of

•
*

»
*

NoiwMV in exports of

in imports of

*
*

•

*
»

I'ortiiKiil in exports of

in imports of

•

Trinnla.l m exports of

in imports of

«
*

*
»

*
*

All otliir^ jii exports of

in inipiirfs of

+
+

* Not umoni; tun leading trading nations.

Increases ( -f-) Decreases ( — )

Clianilirr of Commerce of U. S . ForeiRn Conimercr DepI , WashinRton, D. C "South America's Trade."
1').18.

Increases and Decreases in the Share of Important Trading Nations in the Trade of
Each South American Republic From 1936 to 1937.

This chart is read as follows: from 19.?6 to 19.? 7, the exports of Paraguay to Uraguay
decreased, as indicated by the minus sign, while the imports of Paraguay from Ura-
guay increased, as indicated by the plus sign.

In this book, an illustration occupying a full page is referred to
by page number. When there is more than one illustration on a
page, each is identified by a letter of the alphabet. When there is
more than one footnote beneath an illustration, each is numbered.
Thus the cross reference 267B2 means page 267, illustration B,
note 2.

TOPICAL INDEX (2nd Half) ^47

Place ri^ht thtiiiib on tri<m^lc, /infers irisidc back cover.
Spin pu^es to desired chapter.

248-255 .U. Chronoiogy Charts ^

256-262 32. Progress Charts <

263-274 33. Curve Charts ^

275-285 34. Comparisons witli Two Curves
286-293 35. Comparisons with Curves

294-300 36. Component Parts Shown by Curves

301-309 il . Index Numbers Shown by Curves —

310-319 38. Frequency Charts -^

320-330 3^). Correlation Charts

331-338 40. Ogive and Lorenz Charts
339-353 41. Ratio Charts

354-359 42. Three-Dimensional Methods
360-366 43. Composite Charts

367-380 44. Suggestions for Making a Chart —

381-396 45. Standards for Time Series Charts

397-404 46. The Camera and Its Use

405-409 47. Lantern Slides

410-422 48. Preparation of Illustrations
423-428 49. Color and Its Use

429-434 50. Methods of Reproducing

435-442 51. Methods of Printing

443-448 52. Selection of Paper

449-453 53. Binding Techniques

454-463 54. Graphic Charts in Advertising

464-474 55. Quantitative Cartoons

475-485 56. Quantitative Posters

486-493 57. Displays and Exhibits

494-496 58. Dioramas

497-500 59. Graphic Charts in Conference Rooms

501-505 60. Glossary

506-511 Index

(For 1st Half of TOPICAL INDEX, See Puge 1)

248

Chapter 31
CHRONOLOGY CHARTS

X he practice of showing time as a straight line is utilized in mak-
ing chronology charts. Often the line is widened to make it pos-
sible to shade sections. Both quantitative and qualitative data may
be presented.

VACATIOnS POH TRI YTAR

So 1th

Coop«r

Brown

Harris

iThlte

Jonee

Dale

Johaaon

rratt

Black

Rogers

Doe

Carson

Honry

C'Bara

Jackson

SulllTsr

Orey

14 21 20
Ipril

5 12 19 26
May

9 16 23

JXMC

14 21

July

11 la

Aug.

£6 1

16 22 29
Sept.

Brinton, "Graphic Methods." McGraw-Hill, 1914.

Chart for Assigning Vacation Periods in a Large Office.

SCALE .9

With such a chart, one can see at a glance just how many persons from an office will be
gone at the same time. This form is valuable in planning vacations so that two
persons doing the same type of work will not be on vacation.

CHRONOLOGY CHARTS

249

u
.J

<
u

s — Showing
Iving Relics

that item is
nimals lived.

^°

to
<

:^
<:

C E N Z I C

60,000,000 YEARS

H
£

u
c

« 1

servative
f Are "L

»nd when
cinds of a
age.

Radicals, Conservatives, and Ultra-Con
annmals Belong to Another World. The>

line for the beginning of each new item, i
the periods of time during which different 1
e that graphic charts can be a universal langi.

u
o

_ o

CO _

tQ -
>

CO I
° 1

o 1

c
<u
o
o

o
o
.3
o

o
o
UJ

o
o

^ 1

> 1
:: 1

■

■0 1

Itl ■

■txi—

> ^

< ■

Animals —
•Laying K^

tart a new

illustrate

demonstrat

U4
CO

W 1 <o

CO 1 ^

asses of
and Egg

we often s
are used to
r clear and

U.
O

LU
O
<

M E 5 Z I C

1 40,0 0,00 YEARS

G 5

stence of Three C
That the Opossums
sozoic,"

me as a straight line,
le stops. Here lines i
IS make the titles mor<

o
to

ir>

•Si

li !
^ 1

;ngth of Ex'
Graphically
from the Me

hinkiog of ti
ended the lir
visual captioi

250

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

F. P Fi>itir. "Drrn'iiifili/ini' Lniii-shorr L.iluir ;iiiil the Sciittlt- Exp<-rirnr<-." W;ilrrfront Eiliploycrs of
Sriiltlr. Wiish.. Fctiruiiry 1. I'l.M. SCALE .7

Exact Hours and Days Worked in 1929 by the Highest-Earnings Holdnnan in Oregon
Ports.

Till- fxtrenu- irrcj^iilarity of the work of lonj;shorf labor is shown in this study. The black
scctiorjs show the number of hours worked per day accordln^; to the scale at the
left, and the scale at the bottom shows the days.

CHRONOLOGY CHARTS

251

F. P Foisir. "DrrHsiiali/inK L<inK%h(>rc- Liilxir hikI thr Sriitllr ExptiKiu'
Sriittlr. W;i»h . Ftl.riiary 1. I'I.I4

Walrrfrciiil Employers iif
SCALE 7

The Working Year of Pacific Lighterage Corporation Deep Sea Gangs by Days for
1932, Showing Analysis of Broken Working Tinne and Leisure Time.

Prfsi-nti-d aloHK a horizontal line instead of in a circle, this stiuly would have taki-n a
Urcat deal more space. In this form it is concise and adequate for the purpose.

252

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

^^l

ff **

25_

'"^^-

A. Three Cross Sections of a Chart
of Civilizations.

The original of this chart is 14'/4 by 54
inches, in nineteen colors, and
shows history of civilization from
3500 B.C. to date.

Courtesy of M. F. Gelletly. Baltimore, Md.

SCALE .8

Frank J. Root. "An Illuitratrd Handbook of Art History." Macmillan Co.. New York City. 1937.

SCALE .6

B. Chronological Developnnent of Painting During the Renaissance in Italy.

1. Most people are familiar with the blackboard illustration showing how the lives of

writers, philosophers, or rulers overlap, with time represented as a straight line.

2. This chart shows the influence of Italian painters during the Renaissance upon others,

as well as the chronological place of each painter.

CHRONOLOGY CHARTS

253

4000BC AO

i i i 1 i i i I i i » r I < i i ■ i i g I

mn m anumi « ■•■ Ma fo •ouit iw itmm mtota » nc orriMin onauvM

I AD-OME

'::r iwdo v i

■CD* V nc Mimic noinaior M o«tii«(>i

Frank J. Roo«, "An Illustrated Handbook of Art History," Macmillan Co., New York City, 1Q37.

SCALE 6

Chronological Development of Art Periods From 4000 B.C. to 1937.

The shading of the bars indicates gradations in the development of art, and thus gives
meaning to art periods named beneath the bars.

254

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

Li U

C7>

-J

-C

*•

c QJ

- >

o ^

B£

o
o

,.>if

ifl

.»-«♦-

S 2 £■

^ o ^

C C

o r.

-c —

"t ™

W -

£ U

CHRONOLOGY CHARTS

255

T SHtrVlELO FARMS CO -

28 TM ST

nit

1 L

OI*T)liavTION Of Tl

M tLCMCNT IN MILK OCLIVIKT - OCTQU

•OUTt T

r I r I i I I 1 I 1 1

l« MOD M MOON 1 (tullO II tTO*> 1 1 1

lum

OI.1.

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

CtiQN 0<

■

—

All

moult in

H NCWV

■

M-.

■

' •mm

I^D]

I ■

■

»»0 C^i"- '"'*- .1 JOM,(\ 4l^'l><•^

in 1

L.-

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

n '

1 1 1 1 1 1 ' 1

■mi^^ii

' I i I 1 1

1 IVAKO tLCCTmc *2awiri.ti SIJTOCS

: 1 '

I L. . _.

1 MUNNING TO OD rllO« CLCCTIIIC CAMAic
1 1 1 1 1 1 1

1 1 1 I 1 1 ! I

0<>« HO*Jt W»<iON lOOOMlLtS Ji$TO»>» |

^ KA*r«SS ANO HiVcM UP on vice VtKiA

i J 1 1 1

^ LOADi'nC O* UNLOAOIlic

I 1 1 1 1

^ aurMiNC TO on foou DouTC

1 III

'3 T»AV LLINCONNOU+t

"■ 1 III

HOWNS

■

9 TMAfriC OtLAT

r 1 ) 1 «

■ STANDING ON MAUTC

r 1 .'o 1 .'.

Elfctric Storagr Battery Co.. Philadelphia, "Exide-Ironclad Topics," May 1Q33.

A. Study of the Time Spent Delivering Milk on Seven Different Routes.

The purpose of this chart is to compare the length of time spent delivering milk by horse-
wagon with the time spent delivering milk by electric truck.

■I IDLE CD Townrw Omtuoat gg -powiMS Uomtch ^^ Running uoht g^TXniNO Wattw FxICoauw
W. C Brinton. "Graphic Methods," McGraw-Hill, 1914.

B. Operations of Three Tug-boats in New York for Twenty-four Hours. The

Boat Represented by the Lower Bar is in Service for a Twelve-Hour Shift Only

.\ morkinK rhart nf this kind wotiKl iisuully Ix- ina<lo on a lory? strip of co-onlinalc paper. The illustration
na.s <lniwn rnlin-ly \>y hnml lo show the possibilities of han<l cross-hatching for bringing out information
ordinarily shown in several colors

256

Chapter 32
PROGRESS CHARTS

l3 ynonyms for progress charts as used in this chapter are schedule
charts, Gantt charts, procedure charts, process charts, production
control charts.

REFERENCES

Clark, Wallace, The Gantt Chart. A Working Tool of Manage-
ment, The Ronald Press Co., New York City, 1922.

Gantt, H. L., "Organizing for Work," Industrial Management,
Vol. LVIII, August 1919 (Now Factory Management and
Maintenance).

Induitrial Management, December 1918.

A Material Control Board

SCALE .9

The dotted lines represent orders received. The straight lines represent materials received.
The dotted lines beneath the straight lines represent orders on the factory depart-
ments. The full lines represent completion of that number of pieces.

PROGRESS CHARTS

257

PRODUCTION PROGRESS CHART

UNIT VALUE tA\%

ORDER NO. XOOI ENTERED DEC. IB 19- SHIPMENT DESIRED MAY IV 19-

APPARATUS 3000 K-V^- TURBO OCNCRATOR

ITEM

Aritfiur* Fl*n ^€
Afiwtur» 5fi dcr

Cotia

J>nu»ry | ftbru^ry | Mfcrcl

tPR. —

April

'^^i — i — \t „

IS to rr

Factory. December 1919.

A Production Progress Chart.

SCALE .9

1. The solid black lines represent the schedule, while the dotted lines represent the progress

made to date.

2. Note the percentage schedule per week and total at the bottom of the chart. This indi-

cates that the job has progressed faster than schedule.

258

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

Organication to arriral In Franoe
▲rrlTal In France to entering line

Entering line to aetire battle service
Service aa aotive oonbat AlTislon

Leonard P. Ayrc». "Thr War With Germany." Government PrintinR Office, 19)9.

A Time Study of the Various Divisions of the United States Arnny During the World
War.

It would be interesting to liave an analysis of the reasons why certain divisions, although
they arrived in France before others, did not enter the line until long after and
sometimes did not enter the line at all.

PROGRESS CHARTS

259

A. Progress Chart for a Catalog

Production Job.

1. While each company may have its own,

some form of proRrcss chart
aids in determining where certain
jobs are, how far they have pro-
gressed, and how much more has
to be done before the job is com-
pleted.

2. The use of colors makes a progress

schedule valuable for display.

. A

■ DEPT ^

<r'"vor- •|»|C-L. __. :.. .-"-

U.^r..^ , ! ,

• 1

L"..- J 1 V » -, • 1

■ U.

a' •• ♦ ^ V •

■ {^l

(T 1 ' ;' ♦ \ \

' rv;

a 1 : ■ ♦■ v

•

- 6)

i? . ■ . . • . "

•

' "/

Oj. . . ..#, *

•

■ (3

- w5

- r^;

- (■/,

Joifph R. Bolton. "Grt the Cataloe Out on
Time." Printcn' Ink, November l.S, 1Q17.

SCALE .6

Eneincerinc New»-Recor<l. February .V 1917. SCALE .6

B. Progress Schedule.

Duririf; tht- proRrcss of the job. the horizontal lines in color, represented the quantity of
work done.

260

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

lltiijl:. .i|_

t\, »»>

PROGRESS CHARTS

261

i-i «

h w ^

V eg

►J M

« .5

& >.

00 <"

a 3

X r.

a»

a i;

o >

Ix:

s °

~io

§ E

1"^

»-
c
o

Q. ^

en Uj

. o

c -c

o <«

.5 'n.

"~"

m »

S c^-

t) >»

■J3

J3 C8

« 3

E u<

c .2

cs cs

° «

"a *

S 2

u a

C7>

°M

>
o

i . , /TV/'/

262

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

Widlh of ii»ilv «|i.i<i' rrpri'iiriits niiiouiit of

%tork th.'it slioiiM linve boon iloni' in a d«/.
Amount of work nrtually done in n d»y.
Tiino t.'ikrn on nork on nliirli no eatim.ile is

av:iil:iblc.
Wcoklv total of operator. Roliil line for o»ti

niatitl work; broken line for time apent ou

work not eslimuted.
Weekly total for group of operators.
Wi-ekly total for department.

The portion of the daily upaee tliroucb wliieli no line
drawn Rhown hoiv niucli the man has faUeti behind what \
cipwtcd of him.

Rc.vsoNS roR K.M.LiNo Behind

Abneiit

ti — (".reen operator
I — Lurk of inntruetions
L — Slow o|>i*rator
M — Material trouble*

When tliere is more than

R — Rep.'iirs neisled

T— Tool troubles

V— Holiday

Y — Smaller lot than estimate

u basi'd on.
reason for failure to do the

work in estimated time, the reason enteriil on ehart is deter-

minetl by nskiuK questions in the follow inj; order;

R — Was the maehine in f^ood eonditionf

T — Were the tools and fixtures in gooil eondition'

1 — Was the op<-rator i;i\eii proper instructions .-ind

snfHeient information?
M — Was trouble experienced with material.'
G — Was the operator too (jrivn to do the job?

L — Was the opi'rator loo slow ?

V — W;is the lot smaller than estimate is basiwl on?

Wallacf Clark. "The Gantt Chart — II." Management Engineering. September 1921.

A Gantt Man Record Chart

SCALE .7

This chart is one type of those identified as Gantt Charts, developed by the organization
of the late Henry L. Gantt.

REFERENCES

Knoeppel, Charles E., Graphic Production Control, McGraw-
Hill Book Co., Inc., New York City, 1920.

Smith, W. H., Graphic Statistics in Management, McGraw-Hill
Book Co., Inc., New York City, 1924.

263

Chapter 33
CURVE CHARTS

Xhe curve charts in this chapter are only those having one curve
on a grid. This includes those having visual captions. The chap-
ters up through page 366 cover other types of curve charts.

REFERENCES

Karsten, Karl G., Charts and Graphs, Prentice-Hall, Inc., New

York City, 1923.
Riggleman, John R., and Ira N. Frisbee, Business Statistics, 2nd

edition, 1938, McGraw-Hill Book Co., Inc., New York City.

■

^^H

120
100

■

MILLIONS OF RADIO

■

■
J

■

*•

/•

19*27 '74 *7b '7B '50 *57 'i4 "ib 'id

Electronics, October. 1938.

Number of Radio Sets and Radio Receiving Tubes Built In the United States from
1922 to 1937

1. The curves in these charts illustrate the plotting of a curve on a grid.

2. The points are plotted on the vertical rulings and a connecting line is drawn through

each point.

3. In plotting a curve, there are two variables, the independent and the dependent. In

these curves, the time scale indicates the independent variable, and the amount
scale the dependent variable.

264

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

Sidpburir Arid Priew

«r. .1 WiHk.)

trnftm

.71

•24

•2S

•26

•27

•28

•29

•30

•31

•32

•33

•34

•35

•36

•37

•38

A. Sulphuric Acid Prices in the United
States From 1924 to 1938.

Often a curve chart takes the appearance
of a stair chart when prices which
remain stable over a long period
of time are presented. This should
not be confused with such charts
as 1358.

Standard Statistics. Inc.. N. Y. C, "Standard
Trade and Securities." March 4, 1Q38.

SCALE .6

TIME-SERIES LINE CHARTS

The "time-series line chart" is the type in which values of a
time series are plotted on a coordinate surface ond the points
joined together successively to form a continuous line or
"curve." The line chart has a wide range of application and
in most cases is relatively easy to construct and maintain.

A. THE LINE CHART SHOULD GENERALLY BE USED:

1. For series where there ore many successive values to be
pictured.

2. Where several series ore shown for comparison on the
same chart.

3. For close reading or interpolation.

4. When the emphasis should be on the movement rather
than on the actual amounts.

5. When the chart is to be used for the projection of trends.

B. THE LINE CHART MAY NOT BE THE BEST TYPE:

1. Where there are relatively few plotted values in the series.

2. Where the emphasis should be on the change in amounts
rather than on the movement of the series.

3. To emphosize the difference between values or amounts
on different dotes.

4. When the movement of the doto is extremely violent or
irregular.

5. When the presentation is designed for popular appeal.

CURVE CHARTS

265

B«i*d Upon Av*««4« U S. ftic»% •« R»porf sd by tht U. S. Butmu of Ubor Statitttct

Chicneo Trihunr. The l')J8 Chnrt Book. " Fclnunry 22. 1Q38.

A. The Cost of +he "Market Basket" in the United States Calculated From Gov-
ernment Prices From 1929 Through 1937.

It is not possible to compare the curve in this chart with the chart B below since the
content of the "market basket" as listed is not the same.

7jOO

B«f*d Upon Avvraq* U. S. Pricat »t R*pert*d by th* U. S. Bureau of Labor Statittici OOOAXS

7JM

JFMAMJ JASOND JFMAMJ J A SON J F MAM J J AS ON J FMAM J J A SON D JFMAM J J A SON

1914 1915 1916 1917 1918

L«tt«r« Abova Ara kwKal* of MeirHu: J for January, F for Fabmary, Etc

Chicago Tribune. "The 1938 Chart Book." February 22, 1938. SCALE 8

B. The Cost of the "Market Basket" in the United States During the World War.

1. When the zero line is omitted, this is one method of indicating its absence. It might

have been better if the line had been more wavy so that in reduction the irregu-
larity would not be lost.

2. The visual caption used in this chart is very effective. By cutting an appropriate pic-

ture from a magazine or newspaper apd using it in this way, a chart is easily
"dressed up."

266

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

"^ III

llllllll Mil III III!

' I3::::?c"

^iB^BB niiii'.iiii

>«f iHKiia

' i

tiJ^M iiiii'iitiiii

^ --«%: Siians

'-k-

- ■

TJinSKSS

■

, , . . . . M /I i 1 1 1 1 1 11 i

i ill iKi l/i 1

T Ttr-rtr

1 ^/ V"

/■ ( ""

— -±-iir^

_» iyt«i*!^-;-tai«<ih-

The Goodyear Tire and Rubber Co., Akron, Ohio, "Annual Report to Stockholders," 1037, SCALE .5

A. Yearly Oufpul of Goodyear Pneumatic Tires for Motor Vehicles.

1. The uj.e of an illustration in the upper left corner is effective.

2. The small table at the bottom is read as follows: the Goodyear Tire and Rubber Com-

pany took 43 months to produce its first fifty million tires. The last report of
production indicates that twenty-five million tires were produced in 15 months.

1. 1

l^'-r-

"t"' ' I 1 1 [

' — t'

^ ■ ^"^

. ■ ■ -

^^TAIU F W

\//

..
\

(

Af rOL.tiflriu i^fliuifeUlwJr]

).y, , ;„.,„ y

—

ffta^^ ^^-^

■ I

—

1 1

p 1

\ 1

F j

<#
•«

' ■

rff

r I

/ ^^^^^^1

,li

^^Bl

«5

■ ■■■■

\m^

"^"

•

... - r ■ f. 1^ 1/ in ,-. ,. -;7 „-■ „* ,,r. ■-, .i„ V 7 ,-*■ -.'. ' .: ,r 7 ■,-.—: — ; , i .\. .», ik^ /r-n :

William Playfair. "Tableaux d'Arithmetique Lineaire." Paris, 1780. SCALE .3

B. Expenditures by England for Ordnance From 1720 to 1786.

1. This is one of the first graphic charts.

2. No doubt realizing that the three humps in the chart would raise a question, William

Playfair included at the top of the chart black lines indicating "time of war."

CURVE CHARTS

267

■■"

■

'A 1

»a

—

...

ri c

,Ooe(

pOj

V m

-iH ogja ^ '

—

L-nA^

CP^

-diklT ^WFTUtf'feat

^1r

-,^

—

-^^**S*i-_5!!5iJP-iI^- A

1 _

. . . -

^*" 1

-1^-*

i>o

)

OeOCTlOM XtLO 1

•/H sy »«o-»atiom|

[tN,

, •

DOi

.0.

'4<MUSTA UIO CLOOVAM
H riti-OS C»MI in TO
1 PWOOUCTiOM.

,000

.ODO

1 —

lOfOO

^o.loci

f\B

1 —

r#-

—

1900c

5 c

>7 t

>S C

55 1

1 1

2 T

5 1

4 ^

5 14

17 '

8 '1

? 2

1 ';

>2 i

»3Z

4 2

5 2

6 '<

•7 J

•5 2

>0 J

1 i

2 3

4 A

National Rrtourcrs Board. State Planning, 1935.

Kansas Oil Production From 1900 to 1935.

SCALE .8

The use of illustrations on a curve chart adds to its appeal and gives some indication of
the material presented. It is no problem to include a picture similar to the

one shown here in a chart. A clipping from a magazine or a newspaper will suffice.
See 265B.

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

IM* U«0 1*M IMO 1(M ItlO Itla KM III! 1I30 l»M \**a

ItO. 000.000

oi«A»ni A(f»n^^

'rASADOU KOMTI
pO. 1 UKD.

uo.ooo.ooo

Aoopoopn VAI 1 lATinM

"aK[^^'^

7/^Aiuioro AOortiM
^ Ijio. I Ajra<3.

ITO.000.000

1 1

I8&7 TO 1936

1 1

lao.ooo.ooo

NOTE

CITY OF PASADF"
1 1 1

-UTILITIES RETURNED TO LOCAL
1 1 1 1

.IMM, 1

TAX ROLLS IN

I93S

1 ^kAIi Airircx

iw,oao,ooo

IN AMOC

NT OF

I >o.x

^eiaoo

CAIi)ll AIIKEX

in niii Aiib

■LvAiaiBi Antx
\ 1

143,000,000

130.000.000

fllBTAM) t»:IJ. ^

juivnisiir Aica \,

120,000.000

SA«
LAMA.'!

tA AXITA A
U PAU K

JIKEX

.1 Ajnis

110.000.000

■ :lu-allek a.v.sx "] \
«i3t Foor.iaL AioiEX''

l:rLL-rc?ElA AAICI.

100,000,000

]

90,000,000

:i(Evi

AVOir

ALE AmtX

0HT3 AmC

•0, on ,000

'0,000.000

iicra AJDi

^"^^^^"-JJUON

A PAUK AH

10,000,000

PASADDIA HEIGHTS

LIKDA TISIA Aimn \ ,^

AJINAJIDALZ

Aim EI

«0, 900,000

s«

lAFA't m\

OKTS A»KB

so. 000,000

10.000,000

CAST

PAS ADO A 4

PINtJC

■^

^HOIITll

rAjAonA

AKXn

<S '.9M IttS IMO |«06 1>U Kli 1970 192S 1990 19U 1940

Patadcna, California, "Annual Report of the City ManaRrr. 1036-37." SCALE .8

Assessed Valuation of the City of Pasadena Fronn 1887 to 1936.

The inclusion of the notations about the annexes aids in reading this chart, since some
explanation for sudden rises and falls is needed.

CURVE CHARTS

269

Excess Reserves of New York City
Central Reserve Banks Fronn
1934 to September 1937.

This chart presents weekly averages of
daily figures.

Federal Reserve Bnnk of New York. "Monthly
Review," October 1, 1937. SCALE .6

-Improved carbon
filament lamp
costing $1.60

Squirted ]
tungsten {
♦ straight — Drawn tungsten vwire ■ —
filament straight filament vacuum
vacuum

Ho\u research on lamps has reduced the
cost of electric lighting .This chart is based
on the lumens of light produced by nevu
eOviJatt bulbs per \uatt of electricity
consumed.

Da fa furnished by Wtstinghouit Elecfric Mfg Co

Draiwi
tungsten
Drawn tungsten — — wire re

\wire coiled fila-
ment gas filled

Average cost
of lamp 75(t

Due to greater manufacturing
precision

Due to
research

Ol I I I ' ' ^ ' I I I I I I I I '

J I I I'll

— — — — — oldr^ccJ

CM •* vD ao
»0 ro Kl to

0> <J> O o>

Product Engineering. October 1938. Part of an Editorial on Public Relations Entitled "Research in
America — the Key to Belter Living "

B. The Effect of Research on the Price and Quality of Light From 1904 to 1938.

Supplementing the information given here with further details, it is estimated that if the
iillumin«tion of 1937 had been attempted with the lamps of 1900, it would have
cost two billion dollars more for electricity alone at present power rates.

270

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

V 5

^ 5

CO jT^

Ul I—

^■-

\ •

S I

5 p

o ^

1 *

^ i

i ^

\ \

O 5

c ^ *-

-D

*^ 2

„ c ■^

- o

O cs

UL a

r/1

h
o

■*^

t/3

•o

^ oo

c ^

0) u

Z. C/3

CURVE CHARTS

271

A. Cost of Rubber Per Pound in New
York From 1838 to 1937.

When data over a long period of time is
plotted in curve form, it is usually
necessary to allow a great deal of
space horizontally, or to condense
the years so that a trend only is
indicated. This method of break-
ing a series of years into four
parts solves both these difficulties.

1*41

t»*r

•»!

■Mr

too

100

■

^^^

«*J

«Tt

lerr

>oo
too

jji

■

^^_^^^b&. M

IMT not i«or ifix

»oo

100

■

•

•»!> IfIT

U- S. Department of Commerce. Bureau of For-
eign and Domestic Commerce, "Domestic Com-
merce." July 20. 1938. SCALE .8

Science Service Inc. Washington. D C. "Science News Letter." February 20 1Q32. SCALE .7

B. The Deviation From Normal Temperature in Iowa From 1873 to 1931.

In this chart a normal was first decided upon and marked as zero. The departures from
this normal, or average, were then plotted above and below the zero line. The
deviations below normal are distinguished from those above normal by color.

2^2 GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

FUNDAMENTAL CONVENTIONS OF FORM

1. A TimoS«ne$ Chort is one of severol types of bi-numericol scole
cherts. A binumericol scole chort is based on the conception of two-
dimensionol movement in o single plane.

2. The field or coordinate surfoce on which the voloes ore located is
formed by intersecting verticol ond horizontal rulings located ot
measured intervols from the two principal axes.

3. It is the convention that positive values are measured upword from
the horizontal oxis and to the right of the verticol axis and negative
values ore measured downward from the horizonlol axis and to the
left of the vertical axis.

4. In o time-series chart the vertical or Y axis measures amount, ond
the horizontal or X oxis meosures time.

5. Time values In o time-series chart ore usuoily represented as positive
and move from left to right on the horizontal or time scale.

6. Every plotted point in o time-series chart has two values: An amount
volue meosured on the verticol oxis ond o time value measured on
the horizontal axis.

7. The horizontal oxis, zero line or other line of reference, should be
accentuated so os to indicate that it is the bose for comparison of
volues. There is no such bose of comporison for the time scale in a
lime-series chart, however, there being no beginning or end of time.

8. In o time-series chart the plotted points ore generolly joined consecu-
tively by straight lines to form o continuous line movement which is
conventionally spoken of as o curve. The points of volue con be indi-
cated by means of other grophic forms such os columns or surfoces,
but the fundomentol principle is the some.

9. The values on the omount scale should be continuous,- and points
on the scale with their corresponding horizontol rulings should
reflect the actual intervals on the scale.

10. Time should be regarded os continuous with vertical rulings used to
indicate only certain intervals of time. Equol intervals of time should
be indicoted by equal space intervols on the scale.

Mathematical graph

CURVE CHARTS

273

S,000

t.ooo

1,000

5T
Minid

-ri M 1 I
ntoit Aseomt

1 II

lATtAU-TWfHBV

) - -

.Jill

1 l^^^^^^^^^^l

Uiiii

MU»itbi

onujiotTMirittiti li 44 k 9 Ufcirih

a??^ff»ffli2»^ffi?WftiS

APB r>»» jun JUL AM XP1 OCT nov PCC jam Ftt nw APR

191B 1919

Leonard P. Ayres, "The War With Germany." Government Printing Office, 1919.

Hours Spent in the Air by American Service Planes at the Front During the World
War.

1. The historical labels marking three important attacks of the World War and the

Armistice give meaning to the curve.

2. Note the method of indicating the year, the month, and the day.

274

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

a; q:

ft: uj :5 ::j ■^

Uj-4oco5

^ hft:S;Ujl
U,5coO

<n ^

ft: ua

c^5

o ^

2; CO

cj ■<«:

^^:

:?o

■^ *^ "^ rN

X Q ft:_

ct uj uj Q

U) UJ i>.

:?<

ri^ o

=)"^

Oft:

foS:

::3

o a,
ft: 5

2;uj

-J

^ Q

J Uj CO

S^^Q:|

-J

Q
UJ

PECl
ONC-
STEE

CO -J

CO Q _

CO Uj a; M
Uj ik Q Uj ^

^ o o Q ■<»:

--• a; O UJ 5
ii; Q. O UJ UJ
§5 '^'Q

<J>

CO
CT>

r-.

<T)

' —

•^

—

cr>

c\j
(J)

CO
C\J

(J)

C V

._ Id

CsJ
CD

-D

M-

3 -z *'

w a»

D U. H

Ill

275

Chapter 34
COMPARISONS WITH TWO CURVES

HE types of curve charts covered in this chapter are simple
comparisons of two curves, cumulative curves, causal rela-
tionships and high-low curves.

REFERENCES

Arkin, Herbert and Raymond R. Colton, Graphs: How to Make
and Use Them, Harper & Brothers, New York City, 1937.

Croxton, Frederick E., and Dudley J. Cowden, Applied General
Statistics, Prentice Hall Inc., New York City, 1939.

■

^"X^

\^^

r:::

n::^

V--^

weeMy salary

of teachers

——Average

weeltly salary

of unsKiiled labor

1900

1905

1910

1915

1920

1925

1930

1935

1940

National Educational Association. "Rcsfarch Bulletin, " May 1938.

SCALE .9

Trends in Teachers Salaries and Wages of Unskilled Labor in the United States fronn
1 900 to 1937.

1. When more than one curve is put on a grid, it is necesary to make some differentiation

between the curves. A dotted line is one solution.

2. The grid of a chart may be omitted to great advantage in some cases. Since the

omission often hinders the reading of the chart, the practice should not be en-
couraged.

276

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

— bOO.OOO

T soo.ooo

* 4 00.000

B soo.ooo
3

A ' '

AirrOIHOBILES

Dkh

l\J\

SWBEL INGOTS

K^t

rWurAj |/[i

Jlf 1

iV ' 1

Afi'U

' V 1 1

1 u y '

[ V \:j^^ u 11 1 ! J

M r M ' 1

•.ooo.ooo

s.ooo.ooo T

1, ooo.ooo ■

1, ooo.ooo ""

I9t« 19*7 19*8 1999 I9M> 1991 t93t 19SS »9S4 I93S 19S6 1997

Annual Review Number of Iron Age Magazine, January 6. 1938.

SCALE .7

A. Comparison of the Record of Automobile Production and Steel Ingot Pro-
duction in the United States from 1926 Through 1937.

1. If this material had been plotted on a grid with one scale, it would have resulted in

too large a chatt. When a common grid is thus used for two scales, care should be
taken to put the zero of each at a common starting point.

2. Note the lag of the automobile curve as compared with the steel ingot curve.

THOUSAND
OOUARS

High and Low Pric* of a Membership on th* N. Y. Stock Exchange, 1900-1937

THOUSAND
OOUAKS

660

MY)

—

-1929 H

igh

650
600
sso

^50

}at.

500

soo

4<in

n gn
Low

tM\

ow
..R

I9r»
ghts

4nn

3S0
300

250

35(

L0(

ISO

1
\

'37

300

1
1

134.000

2S0

200

ISO

ion

1
1

200

)H
7.0(

igl
X)

»w
34

19
00

',.

ISO

"•

—i

\
\

100

k«

•«

«<

•-

**.

.$37,000

61,000^

,•

lob

■|

■I

■|

■I

•0

•2

'31

'3<

)

Chicago Tribune, "The 1938 Chart Book," February 22, 1938. SCALE .8

B. The Price of Memberships on the New York Stock Exchange from 1900 to 1937.
Compare this method of presenting high-low data with 28 SB.

COMPARISONS WITH TWO CURVES

1920

•30 '35 1920 25

I93e DATA ARE PRELIMINARY

U S Drpartmcnt of Agriculture, Bureau of AKricultural Economics. SCALE .8

Production and Farm Prices of Strawberries in the United States from 1918 to 1938.

This chart shows an effective way of comparing two curves. Note the combination of the
shaded curve and the dotted-line curve.

278

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

THOUSANDS OF PERSONS
2500

1920 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

J2 33 34 35

WPA. National Research Project. "Summary of Findings to Date," March 1938.

A. Movement to and from Farms in the United States from 1920 to 1935.

This information is also given in B below. Here the emphasis is on the population move-
ments to and from the farms. These two charts illustrate the technique of shading
different sections of the same chart for different emphasis.

1 1 1 1 1

LEAVING FARMS FOR
CITIES AND VILLAGES

NET MOVEMENT
TO FARMS

U S Department of ARriculture. Bureau of Auriculfural Economics.

B. Movement to and from Farms in the United States from 1920 to 1937.

The interest in this chart is centered on the number of people who came to the farms,
causing an accumulation of farm population. As a result, the section labelled
"arriving on farms" is shaded darker than the "net movement from farms."

1"!

COMPARISONS WITH TWO CURVES

279

t»OM Nwnx» JO toNWtOKi

! ! ! S

Nrw York Worlds Fair. 1039. Treasury Division. Methods and PlanninR Drpt. SCALE 6

Three Cumulative Curves Shov.ing the Thousands of Column-Inches Which the Nev^ York World's Fair Received in Out-
of-town Daily and Weekly Newspapers from January 1937 to March 1938.

he month for each of the
n inches from the first o
•hes for the year is given

I for t
colum
mn inc

1 1

jary, the tota
al number of
umber of colu

of Jan
the to
total n

•v

e end
ruary,
7, the

At th
of Feb
)cr 193

X"^ '^1

■\

L «

nches is zero.

At the end

nd of Decemt

C 3 o

E Si f

of CO

on tht
rth. At

plotted
so fo

y 1937, the
sifications is
s plotted, anc

Beginning Januai
three clas
January i

280

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

MULTIPLE AMOUNT SCALES

SOLID

HOLLOA

SHADED

DASH

0ASH-HOLU3W

DOTTED

LINE AND DOT
DOT DASH

BALL AND LINE

LINK

A/'

.1 M

• • •

Curv* pottamt

Principles

1. The purpose of multiple omounl scoles is to compere the movements
of two or more series differing considerably in magnitude.

2. Multiple omount scales can be effectively used for comparing on the
same grid two or more series not measured in comporable units (e.g.,
dollars and tons}.

3. In general, the use of multiple amount scales should be restricted and
regarded as a device for special cases.

Procedures

1. LIMITED NUMBER DESIRABLE. Multiple scales should normolly be lim-
ited to two, as more ore likely to be confusing.

2. SAME RULINGS FOR BOTH SCALES. Scales should be so selected
that all horizontal rulings for both scales will coincide.

3. ZERO VALUES SHOULD APPEAR. The zero lines of both scales should,
if possible, be included on the chart and should coincide.

4. WHEN ZERO IS OMITTED. If the zero lines of the two scales cannot
well be shown on the chart, the scales should be so adjusted that the
zero lines would coincide if the scales were extended to zero. This
procedure, illustrated at the right, will present the curves in their cor-
rect relationship.

5. CONTROLLING CURVE MOVEMENT. Scales should be selected which
will ovoid undue emphosis of any one curve. iSo selected that the
relative movement of the various curves will be comporoble. It is not
permissible to enlarge the movement of one curve orbitronly while
minimizing the movement of the other.)

6. WIDE SEPARATION UNDESIRABLE. Scales should be selected that
will bring the curves in close enough proximity for ready comparison.

7. THE SCALE RATIO. If possible, scole intervals of one scale should be
in even multiples of the intervals of the other scale so as to facilitate
comparisons of relative magnitude.

8. LOCATION OF SCALE DESIGNATIONS. Normolly, it is best to des-
ignate one scale at the left and the other ot the right.

9. ALTERNATIVE METHOD OF PRESENTATION. The difficulties of mul-
tiple scale presentation may be avoided by converting both series
to a common base leg., index numbers, per cent of overage for pe-
riod, etc.).

CURVE PAHERN

1. Curve patterns should be so selected that the curves can be distin-
guished readily from each other.

2. In general, the simplest patterns ore most effective and most eco-
nomical.

3. In selecting curve patterns, it Is well to bear In mind the drafting diffi-
culties and disturbing optical effects of complicated patterns.

COMPARISONS WITH TWO CURVES

281

itn

1935

I9M ■

/•

.it.

lU!

1 X

Conawrdal

,-'

IID

1928 — —

193S

I9M

/■

■^

Standard Stattitici Co . Inc , N. Y. C , "Standard Trade and Securitiei," May 29, 1936.

SCALE .7

A. Building Contracts Awarded for Residential, Commercial, and Industrial Use in
the United States for 1928. 1935, and 1936.

For explanation of cumulative curves, sec 2 79.

930
900
250
700
ISO
100
SO

:=:;

■-

■■

>
/

^a-

5^*^

ir^

iLU

««*

555

Irs

m H

W l<

W»l

n\ «

n K

Ml K

r:4 K

m H

n6M

rtTK

Jin

)«I4

t\ li

niM

National Aitociation of Motor Bus Operators. Washington, D. C, "Bus Facts for 1938." SCALE .9

B. Comparison of the Number of Cities Using All-Rail Transportation, Combined
Rail and Bus Transportation, and All Bus Transportation in the United States
from 1912 to 1937.

1. In this chart, as the number of cities using rail and bus transportation increased, the

number using only rail transportation necessarily decreased, since the number of
cities included in the study varies little over a period of years.

2. In more recent years, as those using buses only increased, the number of cities using

the combination system decreased.

3. This type of record would be affected by any change in the total number of cities within

the three classifications. Similar charts might be based upon 100%. See 298A.

282

l"t

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

1 ■

I'rice

Cent* Per Pound

^-x.

-.'V-.

W 1 v/ 1

T • »

'^v-..

rid's Visible Supply

Miuand Long Tons

^ -

1931

1932

1933

1934

1935

1936

1937

1938

Standard Statistics Co., 'Standard Trade and Securities." March 4. 1QJ8

A. The Price of Tin Per Pound in the United States from 1 93 I to 1 938.

1. The inverse relationship chart is an especially interesting one. If there is a causal

relationship, a rise in one curve may cause a fall in the other.

2. The causal relationship between supply and demand and its effect upon price is well

known and is presented in this chart. As the "world's visible supply" of tin goes
down, the price per pound goes up, but not necessarily at the same rate.

3. One of the most common forms of inverse relationship is that as production increases,

unit costs usually decrease.

/ Y-'^SO^VEMCY 'NDEX

*i '

•"^

•>

A A

^r\

\^i

\'\

St\

«!

.r*

*--

-1

U.INO

F lUSINEM

ACTIVITY

1 1

L/^

^..^

^^___

__^_

__,_

^,_

I9IS ino

Dun's Review. February 1<)J')

ins )>M

SCALE .7

B. Twenty-five Year Comparison of Dun's Insolvency Index and the Cleveland Trust
Company Index of Business in the United States.

1. Compare with A above.

2. Obviously the records of insolvency show an increase during periods of lessened business

activity.

i"r

COMPARISONS WITH TWO CURVES

283

)j eg

73 C

c "*

2 V

2 -o
a M

o
o

CO
c

"■

■l 1

o«

•o

-*-

u
o

•t

• —

—

ir>

jC
«
t3

T5
U

E
o

c
o

U-

a
to

u
in

u
O

"(5

•—

•-«

-C

M
3
a

c
o

•^^

c
o

'•5

•a

E
o
U

•o

284

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

sua

—

XTK

1 I 1

At OVta SllICT*

1 1

l**1

k— »

••im

Amt

! ' '

tS::

SfltCTS

oviR St

1
ANDAKM

;

■-. y

(

'--.

Mwimwn
1

t. t

-~1

11j

..it.

-Miniawm

■"

■^

iMi

A. Maximum, Average, and Minimum
Prices of 2 Grades of Eggs in
the State of Utah from 1924-
1936.

In the chart from which this was re-
drawn, the colored section was
dotted. In the process of photo-
statting, some of the dots were
lost, with the result that uni-
formity of shading was lost. For
that reason the chart was re-
drawn.

1tt4 •« 1* 27 l* •« M 11 •« JJ »« »S St

Redrawn from U. S. Farm Credit Administration,
Cooperatives Division, "Business Analysis of
the Utah Poultry Producers Cooperative As-
sociation," E>ec. 1937. SCALE .6

STATE & FEDERAL GASOLINE SALES TAXES

SHOWN IN CENTS PER GALLON

SH^LC WtKACC or SAL£S TAJC*
SHOWN tern CACH TtAII

AVERAGE U S
rirTr ntFKCMNTATivi citics

eoM

ooe*

OSM

aoM

oo*i

«!••

a»>

M«i

M04

OMO

oin

S40O

o««i

OMI

0**1

ou*

«!•

o*«o

OVi«

;

^SE

WIC

E S

rATi

»RIC

t IN

CLU

>INO

X :

^.„.

j^
~

!■

SER

y/iCE

ST>

iTIOlM P»

ICE

EX<

LUO

ING

TAX

•n

;

.1.,!. ..

1.1..!...^

■nJ.iI..

^..J^

..i,.l.,i..

.ij.j.

MOTC-rUCAM. TAB

I CUT CrtCIIVC A<« tl lUA OMITMNM. </t C«MT f nCCTlVt JUM I'.IUA ■/• CCHT «IT 1 « »,l— l JIMUMW I, t»f

Joseph E. Pogue, "Economics of the Petroleum Industry," March 1939, The Chase National Bank of the
City of New York.

B. Trend of Average Retail Price of Gasoline in Fifty Representative Cities in the
United States by Months, 1919-1938, Showing Incidence of Gasoline Sales
Tax. Courtesy of The Texas Company.

COMPARISONS WITH CURVES

285

SS4?=

il*.

i*^

4JL1

fi-

R*^

'T*

xeo

•^- «!

«j

'iAi

•w

'<^'

mW'

'•ir'

■'•i*

Frdrral Retcrvr Bonk of Nfw York. "Monthlv
Review," November 1. 1^38. SCALE .6

A. Daily Range of High and Low
Quotations for Sterling Ex-
change at New York in Sep-
tember and October, 1938.

1. The range bar chart is a form of the

high-low chart.

2. Daily fluctuations are presented here

and in C below, while a monthly
range is given in B.

Federal Reterve Bank of New York, "Monthly
Review," December 1. 1938. SCALE .6

B. Monthly Range of High and Low Quo-
tations for Sterling Exchange at
New York from 1931 to De-
cember 1938.
When the bars are adjacent to each other
as they are in this chart, the simi-
larity between the bar form and
the curve form of high-low chart
is more pronounced. See 276B.

IS18SS!BMBBIiV««a

1 938-

-19 3 9-

— lao

2IS
"

: 70 INDUSTRIALS

mi,

^E??

gffte

ws^

30 RAILROADS

& = 53'

New York Herald Tnbune. March 13. 1939.

SCALE 6

C. Trend of Prices on the New York Stock Exchange Market from 1929 to March
1939.

Note the method of changing the scale to give monthly data for recent periods of time.

286

ill

Chapter 35
COMPARISONS WITH CURVES

^^^H types of curve charts covered in this chapter are simple
comparisons of more than two curves, progressive average curves,
moving average curves, and normal trend curves.

REFERENCES

Croxton, Frederick E., and Dudley J. Cowden, Applied General
Statistics, Prentice Hall Inc., New York City, 1939.

Karsten, Karl G., Charts and Graphs, Prentice-Hall, Inc., New
York City, 1923.

PERCENT
60

National Association of Motor Bui Operators. Washington, D. C., "Bus Facts for 1938."

SCALE .7

A Comparison of the Percentage of Sales of Five Types of Motor Coaches in the
United States from 1929 to 1937.

1. The total of the percentages which the lines represent is one hundred.

2. One way of differentiating a large number of curves plotted on one grid is shown here.

3. It might have been better to connect the labels to the lines with arrows, eliminating the

necessity for putting them at an angle.

ill

lit

COMPARISONS WITH CURVES

287

OTOttr

'1.

«•

-/
^

—

;:=

Nta

>»,

•n

itii

--^

■N

•«»«

Pcdrral Rcifrve Bank of New York. Monthly
Review." July 1. 1937. SCALE .6

A. Daily Average Production of Pas-
senger Automobiles and Trucks
in the United States in 1929,
1932. 1936. and 1937.

1. By using a monthly scale, the curves

for several years may be plotted
on the same grid with clearness
and a saving of space.

2. When letters only are used to indicate

the months of a year, by noting
the position of JASON in the line,
it is easy to determine whether
the year begins with January or
June.

*V CtHT

1 . !

:\'

. 1

1 \ \^

V, kucavt B*M« oocotMT lun

>tj

i A

;■..... -'...

kNCt «*Tt

iSi

19V

1933

lii4

«35

•93^

i45?

Federal Reserve Bank of New York, "Monthly
Review." April 1. 1937

B. Money Rates in the New York
Market from 1931 to 1937.

This line chart has taken the appear-
ance of a stair chart because
.•noney rates do not fluctuate a
great deal from week to week ex-
cept under unusual conditions.
Compare with 135B and 264A.

Dun's Review. November 1938.

Scale -6

C. Failures by Federal Reserve Dis-
tricts in the United States from
1936 to September 1938.

1. This arrangement of curves enaMes

one to put a great many on one
grid in a very small space.

2. Note that the zero line of each curve

is the top line in the one below.
Compare with 271A.

\\\

288

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

^Arrtiiiiiuiiiuiuiiiiii'iiiuuu

; 1 1 ;i j a 1 9 > II { s J ; ; 1 1 s .1 1 2 s .8 s } ? Iji 11 ! .: 1

Brinton, "Graphic Methods." McGraw-Hill, 1914.

SCALE .5

A. Yearly Average of Revenue Tons per Train Mile on the Pittsburgh and Lake
Erie Railroad.

1. The dotted line in this chart is a progressive average, or an average of all the items

shown.

2. The numbers along the top of the chart give the value of the points on the plotted

curves.

3. When space does not allow the dates to be put in full, the method shown here identifies

each vertical line, and accents the decades.

4. Note the position of the scale designation in the upper left corner for both the scale and

data figures.

1930

U. S. Department of ARriculture, Bureau of Agricultural Economics. SCALE .8

B. Annual Yield and Nine-Year Moving Average Yield of Rye Per Acre in the
United States from 1 866 to 1930.

A moving average, often used in graphic charts, is obtained in this way: the sta-
tistics for a number of years are averaged and the result is plotted at the half-way
mark. Thus if the data for the 9 years from 1890 to 1898 had been averaged, the
result would be plotted at the year 1895.

COMPARISONS WITH CURVES

289

'• E

(J o

>«

'<o
O

0)
TJ
<0

Id wt-

_ O

u a,

Li ^

>
o

^ o

i 2

o -D —

c So

E «> O

t: _2 <N

£ ^£:

c -o

- ij

V c

c c

2 5

M JJ

"■ a

It o

> 1.

a£

T3 a

CD „

> «

15 i

290

IIE

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

Active File

...... Inflow of Appliconts

^^— Outflow of Applicants

Excess outflow of appliconts over
inflow.

Excess inflow of applicants over
outflow.

U S Employment Srrvirc "Survey of Employmrnt Service Information." Fetiriinry I9J8.

Effect of Outflow and Inflow of Applicants in the U. S. Employnnent Service on the
Active File from April 1934 to January 1938.

1. Whereas each of these three curves minht have been presented separately, the com-

bination of the tliree presents a picture not otherwise possible.

2. Notice how a solid section in the two lines at the bottom is rcHected in the upper one.

3IE

COMPARISONS WITH CURVES

291

FftCSHMEN

1912 1913 19W 1915 1916 1917

6,000

5,000

SOPHOMORES

JUMIORS
SENIORS

4/XX)

3,000

2.000

Engineering Nfw«-Rccord, Novfmber 29, 1917.

A. Enrollment in Engineering Schools in the United States from 1912 to 1917.

1. This chart presents the effect of the draft and enlistments for the World War on the

enrollment in enginering schools.

2. The dotted line gives the numbers of students enrolled as freshmen, sophomores, etc.

The other line by linking these lines shows the history of the classes from the time
the students entered as freshmen.

3. Thus in 1914, over 6,000 students enrolled as freshmen to be graduated in 1918. The

enrollment of this class in 1917 at the beginning of its senior year had dropped to
a little over 2.000.

•40 SO

•0

1900

1950

4.P

I 11 I I I 1 1

•|

MARIETTA, OHIO

■--

■

44 U

-Htj

X ^

I f T

..If

Wi,

40^-^

^1 i iX

iHn

vun

jrJ "

" t^'

rM-l.

^ .

w . ; • . 7C

■ SO

M M M 1 M 1 II

ST. PAUL. MINNESOTA

^ J

^1L

^ If

h+/: 1 , , r.

k^ ^

■■ ■ ) , y^ ' ' • I

-.-

T"^

XJi'KT n, y ^.JLa

»-

1 1 J

r^-/\/y. . , ''s

V . T\

.^-Jrf.

1^ \ : : ^

■

fOB TEN TEARS ENDING

National RftourcM Committee, "Report of Water Planning Committee, Part III," 1934.

SCALE .7

B. Ten-Year Moving Averages of Annual Precipitation for Marietta, Ohio, and St.
Paul, Minnesota, from 1 840 to 1931.

This chart differs from 288B and 289 in that it is a moving average "for ten years ending"
rather than for ten years "centered."

Ill

292

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

•

v-^

■

-V

^ '

— ^

V-

— '

?>^

^s.

^^^

•

' \^

1 '

Z:u_

-— 1

■^ '

^m~ ^

^2h

-V^

^=»;

•9

B»

-A:

^ii«\

V>.

.A^

^^i"

^V-i

•

1 1

^ i

o
o

^ b

B -§

.•5; c

COMPARISONS WITH CURVES

293

Brinton, "Graphic Methods." McGraw-Hill. 1Q14.

SCALE .9

A, Chart Showing by Months the Average Total Daily Water Consumption In
Boston, and by Months the Average Daily Per Capita Water Consunnption.
Also the Yearly Average of Daily Consunnption Stated in Total and Per
Capita.

1. In this illustration, the curves may be read from either of two different sets of coor-

dinate rulings. Using the horizontal ruled lines, we may read from the curves the
average total consumption per day. By reading from the slanting lines, the same
curves may be interpreted as the average consumption per capita per day.

2. The scheme of using two sets of coordinate rulings is a valuable one. The scale for

"million gallons per day" should, however, have been shown only at the left, with
the slanting line scale for "gallons per capita" placed in the right-hand margin for
the sake of clearness.

3. The scale for "gallons per capita" is shown in the second vertical zone of the grid.

Exhibit of thf Metropolitan Life Iniurance Company at the New York Worlds Fair, 103<)

B. Curve in Neon Lights on a Glass Grid Placed in Front of Three Related Curves
Painted on a Wall Surface.

1. Tubular form of the neon light lends itself particularly well to the making of illuminated

curve charts without limit in size. Colors are available to give contrast in super-
imposed curves. Consideration should be given to glare as lights may be too brilliant
for easy reading.

2. On the glass-ruled grid for the neon lights above it is unfortunate that the zero line of

the death rate was omitted.

3. For other methods of display, see "Displays and Exhibits," pages 486-493.

294

Chapter 36
COMPONENT PARTS SHOWN BY CURVES

IN THE chapters on "100% Bar Charts." pages 92-105, and
"Component Bar Charts," pages 132-141, the method of show-
ing component parts in bar chart form is illustrated. The charts in
this chapter present the same type of information in the form of
curves.

Other terms used for charts in which component parts are shown
by curves are percentage charts, band charts, 100% band charts,
percentage band charts, and surface charts. The terms "100% band
chart," "percentage chart," and "percentage band chart," designate
only those charts in which material is presented qn the basis of
100%. See 297B, 299B. and 300. The terms "surface chart" and
"band chart" may be used when referring to either of the two
charts shown on page 300.

Pfdfral Rfservc Bank of New York. "Monthly
Review," July 1. 1037. SCALE .7

A. Reserve Balance of Banks in the
New York Federal Reserve Bank
District from 1932 to 1937.

1. In a curve chart, showing component

parts, it is possible to plot the
totals of several groups of figures
and the parts of which the total
is composed.

2. In order to show rulings in a solid

black or cross-hatched area, white
ink is extremely useful. The white
lines may be drawn after the area
is completely filled in with ink.

Alexander Hamilton Institute. N. Y C . ' Busi-
ne<.s Conditions Weekly." July 2S. 1').18

SCALE 6

8. Employment and Unemployment in
the United States from 1929 to
1938.

1. Because it probably was desired to em-

phasize the unemployed, the divi-
sion of the total supply of workers
representing the unemployed was
put in black ink.

2. Note that the total supply of workers

increases each year, due no doubt
to the increase in population

COMPONENT PARTS SHOWN BY CURVES

295

1900

1910

1920

1930

1940

U S Department of ARriculturc. Bureau of Agricultural Economics. SCALE 8

Approximate Acreage of Crops Harvested and of Pasturage to Feed Horses and
Mules in the United States from 1900 to 1936.

Brackets may be utilized for grouping in a number of ways. Compare this with 96A.

296

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

WPA and Bureau of Agricultural Economici, "Rural Poverty." 1938.

SCALE .8

A. Expenditures for Direct Rural and Town Relief in the United States from 1932
to 1937.

1. Because the CWA and WPA reduced the number of persons receiving direct relief, ex-

penditures during these two periods were affected.

2. The division of the total into parts shows that public relief has been reduced since the

beginning of 1935, and that another form of direct relief has increased.

"The Federal Chart Book," Prepared by Central Statittical Board and National Resources Committee,
January 1938.

B. Population in the United States by Size of "Conrimunity" from 1890 to 1930.

1. Each incorporated place is a separate "community." The use of a heavy line to repre-

sent the total emphasizes the fact that the lines below it arc merely divisions.

2. See 93 A4.

COMPONENT PARTS SHOWN BY CURVES

297

MILLIONS OF PERSONS
50

AO —

}0 '

^O' * o ^--^^'c

-,, ^\>-r--^vv\^^v

,-^ V X -■ Cmp/oyeea in Distribution Sarvice .^ t x ." o ;" • c>\; ,-' ^ ^"^>.

1929 1930 I9?i I9?2 19?? I9M 1935 19)6 I9?7 19^8

U. S. Dfpartmcnt of Commfrcc. Division of Economic Resrarch, "Survfy of Current Business," July 1938.

A, Total Non-Agricul+ural Employment in the United States from 1929 to 1938.

1. When the labels for the various sections of a component-part curve chart are indicated

within the section, an attempt should be made to keep the labels on a horizontal
plane.

2. Note the position of the label for the "total" line.

Dun's Rrview. August 1938

B. Percentage Distribution of Strike Issues in the United States from 1927 to 1937.

The 100% band chart is similar in principle to the charts which contain a series of 100%
bars. See 102B.

298

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

^IRCKNT

100
80

60
50
40

*■

—

„^^

fc.

RA
RF

rFi

}AD
5T,5

■^

■1

^^^

■«>

■^

1^"

KIICtNT

100
80

60
50
40

^ WI6 'tT 18 W 20 "21 "22 "23 '24 75 26 "27 28 "29 '30 31 32 '33 '34 '35 '36 1937
Automobile Manufacturers Association, "Automobile Facts and FiRures," 1038.

A. Comparison of the Percentage of Receipts from Marketing Livestock by Truck
and by Railroad in the United States from 1916 to 1937.

The reason for including this chart in this chapter was to show a hundred per cent chart
in another form. In any one year the total of the values of the two curves is 100%.
See 299A.

SURFACE CHARTS CAN OFTEN BE USED SUCCESSFULLY:

1. To add emphojis to a chart which might appear weak as a line
chort.

2. To emphosize "omount" as against "ratio."

3. To picture "point" data as distinguished from "period" data Isee
definitions — poge 9).

4. To show components of o total, especially a percentage distribu-
tion.

5. To present a general picture as ogoinst exoct measurement.
SURFACE CHARTS NORMALLY SHOULD NOT BE USED:

1. Where accurate reading of values is desired, in the case of more
than one component.

2. For coses where irregular layers will unduly distort the contours
of the others aL>ove it.

3. Where chonges in the series are abrupt, causing opticol dis-
tortion of the width of the slroto.

Construction

1. LAYOUT AND DESIGN In generol, the principles and procedures
ore the same as for line chorts.

2. GRIDS As o surface chart is rarely used for the accurate determino-
tion of values, few horizontal rulings ore necessary. They generally
serve merely os bases of comparison. Surface charts ore generally
more effective with relatively few vertical rulings. Minor time divisions
can, in such coses, be indicated by means of stubs on the horizontal
Kole.

COMPONENT PARTS SHOWN BY CURVES

299

A. Percentage Distribution of Three
Types of Gasoline Feed in En-
gines fronn 1910 to 1918.

The total of the figures at the right-hand
edge of the chart is 100%. as
commented in 286.

"Automotive Induitrict," January 3, 1418.

SCALE 6

3. SCALE SELECTION. Since surfaces ore built up (rom the zero line
or other line of relerence, the oitiount scale should never be broken.
Multiple amount scales ore not opplicoble to this type of presentation.

4. SCALE DESIGNATIONS. In general, the principles ond procedures
ore the some as lor line charts.

5. SURFACES Surloces should be so shoded os to present a pleasing,
even tone. In stroto charts the layers should be so shoded as to be
easily distinguished. The weight and spocing of the lines and dots of
the shading ore important; both should be determined from a con-
siderotion of the size of the areas to be shoded end amount of reduc-
tion intended Proiected surfaces may be indicated by lighter shoding
of the some type as illustrated at the right.

THE FOLLOWING SHADINGS ARE SUGGESTED:

lal Block (solid) for generol use for purposes of emphosis. It should
be used with discretion, however, and usually not for large
oreos. In stroto charts the lowest layer should be the most im-
portoni and therefore generally requires the heaviest shading
(usually block).

Ibl Crosshotch Sfiodmg* of o relatively dork lone, is often used in
place of block for large oreas. A light Crosshatch is often useful
for small layers of o strata chart.

(c) Parallel Line Shading* may be used lor large or small surfoces.
The lines should not porollel any opprecioble length of the curves
end vertical or horizontal shading is not recommended as it may
be confused with grid rulings.

(dl Doited Shading (pebbled or stippled) is particularly useful for
narrow layers of a stroto chart.

6. SURFACE DESIGNATION. Lobels should generally be pieced entirely
within their respective surfaces If the surface is too smoH to permit
this, o lobel may be placed entirely outside ond related to the sur-
foce by meons of on arrow. Keys should not be used if direct lobielmg
is possible. However, the spoce about labeU should be reduced as
much OS possible to ovo<d loo great contrast.

7. SURFACE CHART DESIGNATIONS. In general, the principles ond
procedures ore the same as for line charts.

* Crosshotch ond oorolt«t line shod<ng should b« drown ot o 45 d«ore«
ongi« Shoding constructed with v«rticol or horizontal lines is rtot recom*
mended lo< surlocc chorts.

300

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

TOTAL B T U EQUIVALENT CONSLKtO

»^^ 2» ■?« -x

PERCENT OF TOTAL B T U EQUIVALENT CONSUMED

<m 1* at 10

WPA, National Research Project, "Fuel Efficiency in Cement Manufacture," April 1938.

Total Energy Consumed in Hydraulic Cennent Manufacture by Types of Energy in
the United States from 1909 to 1935.

When component parts are presented in curve charts and if space will allow, it is desirable
to use two charts, one showing quantities and the other showing percentages. The
above charts illustrate the reason.

301

Chapter 37
INDEX NUMBERS SHOWN BY CURVES

in a chart showing index numbers, 100 is used as the basis of
comparison. In computing index numbers, one item or the average
of several consecutive items is represented as 100. All other items
are expressed as percentages of the base.

Index numbers are computed and published by the U. S. Bureau
of Labor Statistics, the Federal Reserve Board, the U. S. Depart-
ment of Commerce, Dun and Bradstreet's, and many other statis-
tical organizations.

REFERENCES
Brown, Theodore H., Richmond F. Bingham, and V. A. Tem-
nomeroff, Laboratory Handbook of Statistical Methods, Mc-
Graw-Hill Book Company, Inc., New York, 1931

»!••» -21 11 13 14 IS •» -27 ■» •» -JO ^l -il -JJ -M-JJ 1*

Fcdrral Rctervc Bank of New York, "Monthly
Review," January 1, 1937. SCALE .6

A. Index of General Production and
Trade in the United States from
1919 to 1936. 1923-25 Aver-
age Equals 100%.

In index numbers, one figure is selected at
100% and all others are expressed
as percentages of that figure. In
this chart the average for the years
from 1923 through 1925 was se-
lected as the base figure or 100%.

1929 1930 1931 1932 1933 1934 1935 1936

Federal Reserve Bank of New York, "Monthly
Review," March 1, 193 7. SCALE .7

B. Indexes of Volume of Agricultural
and Non-Agricultural Exports in
the United States from 1929 to
1936. 1923.25 Average Equals
100%.

It is better to have both the 100% line
and the zero line heavier than the
others in an index-number chart.

302

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

-i — I — r—i — I — I — I — I — i — I — r

-I — I — I — \ — \ — I — I — I — ' — I — r-
Price Barometer of Profits

(1910= 100)

Income

Alexander Hamilton Institute. "Business Conditions Weekly." July 2J. 1<»38.

A. Price Barometer of Profits in the United States from January 1937 to July 1938.

The crossing of two lines often creates areas which can be labelled. Compare the shadmg
of these two areas with 283.

* SEASONAL AVERAGE PRICE TO CKOIVERS

U S Department of ARricuIture. Bureau of ARricultural Economics SCALE b

B. Comparison of the Indexes of Production, Total Value, and Price of Seventeen
Vegetables for Fresh Market in the United States from 1919 to 1936.

In curve charts, when a number of curves are plotted on the same grid and when a num-
ber of curve patterns are used, it is better to have the curves labelled as they are
here than to have a boxed legend or key to identify them.

INDEX NUMBERS SHOWN BY CURVES

303

INIXX XUMBtM Ivn-KK)

l«M l»» l»V >9yi nfi !?>« I«» r»>6 l»)7

U S Drpnttmfiit of Commerce. Division of Eco-
nomic Rrscarch, "Survey of Current Busi
nr%5 June l'»38 SCALE <>

A. Indexes of Income Paid Out by
Type of Paynnent in the United
States from 1929 to 1937. 1929
Equals 100%.

1. Till' thfcjry of index numbers is clearly

demonstrated in this chart. Since
the hgurcs for 1929 are equal to
100%, every curve begins at the
same point in 1929.

2. In choosing a base year, care should

be taken to select one which is rep-
resentative, and devoid of "high
peaks" or "low valleys."

3. For another method of presenting this

material, sec 114A.

Per Cent

105

▲

100

«N

•^

^^^

____^

Quarters

100 Per Cent

3 4

1914

2 3
1915

2 3
1916

Leonard P Ayrcs

B. Method Developed in Washington, D. C, During the World War to Keep
Track of British Ship-Building.

The blue lines going up show the new tonnage built in each three months' period. The

black lines going down show the tonnage sunk. Thus at the end of any quarter.

it was possible to ascertain the gains and losses, as well as the total remaining.
One hundred per cent equals British seagoing steam vessels at the beginning of the war.

This consisted of 18.892,089 gross tons, plus 72S.500 seized from the Germans and

Austrians.

304

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

I9t6 1917 I9te 1919 1920 1921 r922 1923 1924 I92S 1926 1927 1928 1929 1930 1931 i932 r933 1934 1935 r93( t937

The Magazine of Wall Street, November 20, 1937.

A. Changes in Major Connmodity Price Group in fhe United States from 1916
to November 1937.

The technique of putting the detail for the last year under a magnifying glass is good.

eso

PncM

tfht

ISO

100
80

Piot

■Old

yiT'

}

•

. .

250

ISO

100

"T"

Pnew

WPA ,Tnd Bureau of ARricuIturnl Economics. 'Rur.nl Poverty." 1038. SCALE .7

B. Prices Paid and Prices Received by Farmers in the United States 1910-1937.
For Prices Paid the Average Year August 1 910- 1 9 14 Equals 100%. For
Prices Received the Average Year August 1909-1914 Equals 100%.

Since the chronoloRical scale from 1910 to 1937 is by years and the scale for 1937 is by
months, the latter is presented as if it were a separate chart. Compare this with
304A and 285C.

INDEX NUMBERS SHOWN BY CURVES

305

•((.LIONS
V OOLLAM

TOTAL EXPORTS

"The Federal Chart Book," Prepared by Central Statistical Board and National Resources Committee.
January 1938. SCALE .7

Total Exports and Imports of the United States Compared with the Index of Physi-
cal Volume of Exports from 1919 to 1937.

1. To add meaning to numerical values, a comparison with index numbers is often useful.

The insertion of the small index number chart in the space at the upper right
shows one method of accomplishing this.

2. Note the method of breaking the grid to indicate an omission of a period of years.

3. See 93 A4.

306

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

WPA. and Burrau of Acncultural Economics. "Rural Poverty." l')38.

SCALE 7

A. Trends of Expenditures for Relief in the United States fronn 1932 to December
1936.

When a broad line is used for a curve, the point in the middle of the line is the plotted
point. If great accuracy is desired, a thin line should be used. The advantage of
a thick line is that it is easily seen from a distance.

ISO

12$

125

A _*

Noi

^ -^

10?

7»'

V ^

V* .

-1

1 J

.v„

•21

•22

•2.1

•24

•a

•26

•27

•28

•29

•30

•.11

•32

•.XI

•.1

•3.";

•36

•37

•38

B. Steel Production in the United States from 1921 to 1938. 1926 Equals 100%.

This chart shows concretely that the average for the base period actually averages 100%
on the chart. Sec also 302B.

INDEX NUMBERS SHOWN BY CURVES

307

MOCX NUMBint, HI6H MONTH Of i«s;>ioo

National Industrial Confrrcnoc Board. Inc , November 2S. 1038

SCALE 7

Depression and Recovery in the United States for the Years 1937 and 1938.

1. The most interesting feature of this chart is that the high month of 193 7 is equal

to 100% in each of the six charts. The result is that each curve has a different
base figure.

2. The lowest point from that date to the date when the data were last available was

designated the end of the depression period. As a result, there is a variation in
the date at which the depression period supposedly ends in each of the six charts.

308

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

m-i

/v. ,.-^'r\i

-1

* — «

Lf^

\/i

' V

m mt m m nonnnBHniKTononifaonaifatifuitstnimt

U. S. Department of Labor, Bureau of Labor StatUtici, "Labor Information Bulletin," April 1936.

A. Physical Volume of Industrial Production in the United States fronn 1919 to
1936. 1923-25 Average Equals 100%.

Compare with B below.

INDUSTRIAL PRODUCTION

(PER CAPITA)

Magazine of Wall Street, January 29, 1938.

SCALE 7

B. Per Capita Industrial Production in the United States fronn 1875 to 1938.
1923-25 Average Equals 100%.

This silhouette is different from most m that the grid above the plotted line is eliminated.
Compare this chart with A above and 2 73.

INDEX NUMBERS SHOWN BY CURVES

309

Yearly Output of Four Important
Industries in the United States
from 1919 to the Middle of
1936. Relative to 1923-25 Aver-
age.

Noti- the- use of iirruws lo imlu-ntr tin-
scale applii'iiblr tu tlic ilata.

The reas«)ii (or prisj-ntmj; this mate-
rial in 'his form was no doubt to
avoid crossing the curves. Com-
pare tJus nuthoil with .U)JA.

Fr.lci

Kurtvr Blink of New
w ■■ Aiimi»t 1. l'JJ6.

York, ••Monthly

INDCXtS or INDUSTRIAL PRODUCTION

MCTAL INDU5TRIC3

1921 l^^^ nzi I9^■^ i925 l^^6 isz' on i929 i9J0

Brown Bineham. ami TrmnomrroH. ' Laboratory Handbook of Statistical Methods/' McGraw-Hill, 1931.

B. An Example of a Multiple Axis Graph.

1. It has been noted that when a multiple scale is used on an arithmetic chart, all scales
must have a common zero line. When the data are chant; ed to index numbers, it
is possible to arrange the curves on a multiple axis; that is, each curve fluctuates
around its own base, or 100, and can be moved farther from or closer to other
curves without distorting the facts presented.

2 The purpose of this arrangement is to facilitate comparisons of the time and ampli-
tude changes in the curves.

310 ■

■|i

■||

Chapter 38
FREQUENCY CHARTS

■ HE charts in this chapter present data showing frequenoy dis-
tribution. The most common bases of classification or arrange-
ment are according to kind, size, location, or time of occur-
rence. Other terms that may be applied to this type of chart are
histogram, distribution chart, and block diagram. When the curve
in a frequency chart assumes the shape of a bell, it may be called
a bell curve chart.

250

200

8 II 14 17 20 23 26 29 32 35

to to to to to to to to to end

II 14 17 20 23 26 29 32 35 mort
Income in tt^ousonds of dollars

WPA Division of Social Rrscirrh. "L.Tndlortl and Tenant on ttif Cotton Plantation." IQJ6.

Distribution of Total Gross Income of 645 Cotton Plantations in the United States
in 1934.

A frcqiit'ncy chart is a distribution accordinn to certain catcnorics. In this chart the cate-
Horifs arc income groups. The first bar represents the number of cotton plantations
in the United States with an income less than $2,000 a year, while the last bar
represents the number of plantations with an income of $35,000 or more.

Ill

III

FREQUENCY CHARTS

MACHINE OPERATORS

PERC£NT or TOTAL PCRCLNT OF TOT AL

III

311

16-19 20-24 25-34 35-44 45-54 55-64

AGE GROUPS

HAND CIGAR MAKERS

PERCENT OF TOTAL
35

PERCENT OF TOTA L
135

20-24 25-34 35-44 45-54 55-04 85 AND

ON/FR

AGE GROUPS

WPA National Rrsrarrh Projcrt. CiKar M;ikrr» — Aftrr thr Lay-off." Dfccm»>*r 1Q37 SCALE 9

Age of Machine Operators in Cigar Factories and Hand Cigar Makers in the
United States as of July 1931.

1. A comparison of these two frequency charts indicates that machine operators are rela-
tively much younger than hand cigar makers.

i. The notation of the median age means that there are as many men younger than 26
working as machine operators as there arc men older than 26.

Ill

III

312

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

Male

Female

WPA, Diviiion of Social Rcsfarch. "Urban Workers on Relief," 1936.

SCAI.E 9

Duration of Unemployment Since Last Non-Relief Job of Unemployed Workers on
Relief in May 1934 by Socio-Economic Group of Usual Occupation in the
United States.

Note that the total of the bars representing any one group, such as female unskilled work-
ers, is equal to 100 per cent.

FREQUENCY CHARTS

313

400
350
300
250
200
150

too

400
350
300
250
200
150
100
50

>•

Frequency polygor
1 from data ^

ft.

Curve obtained fro
first smoothing

(Jurve obtained from
y' second smoothing i

V-

1 1 1 1
Curve obtained from

fornr

all

reqi

lenc

y cu

rve

second smoothing J
1 1 i» 1 /

\yr'

UN0ER2 4-5

89 1213 16 17 20-21 24 25 28 29 32 33 36 37
COUNTIES YIELD-PER-ACRE GROUPS.IN BUSHELS

U S. Dcparttiwnt of Acriculturc, Burrau of Acricultural Economics.

SCALE .8

Distribution of 2,412 Counties in the United States Into Wheat Yield-per-acre
Groups.

This shovwT the three steps in securing a frequency curve.

314

III

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

■|i

HUMDRCDS
OF CARS

MAY JUNE JULY AUG. SEPT. OCT.

Rrtlrawn from n Chart liy Biirrnu of AKririiltural Economic*. U. S. IDcpt. of ARriculturc. SCALE 8

Average Weekly Carload Shipments of Peaches in the United States by States.

1. The average is of the years 1927-19.^0.

2. The copy from which this was redrawn was a photostat, and it was redrawn because

the base lines of some of the charts were wavy. After the chart was finished, it
was found that there was a definite optical illusion. When the chart is viewed
from a distance, notice that the base lines seem to hump at the point where the
bars arc the highest.

Ill

ill

III

Ill

III

FREQUENCY CHARTS

■|i

315

- 10

^ 30

16-17
- ytort o» og« am-

— ■Iili

18-19 I

ftOfi of 09« ■

20-21
yeort o( oge '

^■ti

■ ■ ■ I

22-24
yeors of oqe '

LLt

[

JLJL-M.

htow 1-3 4-5 6 7 8 9 10
Grode school and high school

OPEN COUNTRY - Grode completed

2 3
College

16-17
years of oge

6-17 ■

rs of oge ■

zidtulxx^

18-19
20 [- yeors of oge

■ 1 ■ I l^-rrl

20
10

20-21
years of oge

1_I_I

Jml

22-24
yeors of oge

T^ITI

!_■_&

None 1-3 4-5 6 7 8 9 10 II 12
Grode school and high school

VILLAGE - Grode completed

■^ ^0

12 3 4
College

WPA. Divifion of Social Research. "Rural Youth on Relief." 1037.

SCALE 9

Grade Completed by Out-of-School Rural Youth on Relief, by Age and by Resi-
dence, in the United States, October 1935.

This may indicate a lower percentage of college graduates on relief, or only a lower per-
centage of college graduates in the community.

Ill

316

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

St o

5!?

H ^

•V

c
u

C
>

C
<D

—>

•o

u
a

a>
u

00
CD

« ^«2 u

u a>

< ■?

6 IS

i «

5 -O

1 :?

d) u

2 CL

o Of

^ u

C 0)

o -^

^ ^

>.-

■^

(/»

z: J3

^ 2-

i; 2 -. J=

>2 " "5 z:

., « CD (/»

*> 3

•C i

Q -

FREQUENCY CHARTS

317

HALF-YEARLY INTERVALS. JULY 1933 -JULY 1935

0f^ y<Kt 0Ot)o«ort

0P(ftittrl»On« ©Oijlnel o( Colun*w ©Aiobomo
@Wnl Virqmio @Aikcnsos

(|)Ncrin Co'Dii'va

®Sg>k>> Conttno @Oiar>oma

WPA. Division of Social Research, "Trends in Relief Expenditures. 1910-1935." 1937.

Percent of Population Receiving Relief, by States, fronn the General Relief Pro-
grann, F.E.R.A., from July 1933 through July 1935.

1. If this chart is turned so that the left side becomes the base line, the similarity be-

tween it and other frequency charts is more easily seen.

2. The shaded areas and the use of numbers to give a key to the states are good tech-

niques.

318 ■

III

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

■!■

■■ UCDIAN, BWKAU OF STAHOAffOS
• SM-A^y or Ott Of HJODC IMXvmMLS

ontp cu»f3i tA/tm^Gs or CNc»€)a»c auaMJB, auLUVN a

ISOOO

14000

13000

12000

IIOOO

10000

90O0

aooo

7000

5000

4000

3000

2000

lOOO

t
/

' /

—

•

1 '

■^

• •

•

^■■^

'']

• * ^^

• •

; •

'^—^m

• •

•

^orumiiuiL

Mzsficf>a

•

1
^{JPP£H BOUNDAffir Of It

•

'CPCCMT

•

• •

to 15 20 25 30

YEARS AFTER GRADUATION

35 40 45 30

WaihiriKton, D. C Section of the A.S.M.E., "The Economic Status of Enninecrs in the Federal Service,"
Mechanical EngineerinK, February 1930.

Comparison of the Salaries of the Professional Staff of the National Bureau of
Standards in August 1928 With the Salaries of Persons Holding the Same
Type of Position Outside the Federal Service.

The 5 curves labelled as follows: "lower boundary of maximum 10 per cent," "lower
boundary of maximum 25 per cent," "median," "upper boundary of minimum 25
per cent," and "upper boundary of minimum 10 per cent" refer to the distribution
of persons in a similar occupation outside the Federal Service. Only the heavy
line represents salaries in the Federal service, as indicated by the key.

■Il

III

FREQUENCY CHARTS

■!■

319

A. Distribution of the Causes of Ac-
cidents in Hartford, Conn.

Compare this method of showing the dis-
tribution of the causes of acci-
dents with that used in 190A.

Travelers Insuranrr Co . Hartford. Conn

SCALE 7

Burni. "The Decline of Competition." McGraw-Hill, 1936 (Source: Federal Trade Commitsion Price
Baies. Inquiry). SCALE .7

B. Net Yields on the Sale of 2.350 Carloads of Cement to Five Minneapolis Line
Lumber Companies at 2 1 Destinations in Minnesota, Iowa, and North and
South Dakota Between July I, 1927 and June 30, 1929.

1. Each dot represents one carload of cement. Dots in the area marked "one price sys-

tem" represent sales at prices yielding to the mill its "then current maximum mill
net price."

2. Dots in successive outer zones represent sales yielding less than the mill's maximum

mill net by an amount within the range of cents indicated within each zone on
the chart. The guide for cents per zone is shown in the South Dakota section.

320

Chapter 39
CORRELATION CHARTS

THE purpose of correlation charts is to indicate the degree and
type of relationship between variables. One form of correlation
chart, the scatter diagram, also called the gun-shot or shot-gun
chart and buck-shot chart, sometimes indicates that there is no
relationship between two variables. See the chart below.

( 4tfir tu^Kidtf t

IT"

vuit votuui itn - TMOtnANM of ook.iu\

Dun't Review, August 1938. SCALE .7

The Increase or Decrease of Sales for the Period 1935-37 for Individual Retail
Stores in the United States According to Sales Volunne in 1935.

According to the comments in Dun's Review, the wide scatter of individual cases
indicates a "growth tendency in favor of small concerns" rather than indicating
that "all large stores had built sales volume more rapidly than the small ones."

It should be noted that the vertical rulings are logarithmic.

The limited number of vertical and horizontal rulings was intentional -that is, they
were limited to make it easy for the reader to notice the lack of pattern of the dots.

CORRELATION CHARTS

321

. The Development of Electrical Ad-
vertising as Revealed by the
Number of Watts Usea per
Inhabitant in 143 Cities in the
United States in 1922.

This scatter chart is supplemented by
an average hne secured by com-
putation.

The lack of pattern here indicates that
there is little correlation between
the two variables.

Aggregate population of the 143 cities
was 6,300,000. The average of
3 1/3 watts per inhabitant was
weighted according to population,
not according to the number of
cities.

■Hill

~i"

•

._llil«k

' •

•

. .

•1

" '

• .•

• '.

.^^

L •

• ,

roruLATio,

1 1

« o» c

National Electric Light Association Bulletin, Feb.
1923.

CENTS

PER
BUSHEL

150

100

'28

PRICES ADJUSTED FOR LEVEL OF INCOMES OF
INDUSTRIAL WORKERS (l924-29= tOO)

300 320 340 360 380 400 420

PRODUCTION PLUS NET IMPORTS OR MINUS NET EXPORTS

(BUSHELS. MILLIONS)

U S Department of Agriculture. Bureau of Agricultural Economics. SCALE .9

B. The Relation of Adjusted Farm Price of Potatoes to Production in the United
States from 1921 to 1936.

1. Since the scattered dots form a pattern, the relation of production to price can be
determined. As the production of potatoes increases, the price per bushel goes
down.

2. Compare this way of presenting relationships with the form shown in 282A.

322 ■

III

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

■||

(/)rgrrr> Fahrrnhelt : tnchr$t

ANNUAL

■

•d

60*

7rf

TOT

°o o

*o'x

2 erf

♦ A

erf

A o * A x* X O

« "^A A^ AA»« X
A A A ^♦X. x""

5rf

*• • i w >.

**. A

50'

AA
Ox A

ivj**

x"^*/

4rf

'*3 O

/ /a

X ♦ *
X

4rf

o oo

XAX OA,

" X *

1/^

.if-* '

10 IS 20

PRECIPITATION

O I

I ■ ■

(two months
o

A
A

*■ Hifh. 20 bushtis tnd orw
X Supvior 140-199 buthtlt
A Modtl 10 0-I3 9buthtlt
O loir unOtr 100 bulhUl

70*

eo'

o °

O o
O

♦

AA*

O X

A° t A

"A
O

A O
,aO o Of <

^* Avi

A VC^^'^ ♦ »
♦^JAO^W"-*

' A "

A . A» , g 4

* A^X +°°xx ,

O X

If X ,

■

: .*f f •

" A
X +' *

X^ A X

•

X A

A ♦

;?°'

PRECIPITATION

Stanford University. Palo Alto, California, "Wheat Studies of the Food Research Institute," March. 193 7

SCALE .7

Distribution of 209 World Wheat Areas According to Annual and Pre-Harvest
Precipitation and Tennperature.

I. The most strikinR feature of this chart is the concentration of "high" and "superior"
yields of wheat within the middle ranges of annual and pre-harvest precipitation
and of annual temperature.

1. Of the 60 areas characterized by an annual precipitation of less than 20 inches, only
18 had long-time average yields of wheat above 14 bushels. These 18 are dry-
farming areas in Canada and the western United States.

•Il

III

CORRELATION CHARTS

■||

323

a:
<

o
o

(/)

300 —

FOUR SMALL CITIES IN OREGON AND WASHINGTON

FOOD HOUSING

^50 600 750 1000

AUTOMOBILE

ZOO 400 6O0

— 300

123 250 373 SOO

RECREATION

50 100 130 200

FOUR COUNTIES IN PENNSYLVANIA AND OHIO
PERSONAL CARE HOUSEHOLD OPERATION

50 100 150 aoo

MEAN IN DOLLARS

Dorothy S. Brady. "Variations in Family LivinK Expenditures." Journal of thr American Statiitiral
Association. Junr 19J8.

Standard Deviations of Fannily Expenditures in Relation to The Mean in Four Small
Cities in Oregon and Washington, and Four Counties in Pennsylvania and
Ohio, 1935-1936.

324

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

CENTS

PER
BUSHEL

140
120
100

80
60
40

(A)

•
•27

•34

• •
•31 '33

••32

30 40 50 60 70 80 90

PRODUCTION OF SWEETPOTATOES ( MILLIONS OF BUSHELS)

100

DEVIATION
FROM A

-20
-40
-60
-80

(B) '

^^23

■27

•

•
•30

1924

•

•
33

•
•31

'34

•
32

280

300 320 340 360 380 400 420

PRODUCTION OF POTATOES ( MILLIONS OF BUSHELS)

440

90 100 no 120 130 140 150

INDEX OF FOOD PRICES (AV. JULY-JUNE; I9IOI9I4'IOO )

160

SCALE 8

U. S. Department of ARriculturc, Bureau of AKricultural Economics.

The Relation of Sweetpotato Prices to Sweetpotato Production, Potato Production,
and to Index of Food Prices in the United States from 1924 to 1934.

1. The small number of dots in these charts makes it possible to put the year which

each represents beside the dot.

2. Note that the center chart shows deviation from the data in the first one, and the

last one shows deviation from the center one.

CORRELATION CHARTS

325

WAGE EARNER FAMILIES OF —
CHICAGO DENVER

,'^

too

T»ir2«

ItZX

100

y-27

4- I02X

CLOTMINO

PCRSOMAL CA,RE

•y

Y. 8+.

>I7 X

V- 6 +

oirx

OirTS AMD TAXES

KOO JOCO 40CO KOOO 1000 tOOO

rCAHiy INCOME

tto

ISO

lOO

'^^^^

Y»

-2I+04IX

D. H. Kaplan, "Expenditure Patterns of Urban Families,
ciation. March 1938

Journal of the American Stmtiitical Asso-
SCALE 8

Straight Line Fitted to Average Expenditures in Relation to Family Income in
Wage-Earner Families of Chicago, Illinois, and Denver, Colorado, in 1935-
1936.

1. Because wage levels generally run lower in Denver, the data for Denver wage earners

stops at $3,000 while the data for Chicago runs to $5,000. Approximately thirty
families were sampled for each dot or income band on the charts.

2. The method of reading these charts is as follows: in Chicago, a wage-earner family

whose income was in the $1,000 to $1,200 income band would spend about $420
for food, while in Denver, a family with the same income would spend about $390.
While $420 was spent by the Chicago family for food, only $90 was spent for
clothing.

326

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

txKPtoiTimes

in OOLLtRS

s,ooo

ex^MoiTimes

IN DOLLARS
3,000

4.000 -

SfiOO

t.ooo -

4,000

t.ooo 3,000

INCOME n OOLLA/tS

- 3,000

A. D. H. Kaplan. "Expenditurr Patterns of Urban Families," Journal of the American Statistical Asso-
ciation. March 1938. SCALE .9

Expenditure Pattern of Wage-Earner Families in Chicago, Illinois, in 1935-36.

1. It should be noted that these lines are cumulative. The line numbered 5 represents

on the expenditure scale the amount spent for 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. The difference
between 4 and 5 is the amount spent for "fuel, light, and refrigeration."

2. If line 17 is above 16, the families in that income band were not in debt at the end

of the year; if line 17 is below 16. the family income did not cover expenditures.

Ill

III

Ill

CORRELATION CHARTS

327

100

K SO

O 50

I-

E
< 30

N^^ •

"■'■■■

V-

• • "• !

' .. '.rii-

: '. : : :

V.^

•

^ ■j/'

"■/

•

;,;':'-

^ " ■i\.-

v:;;-;;;!;!

30 40 50 60

English Marks -

7o eo 9o too

iHUa oj W. (iamtU <n the Journal of the Koyal SlallsHcal Society. 1910

Brinton. Graphic Methods.' McGraw-Hill. 1014 SCALE Q

Examination Marks Obtained by 9,396 English School Girls in English and Arithmetic.

1. Each girl is represented by one dot showing the grade in English and the grade in

arithmetic. The dots are arranged uniformly inside squares formed by co-ordinate
lines spaced ten units apart.

2. The straight diagonal line drawn from zero shows equal ability in the two studies.

The heavy wavy line is drawn through points having an equal number of dot^
on cither side of the line. Its position indicates that girls generally have more
ability in English than in arithmetic.

Ill

328

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

r
ii:

. - r

■Bsa^'-

It* AttAMliC wcr>ON
I '"' ^'g...... Hi

»«.

TIO~

j^'o7r^*<Sti*'

r
1'

i 1

^ r^^ — 1 — 1

•a ■•

•• M

m» ..0

•• >M» tOM

<eoo toou >ooo 40

CO MM two

U S. Dcpartmfnt of Commerce. Bureau of Foreign and Domestic Commerce.

SCALE .5

A. Ratio of Estimated Market Value of Property January I, 1934, to Average
Annual Family Income for 1933, by Income Classes in Four Geographical
Divisions of the United States.

1. Five geographical divisions which were included in the original group have been

omitted.

2. The method of reading these charts is as follows: in the Pacific section, represented

by the four cities listed, the property of a family with an annual income of about
$1,200 would be equal in value to about three times the income.

200 40O aoo aoo ifoo vmo

Sales Volume i-n Thousapds of Dollare

Prior Sinclair, ' BudKetinR " The RohhIJ Pre»» Co.. N. Y C . 1937.

B. Profit Realization Chart.

V The profit realization chart is often referred to as a "break even" chart or a "profit-
graph."

2. The relation between sales volume and profit and loss is plotted in this simple profit
realization chart. The diagonal line shows the profit or loss in dollars at various
sales volume levels. The break-even point is at $1,200,000.

CORRELATION CHARTS

329

SAltS SCAU IN PlRCtNIACC

4*0 5SA M6 710

SCALt OF PERCENTAGES

Prepared hy E. S. La Ro«e, 1Q31 Year Book of the National Association of Cost Accountants, N. Y. C.

SCALE ,7

A. Profit Chart Showing the Relation of Sales and Profit.

1. This is a detailed version of 328B.

2. The two lines around which the others are plotted are the ones labelled "A" and "B"

at the lower left, which represent total income from sales and total cost of sales,
respectively. So long as "B" is above "A" there is a loss.

kl - IMlOOO
>. ' 140000 . .

°{ noooo.
o tooooo.

2 O
O 2

^ _ )M00O

u ^ I400OO. .*

G 5

£ tioooo
a o tooooo

it '°°°°

J - 40000.

< ^

_.i..

;r w*40ow cnspiAY cm

vLAYB m tAcH OF THE;i-iit>OKKirieY

Its- : . : . : : ! -::

r i:t IIQW fuE ACIUKO. eiR
i*CH or TWt LAROlUlTOItigci ■
! ES FRDMTHl! TRCUIUI II»t

:v;iNt otPBEJl MTca BY 'pit

1 .'

The Advertising Research Foundation. New York City. 1937.

SCALE .5

B. The Average Daily Circulation of the Number of Window Displays Required
to Obtain Normal Distribution in Various Cities.

The dots represent actual average daily window display circulation passing the normal
number of displays in each of the cities studied. It has been estimated that to
produce normal display distribution, the average daily window display circulation
passing a display should equal 50% of the population of the market. The curve
represents that theoretical 50%.

330

III

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

[ I r UMABSORBEO INVESTMENT

( I . ABSORBED INVESTMENT

pTH »C0NCt8SI0NAIRt'S CLEAR PROFIT
f^—^ ' CONCEStlONAIRE'S TOTAL PARTICIPATION
in* FAIR PARTICIPATION
^H < OPERATING COSTS

CRO*5-0V(R AT
19 MILLION
ADMIf SION0

14 MILLION
ADMISSIONS

28 MILLION
ADMISSIONS

40 MILLION
ADMISSIONS

New York World's Fair. l')3Q, Treasury Division, Methods and Planning Dept.

A. Break-down of Receipts in Percentages of the Ice Cream Stand at the New York
World's Fair, 1939.

1. This includes also soda fountains, and carbonated beverages.

2. The Fair participation basis is 11V4% at 14 million admissions, 20% at 28 million

admissions, and 35% at 40 million admissions.

/■

•

..'■

!?»

1 100

•&

3 "50

S LOO
S OM

2000 4000 MOO 80OO ICtOOO I7M) M^OO (^ WIOO XtOOO 17000 NOOO lUOO
NUMBER or WELLS

Joiei>h E PoRUc. "Eronomics of the Petroleum
Industry. •■ March IQ.JO. The Chase National
Bank of the City of New York. SCALE .6

B. Correlation Between Weighted Aver-
age Price of Crude Oil and (a)
Nunnber of Dry Holes Drilled
and (b) Number of Oil Wells
Drilled. Data Are by Years,
1915 to 1935.

The relation between the average price of
crude oil and the number of dry-
holes drilled may be used as an
index of wildcatting. The rela-
tion between the average price of
crude oil and the number of oil
wells drilled may be used as an
index of development effort.

Ill

Ill=l|l=l|l=l|l=l|l33,

Chapter 40
OGIVE AND LORENZ CHARTS

X he Ogive chart is also called a cumulative frequency curve. Its
definition is as follows: a frequency distribution in which "more
than" or "less than" data are presented. One scale of the grid
represents percentages and the other scale represents "more than"
or "less than" values.

NUMftER OF
FAMILIES

90,000,000

20,000,000

10,000,000

NUMftER OF FAMILIES RECEIVIN6 INCOMES OVER SPECIFIED AMOUNTS

Rrdrawn from Advertising and Selling, January 1917

Number of Families Receiving Incomes Over Specified Amounts in the United
States in 1916.

1. In reading the above chart the amount of the income is read by the scale at the

bottom of the diagram. The number of families is indicated by the scale at the
left-hand side.

2. If you wish to learn how many families are receiving an income of $1,500 and up-

wards, it is shown by the point where the curve crosses the middle vertical ruling
between the $1,000 and the $2,000 lines. This is found to be at 3,750.000 accord-
ing to the scale at the left. There are, therefore, approximately 3,750,000 families
that are receiving an annual income of $1,500. In the same way it is possible to
estimate that there arc 5,150,000 families that are receiving an income of $1,200.

lll = lll=lll=lll=lll

332

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

A Lorenz chart gives frequency distribution when both the vari-
able and invariable quantities are reduced to percentages. The
curve is plotted on a grid on which both the horizontal and the ver-
tical scales represent 100%.

100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10

—

11
11

•<

5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50
Waqe ner Week ,in Dollars

A. Actual Wage Distribution of 381.-
575 Workers in the United
States in 1917.

1. The dotted line in this chart repre-

sents the normal wage distribution
based on the average wage for
1917.

2. An "ogive" chart is better known as

a "more-than, less-than" chart.
Cumulative frequency data is
presented in such a curve.

Charles N. Young, "Creative Ability and Its
Compensation," Industrial Management, Janu-
ary 1920.

PER CENT
or TOTAL
PRODUCTION
Oft RUNS
100

. TC

»uc

TIO

I 2 J 4 $ 6 T e <) 10 II 17 13 14 IS 16 n 18 19 20 21 n U
NUMBER OF COMPANIES

Joseph E. Pogue, "Economics of the Petroleum Industry," March liJiQ, The Chase National Bank of
the City of New York.

B. Concentration of Production and Refining in the United States in 1937; Chart
Showing Cunnulative Percentages of National Totals Represented by Largest
Units.

OGIVE AND LORENZ CHARTS

333

Henry S. Dfnniton. "ManBBrmcnt and the Buiinets Cycle." Journal of the American StatUticnl Asso-
ciation. Washington. D C . March 1922. SCALE .8

A. Relation of Disbursements to Receipts from Sales in the Upward Swing of
the Business Cycle.

Brown. BinKham. and Tcmnomeroff . "Lafioratory Handbook of Statistical Methods." McGraw-Hill. 1931.

B. An Ogive Curve Plotted on Probability Paper to Determine the Probable Dis-
tribution of 100,000 Shirts According to Neck Measurements.

1. When an ogive curve is plotted on "probability" paper, assuming that the frequency

curve is symmetrical, the curve is in the form of a straight line. For this reason it
is possible to construct the curve for any particular problem with a small number
of observations.

2. For explanation 6f this chart, see 335.

111=111=111=111=111

334 ■ ^^^.,^.^ ■

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

TABLE A.
Neck Measurements of White Troops at Demobilization

Neck

Measurements,

Centimeters

Number
of Men

Upper Limit
of Class
Interval

Cumulative
Frequency

Cumulative

Frequency,

Per Cent

of Total

28.5-29.49

295

0.06

29-5-30.49

219

30.S

374

0.29

30.5-31-49

314

315

588

0.62

31.5 32.49

1. 133

32.5

1,721

1.81

32.5-33-49

4,286

335

6,007

6.32

33-5 34-49

".353

345

17,360

18.25

34-5-35-49

20,094

35-5

37,454

.^9-38

35-5-36.49

22,628

36.5

60,082

63.18

36.5-37-49

18,047

37-5

78,129

82.15

37-5-38.49

10,051

38.5

88,180

92.72

38.5-39-49

4,426

39-5

92,606

9738

39-5-40.49

1,716

40.5

94,322

99.18

40.5-41.49

492

41.5

94,814

99-70

41.5-42.49

147

42.5

94,961

99-85

42.5-43.49

43-5

95.013

99.91

43-5-44-49

44-5

95,036

99-93

44-5-45-49

455

95,058

99-95

45-5-46.49

46.5

95,075

99-97

46.5-47-49

475

95,091

99-99

47.5-48.49

48.5

95,096

99-99

48.5-49-49

49.5

95,102

100.00

95.102

Source: Reports of the Medical Department of the United States Army in the World War,
Vol. 15, Part I, page 538.

TABLE B.

Shirt Sizes

H. E. Mann, Incorporated

Shirt Bands,

Shirt-band Length

Less 3

Centimeters

Range of Neck
Sizes for Given

Inches

Centimeters

Shirt Sizes,
Centimeters

3302

30.02

29.4-30.69

I3h'

34-29

31.29

30.7-31.89

35-56

32.56

3i-«^33.i9

14V2

36.83

33-83

33.2-34.49

38.10

35-10

34-5-35-69

15 W

39.37

36-37

35-7-36.99

40.64

37.64

37.0-38.29

16' 2

41.91

38.91

38.3-39.49

43.18

40.18

39-5-40-79

17'2

44-45

41.45

40.8-42.09

45.72

42-72

42.1-43.39

Brown, Bifii;hiiiii. uiul Tcninomcroff, "Lal>oriitory HandtKwk of Statiitical Mcthodt," McGraw-Hill, 1431.

lll=lll=lll=lll=lll

OGIVE AND LORENZ CHARTS

335

TABLE A.

Determination of Number of Shirts

H. B. Mann, Incorporated

Shirt

Upper Limit of

Normal Cumula-
tive Frequency
Reading, Percent
of Total*

Normal Non-
cumulative

Number
of Shirts

Bands,

Shirt Band Range

Frequency,

Basis,

Inches

Centimeters

Per Cent of

100,000

Total Centered

Shirts

»3

30.7

o.at

200

13M

319

I.O

o.5t

500

33-2

5-4

4-4

4,400

14H

34-5

19.0

13.6

13.600

35-7

441

25.0

25,000

15H

370

72.1

28.0

28,000

38.3

90.6

18.5

18,500

i6i.i

39-5

98.0

8.4

8,400

40.8

i.ot

1,000

17H

42.1

o.3t

300

o.it

100

43-4

100,000

* This column has been read from graph.

t Frequencies at extreme ends of the curve cannot be determined from this probability
paper. Marked values have been roughly estimated to make the total approach 100%.

Brown. Bingham, and Temnomeroff, ■Laboratory Handbook of Statistical Methods," McGraw-Hill. lOJl.

The three tables on this page and page 334, and 333B were used in a hypothetical case
to figure out how to distribute 100,000 shirts according to neck sizes. The column
at the extreme right of the table above gives the distribution as determined by the
use of probability paper.

333B was plotted from the information in the extreme right column of the table 334A.
The third column (the one labelled "Normal Cumulative Frequency Reading, Per
Cent of Total) in the table above was read from 333B.

REFERENCES ON PROBABILITY PAPER

Haskell, Allan C, Graphic Charts in Business, Codex Book Co.,

Inc., New York, 1926.
Karsten, Karl G., Charts and Graphs, Prentice-Hall, Inc., New

York, 1923.
Whipple, George C, "The Element of Chance in Sanitation,"

Journal of The Franklin Institute, July and August, 1916.

lll=lll=lll=lll=lil

336

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

PERCENT

100

)ALE5

•1

• 1

• /

r 1

•

<:.<^

/
/

1
•

•
•
•
•

20 40 60 80 100

PERCENT NUMBER FIRMS

Redrawn from United States Department of Commerce. SCALE .9

Distribution of Wholesale Sales by Size of Firm for the United States According
to the 1930 Census.

1. The "line of equal distribution" is drawn in this Lorenz chart. The distance between

the curve and the diagonal indicates the degree to which the data is removed from
a perfectly uniform distribution. This feature statisticians call dispersion or scat-
teration.

2. If all firms for which data had been gathered were of the same size, the curve would

appear as a diagonal line. The degree of concentration among the large firms is
shown by the departure of the plotted curve from the diagonal, which is in this
case quite marked.

OGIVE AND LORENZ CHARTS

337

IWV

tlii^

P-^^

—- -

--^

^^' L^

_^''

'Li-i'^^'

^^tf^^^

^*^

':^-^

^^^

^"'

>^^^^

?^^

j^^4<

^^S^^"^

^*-

j-<^

t^^

-•^

^Xk

-^^-

-^^^

—

'* ^

z:^/^

y /.

/ y^!^

/ ^

-y^j-

/ /

^^/

* / -'

///

.?50

Y ^

/
/—

[/.0__

■ *— /

/ /

■

'^40

/ /

///

jT /

' / It

1="

/ ///

1 r ff J

'-Hrr

^30

iff

fr/

,?'

/ /

' &

■', — ^^ — ~'

Housotonic "
3onnec+iCLrt "
/Vesrl-field 1
at.John " ,

i-Mf*

1 lit/

imf

iff

!#/

Kenduskean "^

H 1

\ ' i

X \

3 (

11 12

Number of Months

Engineering News-Record. March 20. 1919.

Distribution of Annual Run-off of Seven New England Rivers in a 12-Months' Period.

The method of reading this curve chart is as follows: at the end of six months, or 50%
of the time period, there had been 82% of the total annual run-off of the St. John
River. If the distribution was the same for every month, at the end of six months
50% only would have run off.

REFERENCES:

Lorenz, M. O., "Methods of Measuring the Concentration of
Wealth," Publications of the American Statistical Asso-
ciation, Vol. IX, 1905. This issue of the Journal is so
limited that the American Statistical Association cannot
sell it. However, it is available in most libraries.

338

i|i=iii=iii=iii=i|i

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

PERCENT OF TOTAL NUMBER OF STORES

U. S. Department of Commerce, Bureau of ForeiRn and Domestic Commerce, "Small Scale Retailing,"
1938.

Correlation of Proprietors and Nunnber of Retail Stores in the United States in 1933.

1. Because this chart is plotted on probability paperj the "line of equal distribution"

assumes an "s" shape rather than a straight line.

2. It is clear from this chart that the number of proprietors of retail stores correlates

closely with the number of stores. The figures and curves show that nearly 33 per
cent of all stores are operated by nearly 35 per cent of the proprietors — who
operate stores of less than $3,000 annual volume.

When certain series of observations showing frequency data are
plotted on arithmetic probabiHty paper, the points do not fall in a
straight line, but in a curve. Plotted on probability paper with a
logarithmic scale as the ordinate, the points may fall approximately
in a straight line or a gentle curve. In order to benefit from the use
of probability paper, it is not necessary that the plotted points fall
exactly in a straight line. If the curve is so gentle and uniform that
it may be extended beyond the limits of the plotted points, it will
usually be found sufficient.

Sources of Arithmetic and Logarithmic Probability Paper:
Codex Book Co., Norwood, Massachusetts.
Educational Exhibition Co., Providence, Rhode Island.

ili=ili=ili=ili=ili

RATIO CHARTS, for idrnlifirr
Cro«« lmr« i|>iii-r rloirr
As you l(M>k hichcr.

Chapter 41
RATIO CHARTS

339

^^ ratio chart is designed to indicate rate of change rather than
arithmetic change. Although in many instances the spacing of the
ruHngs clearly indicates to an experienced reader that the chart is
plotted on ratio ruling, it is frequently desirable to indicate the
ratio basis as shown in 345 and 346. This is especially necessary if
the chart covers a comparatively short range of scale since the
reader might not notice the difference in spacing of horizontal
lines on the grid.

Synonyms for ratio chart are logarithmic chart, semi-logarithmic
chart, rate-of-change chart.

The term "ratio chart" is short and expressive. There is need
for a corresponding term equally expressive to designate charts
planned on the usual arithmetic basis.

lOO.OOO.OOO

lO.OOO.OOO

I.OOO.OOO

lOO.OOO

lO.OOO

I.OOO

lOO

A. Arithmetic Scale and Ratio Scale.

1. On the arithmetic scale, equal vertical

distances represent equal numeri-
cal differences; that is, the dis-
tance from 1 to 2 is the same as
the distance from 2 to 3 and from
3 to 4.

2. On the ratio scale, equal vertical dis-

tances represent equal percentage
differences; that is, the distance
from 1 to 2 is the same as the
distance from 2 to 4 and from 4
to 8.

B. Key for Assistance in Selecting the
Proper Scale for Three - Deck
Ratio Paper.

1. If the figures of the data to be plotted

on 3-deck ratio paper fall within
the range of any one of these six
brackets, the four figures within
that bracket indicate the scale to
be placed at the 4 points of the
3-deck paper.

2. A similar key could be made for 4-

deck and 5-deck ratio paper.

340

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

REFERENCES:

Bivins, Percy A., The Ratio Chart in Business, Codex Book
Co., Norwood, Mass., 1926.

Fisher, Irving, "The 'Ratio' Chart for Plotting Statistics,"
Journal of the American Statistical Association, Vol. XV,
June, 1917. (May be obtained from ASA for 75c.)

SCALE
2000

ISOO

1000
900
800
700
600
500
400

300
200

100
90
80
10
60
50
40

iO
20

, r^

!>./

.■'

CRUDE OIL PRODUCTION IN U.S.

-A

••CRUDE OIL

.•'PRODUCTION IN

.•'WORLD EXCL U.S.

.-'MILLIONS OF BARRELS

.M^A

■* '/' -J

' tiJ

^^•^

, U.S. POPULATION

ijss

t\ 1

. r

MILLIONS OF PERSONS^

j-P^"

=T^n

1 F

\ k

J ^

.r-^SS

i^i

^^^

A>_>

r\lt

'T:

/MOTOR VEHICLE REGISTRATIONS
/• HUNDREDS OF THOUSANDS

V' INDEX OF INDUSTR

f^PROOUCTION (STAN

oTAT.) 1926=100

lAL /

1875 1880 1885 1690 1895 1900 1905 1910 1915 1920 1925 1930 1935 1940

Joteph E. PoRUc. "Economics of the Petroleum Iiifliutry." March 193Q. The Chase National Bank of
the City of New York.

Rate of Growth of Crude Oil Producfion in the United States, and In the Rest of
the World by Years. 1876-1938, Compared With Other Significant Indexes.

RATIO CHARTS

341

I S t« i - t og ar ^ t ni* i c tctlal
NUMBER CONSUMED PER CAPITA

1.00

■M

900

^ r

800

700

000

500

. J

4 00

300

200

CIGARETTES-^

100

.#^^"

• \ i

.-■%

y^^ '

•^ V /

\ ^

fi o

^'' ^*

IGARS ^

^««»^_

"^^

•

1111

till

1111

1 1 r J

1 1 1 r

1 1 I 1

1900 1905 1910 1915 1920 1925 1930 1934

WPA, National Rcicarch Project. "Cigar-Malcert — After thr Lay-off," December 1937.

Per Capita Consumption of Cigars and Cigarettes in the United States fronn 1900
to 1934.

Compare this chart with 342B.

lllHlllHlll

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

1910 1915 1920 1925 1930

WPA, Division of Social Research, "Trends in Relief Exjjenditures. lQlO-1935," 1937 SCALE .8

A. Expenditures for Public Outdoor Poor Relief in Indiana from 1910 to 1931.

1. The broken lines indicate that thrf data were not available, or not available in

comparable form for these years.

2. Since there is no zero line on a rate-of-change chart, there is no difficulty in pre-

senting on the same grid two groups of data which have different scales. Com-
pare with 276A.

=i.

ar.

an<

ig£

ire

lATM

tte

•CA

1 — 1
on

I — 1

SUI

1 — 1
Tip

I 1

tic

—

OAI

t:l

iui

i»ft

•-

—

jlP

=:;

—

«*•

•u

*•

4\^.

"•

CIIMH

CQRBOI

■FT

VIE

' RE

VIE

Review of Reviews and World's Work, June 1934.

SCALE .7

B. Cigar and Cigarette Consumption in the United States fronfi 1801 to 1933.

Although different scales may be used on the same chart, the same cycle must be used.
That is, if a cycle two inches high is used for one scale, a cycle two inches high
must be used for the other scale. It would not be possible to compare the "cigar
consumption" curve in this chart with the "cigarette" curve in 341.

RATIO CHARTS

l|lHl|l

343

REFERENCES:

Karsten, Karl G., Charts and Graphs, Prentice-Hall, Inc.,
New York City, 1923.

Wenzel, J.. "Graphic Charts; the Use of the Logarithmic Scale
for Charting Statistics," Scientific American, 1917. This
issue of Scientific American is so limited that copies are
not for sale. However, it is available in most libraries.

T - r — —

•

CtNTWAL tLCCTdlC-
POWCM STATWHS 1—

■t
•
•

I
t

k.^

•V

S.^

»o>*

•s or COM
Ml ttxutm

L re*

TIO

—

■ aoT au nrr >•>; kit wu n

»'

1 1 1

JMV0«AU«.IC-CEMCNT W.AWTS I ^

POi*et or

. . . i . .

r ■ '

COM. M«

»««tL or

....

CtMCNT

.»«

iSAMOt or »T o

f c»»7 .MT 1*11 1%.

L-

m»

^*"*

or cKuM MM 10 mxi

1 rrrnoLCuM McriNcnics 1

i .... 1 ... .

H >«

B' *

> Ml

n i«

rt n

U f*l

JTtAM LOCOMCmwtS

CLASS I noAos
ywcioMT M.wvict

roi#«« or coAi. rcN
tooo uiois ruciwrr toh-mlcs

•ai nr>

STtAM LOCOMOTIVCS

CLASS 1 ROADS
PASSENG€R StRVICt

l«U IXT

r«^MDS or COM *CM

r*SKN6C« TMAiM CAA-ftM.C

: I I ;

-. J IRON BLAST ruKNACtS 1 1

-0

,^^^

rouNOS or cokmc

rtK CAOU TON

rw MON *f« rtiwo

COM.

Al.LO<t

....

1*
If

2 Itn >U2 ■M7 >•

icorr

M XI

•n

^•••^

•— •

•0

m* ■■

• T U or COM M* nvMSUCTS 1
ICOVtMO PIH t.T u or COM. CMMWCO |

ICOMC OVENS 1

.... 1 ... .

....

. . . . 1

WPA. National Rfscarch Project, "Summary of Frndmss to Datf." March 1938.

Progress of EfRciency in the Consumption of Fuel by Large Industrial Consumers
in the United States.

Because all of these charts arc plotted on the same logarithmic cycle, they are comparable
even though the scales are different.

344

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

Dun's Review. Fcl>ruary 193Q.

Failures by Industrial Groups and Size of Liabilities in the United States from 1935
to Decennber 1938.

There is a definite corollary to be derived from these two charts. In the upper one indus-
tries labelled "retail trade" have the largest number of failures. In the lower one.
those industries whose liabilities are under $25,000 have the largest number of
failures. From these two facts, it may be deduced that the retail trade is in that
category "under $25,000."

RATIO CHARTS

345

CWA in

op«ralion

Wofkt Program
in optrolion

Work* Progrom
in operation

UNITED STATES TOTAL

■ Semi(ogorilhn>ic scol«
\ \ -< I 1

1933

1934

1935

1933 1934

== Obligotions

1935

•^^— Cases =

WPA Divuion of Social Research. •Trend* in Relief Exf)enditure», 1910-1Q3.S," J937

Trends of Relief Cases and of Obligations Incurred for Relief Extended to Cases
in the United States from July 1933 to December 1935.

The horizontal line running through each pair of curves represents the average month,
July to December 1933, for both cases and obligations.

346

lllaalllHlllailll

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

■ ■

1910

1915

1920

1925

1930

1935

Note Broken lines mdicote doto not ovoiloble or
ool ovoiloble in comporoble form for these yeors

WPA. Division of Social Rcsrarrh, •■Trctxls in Rtlicf Ex|>rndituret, iqiO-IQ3.S," 1937.

Trends of Expenditures for Public Outdoor Relief in Selected Areas from 1910 to
1935.

The scale may be omitted, as it is here, with only a notation that the chart is plotted on
a rate-of-change scale. The curves have been moved toKcthcr even though the
scales do not coincide.

RATIO CHARTS

347

A. Growth of Business Based on Re-
search, Showing Industrial Con-
tributions of Research and
Invention in the United States
from I860 to 1930.

The oriKinal of this was black with the

lines and lettering in white. By

revcrsinR the original, black on
white was obtained.

14000

C=|

F=^

1- BASED ON RtSCARCMt—

—

Rv^^

-'-

i '

100

—

il-

—

■7

—

•I

R/^

—

; —

—

.,..

mmImm

Llli.

1111

IB6O IBTO 1880 1990 NOO 1910 1910 nSD

Eltctronirs. October 10.18. P.Trt of an Editorial
Entitled "Why a Public Relations ProRram?"
(Source: National Industrial Conference Board).

1 /^:

A-

— / !

. /V

\ / "

\ '

i»»

m IS

\/^

-v

1 ^

lAYON'*

r-, '"'

.1 .*

^"« f /"

cCOTTON \ •

•A'

•-A

/ ..

N V

^ vi' ■ '•v

iry

/^' A.

/> 1

r^ >

l\ f

j\ r

*;'

ji-4~«

\.V .^^

* A/

^^\y

A n

K 1 P

• \/

^ I

■uruv

0/;

■A / -5 •

r. U ^

■V

!•

■V

i\i !"

: T

'*'!:

Jv "

■

Dun't Review. December 1938 (Source: Textile Economics Bureau. Inc , N. Y. C.. "Rayon Organon").

SCALE 7

B. Textile Fiber Consunnption in the United. States fronn 1925 to Novennber 1938.

Index numbers may be plotted on rate-of-change paper, especially when there is a growth
as great as rayon consumption.

348

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

RATE-OF-CHANGE CHARTS

A. DEFINITION. The rate-of-chonge chart ("rotio" or "semi-logarithmic"
chart) is a type used for picturing the percentage or relative change
in values of a series over a period of time rather than the change
in absolute amounts as shown by the arithmetic chart.

1. The picture of rate of change is achieved through the use of
logarithms. Rate-of-change curves can be constructed either by
plotting the logarithms of the values on an arithmetic scale or by
plotting the actual values on a logarithmic scale. The latter is the
more usual procedure.

2. The effective use of rate-of-change charts requires an appreciation
of their limitations as well as their possibilities.

B. WHEN TO USE RATE-OF-CHANGE CHARTS:

1. When the interest is in relative movement of a time series and not
in the differences between amounts.

2. When it is desired to compare the relative movements of several
time series.

3. When the readers are likely to be familiar with this form of chart.

4. When the usual arithmetic chart would present a misleading pic-
ture of movement.

5. For occasions when there are no minus figures included in the time
series.

Note; If it is desired to present a complete picture of both rote of change
end amount of chonge the dato con be presented on componion charts,
one with a logarithmic amount scale and the other with the usual arith-
metic scale.

/
/

)0%

Secondory scale of uniform rotes of
change

SCALE SELECTION. Logarithmic amount scales should be so selected
that the curves will be well placed on the grid. As

there is no zero line to serve os a base for comparing trends, con-
siderations of the zero line ore not applicable to rate-of-change
charts.

In rote-of-change charts, it is often helpful to provide a secondary
scale indicating uniform rates of change. Such scales are constructed
by means of straight diagonal lines radiating from some point of
origin las shown in the illustration at the right).

Multiple amount scales are more appropriate for rate-of-change
charts than for arithmetic charts because in the former the movement
of the curves is compared and not their position relative to a base.

Note: in order to take full advantage of the scale range, the verticol scole
numerals usuolly printed on a chart sheet may be multiplied by any con-
stont foctor but integers should be chosen so that the scale subdivisions
will not indicate inconvenient fractions.

ht;

aCMC

^^.r-

\ ^^

^'•.

'V.

s:r<

P^O

—

"'"S^

5J;:5

Meaning of curve shapes on
Rale-of-change charts

RATIO CHARTS

349

50.000
45,000
401000
35.000
30.000
2S.000

20.000

15,000
12.000

\0.000
9.000
6,000
7.000
6.000
5.000
4,000

3.000

2.000

1.000
1915 16 17 'W 19 10 t1 tl IS M IS 16 t7 la 19 10 '31 1i 13 I9<4

Automobile Manufacturers Association. "Automobile Facts and FiRures." 1035. SCALE .9

A. Average Life of a Car as Shown by Two Cumulative Curves.

Two cumulative curvt-s are plotted on the same logarithmic grid. The horizontal distance
between the two lines thus gives the average life of the car. A cumulative curve
may be shown on logarithmic scale as well as arithmetic. See 2 7 9.

CURVES. The plotting on rate-of-change charts requires consider-
able care because of the peculiar character of the logarithmic spacing.
Where special grids are prepared without intermediate rulings, it is
desirable to use a logarithmic plotting scale which may easily be made
from printed commercial paper of the proper dimensions.

In general, rate-of-change charts call for simple lines connecting
the points of value. Columns or surfaces, of course, should not be
used to indicate values on a rate-of-change chart. Columns and
surfaces may be used on an arithmetic chart to indicate changes in
ratios, however.

350

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

' 1

1 i

1 1 -"

■""

«■

*■

«■

M
9

•■

*•

»■

M
9t

«
»«
9

M
91

W
9*
9

Annual Review Number of -Iron Age." January 6. 1938 SCALE 7

An Arithmetic Chart Showing Prices of Non-ferrous Metals in the United States from 1917 to 1937.

itt

'ft

. —

■^

■3
u

i
i

nr^

u
u

afiU

!«■■

5 ^"

u <n
W <n

0-SL

^ V

f'v

"o «
•a

i2 XI

owing
black
rush.

4L\

ow sh

ecame

air b

.E •?

ons of shad
phing, the c
was done w

(

»^k

J- \

The gradati

photogra

The shading

<€

3 C

^ oi

puno^

j»cl

■|ui»3

.III

RATIO CHARTS

?•

i 1 ^

•-

■^'

1 1

-«t

; 1
1

.'^'

•'?

; 1

r^.

r .

1 > r

■ i "

< E>

? i"^

1 --=

3 ^s

■

L ^ "

■V-

^ >

r ■^'

- — -■

1 I

L i

^::

N
«

r»

«o

■■

•«

l*»

•c

»>

•«

E o

o 5

.5 -o

•<

r».

« s

ir\

O-

—

C (9

** £.

V o

5. .2

—

>- c

0»

E
o

0»

»•-

i/i

j: .

" T3

•0

•5 ..

c
o

- f.

C IE

> iH

^ z

*■> u

♦J *-*

^ x>
°- e

CD
CO m

OOO
0*a> H (0 )A «

00* OB (« » lA #

M •"

0£
<

H H

352

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

Total
RarcB

1926

1928

1980

1982

1984

1986

19S8

Textile Economics Bureau. Inc.. N Y C. "Rayon OrRanon," June 1Q38. SCALE .7

World Rayon Yarn and Staple Fiber Production.

This chart shows a number of interesting items, among them the ranking of the principal
nations of the world in the production of rayon.

RATIO CHARTS

353

SCALE 8

A. A Method of Ruling Logarithmic Paper.

1. When logarithmic paper with cycles of the proper height is not available, it is fairly

easy to rule paper using a cycle bigger or smaller than the space allotted. In the
illustration above, a cycle from logarithmic paper is used for scale reduction.

2. A statistician's scale may be an easier method.

/ |iiii|iiii|iiii|i;iMii!l |^i|i|ii|i^ipi^i^;^j^^TT7

Ue«

PARAGON

M75 P

STATISTICIAN'S SCALE

Keuffel & Esscr Co , New York.

6. l3t edge, 2 complete logarithmic scales, one 25 cm. long, one 4J cm. long.

2ud edge, 3 complete logarithmic scales, one 12 J cm. long, one 10 cm. long, one 6^ cm. long.
3rd edge, 30 centimeters, subdivided to millimeters.
4th edge, 12 inches subdivided to 40ths of Inches.

This scale is for the statistician.

r —

zs:::

WlUf

a^^^MM^^

C. Triangular Scale, Engineer's,

div. 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60 parts to the inch.

Keuffel 8» Esser Co.. New York.

354

Chapter 42
THREE-DIMENSIONAL METHODS

EY MEANS of three-dimensional models, similar to those
shown in 354, 355A, and 355B, it is possible to present three
variables in the form of curves rather than the usual two.
Other methods of showing three dimensions are illustrated in the
isometric block diagram in 356A and in the trilinear chart in 359B.

Commonwrallh Edison Company. Chicago. Ill SCALE .6

Three-Dimensional Curve of the 1935 Load of the Commonwealth Edison Company.

1. Thrcc-ply bass wood was used in the construction of this three-dimensional model.

Each curve is a board which, before it was cut. measured Yt x 17 x 11 inches.

2. The Klass case is ruled with a scale of kilowatts on the sides and with the 24-hour

period from midnight to 12 midnight on each end. The third dimension is by days,
the scale for which is on the base.

3. The exhibit is about 5 feet long and weighs approximately 300 pounds.

THREE-DIMENSIONAL METHODS

355

Pacific Gas and EIrctric Company, San Franrlsco. California.

SCALE 4

A. Three-Dimensional Curve of the 1935 Load of the Consolidated System of the
Pacific Gas and Electric Connpany.

1. Dimensions of the model, excluding base, are 12" x 24" x 12" high.

2. The front black section represents a load curve showing variation from day to day

throughout the year for the last half hour of each day. The clefts between the
tifty-two sections are Sundays. Additional clefts are the holidays.

The Detroit Edison Company, Detroit, Michigan. SCALE .5

B. Three-DImensional Curve of the 1935 Load of the Detroit Edison Company.

Apparently the data for the entire year were gathered before this model was started. The
load for the first half-hour of each day for the entire year was then cut out, and
for each half-hour after that, making 48 curves. Compare this with 354 in which
the load for each day was plotted, making 365 curves.

356

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

i Specific Structural unm5 of the Basic Fopmula |

W fl('f(M)vOJKM-O0S3M't207iI

^trnm

Basic Formula

■■^■■■■■HiSBc!

j^^^^^^^^^B

^\n*'^<^i-m^c fi

^1 ^^

K^KfcC'^^^* ^^^-^'

Harry H. Laughlin, Department of Genetics, Carnegie Institution of Washington, Cold Spring Harbor,
Long Island, N. Y. SCALE .7

A. The Mathematical Model for the Specific Formula of Heredity.

W. D Johnston. Jr., and T. B. Nolan, "Isometric Block Diagrams in Mining Geology." Economic Geology.
August 1937, SCALE .5

B. Block Diagram of a Large Mine Drawn by the Isometric Method. The Original
Drawing Is Eight Feet Long.

1. The mine layout, shown isomctrically in conjunction with contour lines of the surface

areas adjacent, serves the general purpose of a three-dimensional model with huge
saving in space and cost.

2. For fully illustrated description of methods, reference should be made to the Johnston-

Nolan paper.

THREE-DIMENSIONAL METHODS

357

W. D. Johnston, Jr., and T. B. Nolan, "Isometric Block Diagrams in Mining Geology," Economic Geology,
August 1937.

A, Isometric Protrac+or.

s
^

y
>

y
^

^
^

KeufTel 8l Esser Co., New York.

B. Isometric Cross Section Paper.

A drawing on isometric paper combines the principles of mechanical and perspective draw-
ing. The principal lines are drawn vertically, horizontally, and 30 or 60 degrees to
the horizontal. As a result all parallel lines of an object are drawn parallel and
three faces of the object are shown.

358

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

INCOLARVM OCiCKIPTIO

M ARE5 pVl VIVl NATl 5VNT

5VPER.mTE5 PER. yeXATEi DEiCKIPTI

IVXTA. CENLSV5 IN JVECIA HABITOJ

AB AN MDCCLAD MDCCCLXXV

LINL«
^TATVM • JVUVTITVM IIOMMICiC CtMUTOtyu

ITALl/C REGNVM TABVLARIVM CEN5VALE ROM/E AN MDCCCLXXX

Journal of the Royal Statistical Socifty of London. Jubilcf Volume — 188.S. Chart by Luiri Perozzo in
1870. SCALE .5

Three-Dimensional Model Showing the Growth of the Population of Sweden from
1750 to 1875.

The picture of this model which appeared in the Journal of the Royal Statistical Society
of London was in a brown half-tone with black, red, blue, and j-reen lines. The
three dimensions are the years from 1750 to 1875, the number of persons, and the
age of the persons.

THREE-DIMENSIONAL METHODS

359

A. Triangular Coordinate Graph
Paper.

The trilinrar chart was fust used for in-
vrstigation on strength of con-
crete mixtures. This form lends
itself to the demonstration of prob-
lems involving a mixture of three
ingredients, such as alloys con-
taining three metals and food ra-
tions containing three dietetic ele-
ments.

Krufffl (k Ejifr Co , N Y.

v(Oiopside)

*PDt«s?i Feldspar
(PolaihTeWspar) WT. PER CENT

«»7*

17/3"

J F Sfhairrr and N L Bowcn. 'Thf SyHrm. Lruritr — Diopiidc — Silica." Amfrican Journal of Scicncr.
IQ38 Groi>hy«ical Laboratory CarnrRif Institution of Washington

B. Equilibrium Diagram of the Ternary System, Leucite — Diopside — Silica.

360

Chapter 43
COMPOSITE CHARTS

Jb o present a more complete picture it is often desirable to com-
bine several different types of charts. The charts in this chapter
illustrate different methods of combining various charts.

NET INCOME IN MILLIONS OF DOLLARS

z - «

200
175
150 -

m -
100

75 -

too

1975 197b 1977 1978 1979 1930 1911 1957 19JJ 1914

NET INCOME OR DEFICIT

1975

1976

1977 1978 1979 I9J0

1951

1957

1955

1954

NET INCOME OR DEFICIT |

160

170

Vef Income - -^^^^^^^

Deficit- - -^^^

1111

700
175
ISO
I7S

too

IS
SO
25

75
100

160

40
80

Engineprins and Mining Journal, October 1938, Part of an Editorial on Public Relations Entitled "What
Mining Meant to the United State*." SCALE .9

The Number of Mining Corporations in the United States Which Are in the "Net
Inconne" and "No Net Inconne" Groups, Their Respective Incomes and
Deficits, and the Net Results for Both Groups From 1925 to 1934.

These three charts give the complete picture of corporation income-tax returns in the
metal-minirig industry. They indicate that all mines are not "bonanzas." In fact,
many mining corporations re(>ort no net income each year.

COMPOSITE CHARTS

361

INDEX
SCALE

INDLX
SCALE

/•Labor Cost IjieO
' '.Per *100 Value.
(^ Gross-
>/vlncomc ■

no
108
0(>

-84

82
60

9^t

Guttav R. Stahl, J. T. Trenholm & Co.. N. Y. C

f75ah7

957 r9?3

A. EfFect of Walk-Oufs in the United States on Business From 1936 to June 1938.

"«!*

■^ate^

«r

n M0«3

^ti^

^ate^

Federal Reserve Bank of New York, "Monthly Review." August 1. 1936.

SPOT
, COTTON . . . .

*e»-tOA i«is IBM

SCALE .7

B. Movennents of Prices of Leading Agricultural Commodities With Range of
Prices for 1929-34 and Weekly Quotations Subsequently.

A change in the type of data resulted in this chart with range bars from 1929 to 1934 and
a curve from 1934 to June 1936.

Ill

362

■■|1-

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

III

CENTS

PER
BUSHEL

150

100
50

WINNIPEG

-25

BUSHELS

(MILLIONS)

"1 r

MinneapoUs ,'v

No. 1 . D. Northern p ^

Spring

— Winnipeg
No. 3. Manitoba

i.l.i.l-i.l.i.l.i.l.i.l.i.l.l.l.l.l.i-l-'-l-i-l ■l.l.l.l.l.l.l

- Tariff level -^^^

^ PRICE MARGINS AND TARIFF LEVEL ' ^

^- Minneapolis over
~ Winnipeg

. I ■ I ■ I ■ I ■ I ■ I .1 . 1 ■ I ■ I ■ I . I ■ I .1 ■ I . I . I .1 . 1 .1 ■ I ■ I ■ I . I ■ I ■ I . I ■ I . I . I ■ I

1 — r

-I 1—

HARD RED WHEAT, IMPORTS FOR
CONSUMPTION, FULL DUTY PAID

- ILJ

_lA.i

1922-23

'26-27 '30-31

YEAR BEGINNING JULY

'34-35

U S. Drpartmrnt of Aerirulturr. Burrau of Acrirultural Economiri.

SCALE 8

Prices, Price Margins. Tariff Level, and Imports of Wheat in the United States From
July 1922 to July 1937.

COMPOSITE CHARTS

363

COST or LIVING
INMX NUMMMt,l92«-IOO

REAL" WEEKLY EARNINGS
INDEX NUMBERS, 1929^100

tclepmones and TELECBAPHS

Electric light and power

AND manufactured GAS - ■

Class i railroads

Electric railroads and motorbuses
crude petroleum producing

metalliferous mining __

YEAR-ROUND motels

ALL MANUFACTURING _

DURABLE GOODS

NONDURABLE GOODS

LAUNDRIES

WHOLESALE TRADE

RETAIL TRADE _.

GENERAL MERCHANDISING-

OTHER THAN

GENERAL MERCHANDISING

QUARRYING AND NONMETALLIC MINING-
DYEING AND CLEANING _

National Industrial Confcrrnrr Board. Inc.. N. Y. C. June 17. 1938. SCALE .6

Cost of Living and "Real" Weekly Earnings in the United States From 1929 to 1938.
Curves, bars, and a sector chart combined give a clear, concise picture of a problem.

II.

III

364

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

BY CLASS OF SERVICE. 1929. 1933. 1937

ROAD MSSENCen ENGINEERS
ROAD rnElCHT ENGINEERS
ROAD PA&SENCER CONDUCTORS
ROAO FREIGHT CONDUCTORS
YARD ENGINEERS
ROAD PASSENGER FIREMEN

YARD CONDUCTORS

ALL TRAIN AND ENGINE
SERVICE LABOR

ROAD FREIGHT FIREMEN
ROAD PASSENGER BRAKEMEN
YARD BRAKEMEN
ROAO FREIGHT BRAKEMEN
YARD FIREMEN

UNSKILLED LABOR

||i^^ >«l l»| | t8«.09

l»5V. e i| **« «t leo.se

unsL

• 4«.0t 1S0.23

(47t» t49.00

*i»t»: SSS.if

COMPARISON

WITH OTHER UTILITIES AND
INDEX NUMBERS,

WITH MANUFACTURING

914 • 100

191

4-1937

ELECT

(Ritooi

AMD Oisr

ALL HACC

L /

BICIT
ten Oh
oiauT)

lA/tM

on.

V-

"-,

221 (JAN.I

• 214*

^ '

•'t

\ *"

v:n

ASS

lit ••

I RA

tee e

LRO*
KNIK

DS
i)

/''/

AHO

CAS
XVCT

\UTIOH

HHCR.

t'o

2S MANUFACTURING INDUSTRIES

1 1 (tLl ilALCil 1 1

•<

UOi.A

Vf.

">° l»T4 IS

•16

•|7

°I8

•19

•20

'21

•22

•23

•25

•26

•2 7

'26

•29

•30

•31

•32

•33

•34

•3S

•36

•3 7

National Industrial Conference Board, Inc., September 10, 1937.

SCALE .7

Weekly Earnings of Workers in Class I Railroads in the United States in 1929, 1933,
and June 1937.

An index number comparison with wage earners of other utilities and with manufacturing
from 1914 to 1937 gives a more complete picture than would be possible with the
bar charts alone.

COMPOSITE CHARTS

365

PASSENGER CAPACITIES OF SURFACE STREETS

60 R. Poy»m»nf

3 Lonct EacK Direction

No Pardinq

AulomobiUl Only

Auloi A But*>

Autos & Street Cort

IN AUTOS

IN BUSES

IN STREET CARS

COMPARATIVE PASSENGER CAPACITIES
OF MAJOR TRANSIT AND
TRAFFIC IMPROVEMENTS

One express-local subway will
carry 100,000 passengers per
hour in one direction on two
tracks. Twenty-one four-lane
elevated highways would be
required to carry the same
load in autonnobiles.

It everyone came to work by
private automobile, each office
building would need a garage
of the same size for the storage
of vehicles.

Transit Journal, September 26, 1938, Part of an Editorial Entitled "Transit's Job
Masses."

Moving the
SCALE .7

A Picture of the Transit Problem in the United States.

1. The first chart presents graphically passenger capacities of surface streets.

2. The second one gives comparative passenger capacities of major transit and traffic im-

provements.

3. The third shows the amount of space that would be needed for garage if everyone came

to work by private automobile.

Ill

"lll"

III

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

1899

1914

1925

1937

* Electrical horsepower in factories

Elrctriral World. Ortobrr 8. 1938 Part of an Editorial on PuMic Rrlations Entitled What Elcrtririty
Mrant to Amrrira "' SCALE .6

A Comparison of the Status of Labor in the Electrical Industry and the Increased
Production in That Industry in 1899. 1914. 1925, and 1937.

1. The implication of this chart is that with the increase in use of electrical horsepower in

factories, average wages per hour go up and average hours per week go down.

2. Note that the two curves and the bars have a common zero line, but the scales arc

different.

III

Ill

III

367

Chapter 44
SUGGESTIONS FOR MAKING A CHART

I HE FIRST problem in producing a chart, assuming that the
data have been gathered, is in the choice of materials to be
used in drawing it. Often the materials at hand in the office or
drafting room are sufficient. It is also possible to plan the produc-
tion of a chart, basing all the plans on the materials at hand.

PAPER

The test for the selection of paper on which to draw is to try the
drawing medium upon it; that is, the ink, pencil, paint, or crayon,
and see the result. Cross section paper drawing materials may be
secured from the following companies:
SOURCES:

Codex Book Co., Norwood, Massachusetts.

Educational Exhibition Co.. Providence, Rhode Island.

Rectangular Coordinate Graph Paper.

1. The number of lines drawn on graph paper and the spacing of the lines may quite often

indicate the use to which the paper will be put. For that reason, a wide choice
of printed graph paper is offered the draftsman. The use of printed graph paper
saves time and is comparatively inexpensive.

2. One type of rectangular coordinate paper, called utility paper, is shown above. It has

52 spaces on the long edge to represent one year by weeks, or 4 years by months.
The 36 spaces may be used to represent one month by days, 3 years by months, or
one year by months taking every third space.

3. This paper is so spaced that it may be put in the typewriter and the lines of type will

fit into the space; that is, on the standard typewriter there are six lines of type to
the inch, and on this utility paper, there are six spaces to the inch.

III

■ ■I

III

368

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

Educational Exhibition Co., Providence, Rhode Island.

Eugene Dietzgen Co.. New York City (and various other cities).

Keuffel & Esser Co., New York City (and various other cities).

Rubber cement is a "must" in the drafting room and copy room.
It does not wrinkle paper and may be used for a temporary joining,
as well as for a permanent one.

Transparent materials may be used to great advantage in com-
paring curves, bars, or other types of graphic charts. The charts
are drawn directly on the transparent material. When placed over
each other, a clear comparison is possible.

SOURCES OF TRANSPARENT MATERIALS:
Celluloid Corporation, Newark, New Jersey.
E. I. Dupont De Nemours &> Company, New York City.
Eastman Kodak Company, Rochester, New York.
Monsanto Chemical Co., St. Louis, Missouri.

Eugene Dietzgen Co., New York City.

A. Ratio or Logarithmic Chart Paper.

Logarithm ic paper is obtainable with the
log scale in both horizontal and
vertical rulings or with the log
along only the ordinate.

Log paper is obtainable in vari-
ous sizes and with various cycles
or decks.

Kcuffcl & Esser Co.. New York City. SCALE .6

B. Percentage Protractor.

The percentage protractor is of particular
value to anyone making graphic
charts, since it can be used in the
construction and measurement of
sector charts and similar graphs.

SUGGESTIONS FOR MAKING A CHART

369

A. Triangles, T-Square, and French
Curve.

1. The triangle on the left is 30 x 60 de-

gree, while the one on the right is
a 45 degree triangle.

2. French curves are available in a great

many shapes and forms. The one
shown here is one of the simplest.

3. These drawing instruments arc part of

the equipment for a standard
drawing board.

Eugene Dietzgen Co., New York City. SCALE .5

Us (9)

HE (m^ 4H fm\

' 4C /•)

i 413 <¥> n en

i ' ' '

3C' <"•> ' 2t\ (V)
1 \ / , \ .J

i i

-<•>

2c (mj

jt^. <v>

/ — \

SI-; <0

. <i>

ELDOPADO
GRADE CHART

Jotcph Dixon Crucible Co., Jertey City, N. J.

B. Grade Chart for the Lead of Drawing Pencils.

1. This chart gives the difference in the grades of lead in drawing pencils as seen from the

end of the pencil.

2. In choosing a drawing pencil, the depth and width of line desired are among the various

criteria.

■■■■ ■ ■ ■■■ ■ ■ ■■■■

370 I ■

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

REFERENCES

Arkin. Herbert and Raymond R. Colton. Graphs: How to Make
and Use Them. Harper & Brothers. New York City, 1937.

Brinton. Willard C. Graphic Methods for Presenting Facts,
McGraw-Hill Book Co.. Inc.. New York City, 1914.

Brown. Theodore H.. Richmond F. Bingham, and V. A. Tem-
nomeroff. Laboratory Handbook of Statistical Methods,
McGraw-Hill Book Co., Inc., New York City, 1931.

Haskell. A. C, Graphic Charts in Business, Codex Book Co.,
Inc., Norwood, Mass., 1928.

Karsten, Karl G., Cliarts and Graphs, Prentice-Hall, Inc., New
York City, 1923.

CRAYONS

If you do not have crayons of the desired color on hand, try your
nearest art dealer. If you are unable to secure the materials that
you want there, write to the manufacturers. They will put you in
touch with your nearest dealer.

A wide variety is offered. There are colored pencils, wax crayons,
pressed crayons, water crayons, etc. If when using a wax crayon,
the color tends to smear, scrape the surface with a razor blade. The
excess crayon is thus removed. Lumber crayons may be used for
extremely heavy color work.
Makers of crayons:

American Crayon Co., Sandusky, Ohio, New York City.

Art Crayon Co., Inc., Brooklyn, N. Y.

Binney &" Smith Co., New York City.

Joseph Dixon Crucible Co., Jersey City, N. J., New York City
(and various other cities).

Ea^le Pencil Company, Inc.. New York City

Eberhard Faber Pencil Co.. Brooklyn. N. Y.

Koh-I-Noor Pencil Co., New York City.

E.-ii;lr Pencil Company. Inc . New York City

Pencil Lengthener.

1. The pencil lengthener is used with a pencil stub. This makes it possible to use the

entire pencil and yet not be uncomfortable while using the small length.

2. The pencil lengthener may also be fitted with a pencil which is made short especially

for use in a lengthener.

.ill , ill , ill

Ill

■■ll"

III

SUGGESTIONS FOR MAKING A CHART

371

Charirt M HigRins Ik Co . Inc . Brooklyn. N Y. SCALE 8

Inks for Drawing and Lettering.

A good drawing ink should be smooth flowing and quick drying as well as permanent and
waterproof. The stopper is usually equipped with a quill to be used in Tilling
drawing and ruling pens.

PASTED COLORED PAPERS

The problem of putting color on a graphic chart is further sim-
plified by the use of colored paper.

1. Plain colored paper may be pasted on with rubber cement.
Colored paper with a gummed back may be obtained either
in tape form or in sheets.

Colored paper with a back which adheres to any clean,
smooth surface and which requires no water may be obtained
in a variety of widths and colors.

Sources:

Dennison Manufacturing Co., Framingham, Mass., New York

City (and various other cities).
Industrial Tape Corporation, New Brunswick, N. J.
Minnesota Mining &' Manufacturing Co., Chicago, New York

City (and various other cities).
Poster Products, Inc., Chicago, New York City,
Van Chef Bros., Chicago, New York City.

.1.

..I.

Ii.

372

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

ERASERS

Erasers are necessary implements in the drafting room. They
may be classified into the following types:

1. velvet — for erasing pencil

2. sandpaper — for erasing typewriter type

3. scrubbing — for erasing smudges, charcoal, pencil, etc.

4. roll-off — for cleaning up drawings

5. kneading erasers — for cleaning pencil, etc., from walls

6. ink erasers and ink eradicators

7. erasing machines

Sources :

Joseph Dixon Crucible Co., Jersey City, N. J.
Eagle Pencil Company, Inc., New York City

Eberhard Faber Pencil Co., Brooklyn, N. Y.

Weldon Roberts Rubber Co., Newark, N. J., New York City

Erasing Machines:

Chicago Wheel & Manufacturing Co., Chicago.
Charles W. Speidel &> Co., Philadelphia.

Illllll

No. 00 1 2 3 4 5 6 7N 8N 9 10 12 14

Kcuflrl S Esser Co . N<-w York City.

Leroy Let+ering Pens and Width of Letters.

While these pens are designed primarily for use with the scriber and lettering guide shown
in 373 they may also be used for free-hand lettering and line drawing. A special
socket which fits into an ordinary pen holder is necessary for this.

SUGGESTIONS FOR MAKING A CHART

373

INK

A good waterproof permanent ink is essential. Colored inks such
as red and green are often standard equipment in an office. These
may be used to color graphic charts and maps. See 371.

If there is a choice of colored inks, the following order of choice
is recommended:

1. black

2. carmine red or scarlet

3. green

4. blue

5. yellow

6. brown

7. orange

KeufTrl H Esscr Co.. New York City.

Leroy Lettering Guide and Scriber.

1. This lettering guide is of three-ply construction, two white sections, with one blacic

center section. The letters arc cut only in one white section, revealing the black
one underneath.

2. There are two types of scribers: the adjustable one that produces both vertical and

slanting letters, and the fixed scriber that produces vertical letters only.

374

"III-.

-I|i

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

•I'

Wood Rrgan InsUumcnt Co.. New York City. SCALE .6

A. Wrico Lettering Pen and Lettering Guide.

1. Tubular points on this pen prevent ink from getting on the edges of the openings of

the guide. Steel needles regulate the flow of ink and prevent the points from
becoming clogged with ink.

2. The under side of the guide is grooved so that ink will not be smeared when the

guide is moved from one character to another. The guide is placed directly
over the portion of the paper on which the lettering is to be done.

Thro. Altcnrdrr Qi Sont. Philadelphia, Pa.

B. Ruling Pen of the "Hinged" Type.

1. The hinge arrangement of this pen makes the pen easy to clean. Ruling pens are avail-

able in a variety of sizes and shapes. This is the actual size of the pen.

2. The firm from whose catalogue this illustration was taken also handles a helpful device

called a "Spacing Divider." This instrument consists of 11 teeth, numbered from
to 10, and so designed that they always divide the extreme setting of the
dividers into 10 equal parts.

III

Ill

■I"

III

SUGGESTIONS FOR MAKING A CHART

375

Poster Products, Inc., Chicago, and Tablet Sl Ticket Co., Chicago.

Cut-Out LeHers.

1. Another method of lettering a chart is to secure cut-out letters and (inures and then

to put them on the chart. The letters come in a variety of styles and sizes and
may be secured cither with a gummed back or a back wliich adheres to any clean
smooth surface and which requires no water. The latter are both removable and
reusable.

2. The letters "OSNX" are K^in^i^^<l-t'3<^l< a"d come in sizes from 'g to 2 inches in height

(Tablet & Ticket Co.). The letters ■■W2" require no water. A white backing
protects the adhering surface and is stripped off just before using. These letters
come in sizes 13 16 to 9 inches in height (Poster Products Inc ).

3. A third company making letters from 1 inch to 18 inches in height is The Rcdicut

Letter Company, Los Angeles, California.

III

■ nil

376

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

lip

PACRAtti or TYHE

m^'

ASSORTED FURNtTURt

The Kclsey Company. Meriden, Conn.

A. Small Portable Printing Press and Outfit.

1. The small press shown above prints a type space 6 x 10 inches. A downward pressure

on the lever gives the impression. Ink is spread on the ink table, which may be
removed for cleaning. From 600 to 2000 sheets may be run through per hour.

2. These small presses are available in a number of sizes.

Pica— No. 1 (10)

This is a sample of writing with
No. 1 Pica type, the style most
used for general correspondence.
123456789 10

Elite No. 6 (12 or 10 Special)

ILITE. Is used largely for personal
correspondence. Much matter in small
space without crowded appearance.

L. C. Smith Typewriter Co., New York City.

B. Pica and Elite Typewriter Styles.

1. Graph paper may be inserted in the typewriter so that the lettering and numbering

may be typed. A standard typewriter makes a legible chart. The most commonly
used type styles are the pica and elite.

2. There are ten letters to the inch on the pica type and six lines of type to the inch.

On the elite type there may be either twelve or ten letters to the inch.

3. A large variety of type styles are available on typewriters today. A new machine makes

it possible to use several styles of type on the same typewriter. See 379.

SUGGESTIONS FOR MAKING A CHART

377

OROrrH Of Trg ILfCTHIC LIOUT AHP rOfIR HCDUSTBT -- 190? TO 19^

y^wi or vuHT ahh ijuipmimt

la MlUloQ. of Dollar.

XliL

1937. .
1932. .
1927. .
1922. .
1917...
1912. . .
1907. . .
1902. . .

Million'

3 T 5 5^

-2_I — "i 1 1 * «• ■
7 8 9 10 11

13 Ik

TTTTlTm

umim

ummi

nmuE

mnuR

nmmLUR

ummni

zzzz

ZZZZ2ZZZ

zzzz

mLUR

zzzz

mLTULUR

TnLmLnminL

JUL

TEL

TRL

JUL

zza

XttL

1937...
1932. ••
1927. . .
1922. . .
1917...
1912. . .
1907. . .
1902. . .

anRQT agyiRATiD— BUUOMs or tiLowArr-HOUHg

B 1 1 1 i a t of k 1 1 w a t t - h tt r «
10 20 30 50 50 50 fo 10 fO 100 110 120

77777

ZZZZZ

ZZZZIZZZZZ

ZZZZZ

7773
H

jmLmmmmmR

mmmiL

zzzffizzzzLznzz

ZZZZZ

ZZZZLZZZZL

ZZ3

ZZZZL

ZZZZZ

77777

mmmmwu

ZZZZZ

ZZ3

Rmmmm

International Business Machinrs Corp , Nrw York City. SCALE .7

Two Bar Charfs Made on a Typewriter.

1. For the employee in a business office, lacking the tools and the skill in drawing and

lettering of a draftsman, the typewriter offers an opportunity for quick and easy
preparation of graphic presentation of data through charts and diagrams. It solves
the problem of lettering and asures that vertical and horizontal lines will be at
right angles without the use of a drawing board and T-square.

2. Making bar charts is a simple process. By letting one space on the machine represent

a unit quantity, the character selected for a given bar can be struck the correct
number of times to represent any specified amount. There are several characters
which when written so that one row exactly touches the next one will make a very
attractive "all over" pattern.

378

■I'

•!■

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

■ ■

DisT«noTio>r OF ncH dolus

LXSS COST or MATP I AU)

International Businrss Machines Corp., New York City. SCALE .5

A Sector Chart Made on a Typewriter.

A sector chart can be made quickly -and easily on a typewriter by the following method:

1. Draw the circle of convenient size with any ordinary school compass.

2. Indicate the division of the circle into its parts by a protractor and draw the dividing

lines in ink.

3. Type in the names of the sectors.

4. With the compass set as it was to draw the original circle, draw another circle exactly

like it on a sheet of thin typewriter second paper. By running the sharp point of
the compass around the circle several times on the thin paper, the circle will drop
out and leave a hole in the second sheet.

5. Place the copy in the machine with the second sheet over it so that all of the copy

excepting the circle itself is covered.

6. Roll the copy up in the machine and place a strip of second sheet along one of the

dividing lines and another strip along the adjacent dividing line. The two strips
of paper will cross at the center of the circle and will cover all of th* circle
but one sector.

7. Beginning at the bottom of the exposed sector, make rows of the desired character to

make the "all over" pattern for that sector, allowing the rows to extend beyond
the edge of the sector a few spaces. The excess typing will fall on the second
sheets and a very sharp edge of the pattern will appear on the copy. Adjust the
strips of paper each time to expose one sector and fill in each sector, running the
pattern carefully around the lettering.

8. It takes as long to describe it as it does to do it.

III

■■I

III--

-■ll-

-III

SUGGESTIONS FOR MAKING A CHART

379

The Varl- Typer Electric Composing Machine Is •*nuf *c tured by the Ralph C. Coxhead
Corporation, with their main office at 17 Park Place, Mev Tork City, II . T.

Vari-Typer, an Electric Typewriter with Interchangeable Type

The Vari-Typer Electric Composing Machine is used to "cut" stencils and
to compose the master copy for reproduction by Photo— Of f set . The
machine features Interchangeable Type, Horizontal Spacing Control,
Vertical Spacing Control, Uniform Impression Control, Bold Face Repeat
Key, Margin Justification Mechanism, Open End Carriage, Standard
Keyboard and Shadow Light. The machine is simple to operate.

The above was typed on the Vari-Typer.

III

380

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

GRAPHIC

RAfHllG

MiPiHin©

Martin J Weber, New York City.

Photographic Method of Securing Various Types of Lettering Effects.

1. All the above letter eFfects were made photo-mechanically by a special device on a

camera from the same original line. The original is the top line of the left column.

2. The letters can be made to slant either to the right or left.

3. In addition to altering the letter effects, this process invented by Martin J. Weber,

New York artist, will produce variations of the original which will register perfectly
with that original for color registration work.

Green and red as favorable and unfavorable originated with rail-
road signals which were based upon the idea of red for danger and
green for safety. Today, red and green are used in traffic signals
for stop-and-go.

When there is to be a gradation from dense to least dense there
is a question as to how the gradations should be crosshatched.
Generally, black represents the unfavorable and white the favor-
able. Since the question is one of interpretation, the decision should
be made relative to the particular problem.

381

Chapter 45
STANDARDS FOR TIME SERIES CHARTS

n the following pages are abstracts from Time Series Charts.
A Manual of Design and Construction, 1938, prepared by the Com-
mittee on Standards for Graphic Presentation under the pro-
cedure of the American Standards Association, with the American
Society of Mechanical Engineers as sponsor body.

Other abstracts from this report will be found in the following
chapters:

Chapter 12. MULTIPLE BAR CHARTS

Chapter 13. CONTRASTING BAR CHARTS

Chapter 33. CURVE CHARTS

Chapter 34. COMPARISONS WITH TWO CURVES

Chapter 36. COMPONENT PARTS SHOWN BY CURVES

Chapter 42. RATIO CHARTS

Chapter 51. METHODS OF PRINTING

The pamphlet number of this report is ASA Z15.2 — 1938. It
may be secured for $1.25 from the Publications Department of the
American Society of Mechanical Engineers, 29 West 39th Street,
New York City.

The Committee on Preferred Practice for Time Series Charts,
with Arthur H. Richardson as Chairman, prepared the report Time
Series Charts. It is a subcommittee of the Committee on Stand-
ards for Graphic Presentation. Within the next year, it is expected
there will be a report by the subcommittee on Engineering and
Scientific Graphs, of which W. A. Shewhart is Chairman.

382

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

DESIGNATION OF CHART COMPONENTS

GENERAL
NOTE

REFERENCE
SYMBOL

HORIZONTAL
RULINGS

LABELS

(curve

captions)

AMOUNT-
SCALE
NUMERALS

AMOUNT-
SCALE
PTION

/Vye of
Paper

REFERENCE
NOTE

BASE LINE
(ZERO LINE)

TIME
DESIGNATIONS

The arrow and designation "Edge of Paper" have been added to the original in order to
indicate that the outside hne is not a frame. The author beheves it is undesirable
to put a frame hne around a chart because of the possibihty of that hne being
falsely interpreted as a zero line.

STANDARDS FOR TIME SERIES CHARTS

383

GRIDS

Grid Structure ploys a controlling port in interpreting the
facts. However, grid specifications should seldom if ever be
determined without tokmg the scales into consideration. In
the matter of influencing the behavior of the curve, the two
are of equal importance.

The proper construction of a grid involves more than sim-
ply covering a convenient space with cross rulings. As in
the matter of general layout, the nature of the doto ond
purpose of the presentation must be considered. A grid un-
suifed to the doto moy be not only lacking in effectiveness
but may actually be misleading.

GRID DIMENSIONS

1 . Grids should be so proportioned as not to distort the facts.

2. Grid proportions should not be rigidly standardized.

3. Grids should be of pleasing proportions.

FREQUENCY Of VERTICAL RULINGS

1. The number of rulings should be sufficient to indicate the frequency
of plotting.

2. There should be a sufficient number of rulings to facilitate the read-
ing of time values on the horizontal time-scole.

WEIGHT OF VERTICAL RULINGS

1. Vertical rulings should be of sufficient weight to guide the eye readily
to the time-scale designations.

2. The weight of vertical rulings should be varied so as to indicate
clearly the nature of the time intervals or the subdivisions of time for
which data ore shown.

FREQUENCY OF HORIZONTAL RUUNGS

1. Horizontal rulings should be so drawn as to meet the requirements of
their two-fold purpose: To assist in reading values on the vertical
scale and to provide a series of horizontal bases of comparison

2. The number of horizontol rulings should vary according to the close-
ness with which it is desired to read values of the vertical scale.
Rulings should not be so frequent as to imply a greater accuracy of
the data than actually exists.

3. In general, there should be no more rulings than ore necessary to
guide the eye to on approximate reading of the curve values.

WEIGHT OF HORIZONTAL RULINGS

1. Horizontal rulings should be sufficiently heavy to guide the eye to the
amount scale without conscious effort.

2. Horizontal rulings should be heovy enough to serve os supplemen-
tary "boses" of comparison for the curves.

3. Horizontal rulings should be light enough to contrast sharply with
the curves.

F«w plotting*

Many plottings

Emphasis on chonge

Indkotlng omUsion of rulings

Infrequent rulings generally
desiroble

384

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

ROOT-TWO

DIMENSIONS

Short Long

Short

Long

Short

Long

Short

Long

1.0 1.4

3.0 4.2

5.0

7. 1

7.0

9.9

9.0

12.7

1. 1 1.6

3.1 4.4

5. 1

7.2

7. 1

10.0

9. 1

12.9

1.2 1.7

3.2 4.5

5.2

7.4

7,2

10.2

9.2

13.0

1.3 1.8

3.3 4.7

5.3

7.5

7.3

10.3

9.3

13.2

1.4 2.0

3.4 4.8

5.4

7.6

7.4

10.5

9.4

13.3

1.5 2.1

3.5 4.9

5.5

7.8

7.5

10.6

9.5

13.4

1.6 2.3

3.6 5.1

5.6

7.9

7.6

10.8

9.6

13.5

1.7 2.4

3.7 5.2

5.7

8. 1

7.7

10.9

9,7

13.7

i.e 2.6

3.8 5.4

5.8

8.2

7.8

1 1.0

9,8

13,9

1.9 2.7

3.9 5.5

5.9

8.3

7.9

1 1.2

9.9

14,0

2.0 2.8

4.0 5.7

6.0

8.5

8.0

li.3

10.0

14. 1

2. 1 3.0

4. 1 5.8

6. 1

8.6

8. i

11.5

10. 1

14.3

2.2 3.1

4.2 5.9

6.2

8.8

8.2

11.6

10.2

14.4

2.3 3.2

4.3 6.1

6.3

8.9

8.3

1 1.7

10.3

14.6

2.4 2.4

4.4 6.2

6.4

9. 1

8.4

1 i.9

10.4

14.7

2.5 3.5

4.5 6.4

6.5

9.2

8.5

12.0

10.5

14.8

2.6 3.7

4.6 6.5

6.6

9.3

8.6

12.2

10.6

15.0

2.7 3.8

4.7 6.7

6.7

9.5

8.7

12.3

10.7

15. i

2.8 4,0

4.8 6.8

6.8

9.6

8.8

12.4

10.8

15.3

2.9 4.1

4,9 6.9

6.9

9.8

8.9

12.6

iO.9

15.4

In preparing a chart to be

of root-two

p ropo rt

ons select

one of the pairs of dimensions Indicated above fc

r a

bordering rectangle and fit

the material within

It as

:o»-

pactly as practicable.

Measure the short dimension

and if the

CO rr esp(

>nding

ong

dimension from the table Is

grea.ter than

the Ion

g dimension

of the layout, expand the latter to correspond

the

long dimension from the

table Is less than

the

ong

dimension of the layout, find the short dimen

lion CO rre-

spending to the latter and

expand the

short d

mension

the layout to correspond.

The proportions of o chart should be such that when reproduced or
displayed it will fit harmoniously the medium of presentation.

PROPORTIONS FOR LEHER SIZE. The ratio of 1 (short side) to 1.414
(long side) is particularly appropriate for correspondence size sheets
(nominally 81/2" X 11").

Note: A rectanflle of this proportion is Icnown as a "root-two" or "hypote-
nuse" rectangle, the long side of which is equal to the diagonal of a square
constructed on the short side. This rectangle possesses the unique character-
istic that when divided in half width-wise, each resulting rectangle is also of
root-two proportions; a characteristic useful in grouping charts on a page.

STANDARDS FOR TIME SERIES CHARTS

385

IMPORTANCE OF PROPER SCALE SELECTION

EFrECT OF SCALE ALTERATION - CHART SHOWING MOVEMENT

OAiCINAL SCALC
ARnANCCUCNT

--n/

*rf

ONTIUCTIMC TIMC tCALt

COMTHACTIMC

AMOUNT SCALC

OMMDIMC TIUI

SCALI

^"^

♦

^j,^

EFFECT OF SCALE ALTERATION - CHART SHOWING TREND

0«ICINAL SCALE
AARANCCMCNT

COMTIIACTINC

JCALt

IXPANOINc/luOUMT JCALC

H
.««,

THACTIN
OIHC Ak

C
<0

TIU
JH1

C
9

■*•€

ICA

L»

CSNTItACTINC AMOUNT SCALC

CIMNOINC TlUC SCALC

.^^

^,1—

_— —■

--^ 1

386

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

RELATION OF TIME SCALE TO AMOUNT SCALE

1. The relofion between the time scale and the amount scale has a de-
termining influence on the movement of time-series curves.

Note: The movement of o curve ij here understood to meon the o'opf^ic
effect of the progressive chonges in the quantity considered The trend is
the graphic effect of the overoil changes in the quontity considered

2. Selection of both scales should be made to convey the correct im-
pression of the trend and movement of the series.

3. Manipulating the scales so as to picture a movement contrary to the
facts is never justiPied.

True picture

Distortion fMultino from oinitslon of
zero value

(b)

Methods of Indicating omluion of
zero volue

•00 1935 1935

Effect of altering grid proportions

INCLUSION OF PRINCIPAL POINT OF REFERENCE

Principle

1. The amount scale should normally include the zero value or other
principal point of reference. Departure from this rule should never
be made except where there is a special reason for so doing.

Procedures

1. WHEN NECESSARY. The zero line or other base of comparison should
never be omitted when the interest is in relative amount of change
between points on the same curve.

2. WHEN NOT NECESSARY. When the interest of the reader is in the
absolute amount of change rather than in the relative amount of
change, it may be safe to omit the principal point of reference and
the accompanying horizontal line.

3. OMISSION SHOULD BE INDICATED. When the zero value or other
principal point of reference is omitted the fact should be clearly indi-
cated in a manner that will attract notice.

Note: Since It Is generolly token for granted that the base line is the zero
line, it is not sufficient merely to show the bose line as a light ruling instead
of the customary heavy ruling.

4. EFFECTIVE METHODS OF INDICATING the omission of the zero
point and line:

(a) A wavy line across the bottom of the grid,
(bl A straight line waved at each end.

STANDARDS FOR TIME SERIES CHARTS

387

RANGE AND SPACING OF AMOUNT SCALE

Principl*!

1. Since the omount scole has a controlling effect on the movement
oi the curves it is highly important that a scale be selected which will
result in a true picture of the facts.

2. The amount scale should be divided in a manner that will facilitate
accurote reading of the curve values.

Procedures

1. FULL RANGE DESII^ABLE. Generally the amount scale should begin
at zero. It should extend continuously to a point somewhat beyond
the greatest value, to avoid crowding the grid. In cases of marked
upward trends, curves generally should not point obove the upper
right-hond corner of the grid.

2. AVOID WASTE SPACE Unnecessary extension of the scale range
should be avoided if blank space which serves no useful purpose is
thus added.

Noie Eoendino 't<e scole range reduces the fluciuotion and separation of
Curves When this is desirable it mov be belter accomplished by reducing the
Koie dimensions i( the resulting chorl con still be made ol the desired pro-
portions.

3. "FREAK" VALUES. Where a series contains a few widely divergent
points lunless they ore really significant) it is often better not to
attempt to select a scale that will include them all. Inclusion of these
points will tend to depress the fluctuations of the rest of the curve.

4. DIVISION OF SCALE. It is desirable to select a scale range that is
divisible into convenient scale intervals.

lal For reading SCALE VALUES it is generally well to subdivide the
scale into intervals that are familiar and easy to visualize leg.,
5, 10, 15, 20).

(bl For reading CURVE VALUES for purposes of interpolation or read-
ing between the main points on the scale, it may be desirable to
divide the scale into even units rather than odd, as the eye can
more readily divide the space into even ports than into odd.

5. "BREAKING" AMOUNT SCALE. Although the amount scale should
generally be continuous, it is sometimes permissible to omit on inter-
mediate portion 111 when the curves on the grid ore widely seporoted
and it is desired to compare them more closely, or (2| to magnify
the fluctuations of the different curves which may be widely separated
on the amount scale.

6. INDICATING BROKEN SCALE. When there is any break in the amount
scale or any intermediate portion is omitted, the fact should be clearly
indicated by some accepted convention.

7. SPACING BROKEN SCALE When the amount scale is broken, spac-
ing in both resulting portions of the scale should remain identical.

Ploclng the curve

Method of showing "freok" values

Division of amount scale

Breaking amount scale
(Se« procedures 6 and 7)

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

LOCATION OF AMOUNT-SCALE DESIGNATIONS

Principle

1. Amouni-scole designations iiiould be ploced where they con be read
most easily in coniunction with the curves.

Procedures

1. AT BOTH SIDES:
In general

la) To provide for any reading requirement.

(b) To give balance to the chart.

Especially

Ic) When the grid is extremely wide.

Idl When the horizontal rulings are dose together.

2. AT RIGHT SIDE OF GRID ONLY:

lal When interest is definitely centered of the right,
(bl When a noturol reading of the chart requires reading the curve
before the scale.

Noie The theory of plocing 'he scole oi the right is ihoi o oerson will
normolly read the chort trom let' to right (thoi is. from the curve to the
scole ro'her thon (rcn 'he scole lo the cu'vel.

3. AT LEFT SIDE OF GRID ONLY:

lal When interest is definitely centered at the left.
jbl When interpretation of the chart requires reading the scale before
the curve.

4. NEITHER SIDE It is sometimes feasible to place amount designations
adiacent to the plotted values on the curve. iThis treatment is most
effective when grid Imes ore omitted, and is especially suited to charts
for popular appeal )

AMOUNT-SCALE NUMERALS

1. Amount-scale numerals should be so written and placed that they will
clearly and easily indicate the value of the horizontal rulings.

Scales both sides o*rierolly
recommended (See proceduie 1 1

Interest ot right

Interest at left

STANDARDS FOR TIME SERIES CHARTS

389

AMOUNT SCALE CAPTIONS

1. A scale caption should always accompany the amounl-scole numerals
unless the character of the scale units is otherwise indicated.

2. Amount-scale captions should be located where they will most effec-
tively mdicate the units of value.

TONS
400

I..

CopMon

above

numerali

Caption
at the
tide

»io

RANGE AND SPACING OF TIME SCALE

1. The time scale should correspond to the characteristics of the data
both in regard to the span of time covered and the frequency with
which values ore recorded.

$e —

Caption combined with numerals

RELATION OF TIME SCALE TO VERTICAL RULINGS AND PLOHED
POINTS

Note: Time icale^ consist of a series of successive equally spaced points of
time Idates. time of doy, etc.) ; the intervals between such points representing
periods of time.

"f^INT DATA" are values in a time series as of specific points of lime
"PERIOD DATA" ore volues in o time series for periods of time.

1. IN THEORY, vertical rulings should always indicate specific points of
time on the time scale.

|a| Point data should be plotted on such point-of-time rulings,
lb) Period data should be plotted midway between point-of-time
rulings.

2. IN ACTUAL PRACTICE, however, this principle may often be disre-
garded in showing period data.

1 1

1 -►OiNT 0*TA* 1

|isr or c*o« MOfrral ^

1 -«•«« 0«T»- {I
|fO« MONTMJ KOTCOJI

JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN

Point doto on verticals. Period doto
midway between

Theory followed in showlr>g period
doto on verticals

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

LOCATION OF TIME-SCALE DESIGNATIONS
Principle

1. Time-scale designations should be placed where they con be read
most easily in conjunction with the curves.

Procedures

1. USUALLY AT BOnOM OF GRID BECAUSE:

lol The bottom o( the chart is the conventional location.

(b) The base line is ordinarily the principal line oi relerence to which

the eye travels lor a basis of comparison.
|cl In many coses, the curve starts near the bottom of the grid, eg.,

growth curves starting near the base line.
(dl The scale designations at the bottom odd to the appearance of

the chart in balancing the weight ol the composition.

2. SOMETIMES AT TOP AND BOHOM—
(al When the grid is unusually high.

(bl When the vertical rulings are so numerous as to cause difficulty

in following them to the scole at the bottpm.
Icl When a considerable portion of the curve lies near the top of the

grid.

3. AT TOP ONLY, IN SPECIAL CASES—

la) When it is desired to emphasize the time periods in conjunction

with the title,
lb) When the space at the bottom is insufficient.
|c) When the principal line of reference lies near the top of the grid.

4. WITHIN THE GRID. In very simple charts it is sometimes effective- to
place time designations within the grid directly under or over the
plotted points. (This treofment is well suited to advertising or publicity
charts, especially when the curve is shown without grid lines.)

1932 1933 1934 1935 1936

1925 1926 1927 1928 1929

Usual location of time-scale
designation

1936

Procedure for unusual coses

STANDARDS FOR TIME SERIES CHARTS

391

ARRANGEMENT OF TIME-SCAIE DESIGNATIONS

l»2S l»M IMT ins l«2« WM It3l W33

Arrong«menl for yoort

1930 1931 1932 1933 1934 1935

Arrongemenl for quarters

Principle

I. Time-scale designations should be so arranged as to focilitote the
reading of time values lor all plotted points on the curves.

Procedures

1. DESIGNATION FOR EACH RULING. A time designation should
normally accompany each vertical ruling.

2. OMISSION OF DESIGNATIONS. When vertical rulings ore so
numerous that designations cannot be shown in legible size lor each
ruling, it is well to omit some of them; e.g., every other ruling.

3. PLACING. Time designations should be centered under the vertical
grid rulings or spaces to which they relate.

4. READING POSITION:
la) Designations should, if possible, read horizontally.
(b| When there is insuFTicienf space to place time designations in a

horizontol position, it is generally desirable to place them in a
vertical position reading upward.

Note In some cases where it is important to retain horizontal reading it
is possible to "stogoer" captions.

5. SUBDIVIDED TIME PERIODS. When major divisions on the time scale
ore divided into minor divisions, it is normally desirable to indicate
both, by means of primary and secondary scale designations.
Major divisions should be indicated by captions placed under the
minor designations to which they apply.

Note: Dropping secondory designations As a means of retaining hori-
zontal reading, designations for minor time divisions con often be dropped
entirely where interest lies in the general trend rather than in specific points
on the curve, eg, for time series plotted weekly it is often sotisfactory to
show only monthly captions under the weekly rulings. iSee illustration at
the right I

6. DESIGNATION FOR EACH PLOHING. For series containing irregu-
lar time intervals, it is sometimes effective to designate on the time
scale only those points for which there ore plotted values.

7. TIME-SCALE CAPTIONS. If necessary to on understanding of time . Arrongemenl for weeks

. . ■ .. I J ■ • . •• L ij u I _i (Oindicotes beginning ond end ot

characteristics of a series, a descriptive caption should be placed ^ montt»i)

below the time designation; e.g., "end of each month."

■

1933 1934

Arrongemenl for monlhi

JAN ^ r(B t^AII API! UAV .lUN

392

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

ABBREVIATION OF TIME-SCALE DESIGNATIONS

SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT

Abbreviations for days of the week

JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN

JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC
Abbreviations for months of the year

I I I I I I

Principles

1. It is desirable to abbreviate time designations whenever the complete
designations v^ould be too crowded or require o size of lettering too
small to be legible.

2. Only stondord or recognized obbreviations should be used.
Procedures

1. IN GENERAL, time-scale designations should not be abbreviated until
the possibilities of other methods have been considered Isuch as stag-
gering or placing verticollyl.

2. DAYS. The days of the week should conform to the usual method of
abbreviation except that Tuesday and Thursday should generally be
written '"Tue" and "Thu" in order that all may be of equal length and

emphasis.

3. MONTHS. Months also should generally conform to three-letter ab-
breviations in order that all months may be of equal length.

Note: If it is importoni to retain horizontal reodino but sufTicient space
lor stondord obbreviolion is not ovoiloble, the initio! letters of the month
con sometimes be used: JfMAMJJASOND. This form is not
recommended for generol use.

Another oliernolive sometimes used to retain horizontal reading is to
indicate months by numerals: I 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12. This is not oen-
eroMy recommended becouse many people do not readily associate month
numbers with month names.

4. QUARTERS. Designation of quarters can be 1, 2, 3, 4, or 1st, 2nd, 3rd,
4th, with the word "quarter" below, or, if space permits, first quailer,
second quarter, etc.

5. YEARS. Where possible, years should be written out in full, whether
horizontal or vertical, but if abbreviated, should be shown as — '28,
"29, '30, etc. When abbreviations are used, it is well to have some of
the years written out, as follows:

1920 '21 '22 '23 '24 1925 '26 '27 '28 '29 1930

1925*26 "27 •28 '29 1930 "31
Abbreviated yeorly designoilont

STANDARDS FOR TIME SERIES CHARTS

393

CURVE WEIGHT

Noi*^ Proctlcet rec6mm«nd*d In Ihli tecllon apply primarily to lolld lin*
curvai.

Principlet

1. Corves should be sufficiently heavy to attract immediate attention and
to impress a visual image on the mind of the reader.

2. In general, time-series curves should be heavier than is the practice
in the case of engineering and scientific charts.

Procedures

1. RELATION TO WEIGHT OF RULINGS. Curves should be sufficiently
heavy to be distinguished readily from the co-ordinate rulings.

2. RELATION TO WEIGHT OF REFERENCE LINES. Single curves should
normally be heavier than the zero line or other principal line of refer-
ence. Multiple curves should normolly be no lighter than reference
lines.

3. RELATION TO NUMBER OF CURVES. Curves usually should be heov-
ier when shown singly than when several are shown together Iper-
haps decreasing % for each additional curvel.

4. RELATION TO CHARACTER OF CURVES. Irregular curves should nor-
mally be lighter than relotively smooth ones (the greater the irregu-
larity the lighter the curvel.

5. RELATION TO OTHER COMPONENTS. Curves should not be so
heovy as to appear crude or to overpower the other elements of the
chort.

6. GENERAL PICTURE vs. CLOSE READING. The weight of curves should
vary according to the use — from relatively heavy lines in charts for
popular appeal to very light lines in charts used for close reading of
values.

7. VARIATION OF WEIGHTS on the same chart:
la) To distinguish one curve from another.

(b) To indicate the relotive importance of curves.

8. OVERLAPPING CURVES. The more curves intersect or overlap on the
same grid, the greater should be the contrast in weight las well os
pattern).

Curve 5 limes Curve 2 to 3 times
grid rulings grid rulings

(TtTAtl/

•^

—

"Total" curve 5 times grid rulings

"component" curves

2 to 3 times grid rulings

394

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

LABELS

1 . labels should be brief.

2. Labels should be of sufficient size to be easily read.

3. Labels should be placed where they will clearly identify the curves
to which each relates.

4. Labels should be so placed as to assist in effecting a balanced com-
position.

TITLE

3
O

TIUI

> C

rit

fifffe of Papt

I I I I I

KEY
WHEAT
CORN
OATS
BARLEY
ALL OTHER

Arrongement of identifying coplions

TITU

arKING(Mi)COMPAKCD WITH PALL(^a)

TITLE

^■WMCAT C3CO*N aBOATS
CmSAKLIT ^AU. OTMtM

Suggested arrangement when
obove grid

KEYS

Definition; A key In the case of a curve chort I] o device for identifying
curves by means of labeled "samples" of the curves ploced opart from the
curves themselves.

Principle

1. Keys should be so constructed and placed as to permit ready iden-
tification of the curves.

Procedures

1. KEY WITHIN GRID. If space permits, the key should be placed within
the grid (but separated from the curves so as not to intrude upon the
picture).

When the key is placed within the grid if should be placed apart
from the curves in such a way as not to interfere with the profjer
reading of the curve values on the scale.

Scales and keys should be located in respect to each other so as
not to interfere with the easy interpretation of the curves.

2. KEY OUTSIDE GRID. If the key is placed outside the grid, it may be
either above or below, the choice depending upon which location
permits easier reading in conjunction with the curves.

When placed above the grid, it is often feosible to incorporate the
key in the main title. (See illustration at the left.)

3. ARRANGEMENT. Items in the key ore normally placed one above the
other in column arrangement.

When the available space is not suitable for column arrangement,
items may be placed one after the other in horizontal lines.

4. ORDER OF ITEMS. Items in the key should follow a definite order;
either the order in which the curves should be read or some natural
order suggested by the data.

5. CURVE SEGMENTS. It is better to illustrate the curves referred to by
showing sample segments rather than by merely describing them
(e.g., is better than the description "dotted curve").

The curve segments should normally precede the designations.

It is permissible to enlarge the curve segments slightly to identify
the design more easily.

The curve segments should be of sufficient length to show at least
one complete unit of the design.

6. USE OF COLOR. Where color is used for curves it is effective to let-
ter the curve designations in the same colors.

The arrow and designation •'EdKc of Paper" have been added to the original in order to
indicate that the outside line is not a frame. See 382.

STANDARDS FOR TIME SERIES CHARTS

395

RELATION OF CURVE TO PIOHED POINTS

Not* Quesiions on this subieci arise mainly in coses of very heavy curves
where the difference >n volues of the upper and lower sides of the curves
ore sufTiciently Qreat to give sionificanl differences of interpretation. Where
extreme occurocy is required heovy or wide curves should not be employed.

1. Curves should be so drown as to depict accurately the trends and
relative values of the plotted points.

2. A uniform procedure should be followed in locating the curves in
relation to the plotted points.

MCOUUINOCO

NOT HCCOMUCNOCO

-■v/p /v/'-

Relation of elements of curve design
to plotted points

irriES

1. The main title should undertake to give the reader a quick understand-
ing of what the chart is about.

2. Titles should be so worded as to be readily understood and so exe-
cuted as to be pleasing to the eye.

3. Material serving to complete or supplement the main title should be
placed in a sub-title.

NOTES

1. Explanatory notes should be included when they ore necessary to a
clear and accurate understanding of the chart.

2. The content of a note should anticipate questions which might arise
in reoding a chart.

REFERENCE SYMBOLS

1. The purpose of a reference symbol is to assist in associating a par-
ticular part of the chart with a reference note.

2. Reference symbols should be so constructed that they will stand out
clearly from the material to which they ore related, and be dis-
tinguishable from one another.

PHINTCBJ

STuaoLS

mSm

lsiMH.irico fO«

D«»rTI»c U5t)

•

• •

LtTTtK
STMBOLS

•
•

NUUSCO ^^^ 1

•

CCOMCTRIC H|

srusOLS ■!

♦

Suggested reference symbols

396

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

INCLUSION OF DATA

Supplementary dota Inserted
the grid

f</3

Paper <

TITLE

X
J

%
i

—

•

TIM(

Actual figures for points of speclol
Interest

Note: In chart prepcrotion It must be borr>e in mind that many people ot%
noi fully "grophic minded" end would prefer the focts in tobular form.
Moreover, there ore many occasions when supplementary figures will im-
prove the value of o chart for everyone; and often the effectiveness of the
presentation itself can be enhanced by the proper use of figures.

Principles

1. When figures are added, they should make some definite contribution
such as —

(a) To provide the actual figures for the values shown in the chart,
(bl To provide data supplementing the values shown in graphic form.

(d) To emphasize amounts and differences shown on th6 chart.

2. The inclusion of figures on a chart should be done in conformity with
the accepted principles of preferred practice in tabular presentation.

Procedure

INCLUSION OF SUPPORTING OR SUPPLEMENTARY DATA. A com-
mon method of including supporting data is to place the figures in the
form of a table above or below the grid opposite the vertical rulings,
reading upward as shown in the chart at the top of the page. This
method has the advantage of closely relating figures to the plotted
points.

TABULAR INSERTS. Supplementary or supporting data can often be
shown as a tabular insert placed within the grid where adequate
space is available. This procedure is particularly good where it is
desired to include figures but at the same time subordinate them to
the graphic picture.

COORDINATE TABLE AND CHART. Where the tabular presentation
is of equal importance to the graphic, it is frequently a good plan to
construct a separate chart and table, placing them side by side.

4. SIGNIFICANT DATA ONLY. Data added to clarify the picture should
generally be restricted to the items in which the reader is most likely
to be interested, such as high or low points on fluctuating curves or
the values for recent dates. In coses where such values ore included
directly on the curves, the principles outlined under "Curve Designa-
tions," pages 52 and 53, should be observed.

5. A Grid with frequent horizontal rulings may often make the reading
of amounts sufficiently precise to obviate the need for actual data.

The arrow and designation "Edge of Paper" have been added to the original in order to
indicate that the outside line is not a frame. See 382.

397

E Lcitr, Inc . Nfw York.

A. Leica Camera.

Cnniliil Cnnirra Corp ol
Amrrica, Chicngo. III.

B. Perfex 44.

Chapter 46

Carl Zciii, Inr . New York,

C. Contax Camera.

THE CAMERA AND ITS USE

REPORTS, publicity, etc., now consist largely of photographs
and graphic charts. A camera is a necessity and some knowl-
edge of photographic possibilities imperative.
For the inexperienced, a reflex such as E, below, showing a full
size image in the focusing finder, is desirable. Imported miniature
cameras like A and C above, of high quality, have interchangeable
lenses and attachments covering the whole photographic field — if
expertly handled. American miniatures are cheaper but only the
Perfex 44, B above, approaches the Europeans in quality and flexi-
bility.

For contact prints cameras of the Speed Graphic or Linhof type,
D and F below, are widely used by reporters and professional pho-
tographers. Made in several sizes, they use film pack, cut film or
plates, and can be fitted with lenses of different focal lengths.

Folmer Graflrz Corp.
Rochritrr. N Y

D. The Speec
Graphic.

Burleigh Brooks. Inc.

New York, N. Y

E. The Rolleiflex.

F. The Linhof.

398

Dcvin Coloruraph Co., New
York. N. Y.

Thomas S Curtis Lab . HuntinRton Park, Cal.

B. The Curtis Color Scout.

A. Devin Tricolor
Camera.

OPTICAL SYSTEM OF
DEVIN TRICOLOR CAMERA

A portion o* iho Ughl possmo I'lrough itip lens is retlecled by
iho Iranspoieni pellicle minor lAI lo blut> Tliei Ibl. All colors e«-
(epting blue ore Tillered oui and Ihis blue light posst-s on lo
opusu a pluio ICI. thus (orming the blue record

The light romommg ofter passing through the Tirst mirror is ogain
reflecti-d bv tie second minor 101 lo the red filler (El, thence lo
the plata IFI, to form the 'red record '

Tho residual light posses lo the rear of Iho comervi. iind through
tiie ore» n hlter iGi lo lonii Iho greon record ' at IMI

Tricolor cameras come «n
and makes.

TWO METHODS of color photography are in general use. One
requires a tricolor camera. A and B above, making simulta-
neously by one exposure three separate negatives on panchromatic
plates, using color filters and mirrors. Process plates are prepared
from these for three-color halftone or offset printing, or one of the
photographic color printing processes such as Carbro or Wash-Off
Relief. The other method uses color film or plates in an ordinary
camera. Kodachrome and Dufay film. Lumiere and Finlay plates
are examples. When developed they show the image as a color
transparency which must be viewed by transmitted light, directly
or by projection. For printing, three-color separation negatives are
made from them by contact or enlargement. The Kodak exhibi-

'HE CAMERA AND ITS USE

tion at the New York World's Fair, 1939, shows Kodaclirome
35mm. film l" x 1^4" projected to 17' x 22' with perfect color ren-
dering, clear definition, no grain, and a remarkable three dimen-
sional effect. It is obtainable in 35mm. rolls and several sizes of
cut film. Development at the Eastman plant in Rochester, New
York, is included in the price. "Dufay color film, in both roll and
cut film types may be used with almost any camera and developed
anywhere. Lumiere and Finlay plates are used chiefly in lantern
slide size or larger and are not difficult to develop.

Films and plates for black and white photography are too nu-
merous and varied to mention. The manufacturer or an experi-
enced photographer should be consulted as to the one best suited
to your work. .

• 3.Smm. Kodachrome him is also developed
at Kodak, Ltd., Wealdstone. Middlesex,
England: Akt. Fabrik, Friedrirhshapener
Strasse 9. Kopenick, Germany; Kodak-
Pathe, S.A.F., Avenue Victor Hugo,
Sevran, France.

A. How Various Lenses Are Con-
structed and the Approximate
Speeds That Result.

1. It is easy to see why the price in-

creases with the speed.

2. The illustration does not indicate the

greater size of a fast lens, but it
does suggest the added weight.

Eastman Kodak Co., Rocheiter. N. Y.

The lens is the camera. In choosing a lens, sharp definition and
good color correction are important. High speed is of value for
only a few special uses. A set of lenses with different focal lengths
is most advantageous.

Portable dark rooms, daylight loading developing tanks, and
compact and efficient enlargers make it possible to do most photo-
graphic work in a drafting room or store room boasting hot and
cold water. Opaque curtains or a wall board screen may be drawn
when necessary to exclude light. Portable equipment appears in
400A.

ELEMENTS

RELATIVE

LENS

OF LENS

SPEED

MENISCUS

DOUBLET

( )

1/2

F.7.7

F.6.3

III

• F.4.5

«l

F.3.5

III

F.2.8

F.2.0

(CH

400

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

^^^JE^

I — Vorking lopa Urge eooH^ to t*ke four (4) tUndard traft.

2 — Sptec for Irimmer, blotun, tquMigM pUlM, etc.

J — Four (4) driwrn for paper*, filnu, Degttive*. etc.

4 — Foldind doora 6tled with lock and key.

S — Section for storage bottle*, chemicala, meaauring glaaa, etc.

6 — S«fivcl caatorv.

G Grniicrt. New York. N Y.

A. Portable Darkroom.

USING a variety of photo-
graphic techniques will
add interest to a record or re-
port. Photomontage, as seen
in 401 A, effectively presents
much information in a small
space by combining several
negatives or parts of negatives
in one print. Photomosaic is
somewhat similar but combines
several prints or portions of
prints, drawings, etc., by cut-
ting and pasting, using either
photographic or other back-
grounds.

Lines may be thickened as in 40 IB. Figures, lettering, models,
etc., may be made to look taller or wider by photographic methods.
Shading, bas-relief, etc., may be added photographically in copy-
ing quite simple designs as indicated in 380. Distortion can be prac-
ticed in photographic cartoons. Pagano, Inc., Ray Albert, and
Martin J. Weber, all of New York, N. Y., specialize in this work.

A photograph of present conditions may be strikingly contrasted
with a drawing of future plans or possibilities as in 402A and 402B,
or a drawing made on the actual photograph of existing conditions
may indicate the effect of suggested changes as shown in 404A and
404B.

Simmon Bros.. Long Island City, N. Y.

B. Omega Enlarger.

THE CAMERA AND ITS USE

401

Analyzing the Facts

Walter P. Burn Ai Aisociatet, New York, N. Y.

A. Photomontage — "Analyzing the Facts."

Martin J Wcbrr. New York. N Y

Lines Thickened by Photographic
Reproduction.

This method is valuable in reproduc-
ing charts in which the lines are
too fine as originally drawn.

LARGE collections of charts,
maps, plans, etc., may be
photographed on 35mm. film
in either black and white or full
color and stored in a small
space. All government census
records are being reduced to
this form. Rare and valuable
original documents, prints,
maps, etc., in private or public
collections may be copied and
recorded in this way at small
expense and with great accu-
racy. Ancient documents
copied on infra-red film are
often more legible than the
original.

402

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

From o BoDklrt o( thr Civic Crntrr Union Station Coniinittrc of Los Ant;rlrs. Califurnia, I') .17

A. Panorama Made from Three Separate Photographs Taken from One Location,
New Union Railroad Station, Los Angeles.

From a Booklet of the Civic Ccntrr Union Station Committee of Lo» Angclej, California, 1Q3 7.

B. Architectural Perspective Drawing Accurately Representing the View That
Buildings in A Above Should Be Removed and Minimum of Landscaping

1. The method of using three photographs as in A is one that can be applied anywhere

2. Though the Civic Center Buildings were mostly completed, an oblique aerial photo-

majestic buildings so well as the perspective drawing looking upward rather than

Kf: '^'■■:f^i'i^.

THE CAMERA AND ITS USE

403

Will.ird C Bnriton ContullmR EiiKinrrr

Showing Buildings Blotting Out the Civic Center When Viewed fronn Site of

Willard C Brinton, Coniulting Enginrrr. RrndcrifiK hy Aintm Wiltlr^py, Anhitrrt P.ts.nlrn.i C.tl.

Could Be Had from the New Union Railroad Station of Los Angeles if
Added.

without special eq-jipment. The street, really straight, appears to be elbowed,
graph could not have illustrated the possibilities for an impressive vista toward
downward.

404

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

New York Cily Tunnel Authority.

A. New York City from the Bay, Governors Island on the left.

New York City Tunnel Authority.

B. The Same View as Above with Superimposed Sketch Showing Proposed Bridge
from New York to Brooklyn as It Would Appear, Cutting Off Most of the
View of Lower New York as Seen from the Bay.

1. This is a somewhat different technique from that shown in 402A and 402B.

2. The possibility of exaggeration is always present in the use of this and similar tech-

niques.

REFERENCES

Eastman Kodak Co., Rochester, N. Y. How to Make Good Pic-
tures. Clear and concise.

Morgan and Lester, The Leica Manual. Wide technical and sci-
entific field.

Scacheri, Mario and Mabel, The Fun of Photography. The best
yet.

Chapter 47
LANTERN SUDES

405

B. Kodaslide Ready - Mount for
Ready-Mount Changer.

Red bordered side faces screen wl>cn
in projector.

Eattman Kodak Co.. Rochcitrr. N Y.

A. Kodaslide Projector With Ready-Mount
Changer in Place.

Kodaslide Ready - Mount
Metal Franne for Use
Other Projectors.

n this movie-minded world,
photographic projection shows
constant improvement in materials
and methods. The rapid rise of
color film for both moving pictures
and lantern slides has brought projectors such as the Kodaslide
in A above and the Spencer Delineascope in D below, with lenses
and illumination corrected for accurate rendering of color. Sev-
eral of the less expensive models give good results with audiences
up to two hundred while the 750-watt Leica and Spencer machines
are effective for two thousand. The Spencer is equipped to handle

all sizes of slides. ^ . ,

Li ghtness

and conveni-
ence is push-
ing the 2" X 2"
slide ahead of
the 3i>4"x4"

D. Spencer Auditorium Color
Slide Delineascope — 750
Watts.

Equipped to use any sue slide.

]

4i%

Sprnccr I"" r^ B- ff .1 ■ N V

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

A. The Selectroslide.

1. Holds 48 Klass-mounted 2" x 2" slides.

2. May be operated by remote control.
J. Can be equipped for continuous automatic

operation.
Sptndlcr fli Sauppe, Inc., San Francitco. Cal.

Standard American lantern slide and the 3%" x 3%" used in Europe,
Lightest of all is the cardboard Ready-Mount shown in 405 B,
now included in the development charge for Kodachrome film. Fifty
of these in the Kodaslide Changer in 4 0.S A are moved into posi-
tion by working a small plunger. Glass-covered slides are mounted
B. 800 Foot Con+inuous

Projection
nnent for
Film.

Attach-
1 6 mm.

t .It

I i( II

1 w <,■

I / r 1 1 I <■ c tors
. itli. I \<. i!h or witliiiut

With sound runs 22 niin.

without I cpt'.itin^;
Sil>nt pKSMitat ii-'n l.')sts

J,i mjn.

Bell & Howrll, ChicaKO. Ill

with tape or metal bindings. Projectors similar to the Selectro-
slide in A above require a glass-covered slide or one with a metal
frame.

The recognized value of moving pictures and lantern slides for
the effective presentation of facts and ideas has recently produced
several easily operated machines for projection by remote control
or continuous automatic action. Some of these are illustrated —
the Selectroslide in A above, the Kodaslide in 405A, the Bell 8g
Howell automatic machines in B and C, and the Contimovie in
407A. For advertising, exhibitions, and educational work some
equipment of this type is almost a necessity.

Bell (k Howell. ChifttKo. Ill

C. 600 Foot Continuous Projection
Attachment in Sound-Proof Case
with Shadow Box and Screen in
Place.

.1.

LANTERN SLIDES

407

Sources of Screens

Da- Lite Screen Company, Chicago, Illinois.

Motion Picture Screen &> Accessories, Inc., New York City. (See

C below)
Raven Screen Corporation, New York City.
Sasco Photo Products, Los Angeles, California. (See B below)

Eighteen Kodachrome films in Ready-Mounts 2" x 2" cost $2.2 5,
about 14 cents each if there are no failures. Glass-covered black
and white slides of the same size may be made for about the same
price. Some other types and larger sizes are higher. It is as easy
now to use color as black and white, but the slides are not so dura-
ble. Heat and concentrated light affect color, especially the yel-
lows, though the dyes are improving in this respect.

A. The Contlmovie.

1. Can fic ust(! w.ith any

pf<)jti"ti>r uith or \».ith-

out Sound
2 16 mm. SOti-.^OOO fet-t.
35 mm. SOO-.iOOO (cet.
3. iOOO f( < » \t\ mm. runs

for Hilt hour without

rt ptdtion.

Conlimovir Salrs Co . New York

^^^^"TT^

I i. L

^
5^^

Satco Pholo Product! Lo« Angrlrt Cal

B. The Sanders Screen.

28 X 42 . - 28 X 50

Motiun Picturr Scrcrn fii Arrr»-
»oric4 Co . Inc . New York.

C. Britelite - Truvislon
Crysta I Beaded
Screen.

30 X 40 and other sizes.

408

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

"Engineering and Scientific Charts for Lantern
Slidet," Prepared by Sulicommittee of Com-
mittee on Standards for Graphic Presentation.
Sponsored by The American Society of Mechan-
ical Engineers, New York City. 1932.

Desig-
nation

Size of Letters

Sample Letters

Approx.

Height,

inches

HI ABCDE 175

H-2 ABCDE 0.140

H-3 ABCDE

Same Source as A Above.

0.120

Key to Letfering for Lantern Slides.

Valuable
slides may be damaged if left
on the screen too long. The
Lynhoff Laboratories, Roches-
ter, N. Y., makes a heat-re-
flecting glass, either clear or
diffusing, which may be placed
between the slide and the light
source in the projector. As a
further precaution, irreplace-
able slides may be copied in
full color at no great expense
and with satisfactory results.
Cardboard Ready-Mount Ko-
dachrome slides are light and
thin. They may be filed 19 to
the inch, and are easily packed
for mailing. The boxes in
which they are returned, 18 to
the box, fit well in a 3" x 5"
card index file.

A. Chart Reduced to Lantern Slide
Size.

1. The original chart wat 6f^" x 9" in-

cluding margins.

2. The cut from which this illustration

was taken was standard lantern
slide size 3Vi" x 4", one-third re-
duction. The illustration above
was reduced Va from that to about
the 2" X 2" slide size.

3. Directions on the right of the illus-

tration refer to the dimensions of
the original drawing.

Line Width of Letters

Approx.
Desig- Width,

nation Sample Line inches

W-1

iV-2
W-2

0.025

0.017
0.017

'^.

Ov^^

.:^

/M^;^;

j^ritr^

Potiiion of
Slide Number

Lib«l
(Thumb Spot)

Gnd Rulintt Break at
Labels and Symbols

Oosed Symbols for
Observed Points

Same Source as A Above

C. Suggested Practices for Charts for
Lantern Slides.

1. Reduced '/i from oritjinal cut.

2. Cut was reduced from drawing 6 x

^Va", including margins.

LANTERN SLIDES

Science Service, Inc., Washington. D. C.

Microfilm Reader.

photo-

Reading by projection is of
increasing importance in the
larger public libraries, universi-
ties, scientific institutions, and
business organizations where
research is carried on. A typi-
cal machine for this purpose is
illustrated at the left.

Through the cooperation of
the more important libraries
throughout the world, immense
resources are rapidly being
made available to the research
worker by this cheap and con-
venient method. Prices vary
somewhat but complete books
may usually be copied for from
one to three cents a page.
Work in color is slightly more
expensive, but sometimes in-
valuable. The photographing
of old documents and manu-
scripts on infra-red film fre-
quently brings to light erasures,
changes, and sometimes for-
geries hitherto unsuspected.

The American Documentation Institute, Washington, D. C, in
cooperation with the United States Department of Agriculture,
public libraries, and other research institutions, acts as a clearing
house for much of this Bibliofilm Service.

Publication by this film method is also coming into use for re-
search material which does not require a large edition. The econ-
omy and convenience of this can easily be seen. The use of Micro-
color film by Bibliofilm Service adds to the scope and value of
research extract copying, since colored specimens and objects as
well as illustrations may be reproduced and used either for indi-
vidual reading or projected on a wall screen for class or lecture use.

REFERENCES:

Morgan. Willard D., and Henry M. Lester, The Leica Manual,
Morgan & Lester, New York City, 1937.

1. For reading books or records

graphed on 35 mm. film.

2. Turning the handle changes the pages

either backward or forward.

3. The image is magnified 12 diameters.

4. The Reader may also be used as a

projector for ordinary screen.

5. It may also be used as an enlarging

printer, making enlarged paper
print copies of any microfilm ma-
terial.

410

Chapter 48
PREPARATION OF ILLUSTRATIONS

THE preceding chapters have shown the many ways in which
information may be presented in graphic chart form as well as
information on how to read a graphic chart. Choice of the form in
which material will be best presented, while an important step, is
not always the first or last step. The following chapters will show

Bausch 6t Lomb Optical Co., Rochester, N. Y.

A Reducing Glass.

1. The diameter of this glass is three inches. It will reduce in the ratio of about two to

one. The reducing glass is made with a double concave lens of white ophthalmic
glass, protected by a wide chromium rim.

2. A criterion in reducing an illustration might be that an area measuring about 3 " x 6 "

is about all the eye can hold at one time.

In planning page lay-outs, a reducing glass may be used to determine whether reduction
to fit a given space will cause loss of detail. It is possible to sec how an illustration
will appear when it is reduced by adjusting the distance between the illustration and
the glass until the correct ratio between the original and the reduced image is obtained.

PREPARATION OF ILLUSTRATIONS

411

some of the problems involved in the actual presentation of the
chart.

When presenting material in a pamphlet or book, it is possible
and sometimes a good policy to use only graphic charts. Illustra-
tions of other types may be included and many times should be
included. The choice of illustrations will depend upon a number of
factors. The material to be presented will be the most important
criteria.

E W, Pikr S Company Cranford N J

SCALE 8

A. Illuminaied Hand Magnifiers.

Any nnagnificr may be used to secure an
idea of the appearance of an illus-
tration when jt IS enlarged. The
same method suggested in 410
may be used for this also.

SIZE OF COPY

SIZE OF

*^ FINISMED CUT

B. Scaling Copy.

Since the ori^mal drawing or photo-
graph seldom fits the allotted
space, it is necessary to "scale the
copy," that is, to figure out the
height and width it will be when
one side is reduced or length-
ened.

A diagonal line drawn from corner to
opposite corner will be the di-
agonal of a larger or smaller illus-
tration made from that copy. Use
a tissue overlay paper for drawing
the diagonal.

A slide rule is also a useful device to
determine the reduction of a pho-
tograph or drawing.

412

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

A photograph which is to be printed or reproduced should never
be rolled. If it is absolutely necessary, roll the photograph with the
picture outside. Then if the surface should crack the cracks may
close up when the photograph is flattened out.

Instructions written on a photograph or picture will often appear
in the halftone. A paper clip often cracks the photograph and
appears in the finished picture. Writing should never be put
directly on a photograph or drawing. Instructions should be writ-
ten on a separate piece of paper and folded over the margin.

Steel Industry

Wrong Way to Make Crop Marks.
See 413 for remarks.

PREPARATION OF ILLUSTRATIONS

413

To determine whether a cut is already a halftone, look at it
through a small magnifying glass. If the shaded portions appear
as many dots, it is a halftone. Halftone screens are designated as
fine or coarse, depending upon the number of lines of dots to the
inch.

A rotogravure illustration when looked at through a small magnify-
ing glass appears as many small squares, less clearly than a half-
tone.

Right Way to Make Crop Marks.

Put crop marks in the margin of a photograph or drawing. If you MUST mark the copy,
use a China marking pencil for this purpose. The reason for this is simple:— crop
marks drawn on the photograph oblige the engraver to make the plate smaller
than the size indicated by them.

414

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

Reproduction Media for Art Work

Amt

MUIUM

IViiiil. Charcoal. Pailcl.
Clulk. Square Slick, or
l.illiiiKr;i|>h Prim.

K»:pR(H)i'(.TloN MtvilinM
Usi'Ai.i.Y Employki)

I Highlight or rrgular fine-
I screen copper halftone re-
I quired ID secure fine grada-
tion of tone. If to appear
on nou-»print, use a coane-
scrccn halftone.

I't'iiancl'liik. Wood Cut,
Vraitli Hoard. Reverie
Drawuig. or Black Crayon
on Pebbled Board, or Proof
(rom Coarv Screen Half-
tone

Line engiavmif: on copper for
very fine work, or long runs,
on line where work is nut
extremely fine in shading,
and run is rehitivelv short.

UnSUIIABLE KKPRlimiCTlUN

MrtHom

Line engraving not suited un-
less tones are solid, showing
no gradation.

Halftone is uniuited. as it
"breaks up" the solid black
lines and areas.

CklMMKNTS

If technique is bold, coanc
screen can be used.

If later to be duplicated by
electro, stereo, or mat. spec-
ify when the original plate
is made.

Dry Brush. .Vir Brush. Wash
Drawing.

Walrr Color or Oil P.ainting
to reproduce in Black-and
White.

Combination Line and "Flat"
lones (i.e.. tones which
Ikixc no >^adalinn of v.ilur)

Print from "Dry Point" or
.\cid-Bilten Etching.

l'hoirif>rjpli. Photo-Montage.

Oilored Drawings. Water
Oilor .ind Oil Painting.
Colored Photos, Crayon or
Pastel Drawing (to be re-
produced in color).

Drawint^ ol more than one
fo|f>r. ii*in(; solid color
;irras or sli.i(ling\ done with
lin<^ or lion

Highlight or regular fine-
screen coppr) hdlllont if to
Im' um'cI on smooth paper:
co.irv'-Mrecn halftone if on
Mt-wsprini.

Highlight or regular fine-
screen ( tipper hnlflotir if to
bo iiscti on smo<iih paper;
coarsc-strcen halfloiir if on
newsprint.

Line engrailing used with Ben
Day. or other shading me-
dium for flat toned areas

Line engraving will not re-
produce tone values.

Where lines and tone etlects
(as in meMOlint) :ire fine,
use a fine-xrreen nipper
halflone.

Halflone: Coarse screens for
rough papers: fine screens
on copper for smooth
papers.

Two-, three-, four-, five-, etc.,
color process, dejiending
upon ttature of copy and
fineness of work required.

line engraviiif^i for caih of
the 2. J. or more colors will
produce a grc.ii variety of
tones by overprinting of
areas, either solid or shaded
to different decrees

Line engraving will not re-
produce tone values.

Halftone is unsuite«l as it
would make a "pattern."
Line engraving .ilone un-
suitcd unless time is on
original art work by use ol
Bourges screiiis. Craf-tint,
Prcs-.i -Tin t . or other
iiiclhod.

Line engraving unsuited un-
less technique is quite bold
and simple.

If use of dry bnuh produces
solid black stippled dots,
line engras itig ran l)e used.

In certain cases, use of color
filters is required to pre-
serve tonal relations of
original.

Stippling or ruling can be
done by hand, rather than
by a mechanical shading
method.

Use coarse ■ screen halftone
only if to be used on nesvs-
print or rough paper.

Line engraving will
produce tones

Line engraving will not re-
proiluce tones.

If photograph shows only
solid areas of black-and-
white, or lines and no
tones, a line engraving may
be used.

Color process plates mav be
used in < on junction with
additional flat tints for spe-
cial effects.

Halftones unsuited, as they
form an iMulesirable "pat-
tern" and hre.ik up the
solid areas

(iosts can often be reduced
by having an artist make a
separate black ■ and - white
drawing on tissue (so as to
secure register) for each
color. Separate line engrav-
ings are then made from
each.

The Colton Press, New York City, "Production Yearbook," Vol. V, 19.19.

Reproduction Media for Art Work.

SCALE .7

PREPARATION OF ILLUSTRATIONS

415

Lawrrncr W I>rapKfr. "The Art of Linoleum Cutting. " 1Q38. Publithed by Government Printing Office
Apprentice School, Washington, D. C.

A Linoleum Block Cut.

1. Linoleum or wood blocks may be used for the actual printinj;. In fact, the first printed

letters were wood-cut type carved into pictorial wood-cut blocks in explanation
of the picture. Its wide use and the ease with which it is cut have made linoleum
one of the best known and best liked materials in the reproduction of decorative
designs, silhouettes, and the simpler illustrations.

2. In a great many printing plants, linoleum blocks, which are supplanting wood, are cut

for tint blocks, second-color plates, for use in graphs and charts, for indicating

zones or routes on maps, and for all kinds of work ranging from advertising

blotters to letterheads. The block prints best on an antique finish paper, and inks
of a heavy body should be used.

416

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

MACHINE FINISH PAPER

SCREEN

Photo-Engravrn Board of Trade, New York City.

Halftone Screen Tints.

The purpose of the half cirrles in this illustration and the one on page 417 is to indicate how
curves will appear when the various screens are used.

PREPARATION OF ILLUSTRATIONS

417

SCREEN

110

SCREEN

MACHINE FINISH PAPER

PIS

^"""""^ ( iik

> »>

^ C=l^

mmmk\\%
G

A C E

SUPER PAPER

SCREEN

Photo-Eneraver* Board of Trade. New York City.

Halftone Screen Tints.

There were eight halftone screen tints in each of these series, but only every other one
is reproduced here.

418

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

1 Vz V4 1 Vz 'A 1 % V4

The "1" indicates a full color value.

"'/a" a half screen and "54" *

quarter screen.
Those colors that are checked (r )

are the ones used generally in this

book.
Because of the possibility of patterns,

the colors marked x" have not

been used.
The small areas of color between the

combinations of color are helpful

in determining the colors and

color values that are combined in

adjoining sections.

Colors and Possible Combinations of the Colors Used in This Book.

Because enough tints and shadings of color may be obtained by using half screen and
quarter screen colors, the combinations of colors shown above that would require
a double screen have not been used in this book.

For an example of color combinations, see 186.

PREPARATION OF ILLUSTRATIONS

419

When color is used in printing a pamphlet or book, "tints' of the
color or colors may be used to secure shading instead of using cross
hatchings. However, because the areas for color tints usually are
irregular in shape and require more skill in applying them, the cost
of color tinting may be greater than the cost of the halftones.

One definite problem arose regarding the use of the color "green."
As shown opposite, green may be secured from a combination of
full yellow and full blue. If this "combination" green were used,
both blue and yellow color plates and an extra press run would
have been necessary, whenever green was wanted. As a result, a
green ink was used instead of the "combination" green in some
chapters.

The subject "Color and Its Use" is discussed on pages 423 to 428.

DS-25

DT-60

Transograph Corporation, New York City.

Shading Film.

1. A transparent film on which cross-hatchings and halftones are printed in ink has been

developed by several firms. This shading film is placed over the original drawing
on those sections to be shaded and a photograph is taken of the combination.
The halftones available in this film are those used for newspaper work, that is,
from a 2S-linc to a 60-line screen. Perhaps in the future, they may also be made
with a finer screen. Film is made for light or dark background.

2. A modification of the transparent film is also available in the form of illustration

board, which when treated with a chemical solution brings out the shadings in the
desired sections. A screen as fine as 80-line may be secured in this form. This
may be secured from The Craftint Manufacturing Company, Cleveland, Ohio.

3. Other companies from which a similar film may be obtained are as follows:

Arthur Brown flk Bros.. New York City. (Artist Improved Shading Sheet.)
Grafa-Tone Co.. New York City.
Zip-A-Tone , Chicago, Ulinois.

420

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

i!ili!!l

;,lhl:,|.'

iiiillilii!!

Courteiy of Ch;ii; Company, Philadelphia.

A. Drawing Boards for Securing Halftone Effects.

1. These drawing boards and many others may be used to secure halftone effects. Before

a pencil is applied to the board, it is perfectly white with slight indentations on
the surface. The pencil touches only the high spots, and the effect desired is thus
secured.

2. A charcoal drawing on rough paper also secures a halftone effect.

3. Whenever any drawing material which may smudge is used, spray of liquid "fixative"

will prevent any possibility of smudging.

No. 523.— 9I4X 14J4.

No. 509. — 9^4 X i4'4.

No. 526.— 9 J4 X 14^4.

No. 512.— 7 X 7.

Xo. 5iS.—bHx7'/2

No. 527.— 9I4 X 14I4.

Courtesy of Ben Day. Inc., New York.

B. Ben Day Shading Films.

1. The Ben Day process is used to make crosshatchings and shadings on charts, maps,
and pictures. The shading medium consists of a transparent film stretched taut
upon a wood frame. This film bears a design in relief on the outer side. The
work is done on the drawing, on the negative, or directly on the plate before it is
etched for printing. If done on the negative, the finished plate will show the tint
in reverse as to black and white. When a particular shading and the sections in
which it is to appear have been decided upon, all other sections are protected by
French folio paper, gum, or gamboge (a semi-transparent solution). The inked
film upon which the particular pattern appears in relief is then placed face down
upon the drawing, negative, or plate. The top side of the shading medium is
rubbed with a stylus or rubber roller, and the pattern is thus transferred to the
copy.

2. Various shadings are available, as well as textile tints.

3. See 419 and 422 for other methods of securing shadings.

PREPARATION OF ILLUSTRATIONS

Photoengraving and Electrotyping

by Otto Kleppner

421

Si-n i>K Arioss

Ciiirr \\n K>ixm.v.

Ciiirr l.iMir»ri<.vN

CtlMMrST .

Halllont St-rrenf

50. 35. hO. 65.

1 IVint* no nv»< iLnk nn r»>l«<l |»»»~«

Kill

\ «>nly '!»• *»'> .onr««.l •vrMn* .an

U .~.l |u. <r....k> hn

|«K««I Iwpar
B Tka (in.. Ik. -.^.n r,.l.n(. llx

r.n«r Ik. .I.I..I
I* TT*. .^larwr Ik. .|«.alilr "f Ik.

pfinltng IMIwr. tk. titarwr ik.

>r..n ruf.n. F,n. Mtam k.ll

t..n«« ar. apl l<> kll u|> an.l .mu.!*.

..n r....tk •••rla.T.I pai>.r.

1 Vt
Pai

II \uh-

III llj'r'i..

all, n.,
..II a.

■■\_

n«« ..wrwr ikan Km.lin
1.1. rtn ain.. Untf wM.alK
n. |4al.« tann..! Iw r.
lk*M* tna.1. ..n ...pfivr

8S. 100.110,

IVinl* «• MM^IM tMk, MPW. MM

rowr. and «««l«<il •fork.

:in"^

120. 133.

150. 175.

PnntB ttn finml p«p«n rm\\

Line Plates

ClIlM \|.\>SH<.t^ I ClIlKl I.IMlTAnOVS CoMMKM

Bl \(;k \\i> > """r * "••""•'•- •""•■ i- - ••••'>•' I. Tw -~i fr„,„.„ii, .-d („,,

.' i'mn U ina.l« .lui. kl. kUrk bne. or maaava. ara.ini

Wm TK ". I an fc. u..nl«l .m an, itadr i.ap.1 iif^i H Cannat r.|i.,«J>..^ pkuloftaiA- II Make UJd .«»cl. .n irl IJa. k uuaaibtr

. , , ,.d.d r^l.,ln» in ua. <lo.< not l.nn> .a>k <ira>>n(. ... nainlmc III U.ualK ol l.n. . U-k.n m.n>il. .kuH f

(Also KIUXMI a> knra 1... .k— l...rlkrr '" '« •••'■I- t^<' " ""a-l. "n .^tpr..

■'LineCul"> ;

ItFV nW I- P »»»i J .- mon liMtr ail lifc lo a Una a«b- A. "Larina" Ben llay rkaranl aslra. I* All ikal la na>«a.arx « f4aar arawint

'"^■^ I'.-ll ^^1 B. Coally Ir ui«< rilmai.aly >ilkin I oilb in.ln'alion «k.va Ban l)at ia ■■.

(In \arioUS StvlcS I : App~ack». a haKloac in apvaarancT. , a«. pUla. , I ,, !'"'"■*'« ■ i ,

, I Ih.! r.Uin> ..•.(■ilnna of lin. iJal. ,1 \ ».v fin. pall.tn. p.inl i-K.fl. on II Sfmiall. i^-ifarv.! .Irawinca - ar. In

.IS Sno»n III paltt'rn •, t.uall> l..> .>p.nuv. in »•. ikan kan.l .^wirw pap.r> ' qaanlly rcMuirrd fiir Ik. qy<-l a.l.aaia

l„„,L , .Ira.n au.l.n< ».»li *'"•• "•<• nf Brn lla.

Srmn inrnm ol Ben l>a. linl ihouM
Iw arW.-lr.f nilk »amr Ikougkl of pa|iar
a».l p..aawo.fc a* fn. kalflnn.a

(•f\t i \0 ItFV r^4\' |«..p.n...r (■•rni of .itk*r r.iM-oduction LimiUlioaa aimilar to Ihoaa of abov* I I. Oriainal illuatralioa ia aaat la «a<ra

•UHJK tJt^ l}\t <- lilal... in bUck and .hila. wilb color adMm.

PLATES I „ ""^•-•'J

II. Allraclivc alTacU in 2. .^. and 4 colon >aa

br okuinad raadily.
Ill No linitalion to lb. numUf of color,
ikal ran U ut.]

From "Production Yearbook." Adapted from a Chart in "Advertising Procedure," by Otto Kleppner,
Copyright 1938 by Prentice-Hall, Inc.

1. Duplicates of the original plates may be made either as electrotypes — a direct process —

or as stereotypes — an indirect process through the use of mats.

2. Three forms of electrotypes are copper wax molds, steel wax molds (both of which can

be made from type setups, cuts, or combinations of these), and lead or steel molds.
The copper wax mold is the least expensive of the three.

3. Stereotypes are plates made by pouring melted type metal into a paper mold called a

"mat."

Wotman illustration board is available at almost any art supply
house in the following four surfaces:

1. Hot-pressed — pen and ink drawings, water colors, and pas-
telles.

2. Cold-pressed — water colors and pastelles. Pen and ink may
be used, but best results are obtained on hot-pressed.

3. No. 1 Rough Surface — rough illustrations.

4. Rough — drawings where detail is not essential, such as land-
scaping.

422

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

Charles T. Bainbridge and Sons, Brooklyn, New York, make a
Coquille Bristol that may be used in the same way as the board
illustrated in 420A. This company also makes an illustration board
for general artwork and a board that is used for work requiring fine
detailed drawings. Samples may be secured upon request.

Sunray scratchboard, handled by the Steiner Paper Company,
New York City, may also be used in the same way as the board
illustrated in 420A.

Chicago Cardboard Company, Chicago, Illinois, manufactures a
colored art poster board calendered so that both lettering and
printing may be done on it.

REFERENCES

Wallace, C. E., Commercial Art, McGraw-Hill Book Co., Inc.,
New York City, 2nd edition, 1939.

U. 8. Drpartnicnt of Afirirulturr, Bureau of Agricultural Economic*.

A Series of Density Distinctions.

1. These cross -hatchings were made on sheets of paper by the Bureau of Agricultural

Economics. It is possible for any individual using a great many hachures and
desiring a large variety, to design several and have sheets of them printed.

2. To secure the greatest variety in shadings, every fourth or fifth one beginning with

black might be selected.

COLOR AND

Recent years have seen the dawn of a new era in the use of color.
An outline of certain color facts and theories may prove helpful.

The above colors arc approximate. The correct hues, vermilion, emerald green, pale cad-
mium yellow, and light ultramarine blue, may be obtained generally in high grade
tempera or show card colors.

A. The Primary Colors as Used and Described by Early Ariists.

Color study was based on human vision alone until Newton made the first physical analysis
of liRht about 1672.

B. The Primary Frequencies of Vibration in the Radiant Energy Called Light.
Young. 1773-1829; Hclmholtz, 1821-1894; Maxwell, 1831-1899. and Konig, 1832-1901,

proved these three frequencies of light vibration can produce all light colors.

C. The Primary Colors in Pigments as Taught During the 18th and 19th Centuries.

1. Green was considered a secondary color during this period.

2. The pure emerald green of Leonardo da Vinci and other early artists, however, cannot

be produced by mixing pigments.

D. The Two Pairs of Primary Color Sensations in Human Vision.

Hering. 1834-1918. based his color studies and theory on color sensations in the human
brain instead of on the physical properties of light.

E. The Three Primary Frequencies of Light and the Four Primary Color Sensations

Which They Produce in the Human Brain.

1. Through studies in color blindness, Ladd Franklin in COLOR AND COLOR THE-

ORIES. 1929, showed that color vision has developed from the power to see yellow
and blue only, into the ability to differentiate red and green from the yellow rays.

2. It was clearly shown that for normal human vision, the three primary color frequencies

of light produce four primary color sensations.

3. This reconcile* apparent contradictions in earlier theories and is now generally accepted.

424

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

A. Maxwell Discs of Slit
Paper or Cardboard.

s the idea of the spectrum band of colors
invaded the field of practical use, it was made into
a circle by adding the purple hues between blue
and red. for which there is no spectral wave
length. Scientists and artists divided this circle of
hues to suit their needs, usually at regular inter-
vals around the circle, with complementary colors
opposite each other. Complementary colors are
those producing neutral gray when mixed in cor-
rect proportions. Unmixed they tend to intensify
each other.

R /(4/u

A A

70 BG

Allcolor Company, New York City, "An Explanation and U«e of
Allcolor Paperi." Courtesy of Munscll Color Company.

C. The Horizontal Scale of Chroma.

1. This shows the practical advantage in numbering
chroma steps beginning at gray.

2. Hues differ in the number of their chroma steps.

3. As new pigments of greater intensity become avail-
able, new chroma steps can be added. Some hues
have acquired four new chroma steps since tliis sys-
tem came into use.

Millon Bradlry Co. New York
City

B. Color Top.

1. Maxwell discs of slit paper or cardboard, for studying primary
and other color relations, can be obtained with small color
tops, and larger color wheels, from Milton Bradley Co.
and the Abbott Educational Co., New York City.

I. These discs arc easily made from water-color paper painted
with tempera or show card colors. They should be slit
from the edge to the center, so that they can overlap as
desired when superimposed.

3. When spinning rapidly, the colors of the overlapping discs

metgc.

4. Light reflected from the surface of revolving discs creates \\\v

scnsation of colored light, not colored pigments. Light
ultramarine blue and pale cadmium yellow spun together
look almost pure white, not green. Vermilion and true
emerald green produce a darkish yellow, not neutral gray.

D. Contrasting Colors In

Even Balance.

Strongly contrasting or comple-
mentary colors, repeated in
equal quantities, are confus-
ing and hard on the eyes.

COLOR AND ITS USE

425

These diagrams illustrate the Munsell System of Color Notation,
and are reproduced through the courtesy of the International Print-
ing Ink Corporation from Three Monographs on Color, a publica-
tion of unusual interest and beauty.

The countless hues, and their modifications,
used in science, art. and industry required orderly
arrangement, and some method of accurate iden-
tification. This need produced several color sys-
tems, of which A. H. Munsell's A System of Color
Notation is the most widely used commercially.

A. 1. Hue indicates the spectral wave length of a color

and its position in the color circle.
2. In Munsell's notation, hue is indicated by its initial
letter.

B. 1. Value, or brightness, indicates a color's approach to

white or black.
2. In this system, it is indicated by a number written
above a diagonal line.

C. 1. Chroma, intensity, saturation, are here shown as a

number of steps away from neutral gray toward full
chroma, on the hue at its greatest intensity or satu-
ration.

D. 1. The three qualities of color, hue, value, and chroma,

are clearly shown in this diagram.
2. R 4/14 indicates a brilliant, intense red, and G 8/13
a light, gray green.

grttn

A. The Hue Circuit.

Wh,u

Another version of these
relationships is found in 42 7B.

Bhck

B. The Value Scale.

Blu* grtm

C. Chroma Steps.

D. Correlation of Three Dimensions of Color.

SCALE .8
International Printing Ink Corporation. New York City. "Color ia
U*e" No. 3 of a Scric* of 3 Monograph* on Color, 193S

426

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

VISIBILITY

^^^^H^^^^^^^^^^^^

10
11
12
13
14

VISIBILITY

Adapted from Whiting-Plover Paper Co., Stevent Point. Witcontin, "The U»e of Color," Founded on
Studiet Originally Published in "Le Courrier du Livre."

RELATIVE VISIBILITY OF COLORS AT A DISTANCE
A. To the Color Blind. B. To Normal Sight.

1. Dr. Edward A. Ayers says ir» "Color and Color Blindness," Century Ma/iaxine, April

1907, that one man in twenty and one woman in about two hundred are unable to
see red and green normally.

2. The use of black on yellow for motor road signs and for advertising in poorly lighted

telephone booths may be traced to this investigation.

COLOR AND ITS USE

427

mill 11 /I III

ax ceo / :>is>

AD /CD
IZ3 1456

I r

These colors differ in hue.

I I

^ I

These colors differ in value.

Grace Cornfll. "■Color." Carter's Ink Company,
Boston. Mass.. 1934.

A. Use of One Color with Black and
White.

The use of red for emphasis on a black
and white page is effective be-
cause of brightness, intensity and
high contrast combined with a
wave length on which the eye can
focus easily at about reading dis-
tance.

These colors differ in chroma.

George Welp. "Color for Packaging." 1938 Cour-
tesy of International Printing Ink Company.
New York City.

B. All Colors Differ in These Three
Ways.

A very fine summary of Ostwald's (1853-1932) color theory and
system appeared in "The Science of Color," More Business, *
November, 1937, written by Egbert G. Jacobson, President, Asso-
ciation for Color Research. The interrelation of hues is beautifully
shown throughout the color solid with unusual accuracy and rich-
ness.

Faber Birren follows Ostwald with modifications, using a 13-26
hue circle instead of Ostwald's 12-24. or Munsell's 5-10 circles. His
chart gives the natural intervals between hues as seen by the human
eye. Printing inkstand tempera colors^in these hues are available
commercially. All color charts are good if used intelligently.

♦Published by American Photo-Engravers Association, Chicago, Illinois.

t General Printing Ink Corporation, New York.

t E. William Berg. 5510 Warwick Avenue. Chicago. Illinoit.

428

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

The Allcolor Company, Inc., New York City.

A. The Allcolor Cabinefs Containing Colored Papers of 362 Hues.

Each paper shows its Munsell Notation number on the back; also the number of the Inter-
national Printing Ink Corporation's ink with which it was printed.

A yellow green is the brightest color in a dim light. Yellow green
light is used in photographic dark rooms whenever possible. In a
large garden, light blue flowers can be seen against a dark green
background farther than any other color. A light yellow is next in
visibility. Green and blue look brighter in a dim light than orange
or red, which require full illumination.

Effective color schemes may be composed of black and white and
another color, different values of one color, adjacent colors in the
color circle, near complements rather than exact complements, a
color and split complementaries — that is the colors on each side of
its complement in the color circle, triads or three colors equally
distant in the color circle.

REFERENCES

Birren, Faber, Monument to Color, McFarlane, Ward, McFar-

lane, New York City, 1938.
Luckiesh, Matthew, Color and Colors, D. Van Nostrand Co.,

Inc., New York City, 1938.
Sargent, Walter, The Enjoyment and Use of Color, Charles

Scribners Sons, New York City, 1923.
Others also are referred to in the text.

429t

Chapter 50
METHODS OF REPRODUCING

THE materials on hand may be used in some instances, but in
others the work must be done outside the office. If you have
only certain equipment, your process of publication is limited
by the need for other equipment.

Carbon paper is one of the simplest methods of securing a num-
ber of copies. If the original is made by hand (pencil or ink), a
special type of carbon paper should be purchased. Best results will
be obtained by using a pencil with hard lead, or a manifold pen.

Tracings in pencil or ink may be made by placing tracing paper
over the copy. Thin paper can be used for small tracings, while for
large ones a tracing cloth, which comes in a larger size than the
paper, should be used.

|P^F^

■g^

■

^
^

Dautco Producti Co , Nrw York City, and Oitto, Inc., Chicago.

Gelatine Process Duplicating Machines.

1. These duplicators are equipped with continuous bands or films of gelatine duplicating

material. The original or master copy may be prepared either by a typewriter or
may be drawn with pen and ink or a copy pencil.

2. The process of duplicating is very simple. The master copy is placed face down on the

moistened surface of the film for two minutes. Blank sheets of paper one at a time
are then put on the film from which the master copy has been removed. From 50
to 100 copies may be made from one master copy. A turn of the handle brings a
new gelatine surface.

3. The machine on the right is a jjortable that can easily be carried around if necessary.

It will copy a sheet as large as 8',i by 14 inches.

430«

flRAIH I g IRII

ENTATION

A. Arc Lamp.

Today it is possible to secure a continuous
blue printing, washing, developing,
and drying machine with either elec-
trically heated or gas dryer.

The C. F. Prasr Company. Chicago. Illinois, and
NfW York City.

Charle* Bruning Co , Inc , New York City.

B. Developing Machine for Making a Whife Print.

1. After the print, whether black and white, blue line, or a blue print, has been exposed

in a blue print machine, the print must be developed in a developing machine.
The machine shown above develops a positive black and white print.

2. The Ozalid Corporation, New York City, makes a machine which exposes and dry-

develops a positive print from a positive original.

METHOD

fWf

EPRODUC

ING

'431

The principle of the blue print, white print, and blue line print
machine is that chemically treated paper is first exposed to a chem-
ical light action, which prints the design. The print is then devel-
oped, that is. treated so that the design will appear clear and
remain semi-permanently. The first method of exposure was by
means of blue print frames placed in the sunlight. The next step
in the development of the present machines was the use of a single
arc lamp. Later a bank of arc lamps placed side by side was em-
ployed. Since the convenience of operation seemed to fit into the
reproduction field, mercury vapor tubes were utilized. It was later
found that such tubes did not compare with arc lamps in the
efficiency of printing.

Makers of Blue-Print Machines:

The C. F. Pease Company, Chicago, Illinois, and New York

City
Paragon Revolute Corporation, New York City
Shaw Blue-Print Machine Company, Newark, New Jersey

Photcntat Corporation. Providrncf. Rhodr Itland.

Photostat Machine with Engineering Board.

1. The Photostat is a machine designed for the rapid production of copy by means of

photography.

2. The subject matter is photographed directly upon sensitized paper without the inter-

vention of any plate or film negative. Printed or written documents, drawings, blue
prints, records, maps, fabrics, small tools, machinery parts, etc., may be copied in
a few minutes at the cost of a few cents.

3. In addition to copying at original size, enlargements or reductions may be made in any

desired size. If enlargements required are larger than the maximum size sheet of
the Photostat used, they may be made in sections and pieced together. Transfer
negatives for reproduction by other processes are easily made on this apparatus.
Standard models produce, on a single sheet, prints up to 18" x 24 ".

432

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

A. B. Dick Company, Chicago.

A. Mimeograph Machine.

1. MimeoKraph stencil duplicating can

reproducr large numbers of copies
in black ink or colors at a low
cost. This process is widely used
for reproducing graphic material
of many kinds.

2. When enlargement or reduction of an

original chart or graph is neces-
sary to effect conformity with
Mimeograph duplicating size lim-
itations, Mimeograph photochem-
ical stencils will be found useful.
The photochemical stencil is fre-
quently used where graphic struc-
tures are too complex to be con-
veniently drawn with a stylus on
a stencil sheet.

Standard Mailing Machines Co., Everett, Maai.

B. Liquid or "Fluid" Process Duplicator.

1. The original or master copy for this duplicator is made with a "spirit" hectograph car-

bon in such a way that a reverse or negative impression is made. This master copy
is inserted in the drum. While proceeding through the machine the copy paper is
moistened with a thin film of an alcoholic duplicating fluid. When this inserted
copy paper is brought in contact with the negative impression of the master copy,
it dissolves sufficient dye to produce a copy. This process will make from 200 to
300 clear copies from one original.

2. Type of copy may be printing, handwriting, or typewriting.

3. The master copy can be stored and reused if less than the maximum number of copies

is made from the original. The life of the master copy is from ten to fifteen years.

METHODS OF REPRODUCING

433

A. Mimeoscope for Illuminated Draw-
ing Board.

1. With the aid of the Mimeoscope and

•tyli, both straight and curved
lines, either broken or soHd. are
obtainable. Thus, ruled forms
specially designed to suit current
needs can be quickly and econom-
ically produced on the Mimeo-
graph duplicator.

2. Triangle guides, beam compasses, and

circle guides, manufactured espe-
cially for the preparation of Mim-
eograph stencils, are also avail-
able.

A. B. Dirk Company, Chicago.

Lithoprint Company of New York. Inc.

B. Two Steps in the Lithoprint Process.

The lithoprint process is a simplified form of lithography. A plate coated with special
composition replaces the lithographer's stone and the copy is obtained by a simple
process of contact printing. Lithoprint reproductions duplicate the original draw-
ings.

434

METHODS OF REPRODUCING

AddmsoKraph-Multigraph Corp., Cleveland. Ohio.

A Multilith Plate for Use in a Multilith Machine.

1. The Multilith process is "offset" in miniature. The paper-thin Multilith plates may be

placed in the typewriter. By using a special typewriter ribbon, typing can be done
on the plate just as it is done on paper. Writing, lettering, or drawing may be done
directly on the plate with a special type of crayon having a grease content.

2. However, the photographic method of transferring an image from the copy to the plate

is usually used. The photographic film is placed in contact with a sensitized Multi-
lith plate and the negative image is "burned into" the plate by exposure to light.

REFERENCES

Binkley, Robert C, Manual on Methods of Reproducing Research
Materials, Edwards Brothers, Inc., Ann Arbor, Michigan, 1936.

Colton Press, New York, N. Y., Production Yearbook, Volumes
3, 4, and 5, 1937, 1938, 1939.

435

Chapter 51
METHODS OF PRINTING

THE three basic methods of printing are — relief (raised surface),
planographic (surface), and intaglio (subsurface).

In relief printing, also referred to as letterpress, the design
is raised in relief from the surrounding surface and only the raised
surface portions print after being inked. Examples — newspapers,
magazines, booklets, circulars printed from type, electrotypes,
stereotypes, halftone plates, line cuts, etc. Relief printing is adapt-
able to all finishes of paper for type work. Where the screen is
coarse enough it is adaptable on rough-surface papers, but the best
results for halftone printing are obtained with a fine screen halftone
on a coated paper surface.

REFERENCES ON RELIEF PRINTING

Hoch. Fred W., Handbook for Pressmen, Published by Author,

New York City, 1937.
New York Employing Printers Association, Inc., New York City,

How to Buy Printing Profitably, 1927.

Hamilton Manufacturing Co., Two River*. Witconiin.

California Job Case for Type.

1. In setting type by hand, individual letters of type are picked from a job case and

placed into a composing stick in which they are arranged and spaced as desired.
Each line is removed as it is set and placed on a flat tray called a galley. When
the page is complete, corrected, etc., it is locked up for the printing press. Simple
corrections are made by removing the letter or whatever is in error and changing it.

2. The illustration above is a California Job Case, which is the universal case. About 95%

of the cases used for typesetting by hand are California Job Cases,

"^^^ GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

In planographic printing, which includes lithography (both direct
and offset), the design is in the same plane as the surrounding or
non-printing portions of the plate. The design, however, is grease-
attracting, while the non-printing portions are treated so as to
make them grease-repellent. On the press, the non-printing por-
tions are dampened with water between impressions to keep them
in that condition. It follows that when the greasy ink is applied
by the rollers to the plate only the design takes ink and prints. In
direct lithography, the design is printed directly upon the paper.
In offset lithography, the design is printed upon a rubber blanket
which in turn transmits the design to the paper. Practically all
lithography is now of the offset type. While both coated and un-
coated papers are being successfully used for lithographing pur-
poses, the latter is chiefly used. Blanket resiliency makes it pos-
sible to secure excellent results in halftones on uncoated (rough)
stock. Examples — displays, posters, books, book covers, booklets,
circulars, labels, wrapping papers, calendars, inserts, etc.

REFERENCES ON LITHOGRAPHY

Rhodes, Henry J., Art of Lithography, Scott Greenwood & Son,

London, 2nd edition, 1924.
Miles, Russell N., The Encyclopedia of Lithography, Published

by Author, Chicago, Illinois, 1938.

Intertype Corporation, Brooklyn, New York.

Slug Cast by a Typesetting Machine of the Line Type.

1. Type may also be set by composing or typesetting machines.

2. One of three types of machine is the intertype. It composes with matrices, small brass

dies, which have the forms of various characters indented in their sides. The indi-
vidual matrices are assembled in the desired order for each line of the material,
and a type-high metal slug with the letters in relief is cast in one piece from these
matrices.

3. Another typesetting machine which operates on the same principle as the intertype is

the linotype.

4. Corrections in linotype and intertype matter are made by resetting the complete line

in which an error occurs.

METHODS OF PRINTING '^^^

Soderstrom, Walter, Photolithographers Manual, Waltwin Com-
pany, New York City, 1937.

Lithographers National Association, Inc., New York, N. Y.,
"Books on Lithography" reprint from Bookbinding and Book
Production.

Lithographic Technical Foundation Publications, 220 East 42nd
Street, New York, N. Y.

In intaglio printing (also referred to as rotogravure, photo-
gravure, and sheet-fed gravure) the design is etched into the sur-
face of a copper plate or cylinder, thus producing sub-surface
recesses. Ink is applied to the plate or cylinder in sufficient vol-
ume to fill the recesses following which the surface proper is wiped
clean. In rotogravure, the surface is cleaned by a thin steel blade
known as "doctor blade" which fits tightly against the surface of
the plate as the cylinder revolves. The paper is brought into direct
contact with the copper plate or cylinder by means of a rubber
roller. As a result, the ink is lifted out of the recesses thereby

a**"*^.

Lantton Monotype Machine Co.. Philadelphia. Pennsylvania.

Type Set by the Monotype Machine.

1. The third kind of typesetting machine is the monotype. It casts and assembles indi-

vidual letters automatically. As soon as each letter is cast, it is moved into the
proper place in the line of type. When the line is completed, it is moved out on
the form that holds the lines of type.

2. On monotype forms, corrections are made by removing the letter or whatever is in

error, and replacing it from a case of type of the same style.

3. This illustration shows how the monotype machine may be utilized in making "run-

arounds." The operator of the machine sets "quads" in the space of each line in
which the illuatration is to be set. The cut is mounted in position on the quads.

438

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

transmitting the printed design to the paper. Examples — roto-
gravure newspaper supplements, magazine inserts, booklets, cir-
culars, etc., usually printed from copper cylinders at high speed.
A wide range of papers from the finest grade down to newsprint —
all from the original roll of paper as delivered by the mill — is used
for this type of printing. A substantial percentage, possibly two-
thirds, of the gravure printing being done today is done at news-
paper speed on both sides of the sheet and folded on the press ready
for delivery.

Ttx HoaMrV TjrpMctllnt MmMik mU tyitt in >ll mMauraa up to M piru in ill •!••• Irnm 4 to I* point. Strattkl
»*tt«r. tabular and int/irat« work, rulad form*. rui« and ficurc work — in fact, all kind* o/ typowttini — ajv dona
with lUioqualUd facility and apaad. No othar marhina ambodira within th« aoop* ai ila oparation ao wida a raaca ol

4 Point Modem. No. 8 Seriefl

Under The Monotype System New Type, Decorative Material. Leads, Rules, Slugs

and metal furniture are provided in unlimited supply for the use in hand composition

and at a cost so low that non-distribution becomes an economy as well as a convenience

6 Point Binny Old Style, No. 21 Series

The Monotype Typesetting Machine Sets Type In All Measures Up

to 60 picas wide in all sizes from 4 to 18 point for straight matter work

8 Point Binny Old Style. No. 21 Series

Monotype Versatility Is Known By Every Printer Using
Monotype machines for composing room needs and supplies

10 Point Binny Old Style. No. 21 Series

The Monotype Unit System Makes It Possible
to fit copy accurately to the space to be occupied

12 Point Binny Old Style, No. 21 Series

Type-&-Rule Caster Supplies Your Needs

14 Point Binny Old Style, No. 21 Series

Cut Mounting Base

30 Point Binny Old Style, No. 21 Series

Artistic Designs

.16 Poinl Binny Old Style, No. 21 Series C_^

TYPE FACE

36H4 Point Kennerley, No. 268 Series

Lantton Monoty|>r Mitrhinr Company, Philntlrlphia.

Range of Type Sizes.

1. These are only a few of the sizes of type available.

2. The four point type is the smallest that can be set on the Monotype machine, and

eighteen point ii the largest. Larger sizes may be set by hand.

METHODS OF PRINTING

439

REFERENCES ON ROTOGRAVURE

Cartwright, Mills H., Photogravure, American Photographic
Publishing Company, Boston. Massachusetts.

Bennett. Colin N.. Elements of Photogravure. American Photo-
graphic Publishing Company, Boston, Massachusetts, 1935.

GENERAL REFERENCES

Colton Press. New York. N. Y.. Production Yearbook. Volumes
3. 4. and 5. 1937. 1938. 1939.

Hackelman. Charles W.. Commercial Enf^raving and Printing.
Commercial Engraving Publishing Company, Indianapolis,
Indiana, 1924.

University of Chicago Press. A Manual of Style, Chicago, Illi-
nois, 10th edition— 1937.

Cvnlurr OldttTl»6l 16 poinl

6 to 3A poink

PACK MY BOX WITH FIVEj
Pack my box with five doz|1234

Go»»..c No 5A4-26J le point (6 to 36 pent)

PACK MY BOX WITH FIVEj
Pack my box with five do|123

&tr«>T(o*d Bold 474 IS poot

6 to 72 point (16, 04 to 130 point)

PACK MY BOX WITH FIVE D|
Pack my box with five dozen 1 12 34

Scotch RecHCH 379 16 Bainl

(6 to 34 point)

PACK MY BOX WITH FI|
Pack my box with five cloze|l23

Bedoni Book 27 18 poiat

6 to 36 point (42 and 40 point)

PACK MY BOX WITH FIVE DOZE|
Pack my box with five dozen jug 1 123

American Typ* Foundrr*. Elii«b*th. Nfw Jertey.

Five Different Type Styles.
For comparison of type stylet, write to American Type Founderi, Elizabeth. New Jer»ey.

440

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

LETTER SIZES

Elite Type - 12 characters per inch
Pica Type - 10 characters per
SMALL GOTHIC - 9 CHARACTER

LARGE GOTHIC - 9 CHARACTER
.120" TEMPLATE LETTERING
J40"TEMPLATE LETTERING

.175" TEMPLATE LET!

.240" TEMPLATE

LINE WEIGHTS
POINT — ^^—

3 POINT
2^2 POINT
2 POINT
I '/2 POINT
I POINT
3^ POINT
I/O POINT

Original Size

Note: A point, in printer's measure, is opproximately 1/12 of a
pice, which, in turn is 1/6 of on inch. Therefore, a printer's point
is opproximately 1/72 inch.

METHODS OF PRINTING

441

LETTER SIZES

Bllt* Typ* - 12 oharftctars p«r inch
Pica Type - 10 characters per
SMALL GOTHIC - 9 CHARACTER

LARGE GOTHIC - 9 CHARACTER
.120" TEMPLATE LETTERING
.I40"TEMPLATE LETTERING

.175" TEMPLATE LET!

.240" TEMPLATE

LINE WEIGHTS
POINT ^— ^^^—

3 POINT
2'/^ POINT
2 POINT
I '/2 POINT
I POINT
3^ POINT
1/9 POINT

Reduced to two-thirds of original size

Courtesy of The Rrgfrntriner Corporation. Chi-
ca(o. Illinoit

A. Relief Printing — Halftone Cross
Section.

In relief or letterpress printing, the image
to be printed is above the surface.
The raised portions of the plate
represent the image to be printed;
they are inked by the rollers and
give off the ink by contact with
paper.

The illustration to the left it a reduction
of the material on the opposite
page.

See key to lettering for lantern slides on
page 408.

Courteiy of The Regentteiner Corporation, Chi-
cago, Illinoia.

B. Planographic Printing- Lilhographic
Plate.

In planographic printing the image is on
the surface, it is ink attracting,
while the non-printing areas are
made chemically ink-repelling.

Courteiy of The Regeniteiner Corporation, Chi-
cago, Illinoit

C. Intaglio Printing- Enlarged Gravure
Plate.

In intaglio or gravure printing the image
is below the surface.

442

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

PROOF-
READERS
MARKS

It is imperative
that corrections
should be marked
on the margins of a
proof sheet opposite
the indicated errors.
Do not attempt to
make a correction
by writing over the
print or between the
lines. Errors
marked in this way
are in danger of
being overlooked
and are generally
illegible.

Proofs read by
authors or depart-
ment readers should
be marked to con-
form to the style as
illustrated at the
right.

9 Period.

CommA.

Hyphen.

Colon.

Semicolon.
Apostrophe.

<^W^ Quotations.

Em quadrat.

Si.

One-em daah.

Two-em parallel daah.

Push down space.

Close up.

•

Less space.

Caret— left out, insert.

Turn to prop>er position.

Insert space.

or O

Move to left or to right.

or U

Move up or move down.

A^.

Transpose.

.....or

xM^t:

Let it stand.

Dele — take out.

Broken letter.

Paragraph.
No paragraph.

Wrong font.

*^7 or

^.#

Equalize spacing.

Capitals.
Small capitals.
Lower-case.
Superior or inferior.

:== or S-^^^xO/^
s= or /fi-.e..

>^or ^

nr J:taX. Italic.

/tyCTyXy. Roman.

Hj Bracketa.

f I ) Parentheses,

Proof-Reader's Marks.

Use a f{ood black pencil for proofreading and make the marks legible. So far as possible,
a line of type should break on an idea. For divisions of words, use a dictionary.

mil

443

Chapter 52
SELECTION OF PAPER

AFTER the method of copying or printing has been decided
I upon, paper suitable to the process chosen should be se-
lected. In some cases a preference for a certain type of paper may
be a determining factor in the selection of the copying or printing
method. However, the usual procedure is to decide upon a method
of reproduction and then to select the paper. For that reason, this
chapter on Selection of Paper is placed immediately following the
chapter on Methods of Printing.

REFERENCES
Wheelwright. William Bond, "Choosing thcRight Paper. What
an Author Should Know About Paper." {Paper and Printing
Digest, Dec, 1939).
Production Yearbook, The Colton Press, Inc., New York, N. Y.,

Volume IV— 1938.
The term "paper" covers a great many articles and products and
no attempt will be made to cover all of them. This discussion will
be confined to those types of paper which would be used most in
presenting graphic charts in annual reports, pamphlets, text-books,
and similar publications.

The Mead Corporation. Kingi|>ort, Tcnn

Paper Machine With "Wet End" In the Distance, and Drying Roils, Finishing
"Stacks," and Reel in Foreground.

444

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

CONSIDERATIONS IN THE SELECTION OF PAPER:

1. Reader comfort

Paper with a minimum gloss and reflectance of light is a factor
for easy reading. When using the letterpress process, however, a
high finish or levelness of surface is vital to the sharp reproduc-
tion of cuts. English Finish and semi-dull Coated papers give
the maximum of reproduction without objectionable reflectance.
For the lithographic process high finish is not necessary, but
again, tends to increase the sharpness of detail. For the gravure
process the same is true.

2. Opacity

Good opacity is desirable, and in the medium and heavy
weights should be no problem. In the lighter weights much de-
pends upon the type of paper selected. The introduction of spe-
cial materials to increase opacity has produced special papers for
this purpose.

3. Grain direction

In all Book paper made on a paper machine, the majority of
the fibers run in one direction. Hence we have the terms "with"
and "against" grain. Such paper is stronger when torn cross-
grain and folds smoother with grain. In general, paper is or-
dered with the grain running the length of the sheets for all pur-
poses. In the folder, booklet, or bound book the grain should
run parallel to the fold or binding. This gives a smoother folded
edge and the pages, being more flexible, lie flatter.

B. F Perkins 6t Son, Inc., Holyoke, Mati.

Perkins Pressure Bulker to Measure the
Bulk of Sheets of Paper.

1. The diameter of the pressure foot is

three square inches and the pres-
sure is figured in pounds per
square inch of paper.

2. There is no fixed standard for the

amount of pressure. The amount
is intentionally flexible to meet
current requirements.

3. The pressure bulker is used chiefly

to measure a specified number of
sheets of paper to ascertain how
thick a book with that many pages
would be. The number of inches
is recorded on the scale on the
left.

SELECTION OF PAPER

445

4. Physical durability

The physical strength of paper may best be tested by tearing
it with and against the grain.

5. Permanence

Book papers are generally made of rag, chemical wood pulp,
mechanical wood pulp, or a combination of these. Chemical
wood pulp is wood cellulose extracted by chemicals from the
wood. In the process, gums, resin, and lignin are eliminated. In
the better grades such fiber has much of the characteristics and
permanence of rag paper. On the other hand, mechanical pulp is
merely the crushing of wood into pulp with nothing eliminated.
These fibers deteriorate in strength and color just as wood does
under exposure. Mechanical pulp is used only in the cheapest
grades of Book paper, which are classified as Groundwood
papers whether they contained a large amount, as in news paper,
or a small amount. All Book papers free from Groundwood are
classified as free sheets, indicating that they contain only chem-
ical wood pulp or rag, or both. In recent years, the improve-
ment in chemical wood pulps has given us papers of fine strength.

Trimmed
ze

Page S

4'/4x 6

4 X 9H

SVax 7Vg
5'/ax 83/i

6x9

6 X 9'/8

7^x105/8

SVixU

9'/^xl2'/,

nches
nches
nches

nches
nches

or
nches

nches

Cuts without
32, or 64 up
Cuts without
or 32 up
Cuts without
or 24 up
Cuts without
Cuts without
or 32 up
Cuts without
or 32 up

Cuts without

16 up

Cuts without

16 up

Cuts without

Boolclefs on Book Paper
waste from 32x44 (128 pages out) when run 4, 8, 16,

waste from 25x38 (64 pages out) when run 4, 8, 16,

waste from 25x38 (48 pages out) when run 4, 6, 12,

waste from 38x50 when run 4, 8, or 16 up

waste from 32x44 (64 pages out) when run 4, 8, 16,

waste from 35x45 (64 pages out) when run 4, 8, 16,

waste from 25x38 (32 pages out) when run 4, 8, or 16
waste from 32x44 (32 pages out) when run 4, 8, or
waste from 35x45 (32 pages out) when run 4, 8, or
waste from 25x38 (16 pages out) when run 4 or 8 up

Guide In Determining Size of Sheet to Use to Secure a Desired Page Size

It is desirable that the page sizes of booklets, etc., permit the printer to use standard
•ixes of paper which are regularly carried in stock. The booklet size should cut without
waste from such standard size sheets rather than require special size sheets or waste. Much
depends upon the size of the printing press and the arrangement of the printing form.
Therefore, the printer can best advise on this question.

446

mil

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

color, and permanence. As a result, the majority of Book paper
today is made from chemical wood pulp. Rag fibers are still used
in the highest grades for certain characteristics, although it has
been demonstrated that by using the best chemical wood pulp
such paper has much of the characteristics and permanency of
rag paper. No matter what the material used, paper cannot be
permanent in color and strength unless carefully made, and acids
or other deleterious materials eliminated.
6. Type of illustration, or printing process, to be used.

It is vitally important that the paper be selected with this in
mind. For the type of paper to use most effectively with various
line screen halftones, see 416 and 417.

Machine Finish Book paper has a medium smooth finish suit-
able for ordinary printing where the cuts used are not too fine and
the requirements, from a printing standpoint, not too exacting.

A better grade of similar paper is called English Finish, which,
having a more level surface, gives a better printing result than
Machine Finish.

Both of the above papers are finished on the paper machine, but
Supercalendered paper is polished after being made, giving a
higher shine to the surface for sharper reproduction of the details
in the cuts when desired. However, the polishing of Uncoated
paper has some effect on color, hence Supercalendered papers are
not so bright in color as Machine Finish or English Finish and are
also somewhat lower in bulk.

Thr Mrad Corporation. Kin|;s|>ort Tciin

Calender Stacks Which Give Paper a Smooth Finish, and Winding Rol

mil

SELECTION OF PAPER

447

Other types of paper finished on the paper machine are called
Antique. Eggshell and Text. These papers have a rough or semi-
rough finish suitable for use where only type or line cuts are used,
but have good bulk and color. In general, the terms Antique and
Eggshell are used for the medium and low grades, and Text is used
for higher grades.

The term Offset paper implies paper made for use in the litho-
graphic process, namely, hard sized or water resistant. Uncoated
Offset paper has good color, strength, and bulk. The finish varies
from fairly smooth to medium because the lithographic process
does not require an absolutely level surface for the reproduction of
cuts. Almost any paper can be run offset if sufficiently hard sized.

Coated paper is produced by the application to a special paper of
a considerable amount of coating material, which is then polished.
This coating material is generally composed of clay, casein, and
other materials which will impart brightness or color to the final
sheet. Either a high glossy finish or a semi-dull finish may be
secured, depending upon the composition of the coating material
used. Both are suitable for fine, detailed cuts, and the glossy
Coated gives sharpness where semi-dull Coated gives softness.
Coated paper is used for the best reproduction of halftone illustra-
tions. Good strength and folding quality are implied when the

BOOK PAPER

Bulking Table showing ihe Approximate Number of Pages Per Inch of Various Types
of Papers According to the Various Weights Available

WEIGHT OF ONE REAM (500 SHEETS)
25x38

Supercalendered

Machine Finish or English Finish

Antique or Eggshell

Offset ,

GloHy Coated _

Semi-Dull Coated

670
640

574
548

500
480

450
426

400
384

960

852

768

640

548

480

844

778

700

584

500

438

442

372

314

2 74

534

466

400

100

120

334
320

The weights of all Book paper, including Offset paper, are figured on the basic weight
of one ream (500 sheets) size 25x38 inches. Thus, the ternn 80 lb. Book paper is the
weight of one ream, size 25x38 inches. Note the headings of the columns above.
Writing paper, known as Bond paper, is figured on a basis of one ream (500 sheets),
size 17x22.

In using this table, it should be remembered that the figures refer to pages, not leaves
or sheets. One leaf or sheet represents two pages.

448

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

paper is called Folding Coated. Also Coated Offset paper has been
developed and when so termed is suitable for the lithographic
process.

Writing or Bond paper as differentiated from Book paper indi-
cates a sheet made for hardness, crackle, and strength for letter-
heads, forms, etc., rather than for printing surface and opacity. In
other words, Book paper is a "filled" sheet to secure printing qual-
ity and opacity, whereas Bond paper is not "filled" These quali-
ties are not as important as the other requirements desired in Bond
Paper.

In the selection of paper, samples of various suitable papers
should be obtained from the printer, who best knows the problem
and can best advise on the selection. The final appearance of the
finished job should be determined by the making of a dummy to
demonstrate bulk, opacity, color, strength, etc. Paper sold under
the manufacturer's brand implies full value, uniformity, and avail-
ability.

A more detailed explanation of the factors in selection of paper
may be found in booklets published by various paper companies:
S. D. Warren Company , Boston, Mass., "A Workbook for Plan-
ning Printing" and "Estimator's Book."
HammerTnill Paper Co., Erie, Pennsylvania.
Champion Paper & Fibre Co., Hamilton, Ohio.
American Writing Paper Co., Holyoke, Mass.

■' •" f

-s^

w0^

k-->

mSm

■L

Vb^

^^b^

^^^1^

"^P

Thf Mrad Corporation, Kingtport, Tenn.

Examination and Inspection of Each Skid Lot of Paper.

449

Chapter 53
BINDING TECHNIQUES

THE TYPE of binding to be used for a pamphlet or book de-
pends not only on the size of the pamphlet, but also on the
final appearance of the binding. If a permanent binding is not
needed, a simpler binding than that for a reference book might be
selected. See 451.

Whether the binding job is large or small, the following speci-
fications should be given to the binder:

BINDING SPECIFICATIONS

Title Headbands

Quantity Cloth

No. Pages Leather

Plates: Boards

Single Tips Stamping

To Jacket

Tissues

Maps Wraps

Whipstitch^ Boxes

Reinforce \ "- " Deliver to

Tapes When Required

Linings Charge to

Trimmed Size Special Instructions

Edges

Round and Back

■

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

If the book is to have an edition binding, there are a number of
features that should be considered. See below.

1. Imposition. See 452A. The binder should be consulted in de-
termining whether the imposition should allow for folding in
16- or 32 -page units (signatures) before the book goes to press.
From a binding standpoint, it is important that the bulk of the
paper be considered in determining the method of folding and
that the grain of the paper run the way of the fold.

2. Inserts. Pages that are printed on different paper from the
body of a book, such as illustrations, maps, etc., constitute in-
serts. They are commonly pasted to the text pages.

3. Reinforcements. The first consideration for strength in the
joints of the cover is the end papers (the papers pasted to the
inside of the cover and forming the first page of the book). The
strength and durability of the binding depend largely upon the
tearing strength of this paper. Other means of reinforcing are
"turned ends," "muslin guards," and "cloth joints."

To secure "turned ends," the end papers are cut about half inch
larger in width than usual to allow a quarter of an inch stub.
These stubs are placed around the first and last signatures and
then pasted down. In sewing, the threads pass through the
stubs of the end papers as well as the first and last signatures.

A uddle wire
slitchH book

A side wire slilched book
(with cover omiHed)

A side Singer sewed book A Smyth sewed book
(cover omilte<l)

Four Forms of Edition Binding.

The choice of binding depends somewhat on the size of the book or pamphlet. Pamphlets
and small catalogs require the saddle wire stitching. Books of 64 pages or more
require the sewed types.

Li^^iilii...iil.i...iilii...iil

III-IIIIII'I'IIIII'IJIIII-I'III

BINDING TECHNIQUES

451

"Muslin guards" arc strips of muslin pasted around the first
and last signatures. The threads pass through the first and last
signatures as well as the muslin, preventing the threads from
cutting through the paper.

"Cloth joints" are obtained by cutting the end paper in two and
joining it with a strip of harmonizing book cloth.

4. Covers. The front and back of a cover (or cases) are made of
two pieces of binders boards. A strip of manila or bogus forms
the backbone. These are covered with cloth or leather. When
paper is substituted for cloth, the style is commonly known as
"bound in boards."

5. Stamping. This term covers lettering or finishing the cases.

Flat Bindings.

1. The advantage of using this ty(>e of binding is that every page is 100% visible and all

pages lie flat.

2. Various sizes and shapes of inserts may be used, and no special imposition of page form

is necessary.

3. The binding on the left is metal; the one on the right is plastic. A variety of shapes,

forms, and styles are available. These two were drawn from samples obtained from
Spiral Binding Company of New York City and Brewer-Cantelmo Co., Inc., of
New York City.

I.I ■ ■.I.I ■ I.!.! ■ l.l.l ■ l.l

452

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

■

i B

■

1 B

•

A. Printed Imposition Showing the Position of the Numbered Pages.

1. The first step in binding is to fold the sheets that come from the printer. Because fold-

ing techniques vary with the binders, before the printing plates are made or
planned, an imposition showing the position of the pages on one sheet of paper
should be secured from the binder.

2. By a "work and turn." type of imposition, one plate is used to print both sides of

the sheet of paper. Out of one sheet of paper two groups of the same 64 pages are
obtained.

Folding and Numbering the Page Form lor a Boole or Pamphlet.

If a printed imposition is not available, a sheet of paper may be folded and numbered by
the binder. By cutting a "V" through all the folded pages it is possible for the
binder to number the pages without unfolding the sheet, as shown in the illustra-
tion. Unfolded you have the imposition of form. The numbering of the pages
when folded is not necessarily in 1-2-3 order. The binder, therefore, should be the
one to do the numbering.

PROBLEMS IN THE CREATION OF THIS BOOK

Ai thi* hooh may hr rrviKd, any tugBrttioni from thr rradrr friativr to (iOMlhtlill«« for im|>rovr-
mml. rtthrr in make-up or rontrr«t, arr invited.

The aim of this hook was to srciirr the Kreateit potsihie numhcr of illuitrationt and to
reduce the text to the minimum.

A majority of the charts prrarntcd in thu hook were rrilured to fit our page plan.
The scale notation should therefore he considered if a chart seems too small to be read
easily. It may be advisable in some instances to use a readmit ((lass.

Color has been introduced on many charts in which the original was black and white.
If this has resulted in an accentuation of a part of the chart not intended by the pro-
ducers, we hope they will understand our difficulty, since enough charts with color were
not available.

In our attempt to secure a book of about 500 pages, we found that by printing 32
pages on one 25" x 38" sheet of paper — 16 pages on each side — we could secure a book of
512 pages with a 6' x 9" page. There would be 16 such sheets.

By printing color on one side of each of these 16 sheets, there would be two pages of
color alternating with two pages of black print. In order to have more than one color on
several color forms. 24 colorplates were distributed throughout 16 forms. One form, the
color form of the 14th sheet (pages 417 to 448) has all four colors. The color form of the
3rd sheet (pages 65 to 96) has three colors. All the others have either one or two colors.

The four colors used — red, yellow, blue, and green — were selected as the ones that
could be used to the best advantage in "dressing up" graphic charts. This necessitated
colors that were strong enough to be used alone and that could also be combined effectively
with others. Printing was done by Gray Photo-Offset Corporation, New York City.

The following offset inks of The Fuchs & Lang Manufacturing Company, 100 Sixth
Avenue. New York City, were used: Red NY-10876. Green # 4697-A6690. Yellow #41
Litho Ink, Blue #26 Litho Ink. Domino Black Litho Ink. The ink for the end paper was
Fuchs fls Lang Offset Brown #60 Litho Ink.

The paper was furnished by Mead Sales Company, New York City. It is Moist rite
Offset 70 #. The paper for the end papers is Weycroft Ivory 100 #, manufactured by
W. C. Hamilton dt Sons, Miquon, Pennsylvania.

The illustration for the end papers was redrawn from a photostat of the original,
measuring 195^" x 11".

The topical index (1st half on page 1. 2nd half on page 247), should be noted. The
tabs on the pages of the book were planned to overlap in order to give a large thumb
space and yet divide the topical index into only two parts. Bleed-outs on the outside edge
of the pages were eliminated in order not to conflict with the tabs.

The flexible covers are Red #700 Fabrikoid. The stamping on the backbone and front
cover is in Peerless Gold Leaf. The book was bound in 16-page signatures in order that
the pages would open as flat as possible.

The color lines at the top and bottom of the pages were designed to differentiate the
various chapters and to suggest possible borders for use by anyone reading this book.

The effect of shading on the borders was secured on pages 34, 35, 42, 43, 92, and 93
and several others, by using Transograph Shading Film DT-60, manufactured by Transo-
graph Corporation, 30 West 15th Street, New York City. Transograph Shading Film
DT-60 was also used in the following charts: 47. 82B. 90A, and 366.

The first letter of the first paragraph in many of the chapters is in one of the follow-
ing forms:

See Page 194 See Page 354 See Page 263 ^See Page 286

DOTS, cir 1^^ lENER ■T'

base ma tm maps X he term "c [^^/)ne well

When used in I 1 Interio divided into graphic distri

applied. Syn photographs a ponent bars in numerical val

The following type faces and sizes were used in this book: Credit Line — 6 point Book-
face, Title Line — 10 point Vogue Bold, Comment — 8 point Bookface. Text — 12 point
Bookface. The type was set on Intertype machines by Allied Typographers. Inc., New
York City.

453

454

|l' illli ■■■■' illli 'U

Chapter 54

From Lfttcrhrad of Shnrp
AilvrilisiiiK ARrncy. Srattle. Wash.

GRAPHIC CHARTS IN ADVERTISING

l^ince graphic charts present an idea clearly and concisely, their
use in advertising should be encouraged. The utility of graphic
charts in advertising is clearly demonstrated in this chapter.

REFERENCES

Carlyle. Paul, and Guy Oring. Layouts and Letterheads, Mc-
Graw-Hill Publishing Co., Inc., New York City, 1938.
Kleppner, Otto, Advertising Procedure.
Prentice-Hall, Inc., New York, 1938.

O Yeah!

Thp Elfctric Storaer Battery Comiiany. Phila-
delphia. Pa. SCALE .4

A. The Use of 100% Bar Charts in
Advertising.

Success

THE tmnwM l MW <rf Ac two coki
liM m^iMMiii pntUM ot our awnf* cImm
bcfo«v and *hn otcupvinf lh« w«rrho««» ■•

Tlvr MOi* Mi«««a in*> «ri»oJ vom«
houad u. • bu*knj oT ou. d~»i>.
Tb« wcnM doa no* drpcnd upon "t»

n d t UwW iy pUiM»*d (o«. "nd M iliUiiiMch
UUunL Ev«T fcoiu™ tkM long «udr •W «H>"-
«nn h» pnxn piodl.hU lo ihc cWm ■• put imo
ihc buUnf . ln«*«T\ti«ddtnKih*f*nonr, ormort.
.fluiid. iMMinJ idrM dr*»to|»«l (f\«n thr tlirni".

Bl niwvlN*TU |S« you«ndono br«r».»h*n wni
Ihnk of h>t«n( u—. ~ c.|»»ding. lK.n con-*

Moorcs 6 Dunford

744 Finl National bulk
CKicago.Ill.

Moorcs & DunforH. ChicaRO, III. SCALE .3

B. A Proportion Connparison.

Since the figures in each individual case
would differ, these bars have no
scale, but their heights indicate
the comparison. The ratio is about
19 to 7.

Ill Illli Illli l|||l III

Il" .III. "Ill" .III. "Il

GRAPHIC CHARTS IN ADVERTISING '^^^

The Story Of Three Little Minks

This Little Mink Went to Joeclcel

lome

This Little Mink Stayed at H«

■lis Little Mink Got too Much Heat

and now there is only ONE

JAECKEL Fur Storage costs no
more than ordinary storage and
protects you against every risk

Telephone BRyant 9-8720
and w will tall for your furs iimtfdiatmly

Jacckcl Fur Storagr. New York. SCALE .6

Graphic Narrative.

This simple graphic narrative which was printed in a small folder tells its story convincingly,
chiefly because of the use of the illustrations.

Ill Mill iih, iiiii III

456

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

Stevrni Hotel, Chicago, III.

A Guide Map.

Note that just enough points of interest are given on this map to locate the hotel

SCALE .6

GRAPHIC CHARTS IN ADVERTISING

457

WHY

Any lO-Year Old Locomotive is inadequate

WHAT HAS HAPPENED TO

HORSE POWE R

19 14

475 H. P.

p«f drivinf •«!(

192 4

575 H. P.

p«r drivinf txlc

WHAT HAS HAPPFNED TO

FUEL CONSUMPTION

19 3 4-

OVER 1,000 H. P.

p«r drivinj axU

19 14

6^ LBS. COAL

p«r drawbar koncpowar

1924

5 LBS. COAL

par drawbar kortapowar

19 34-

3 LBS. OR LESS

par drawbar hooapew*

DO rapid has been the advance of locomotive design that not a
single locomotive in this country over ten years old can begin to
hold its own with the really up-to-date power plant on wheels
known as the Super-Power locomotive.

LIMA LOCOMOTIVE WORKS

JNCORPORATED

Lima Locomotive Works Inc.. Lima. Ohio.

SCALE .6

Volume Representations.

|l" .Ilia "III" .III. "11

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

OOVfllllMENT P«V ROUS HP!

UOtER^MEl^I nt RltllR 8T4BIEI

taati

wtmi

8
1

JUNI JULT AUC UPT OCT NOV OIC

CHART B

PERSPECTIVE

'HART A appeared in a recent acivcrtisement
advocating advertising in Washington, D. C. Chart B is our own chart
based on exactly the same figures. Both arc correct as far as arithmetic
is concerned. The only difference, but what a difference, is the vertical
scale. If Chart A went down to zero at the bottom, as does Chart B, it
would be sixty inches high, but the exaggerated scale makes good adver-
tising copy. By the same process, even a payroll increase of .oopoi per
cent could be made to look 'ike the side of the Washington monument.

The problem is not limited to statistical charts. The scale or
standard against which one measures events makes a tremendous differ-
ence. The optimist compares present standards of living with those a
century ago, and glories in the gains. The next man sets the present
against 1929, or even 1936, and is subject to moderate melancholia. The
pessimist takes our potentials as his standard, and weeps over our great
failures to realize them. Each one starts with the same facts but sets them
in a different perspective. It is the old struggle against exaggeration or
deprecation. Perhaps the best one can do is to try to keep always in
mind which end of the telescope he is looking into.

U/*^"^ <<■ ^=^^Cr^

Dim's Rfvirw for May 1038

Two Charts Illustrating the Importance of a Zero Line.

SCALE 5

III 'III' Hill Mill Hi

Il" .III. "Ill" .III. "Il

GRAPHIC CHARTS IN ADVERTISING

459

LOOK TO TOUR SALES MILEAGE

Tha topmott map npnaunit America at il }ooka when ttattt are drawn in proportion to butintu trantacfed. Mulual'i
•//ectiV* covera0« cu«a (tbown ia bJack) twtlh doubJe in tarmt of tola* — quick yardttick of productive broadcoMting.

In th* concsntrated area east oi the Missiuippi valley, 40%
of the country's square mileage yields 80% of the nation's
business (and encircles 78% of the nation's radio listeners).
Here, deep in Mutual territory, is by far the richest sale*
mileage in America.

The Mutual Broadcasting System is the only ma)or network
deliberately organized for low-cost coverage of this highly
profitable area. Mutual is the only network whose basic
stations are all of super-power and whose station locations
oMiure freedom from costly over-lapping coverage.

The resulting economies, for coverage of the richest sales
mileage in America, explain why advertisers use Mutual, bcih
alone and in conjunction with other network activities— why

47 sales-scientists in the past nine
$1,180,722 in Mutual facilities

nths have invested

And Mutual expands at a touch. You may enlist as many,
or as few, extra stations as you may require for sales em-
phasis or market extension.

We shall be glad to tell you of resuIlM achieved by clients
who have looked to Mutual for Males mileage . . . Costs?
Mutual's comprehensive planning makes available these low
basic rates un|}aralleled in major network history:

One half hour night for 52 weeks $90,000

Five quarter hours day for 26 weeks .... S75,000
Three quarter hours night for 13 weeks . . $50,000
One half hour night for 13 weeks $25,000

THE MUTUAL BROADCASTING

America's Newest Major Network

8TSTEM

orricss! cmcaoo. tsisumi Towts-wair •

DITSOIT ■ WIIIDSOS. SADIO S T * T I O ■■ C X 1 W

IIW Tots 1440 ■SOADWAT-I
BOSTON. TANKIl N I T W O S K

S • ClMCIMMATI. SADIO STATIOM WLW
riTTSSUSOH. SAOIO STATIOM WCAi

Thr Mutual BroadcastinK Syttrm.

A Comparison of a Distorted Map and an Actual Map.

SCALE .6

III Mill iill, illli III

460

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

Why Your Electric Light Bills Vary

The Rruoci Wkr RmmWdIi^ Lifhtinc Bdli
ar« Higher ia December Uutn in June

People Ute EJectric Light Nearly Four and One Half
Time* a* Long in December a* Tliey Do in June

Thii chart divides the 24 hours of a day into three periods — the
period of ileep, the period of using Elcctnc Light and the period
of dajrlight

Public Service Company of Northern Illinois.

SCALE .5

A. A Component Part Chart.

UPHILL—

WITH DOWNHILL SPEED!

Bakers'Helper

TMi FIRST

Bakers' Helper, Chicago. III.

B. A Growth Curve.

SCALE .5

BUSH TERMINAL UnlaUUh^ Its a CITY

— An Induttriol dty whar* monufacturart ond dltttibuton can cut cost* In hoH orvd wh«r« ainclanclM multiphr MrfM o^porfvnHtM

IkjO Bush Terminal IS not o butldmg
' ^ onyWior* than N«w York iio ilreel.
Imogin* t«n millon iquar« fa*! of floor
sooc* devoted completely to the mon-
ufacture, warehousing and distribution
of m«rchondise M you find it difficult
to picture that much floor tpac*. Ihmk
of it OS a twenty-foot
itrlp of ttoor that
would r»och o hun-
dred milM.

6wth Terminol is not
a building but a city
of butldingi . Not ordi-
nory loftt - but new
types of (ndustnol
buildings They may
w«llb«call«dtndustri-

al oparimenl houses, for they provide
economies ond conveniences for man-
ufacturing or distributing merchandise
thai ore OS carefully planned and exe-
cuted as the economiesond convenien
ces of your dwelling oportment house
To tell all the story of Bush Terminol
would be to tell
hundreds of stories
about hundreds of
prominent manufac-
turers and distributors
who hove used Bush

Mom <«»Ii *nd »w*fc w»r«w* M^i and »roill«

efficiency or enlarged soles. ond efficie

You ore interested only In your busi- There is no
ness — your economies — your efficien- your request
cies and your enlarged soles. Bush billty we will
Terminal momtams
a staff of industrial
engineers who ore
conjtontly fitting
Bush Terminal facili-
iies to individuol
and specific needs.
Why not talk obout
your business to one

Bush T«

neel

hundreds of real
problems. In each of
these instances the re-
sults were economy.

of these trained men,
and lei us help you
determine the eitent
to which you can
effect economy

THESE Wdl KNOWN nOOOCTS

ore monufoctured or wore-

hovied ot— or distributed

from Bush Tenninol

► cxMirms

•nCNNUT COffff

f sncn • tiur oirvis
Mt MOMTI cofm
Miaoiss kAnffus

ncy

cost, no obligotion. At
but on Our own responti-
conduct o free Industriol
Survey of your
business. If our
suggestions ore of
volue. adopt them.
if you wish tf not.
discard them.
wRiTCKMDcscarTnn

liKtATUtf on Mon.
ufacture Ware-

housing or Oistrlbu-
hon or set o lime
at which a Bush

BUSH TERMINAL COMPANY

MelropolDon (ocililiei for DISTRIBUTION. WAREHOUSING AND MANUFACTURING
Ixaoitlva Offkaat 100 tread Str*«t, Naw York

P<eri, Sldingt. Worehouwi, Truck Depot and Monufocturiog loflt on New Yofi Boy

ndut

■ ot exper

moy trierview you

Bush Terminal Company. New York City.

C. An Inverse Relationship Curve.

GRAPHIC CHARTS IN ADVERTISING

461

we're y^/ there's been a DEPRESSION

LONE^ST. ytt «rel Hcrr'n why.
FalliniE mIct ^hakr people up. They're willing
lo ilo thinf:* differenlly. They'll liolen lo new,
Mlen-buildini; ideati.

ir« actually a prat time to iarf;e ahead.
Some of our cuctomer* have been doinf; ju*t
that. Ilerr'n how:

Bv cnrrjul rrarardi lhr> dLwttr the nmi for

nrt tfUing poinu in thrir product. Thr> re-

dniffi. fTr arr aiked /or nru and more al-

troctifr finiahn. A hntrr pmdurt rtnrrffa.

And a SELLS — tUs today!

Of course buaineM ri|;ht now i« not all it mi(:ht

be. But you thould aee the unall order* pour-

in|[ in here! They're Mmple», really . . . Ki-

peninent» . . . Progrnal There are good times

and belter aalea ahead (or thoac people who

are thmkinf out and wnrkinf out belter way*

of finixhinf; their pniductt.

.\re you |;oing lo |tel your *h»rr in the next
periocl of prosperity? Will vtju he glad for the
drprcMiion? Maybe we can help you to be.
Call in tlie nearest Kgyptian man and gel his
advice. No obligation, of course. It may lum
the tide for vou.

"Kpyptian Lacquer" in listnl in the phone
boiiku of the following cilien:

\rHNTA

KANSAS CITY

BOSTON

UW ANGELES

Bl KFAU>

PHILADELPHIA

CHICAGO

PORTLAND. ORF_

CINCINNATI

SAN FR\NCISCO

CLEVELAND

SEATTLE

DALLAS

SPOKANE

DjrTRorr

ST. LOIIS

In .Veu' York, call ihr Advrrtisinf Drpl. at
the home iifficr.

TIIK K<;YfTIAN LAiylKK MKG. tX).
90 West Slreet . New York Qly

The Egyptian Lac<)uer Mfg. Co., New York City.

An Action Curve.

SCALE 6

462

||| .III. ■iiii .III. Ill

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

lii4UA«»0ll«
Si Louit

WkhltA

Clevb

Albl*4v«fQiiC

Wlmlow

iwiiimiiiuiiiiimiiuiimiiiiimmiimiimiiimiiiiiiiuiiiiiii .

I » I ( I « II

.nBimnniHHiinmnuiiimiim
uwimniiiimDiimiuumuiiiimiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiuhinpim^^^

Airports — A Market

EVERYTHING that goes up has to
come down. So airports are quite
essentia! to the aviation industry.
But if you think of an airport as a nice
muddy field olTering a soft landing spot
for airplanes, or even if you know what
an airport really looks like, you ought to
be interested in the accompanying chart.
It shows the progress made on a baker's
dozen of flying fields undertaken by mu-
nicipalities or ijrivate airport operators.

A glance at this chart should convince
almost any manufacturer that the airport
is a field — not a muddy field, but a field

for his products — perhaps a field which
he has completely overlooked in his search
for new markets.

Reproduced from "Plane Talk", which
is published by Transcontinental Air
Transport, Incorporated, the chart shows
the various steps all the way from selec-
tion of site to completed airport. And it
gives more than an inkling of the airport's
demands from the manufacturer. Inci-
dentally, when all the units can be shown
in black TAT will bepn operations.

Are you, as a maker of equipment
adapted to airports, missing any bets?

Transcontinrntnl and Writtrn Air. Inc.. N. Y. C. SCALE .7

A Progress Chart.

Seldom does one find a chart as complicated as this in an advertisement. This one was
found in a technical journal.

Ill l|||l lllh lllll III

|l> .III. Mil' .ill. Ill

GRAPHIC CHARTS IN ADVERTISING

463

TME TREND TODAY IS TO GAS

AjiJL

FOR BROODING CHICKS

Amrrican Gai Assn., Nrw York City.

Two Methods of Presenting the Same Trend Curve for DifFerent Types of
Advertising.

The curve at the top was used as part of an advertisement for promoting the use of gas
for brooding chicks. The one at the bottom was used in a beauty shop "ad."

BLACKBOARDS

Blackboards may be used to display graphic charts. White
blackboards on which black chalk is used are now available.
Swinging panels and easel blackboards also aid in exhibiting infor-
mation.

Sources:

New York Silicate Book Slate Company, New York City.

Weber Costello Company, Chicago, Illinois.

White Blackboard Company. Elgin. Illinois.

Bulletin boards are especially useful since material may be
tacked up temporarily. Two manufacturers of bulletin board
material are;

Armstrong Cork Company, Inc., Lancaster. Pennsylvania.

The Celotex Corporation, Chicago. Illinois.

III i||l> illii illli ill

464

Chapter 55
QUANTITATIVE CARTOONS

raphic charts may be used effectively in cartoons.

REFERENCES

Briggs, How to Draw Cartoons, Harper edition, 1926. Garden

City edition, 1937.
Byrnes, Gene, How to Draw Comics and Commercial Art, Bridg-

man, Pelham, New York, 1939.
Thorndike, Chuck, The Secrets of Cartooning, House of Little

Books, New York, 1936.
Thorndike, Chuck, The Art of Cartooning, House of Little

Books, New York, 1937.

95.104

ALL ACCIDENTAL DEATHS /attm.s pate

(Kl THK OMITtO STA,TtS

99,300
96.258

1928 1929 1950

American Mutual Liability Insurance Co., Boiton.

1911

I9S2

The Safety Movement Sawing OfF Accidental Deaths in the United States.

QUANTITATIVE CARTOONS

465

"During this period ire couldn^t even afford ireic"

Copyricht. April 1938. by E»quire-Coronet, Inc.

A New Low.

SCALE .7

466

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

fe 7 e 9 lO n 11 13 14 13 It) 17 16 19 20 11 22 2J 24

GOOD

BAD

AWFUL I

vV-

►(^

f«^

"--'

-J

i*^

ANinAGRAPH (ANIAVJXD GRAPH) SJ^X-.nSy .'LU LPFECTS <-F BUSINESS rLUCIUAnCNS. ^sS^w-

Nation's Business, Cartoonist — Charles Dunn.

A. Ill Effects of Business Fluctuations.

SCALE .6

^ <^ %^

Rrdi.iwii From N<w Yoikrr. F.Ltii;iry iO. 19.M. Original by Kii hard Drrlcrr.

B. The Universality of the Graphic Chart Language.

QUANTITATIVE CARTOONS

467

Jtttt iround iKc co<ntt

Thf Nfw Yorkrr

A. The Search for Prosperity.

SCALE 7

too

xlO

acSO

>40

♦

Sufficiency-Curve-

HAi.rL»AD'

Bkcu

B. A "Sufficiency" Curve

i»

•Puu. LoAl'

'Ovt>.L«A»'

468

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

The Professional "Liberar

New York Herald Tribune, Cartooniit — Darling. SCALE .8

How Our Dollar Would Look If Indirect Taxes Were Actually Removed.

QUANTITATIVE CARTOONS

469

New York World-Tflegram, Cartoonist — WiU B. Johnitone.

Curves of Emotions.

SCALE 9

The news item which accompanied this cartoon read: "Emotions mapped by new geography,
charts of colored lines show likes and dislikes of individuals and groups for each
other."

470

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

' — '

Lifr

SCALE .7

It's All in How You Look at a Thing.

QUANTITATIVE CARTOONS

471

SPECIME.V AT THE WASHINGTON ZOO

The Los Ansflfs Times — Cartoonist — Russell.

A. Big and LiHie Business View With Alarm a New Species of Industrial Curve.

PERPETUAL MOTION AT LAST

472

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

^ <

QUANTITATIVE CARTOONS

473

INJURY FRE.QUENCY AND SEVERITY RATES IN
ALL INDUSTRIES

noiSKr. ^«»^*•^oo Axes^p;;^

1924

1927

19 2&

1929

I930

H3I

1932

American Mutual Liability Insurance Co. , Boaton .

A. A Carfoon Showing the Importance of Keeping the Lines Representing "Injury
Frequency" and "Severity Rates" in Industry Close Together.

sold anoth«r hcMiborg^r"

ThJa Week, Cartoonist — Henry Boltinoff.

B. The Use of Charts in ''Business."

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

"It's only a crack in the wall, but it looked
so good I had a frame put around it" lawrfnce iari*r

CoIIirr't Magazinr.

The Efficiency Expert.

Chapter 56
QUANTITATIVE POSTERS

475

LTHOUGH all the charts in this cliaptcr did not appear in
their original form as posters, the ronstructiou and layf)Ut of
the charts are such that tliey could be used as posters.

REFERENCES

Richmond. Leonard, The Technique of the Poster, Isaac Pitman
& Sons. New York and London. 1M3.S.

Sieel Workers and

Families in the

UNITED STATES

TOTAL POPULATION

FRANCE

GERMANY

TOTAL POPULATION I TOTAL POPULATION TOTAL POPUUTION

American Iron and Strcl Inttitutr. N. Y. C.

A Quantitative Poster Showing a Comparison of Car Ownership in 1937.

Quantitative material may be presented in posters with great success. Although the quan-
titative presentation in this poster is not absolutely correct, the general idea that
steel workers and families in the United States have more automobiles is easily
obtained.

476

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

UNDERWOOD ELLIOTT FISHER SUPPLIES
Will Speed Your Business — and Reduce Cost

CO ST of CO R tP P O N D E N C E

7int Qwalitif Ihbboiu & Garbons

M)l*i

PROVEN COST OF
1000 LETTEflS

^KtaHon ....WS.OO

Shorthand 80.00

OuetheaJ 3 7.53

SMioneri^ 26.80

CMa,/,n<f 24.50

cFi/in^ 6.00

%Uons &

Qarboru ...1.60

$301.63

This Chart Tells the Story - Look at It NOW!

Underwood Elliott Fither Company. New York City. SCALE .6

A Building Used as a 100% Bar Chart.

The danger in using a building for a 100% bar is that the eye compares volume as well
as height. Thus while the height of the 41% area in this building is correct in rela-
tion to the height of the 2 7% area, the volume of the first makes the proportion
wrong.

QUANTITATIVE POSTERS

477

•r«n4 IU^Mb.M

United Statn Gypaum Co., Chicago. III.

A Home Made Bulletin Giving a Connparison of the Accident Rates in Eighteen
Mills in 1924.

478

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

IF an accident occurs while your
car is traveling* under 4oMlLB$ AN HOUR
there is onlyONt CHANCE (N 44 ffiat
someoTie iviil be killed

4afi%. 6>ai^ «afiM^ ffiii^

■SH^^

^ip"^ fl*"^ <8ap«^ik 9P^^

Ir an accident occurs while your

car is traveling- over 4o MILES AN hour

there is ONE CHANCE IN 19 l/iat someone

wi/l 6e killed . . • CT> . , a i

DEATH /)ecrzns all\0/

Triivrlrr* Imtininrr CompHny. Hartford, Conn. SCALE .7

Death Begins at Forty.

The combination of color with the automobiles and speedometer make this an effective
method of presenting the idea that "death begins at forty."

QUANTITATIVE POSTERS

470

DIVERTED
FROM
HIS«WAY
TAXES IN

1937

Aiitomoliilr Manufarturrrs Association. New York.

A. The Use of a Broken Dollar in a Poster to Indicate the Portion of the Dollar
Which Was Diverted fronn Highway Taxes in 1937.

HOW NEW VORK CITY U5ES ITS LAND

BROOKLYN

QUEENS

\nOlilfeSIDeMTiML

(iREATER NLW YORK R ICHMO ND

\lttSIDlHTIPL ["|,|i ; V <»»yj /INQ CtMCTtnttS \ \ v»CANT t«Hb

The Nfw York Time*.

B. How New York City Used Its Land in 1936.

SCALE K

480

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

Ordiiuir>- and Kmcrftcnrv Nffd» That Call For an Outlay of Ten Billions Thi» Year and Six Billioae
Next — The Rrvenues Expected, the Borrowing Required. an<l the F,ffm on the National Debt

The New York Timet.

A. Balancing the Budget for the Fiscal Years 1933-34 and 1934-35.

SCALE .8

National Folk Festival Aitociation, Wathington. D. C.

B. A Folk Festival Bulletin.

SCALE .8

This map was used in various forms as an advertisement for the fifth annual Folk Festival
held in Washington, D. C, in May 1938. Twenty-seven states participated.

QUANTITATIVE POSTERS

FARM PURCHASING POWER NEARS '29 TOP

481

The Chartmnkrrt. Nrw York Cily

A. Farm Purchasing Power From 1929 Through 1937.

SCALE .s

Ainrn. Ill Iron ,..i,l Sl« < 1 InMiMilr NYC

B. Educational Preparation of Steel Workers in 1938.

482

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

INCIUOINO THt HUMOROUS TRIOITION AND FEATURES OF ■ ^ X jL K^^

JudRr iiikI Lifr Matsazinr.

A Mountain Made Out of an Increase.

A curve chart is easily imagined as a series of hills and valleys. By putting the points in
a curve, a mountain can be formed as in this cartoon. The original of this cartoon
was in colors.

QUANTITATIVE POSTERS

483

THE SSZHRDAY
EVJy

Rrprodurrd by Sprcial Permission of The Saturday EvcninR Post. CopyriRht 1932. by The Curtis
Publishing Company

The New Year Forecasts the Future.

At a time when the public is thinking in terms of increase or decrease of business, a car-
toon utilizing curves attracts attention and carries meaning. This drawing capitalized
on that fact.

484

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

CHART OF ACCIDENTS

cfown thisl/ne!

Amrrican Mutual Liability Insurance Co., Boston, Mass.

A Simple Curve Used in a Poster.

The idea that curves represent man's actions is vividly portrayed here. According to correct
procedure in a poster, there are few details given, and the lines are heavy. The
original poster was in black, red, and white, and measured 11" by 17".

QUANTITATIVE POSTERS

485

CHARLESTON

THE PORT OF NO DELy^^^T.

MINIMUM HOURS OF FOG

PROXIMITV TO OPEN SEA

STRATEGIC LOCATION

HARBOR FREE FROM ICE

SPECIAL.IZED SERVICE

AN AVERAGE OF
ONLY 38 MINUTE9
OF FOO PER DAY
POR TEN YEARS

30 MINUTES
FROM BAR TO
BETRTH

.:di£i

1 I I I

lO BO so

rtro

SHORTEST AVER-
AGE OCEAN HAUL
TO PRINCIPAI-
KEY PORTS

TO SHIP THROUGH CHARLESTON -
15 TO SHIP WITH EXPEDITION |

Bureau of Forrign Trade and Port Development. Charle»(on, South Carolina.

A Poster Used in a Campaign to Secure Greater Use of the Port of Charleiton,
South Carolina.

486

'V'f.\

Chapter 57
DISPLAYS AND EXHIBITS

■fc— I — HEN properly planned, a display becomes a salesman for
^A/ its sponsor. The value of a good display is tested by its
,JE_?L-. ability to draw buyers to it and in turn tell them a complete
and convincing sales story. Graphic charts make an effective tool
to use as part of a display.

Interesting problems in large scale displays were brought to the
fore during the construction of exhibits at the New York World's
Fair, 1939. The turntable in the Ford Building weighing 152 tons
with its exhibit was so heavy that a major foundation problem was
involved. The solution was to float the turntable on a circular
moat filled with 20,000 gallons of water. The turntable is revolved
by a two horsepower electric motor.

The "futurama" of General Motors is the largest scale model
animated diorama ever constructed. The 35,538 square-foot
panorama is a conception of America and its highways in 1960

Gardner Display* Company, Pittsburgh. Pennsylvania.

Mechanical Exhibit of the National Tube Company.

This display tells how seamless pipe is pierced from solid steel. The rolling and piercing
operation is shown in the center of the display.

DISPLAYS AND EXHIBITS

487

Gardner Ditplayt Company, Pittsburgh. Pennsylvania.

A. Scale Model of a Plant.

This model of a Bethlehem Steel heat treating plant was built for industrial shows.
A synchronized voice explains operations of the model.

Gardnrr Displays Co.. Pittsburgh. Pennsylvania.

B. Exhibit of the National Cash Register Company at the Business Show of 1938 in
New York City.

This small stage was six feet ten inches wide, six feet five inches high, and four feet
seven inches deep. The characters were approximately twenty inches high. A
sound mechanism controlled the action and voice of each of the five men. At the
Business Show, an eight minute playlet was re-enacted.

488

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

Factory Managemrnt and Maintenance. July 1938. SCALE .7

A. Big-Scale Model of the Plymouth Motor Corporation Plant at Detroit.

Even drinking fountains are shown on the big board where Plymouth lays out to scale
its 1,110,620 square feet of plant.

New York Herald Tribune

B. The Use of a Model Fighter to Familiarize British Students at the Royal Naval
College, Dartmouth, with Sea Terms.

DISPLAYS AND EXHIBITS

489

Luminous paint first used as a medium for magic is now being
used by industry for display and exhibit purposes. At the New
York World's Fair. 1939, this paint, which is luminous only under
ultra-violet light, gives the effect of illumination in the night scene
in the Perisphere. is on the stars and underground cable lines in
the Consolidated Edison "City of Light" and illuminates the night
scene in the General Motors Building. These are just a few of the
many places at the Fair in which this ultra-violet paint has been
applied.

Sources:

Stroblite Company. New York City

Baltimore and Ohio Railway Company. Baltimorr. Md. SCALE .6

Photomural Covering the Entire Wall of the B. & O. Ticket OfRce and Travel Bureau
in Rockefeller Center, New York City.

1. This picture is 35 feet long and 16 feet high. It was enlarged from a panoramic

20 inch negative and required 12 forty-inch strips, each strip 17 feet long in
order to avoid horizontal seams.

2. The picture shows B. & O.'s streamline Royal Blue crossing Thomas Viaduct, nine miles

west of Baltimore, on the route to Washington. In the foreground is the little
"grasshopper" locomotive — the Atlantic (built in 1832) — hauling the Imlay coaches.

490

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

A. Schedule Board.

This display fixture is in production con-
trol headquarters of the Pneumatic
Scale Corporation, Ltd., Quincy,
Massachusetts. Charts are lifted
out by the production clerk for
day-by-day posting.

Factory Management and Maintenance, Febru-
ary. 1938. SCALE .5

Installing photomurals in the Ford Rotunda building at Dearborn, Michigan — the largest
photographs in the world.

Kaufmann & Fabry Co., ChicaRo.

B. Photomurals.

SCALE 7

Photomurals are enormous photographic enlargements which are hung to walls much in
the same manner as wall paper.

DISPLAYS AND EXHIBITS

491

Mutlipl" Display Fixliirr Cnmpnny, St. Louis, Missouri.

A. Wall Pivot Display.

1. This display fixture has twenty-four display surfaces, each with six-square feet of

display area. Material may be either fastened to the board, with thumb-tacks or
posted permanently.

2. Multiplex displays work on the principle of a loose-leaf book except that the swinging

wing-panels are considerably larger. Material may be posted on each side. In this
way charts, graphs, etc., are shown in full. They are smooth, flat, and always
available for quick reference.

3. If necessary any display wing-panels may be removed from the fixture, taken to a

desk where work may be done on the posted material. The entire display is easily
returned to its place in the fixture.

S|>rrdway Manufacturing Co . Cicrro. Illinois.

B. Electric Motor Driven Turntables.

1. The turntable on the left operates on an A.C. line and has a five-pound capacity.

The platform measures 11^".

2. The turntable on the right may be obtained for either A.C. or D.C., and has a 500-pound

capacity. No platform is provided.

3. These tables may be used for every type of display.

492

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

A. Battery-Driven Turntable.

This turntable when equipped with three
batteries will turn fifteen pounds
of display material for 700 hours.
The table has interchangeable
discs, one 5' i" and the other 8'/a ".

Flrisrhrr & Co.. and Aristo lm|>ort Co.. Inc.
Nrw York City. Di-itritnitnrs

Diorama Cori>oration of America. Long Island City. New York.

B. Plastic Relief Map in the Exhibit of the Pan American Union at the New
York World's Fair. 1939.

1. This map is constructed of transparent plastic, phenolic resin base, and is lighted from

beneath. The map is made in twenty-nine individual panels, modeled from United
States topographical maps.

2. The size of the map is 27 feet deep and 20 feet wide. It slopes from a height of 10

feet from the Canadian portion in the rear to 8 inches to South America in the fore-
ground.

3. This map was designed to show primarily the interdependence of North and South

America in regard to transportation and communication.

4. There is approximately six hundred feet of neon tubing, nine-tenths of which is under-

neath the map. Over one hundred principal cities are shown by lights.

DISPLAYS AND EXHIBITS

493

T«f tf lIHItll or*

Iktl wrALL ^

Courtrty of RnymoncI Locwy. Drsicntr. Nrw York City.

A. Sketch of the Service Exhibit of the Eastern Presidents' Conference Division of
the American Association of Railroads, in the Railroad Building at the New

York World's Fair. 1939.

1. This exhibit will be a graphic chart in the form of a huge mirror showing the decline

of revenues in comparison with rising expenditures of the American Railroads.
The following title will appear on the chart: "Revenues are constantly decreasing
and taxes, wages, and overhead are constantly increasing."

2. Starting at 1922 a neon light will move to the right and up along the face of the

chart up to 19.18. This line represents the increase in expenditures. When this
line is completed, pictures will emerge from the back of the mirror in the sections
marked "transparencies," showing the improvement in services on the railroads.

3. Following this the contrasting neon line will move down, and two "transparencies"

will emerge on the face of the mirror — the comparison of old and new service.

- • «

HOW MACHINt TO

Xa*^:-JL#|

"i ' *■ — — — ■

BV^-C t-1

Drsienrd and Buill hy Victor M Clark & Staff. New York City

B. An Exhibit of the National Machine Tool Builders' Association, Cleveland, Ohio,
at the Museum of Science and Industry in New York City.

494

Chapter 58
DIORAMAS

jJQl diorama is a life-like, three-dimensional representation in
miniature. It is capable of reproducing any scene, sometimes em-
ploying sound and motion. The general visual effect of a diorama
is similar to that which the observer gets when looking in or out
of a window onto the actual scene.

A diorama, or a series of dioramas, is used principally as the
focal point of an exhibit, such as a world's fair exhibit, traveling
display, window or industrial museum.

The M;irrhan(l Dinramn Cotji , Mt Vrrnon. N. Y.

Diorama of the Columbia Steel Company, Subsidiary of the U. S. Steel Company,
Under Construction in the Marchand Studio.

This diorama was part of an exhibit at the Golden Gate Exposition in San Francisco.

DIORAMAS

495

DIORAMA IN PLACE

PLATE (3iLA$S

LINE OF DIRECT IMAGE
TUNNEL

U S. Dfpnrlmcnt of Acricultiirc. Bureau of Public Ro;ul».

A. Sketch Illustrating the Reflecting Device for the Historical Dissolving Diorama
Exhibit Illustrating 400 Years of Highway Development in America from 1539
to 1939.

Eacli of the dioramas is six I'nchcs in dcptli. To secure tlie apjiearance of a third dimension
in tliis sniall space, the lin'ires were molded on the face of a curved piece of tin.

Uniird Sl.ntct Stcrl Cori>oration. N< w Y.dk City.

B. Chart in the Entrance of the United States Steel Subsidiaries' Exhibit at the New
York World's Fair. 1939.

1. This chart shows tlie growth in the use of steel per capita in the United States from

the time of George Washington. In 1789, the use per capita was one-half pound.
In 19J9. the use per capita is 19,000 pounds or 9', j tons.

2. The indispensability of steel in modern times is the theme of the huge mural seen in

the background. Thin sheets of steel were hammered into miniature buildings,
bridges, tools, horses, tractors, streamliners, airplanes, and automobiles, and were
mounted on a background of plain blue steel.

496

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

Dioramas can be constructed to almost any size. The average
would probably run between four and eight feet in length, two and
four feet in depth, and four and eight feet in height. The depth,
therefore, is usually half the length.

About 3,600 dioramas including cut-outs, models, and other
forms giving the three dimensional effect were used in exhibits
at the New York World's Fair, 1939. The price range is from $50.
to $150,000.

Due probably to the impetus of business from the New York
World's Fair, 1939. the diorama business has expanded tremen-
dously. Two years ago there was one company specializing in
diorama design and construction. Today there are twenty- five
active in the field. J

Consolidated Edison Company of New York, Inc.

The "City of Light" Diorama at the New York World's Fair. 1939.

1. This diorama is the exhibit of the Consohdated Edison Company of New York. It is

almost a city block long and is taller than a three-story building. Four thousand
buildings with more than 130,000 lighted windows are included. An eight-foot
space beneath the street level demonstrates the city's network of subways and
electric, gas, and steam mains.

2. In the illustration above, the semi-circular wall of the building is quite apparent. It

was especially constructed to house this diorama.

Chapter 59 /

497

GRAPHIC CHARTS IN CONFERENCE ROOMS

X he display characteristic of graphic charts makes them valuable
for use in conference rooms. In some cases, the conference room is

Automobilr Manufacturer* Association. Washington. D. C, "Automobile Facts." February 1939.

The Use of a Pin Map fo Indicate Changing Tastes by States in Autonnoblle Colors
Month by Month ih the United States.

1. Differences in color preferences over a period of time and in different sections make it

necessary for color experts to study fashion trends in order to anticipate changing
demand.

2. More than 40% of the New England drivers and only 16% of the motorists in the South-

west elect black cars.

3. Light hues predominate in California, while Washington and Oregon go in for dark

tones.

4. Blue is No. 1 choice in the prairie states, although black tops that color in the states

immediately to the east.

498

■||

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

constructed so that graphic charts may become a part of the gen-
eral plan. In others, the display of graphic charts is made possible
by means of lantern slide projectors. The display fixtures explained
in the preceding chapter could well be used in any board room.

Burroughs Adding Machine Co., N. Y. C, "The Burroughs Clearing House," September 1938.

Board Room of the Bowery Savings Bank in New York City.

1. The wall maps show all sections where the Bowery Savings Bank has or will have

real estate loans.

2. The projection machine shown in the lower photograph can throw enlarged photo-

graphs, layouts, charts, and other pertinent information on a large screen placed
at the far end of the room.

3. On the west wall of the room is a 35-foot photomural, an aerial photograph of

J*4ew York City.

ill

■ li

III

GRAPHIC CHARTS IN CONFERENCE ROOMS ^^^

Nrw York Hrrnl.l Trituinr J.inuary 1 l<i.l

A. Mayor F. H. LaGuardIa of New York City, and Dr. John L. Rice. Health Com-
missioner, Before a Chart Showing New York City's Death Rate from 1898
to 1938.

U S Drpartmrnt of Juiti.r Fnlrr.il Burrau of IiivcsliK^tioii

B. John Edgar Hoover, Director of the Federal Bureau of Investigation, Before the
Map of the United States on Which Are Tabbed the Location of the Bureau's
Investigative Personnel.

ill

500

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

A. Board Room of the New Federal Reserve Board Building in Washington, D. C.

The star holders on the walls of this room and the charts that hang on them are a definite
part of the decoration of the room.

c^c:^o^c:^c:iC^c:sc^c^c^c^c^c^c^c^^^

^zp^^zp^^^zy^^z^^y^y^n^^ip^ip^y^zp^i?

B. Sketch of the Lay-out of the General Motors Conference Room Showing the
Position of the Projector and Screen.

The solid black line indicates the screen. The projector is directly behind the screen.

Q c^ o Ci o

'^ O O C? C7

C. The Use of Projectors in Conference Rooms.

The illustration shows the general lay-out for the use of a lantern slide projector in a
conference room.

501

Chapter 60
GLOSSARY

SINCE there has been little organized work on vocabulary, the
wordings in this glossary should be considered as suggestions,
and not in any way officially sanctioned.

Absolute Bar Chart. — See component bar chart.

Aerial Map. — A photograph or drawing giving a bird's-eye view

of buildings, roads, trees, mountains, cities, etc.
Area Bar Chart. — A bar chart in which at least one dimension is in

percentages, resulting in a comparison of the areas of the sec-
tions of the bar.
Arithmetic Scale. — An amount scale on a grid with equal numerical

values represented by equal special intervals.
Band Chart. — See component curves chart.
Bar Chart. — Presentation of data in the form of bars whose lengths

and divisions indicate values.
Bell Curve Chart. — A frequency chart in which the distribution

assumes the shape of a bell. See frequency chart.
Bilateral Bar Chart. — A bar chart in which the bars extend both

above and below, or both to the left and to the right of, a

common line.
Bleed-Out — An illustration on a printed page which extends as
far as the edge of the page, leaving no white space between the
edge of the illustration and the edge of the page.
Buck-Shot Chart. — See scatter chart.
Carto^ram. — See statistical map.
Chronology Chart. — The presentation of data with the emphasis

on time rather than quantity or quality.
Circle Chart. — Presentation of data in the form of a circle. The

area may be proportional to the corresponding facts, or the

circle may be divided into sectors. See sector chart.

Classification Chart. — A chart in which facts, data, etc., are so ar-
ranged that the place of each in relation to all is readily seen.

Column Chart. — A bar chart in which the bars are arranged ver-
tically. See bar chart.

502 GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

Compound Bar Chart. — A bar chart with several contrasting bars.
See bar chart.

Component Bar Chart. — A bar chart in which each bar is divided
into two or more parts.

Component Curves Chart. — A curve chart in which the total is
shown graphically divided into parts.

Contour Map. — A map in which lines indicate the topography of
the land. The contour method may also be used to show
erosion, precipitation, climatic conditions, etc.

Correlation Chart. — A chart showing degree and type of relation-
ship between two variables,

Cosmograph. — Trade name for a flow chart made from black and
white strips of paper, and presenting numerical information
or percentages.

Crosshatched Map. — See statistical map.

Cumulative Curve. — A curve in which each value, except the first
which is zero, is a total or accumulation of all preceding values.

Curve Chart — A chart in which a line is plotted on a grid.

Dependent Variable. — The data presented in a chart or table which
varies according to a change in the independent variable. The
amount scale on a time curve chart is the dependent variable.

Disc Chart. — See circle chart.

Distorted Map. — A map in which the areas of states, countries, etc.,
are proportional to quantitative data.

Divided Circle. — See sector chart.

Dot Map. — See statistical map.

Extrapolation. — Projection of the data beyond known points.

Flow Chart. — Graphic representation of movements geographi-
cally or through an organization or structure.

Flow Map. — A map in which either or both qualitative and quan-
titative flow of goods, persons, automobiles, etc., is shown.

Form. — One side of a printed sheet.

Frequency Chart. — A chart in either bar or curve chart form show-
ing distribution of items according to kind, size, location, or
time of occurrence.

Gantt Chart. — A specialized type of production chart. See progress
chart.

Geneology Chart. — A chart used as a method of showing ancestry
and heredity traits.

Genetics Chart. — See geneology chart.

Graphic Narrative. — A story told by means of pictures.

Grid. — The surface or field composed of coordinate rulings on
which data are plotted or graphed.

__^^^^^__^— ^-^— 503
GLOSSARY

Guide Map. — A detailed map on which highways, railroad routes,
or other methods of transportation are indicated together with
cities, etc. Sec route map.
Gun-Shot Chart. — See scatter chart.

Halftone. — A method of reproducing on a printing plate the de-
tails of a photograph, drawing, painting, etc.. including all the
gradations of color.
High- Low Chart. — A chart in which the difference between two
curves is the center of interest.

Independent Variable. — The data presented in a chart or table
which does not vary because of some influence within the data.
The time scale on a curve chart is the independent variable.

Index Numbers Chart. — A chart in which all items are expressed
as percentages relative to a base figure.

Interpolation. — Process of locating data between two known
points.

Key. — See legend.

Lag. — The condition that exists when two curves are not concur-
rent, but one "lags" behind the other to some extent.

Legend. — An explanation or identification of symbols, etc., used in
a chart.

Logarithmic Chart. — See ratio chart.

Logarithmic Scale — A scale of numbers on a grid so arranged that
the spacial intervals are proportional to the differences be-
tween the logarithms of the numbers.

Lorenz Chart. — A chart giving frequency distribution with both
the variable and invariable quantities reduced to percentages.
Both scales represent 100%. See frequency chart.

Map Chart. — See statistical map.

Moving Average Curve. — A curve in which each value is the aver-
age for an overlapping period of time. A moving average for
a period of time "centered" is the average for half the time
before the specified date and half the time after the specified
date.

Moving Total Curve. — A curve in which each value is the total for
an overlapping period of time.

Ogive Chart. — A frequency distribution in which "more than" or
"less than" data are presented. One scale of the grid repre-
sents percentages and the other scale represents "more than"
or "less than" values. See frequency chart.

10(P/o Band Chart. — See percentage curve chart.

^^"^ GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

100% Bar Chart. — A chart in which a single bar represents 100%
and the divisions of the bar represent percentages of the whole.

100% Block Chart.— See 100% square chart.

100% Square Chart. — An area bar chart in which both dimensions
are in percentages. See area bar chart.

Organization Chart. — Graphic explanation of the structure of a
business, government, school, or other unit of operation.

Percentage Band Chart. — See percentage curve chart.

Percentage Bar Chart. — See 100% bar chart.

Percentage Curve Chart. — A component curve chart in which data
is presented on the basis of 100%. See component curves chart.

Pictogram. — See graphic narrative, and pictorial unit bar chart.

Pictorial Map. — See statistical map.

Pictorial Unit Bar Chart. — A bar chart in which comparisons are
made by using a number of symbols, each of which repre-
sents a specific value.

Pie Chart. — See sector chart.

Pin Map. — See statistical map.

Plate. — The composition, whether zinc, lead, etc., which is used to
make the printed impression on paper.

Plotting (Plotted). — Placing a curve or other representations on a
grid.

Procedure Chart. — A time study by which procedure in production
may be planned and recorded. See progress chart.

Process Chart. — A time study by which production may be ana-
lyzed, planned, and recorded. See progress chart.

Production Control Chart. — A time study by which production
may be planned, controlled, and recorded. See progress chart.

Progress Chart. — A time study by which production and transpor-
tation movements may be planned and recorded.

Progressive Average Curve. — A curve in which each value is the
average of all the items previously shown.

Proportional Map. — See distorted map.

Range Bar. — A bar form of high-low chart in which the range of
prices of stocks or commodities may be indicated. See high-
low chart.

Rank Chart. — See rating chart.

Rate-of -Change Chart. — See ratio chart.

Rating Chart. — The presentation of the rank of items as deter-
mined by the quantitative value of each item.

Ratio Chart. — A curve chart in which the amount scale rather than
an arithmetic scale is so spaced that a straight line diagonally

GLOSSARY ^^^

across the grid represents a unitorni percentage increase or

decrease.
Relationship Chart. — A diagram in which facts, information, etc.,

are arranged to emphasize tlicir relation.
Relative Bar Chart. — See 100% bar chart.
Relief Map. — Map showing elevations and surface undulations of

a geographical unit. Relief maps may also be used to present

statistical data.
Route Map. — A map on which point to point movements of ships,

airplanes, railroads, electricity, etc.. are given.
Scatter Chart. — A chart on which the data has been plotted or

distributed as dots on a grid.

Schedule Chart. — See progress chart.

Screen. — A cross-lined screen, usually glass, through which copy
is photographed for reproduction as a halftone.

Sector Chart. — The presentation of data in the form of a circle
divided so that each sector is proportional to the correspond-
ing facts.

Semi- Logarithmic Chart. — See ratio chart.

Shot-Gun Chart. — See scatter chart.

Signature. — A folded printed sheet ready to be assembled with
other folded sheets to be bound together. A signature usually
consists of 16 pages, but it may be 4, 8. 32, or even 64 pages.

Stair Chart. — A chart in which a line plotted on a grid resembles
stairs.

Staircase Chart. — See stair chart.

Statistical Map. — A map on which dots, circles, bars, curves, sym-
bols, or crosshatchings have been placed to give the geographic
location in accordance with statistical data.

Tabulation. — The recording of statistical data in the form of tables.

Three-Dimensional Chart. — A graphic presentation with three
variables. Three-dimensional charts may be drawings in per-
spective or models.

Two- Directional Bar Chart. — See bilateral bar chart.

Traffic Map. — A flow map showing the flow of automobiles or
persons on streets and highways. See How map.

Two-Way Bar Chart. — See bilateral bar chart.

Zee Chart. — A curve chart presenting periodic (day, week, or
month) data, cumulative data, and a moving total on one
grid. The positions of the curves form a "Z."

506

INDEX

ITO-ITT,
1<>0,

501

\t»

lliU

350

1S6

15B. I'VJB, 302A

374B

t21l>, 4JKA

Ahlioll KJiiraliaiml Co. MX

Abtoliilr har rhurl 301

Addrrtunnraiih Nf nil iicra|ili Ciirp. 434

Advrrli>iii|c rliarl . 454

-Idi .rtMinit «nd S.llint 331

Arra l>ar rliarl It<<l52. 501

Arrial:

Map

I'lioloKraph
Agririilliiral Kroiininiri, Hiirraii <if
Air brii»h
Air rniitr map
Alriandrr llaiiiillon Inililuir
Allrfirdrr, Thro. & Son*
Allrolor Co.
Aniriiran A>>o<ialion of l.anditrapr Arrhili-rln 171, 235

Aiiirriran Anaorialion of Slair lliicliwav Ufficiali HVB

Ami'riean .4 vitit ion .„ „ 167

Amvrican Hunint'n^ , ., 3HC

Anirriran (.'ra>on Co. _____________ 370

Anirriraii Doriiiiiriilalion inaliliilr , 40<*

Aiiirririiii (^aa .\»>»rialioii ___^ „. 463

Anirriruii (^i-nrlira A>»urjalioii S4B, 55

Anirriran Oonraphiral Sorirly of Nrw York . 153

Anirriran iron & SirrI Inatiluir 3IIA. 215A, 243. 475, 4H1 B

.-Imciirrin Machinist , „ 1511

Anirriran Map Co. _ . . 154

Anirriran Miilual Liability Iniurancc Co 464. 473 A, 4114

Anirriran I'rirolruiii IiiMi(.ulr _... 19SA

Anirriran KollinK .Mill Co _ 10KB

Anirriran SrhooU of Orirnlal Rrtrarch 170

.\iiirriran Sorirl> of .Mrrlianiral Knginrrri (.S«'i> also

Timv .SiTii-j (hurls and Coniiiiilire on Kn|;inrrrinK

and Srirnlifir (irapbil IIVA, 3lH

Anirriran Slandarda Assorialioii (See Timv Svrivs

Charts.)
Anirriran Slalisliral Asaorialion 323. 325. 326. 333A

Anirriran Trirphonr & Trirgraph Co. 21)1

Anirriran T>pr Kniindrrt • 439

Anirriran VI ritinit I'aprr Co 44)1

Anmlral t'lililisliini: & iSupply Co. 57

Arra bar rhart 149-152

Arra roiiiparison (.Si't- ofjo Area bar charl)_ASA, 23H. 457

Aritio Iniporl Co. ..492A

Arkin. Hrrbrrt .._ 24,370

Arniilrung Cork Co>

Arnold, Bion J.

Art Oa^on Co,

Aloiii rharl .. ._

Auilralia, Conininnwrallh
Autoniobilr Maiiiifarlurrri

117B

74A. 223

- - 370

52A. 52B

159

2HB. 94A. 9H.

/4u(ornurirc lndu$lrie»

Atrraitr

Monnn . _

PruKmiirc

Aviation

Avrri. Dr. F.dward A.
A»rri, I.ronard I'. _
Aiiniulhal projrctioit .

Attorialioit
02B. 131A. 29BA. 349A. 479A. *V

- SO A. 299 A

107 B

209, 2116, 28HB. 2»9. 291 B. 503

. 2H6. 2HHA

.. 45

425

86A, 2SH, 273, 303 B

. 176

& Sont

421'

Bainbridgr, Cbarirt T

Bahvr,' Helper 460B

Balliniorr li Ohio Railway Co. 4H9

Band rharl JOl

lOOCc 294. 297B. 503

Bar rhart 106-114, IIS-120. 363. 364. 464. 501

Abiolule 501

Arra 149.152.501

Bilalrral _ 142-14)1. 501

Column , 106. 501

(.niiiponrnl

Conip d

Ciiiiiiilativr
Madr on t>pi
100%

99, 132-141. 2VI. Ml

502

_ _ _ _ 94B

377

51, HH. 92-97. 9)1-105. 123A. 12HA

132. I37A. 139A. 144B, I45A. 152,

294. 297B. 454A, 460A, 476. 504

200 207

_ - 121-131. 211. 365, .504
. 505

2«SA. 2H5H, 504

505

Kriiiforrriiirnti

Snivllir-srwrd

Stamping

%irr«lilrhrd
Bint-linm. Kichmond F.-

Rinnrv & .Smith Co.

Birrrn. Kabrr

BitiiKi, I'rrrv A.

BIrrd-oul

Blork claasifiratioii rhart

Blork rnl:

l.iliolriiiii

Wood

Blork diiiKruill

Bolicinoff

.24, 3098, 333B, 334, 335, 370

370

427, 42)1

: 340

501

49, 50A. 50B

Bullun, Joseph R.

Borgia map .„

Boston Gtohe

Bowrn, M. I..

BoMrrt SavinRt Bank...
Bowman, Isaiah ___
Brad>, Dornthy S. __

Brrak-rvrn rhart

BrrMrr-tlanlrlnio Co. .

Briggs

Brinton. Vlillard C

415
415

356B

473B

259A

153

29 B

359R

49)1

162A

323

32HB

451

464

.24, 49, 74B, 124A, 161. 1H6. 192B,
254, 261. 28HA. 293A, 327, 370

Brooks, Biirlrigh 397 K, 397 F

Brown. Arthur, & Brolhert 419

Hro«n. Brrtrand . 123A, 124B. 12HA

Brown. Throdorr H. 24, 309B. 333B. 334. 335, 370

Burk-shol rharl

Burraii of Agrirullurul F.ronomict ,,

Burrau of Chrmistr> & Soils

Burrau of horrigii Trade k Horl Oovelopmcnl,

Charlr.tun, S. C.

Burrau of I'ublir Koadt

501
160
160

Burrau o( Krclaiiiation -

Burn. Walter P.. & Attociatei

Burns

485
...160. 495 A

156

_242. 401 A
319B

INDEX

507

lllirrouilAf ('Irniinn //out
Riiih Trrniinal i.o.
Rwiiri. (irnr

California Job eai*

C.inrra

Conlai _ - _

('iirlii Color Sroiil

Drvin Tricolor

i.rira

l.inhof

I'rrfu

Holl»i(l»«

4Mi(:

4.1S

Sprrd («raphir
Trirolor

Candid ('anirra Corp. — _ — _

Car!>U, I'aiil

Carnrnir Inililiilr of WaihlngtOB-

CarlrrS Ink Co, ,

Cartoiirani ^_— _______

Carlooni. c|iianlilalivo

Carlwriithl. Milli H.

Caiital rrlalionthip

Critiiloid (°orp. - ■ .. ..,

397.104

.lOTC

^'^■:^

______ 397 K

j«:b

397 K

.i<)7n

— — ^ .'"H

.197 R

4.VI

.1S3, 3S6A. .1S9R

427A

SOI

_______ 464^ 474

4.19

_27S. 282 A. 211)1 R
36H

109,

Crnlral Statitliral Board
(Srr frHrral Charl Book.)

Chaddofk. H. K.

Chanibrr of Coiunirrrr of llir United Stale*

(Thainpinn I'apcr ft F'ihrr (^o. ^_^ 44H

Chan, iiiiinrilioni for making 367 1110

Chartmakrri _ _. _ _ 4H1A

Chatr National Bank 284B. 330B, 332R, 340

Chrniiilrv ft Soilt. Bureau IftO

Chirano Cardboard Co. . 422

Chifago ^rl^un.• 121. 265A. 26SB. 276B

Chirano U hrri & Manufacluriog Co. .-. - 372

Chroma (Sre aho Color) 424D. 425C. 427B

Chronolony chart 248-255. 501

Churchill Fnitinrrring Corp. 145B. ISO

Cincinnati. Ohio. City Manager _ 38B. 65, I25A

Circle chart {See also Sector Chart)..

On map . .- . - — -

Civilian ConierTation Corp» _

Clark. Victor M.. and Staff

Clark. Wallace _

Clarification chart

Block

Coait A Geodetic Surrojr

Codeii Book Co.

ColUrr$

Color _ _

Color*blind .~__«^_.^_.^..

251. 501

194-199

61 A

493 B

262

43-52. 501

_ .49, SOA. SOB

156. 1511

56A. 367

. 474

Collon Preti —

Colton. Raymond R.
Columbia Steel Co.—
Column chart —^

-418. 419. 423-428. 453

^ 426

414. 439. 443

24. 370

494

106, 501

439

Commercial Engraving Publithing Co.

Committee on Engineering and Scientific Graphs

381. 40HA, 40HB. 40HC
Committee on Standards for Graphic Pretentalion
(Srf Timr Srriet Chartt.)

Commonwealth Editon Co. 3S4

Component :

Bar chart 99. 132-141, 294, 502

Curve chaH 294-300, 393. 502

Compound bar chart 502

Compotile chart .- 16fl-.16A

Conference roomi. chart! 497-500

Coniolidated Editon Co 496

Contai camera „ .^.^__^______^__^____^-_- ._ 397C

Contimotie Salei Co. 407A

Contour map 231-237. 502

Control chart (S«« aiao Pro(r*(» chart) S04

Cornell. Grace 427 A

Corpi of Engineora . . 156

Correlation *•>*■''

Cotmograph -

Covert {Srr alto Binding)
Cewden. Dudley J. .. _

Coihead. Balph C. Corp.
Craftint .Manufacturing C*..
Oayont —

Crotthatched

nap

Creiihatching iSrt alto Skadinf).
CroM-teclien paper .

. 320-330. 502

73. 7IA. 788. 79. 80A. 80B. 502

451. 453

24. 286

379

419

- - 370

.17S-18«. 270. 502

USA. 178

367

lionietrir

Halin

Tri...«..l«r r»....lM.«lr
(rn.lnii. Irr.lrnrk \.
Cruiii, Vlilliuin 1..
(Mininlalivr :

Bar chart

Curve chart 2T!

lrr<|Hrnr> chart

Srrlnr chart
Ciirlia Color Seoul Camera
Curlii. Thoniai S.. Laboratory
CurtK I'ubliihing Co.
Curxr chart .- .-

1S7B

168 A

159A

21. 286

Hrll

Coiiipariinni

(!iinipnnent

Cnrrrlalinn

Cumulative

l-"Tri|Urnf >

CiintI

9tB

279, 281A. 126. H9A. S02

111. 1JJA

198 B

483

261 159. 502

310. 501

275 293

. . 294 300. 391. S02

_ . _ 320 3.10. 502

27S. 279, 28IA. 326. 349A. 502

._ 310 319. 502

256 262.502

275. 276B. 285 A. 28SB. 104B. 503

lligl. lov

Index number*- .1148, 142. 301 109, 347B, 361. 164. 503

l.nreni 331338.503

Moving averaga^ 209. 286. 288B. 289. 291 B. 503

Moving total S03

Ogive 331 118. 501

On map 208-210.261.274

Percentage .. — 504

I'ronrenive averag* 286. 28BA. 504

Ratio 339-353. 504

Cul-nut letter! 37S

Darling ___— ^_-

Dartnell Corp

DaiKco Product! Co.

Da\i>. Harvey N.-.- , , „ —

Da». E. ¥

Decker. Richard

Denniton. Henry S. — .

Drnniton Manufacturing Co..

Dependent variable

Detroit Ediion Co

Deviation

De\in Colorgraph Co_
Devin Tricolor camera..
Dick. A. B.. Co _

-2398
_ 429
-398
_ 34
-4M8

333A

371

.263, S02
3S$8

Diel<|ten. Eugene. Co..

Diniensioni

Diorama Corp. ...

Diorama! ,

Disc chart _________

Displays -.^

Dislorird map

Ditto. Inc.

Divided circle

Divine, J. J.. A!!ociate!, In
Diton. Joseph. Crucible Co..

Donnant. D. F

Dot map ... -. ..

Draeger. Lawrence W.
Drawing:

Roard .

Instrtiiiient!

Pencils

.142. 2718. 324

398A

39HA
.432A. 433A
368A. 369A
384

4928

494-496

_ . . . - 502

__293B. 486-493, 497

238-242. 459. 502

429

SOS

169

369B. 370

1H7-I93. S02

41S

_42eA

-369A
_369B

Dunn. Charle! _ 466A

Dun's Review— 116A. I17A. 141A. 141B. USA. 282B.

287C. 297B, 120. 344. 147B. 458

Duplicating machine (.See alto Reproduction) 429

IHipont De Neiiiour!, E. I., t Co. 368

Durost. Walter 3S

Eagle Pencil Co. .
Eastern Air l.inet
Eastern Railroad

370. 372

163A

91. 491A

Eastman Kodak Co. _ -368. 399A, 401. 40SA. 40SB. 40SC

Eberhard Kaber Pencil Co. 370.372

Kronon.ic rixht price 14S8, ISO

Edition binding .. , 4S0

Educational Eihibilion Co. . 1S4. 193. 367. 368

Egyptian l.ari|uer Manufacturing C*. .. 461

ElrrlrUal Borld 239 A. 366

Electric Storage Batlerx Compaajr-
Elrttroniet — __

-73. 25S. 4S4A
-S8. 263. 347A

508

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

al Walcb C*.

r.lrrlrnltpi
KUin N.I

VMlr l»pr

Knii-nt. Brooks
Knrtrlopriiia Anirrirar
Knfiinfrrtng K' Mining
EnfinrfriniL .V*>u-i Hrro

tZl

.IThR
SI. 20A
IS.1. IS4. ISS
IIH. I.1H. 3(iO
HSB, IhbB. JS4B. 261
2V1A, .137
KnKinrrririK & Srirnlinr (^rapha. Coinniillrr .IHl, 40KA

40HB. 40H(:
372
46S
S3, S4A
122
4H6 493
S02

Kratrrt

F.tquirr-C.oronvl. Iiir.
Kiigrniri KrroriJ Office
F.vant, 11 . Sanford ^ . _ _

KihibiU {S,-i- alto Diaplayt)
Kklrapolalinn _____

Faclory

f'attotj hi annfrmvnt it

257

Miiinlrnanev H2B, K3A, H3B. H7,

134B. 4HHA, 4<»0A

Frdrral Riirraii of ln\ rtliftalion 4<'4B

Fnd^ral Chan Hook 03A4. <>3A. 938. 93C. 270. 296B. 305

Frdrral I'oxrr Coniiiiittion 3SA. 97, 173B

Frdrral Rr.rrvr Board SOOA

Frdrral Krtrrvr. Nrw York lOhA, I I4B, 132A. I32B. 142,

269A. 2HSA, 2HSB. 2H7A, 2H7B. 3hlB, SOOA

Firld. R. M. 6«A, 6HB. 72. 144A

Film (Sfr Canirra.)

Kodarhronir ._ 399

Fir»l National Bank of Botloa 179A

Fithrr, Ir\ing 340

Fi.alivr 420A

Flat binding 4S|

FIritrhrr A Co. 492A

Florrnrr, I*. Sargent _ S5

Flow charl 73-80. 215-230. 502

Flow map 216 230, 502

Foiiir, F. P 37B. 250, 2SI

F'olnirr (>raflrs

Food Industiift

Foolnotr

Ford Motor Co.

Forrst Srrvirr ..

F'orm (Si-e alio Printing)

Forlunr Magazine

Frrnch fur\r

F'rr€|iirncv :

BrII charl

Curvr chart ^

Diilribiition .

Fri.brr. Ira N.

Fuchi & I.ang Manufacturing Co>
FunkhouBcr, Gray H ...____

397D

_ 104

160. 490B

156

453. 502

.30.94B, 177 B
369A

310

310-319. 502
_101. 11». IKO
_24. 263. 292

453

« Co.

Ilalllonr

llaniillon ManliraclnrinK Co

lUtiiillon. \l . C. S Son*..

Ilaininrrniill Paper Co..

Maniniond. C. S., & Co.

Ilarri< & Kwing

lla.kril. Allan C.

Ilrrlograph

llrlinhnllr

Mrrrdity chart . ._ . „

llrring .

Iliggint, Charlr

High-low chart

Hink«, A. K.

Iliilorical map

Hoch. Frrd W.

Holdrn. Arthur C.

(loovrr. John Kdgar

//oik.' and Gardvn

Hubbard. Hrnrt I).

Hiir (».■ «/«o Color)

Hiirricanr niap^

Htdrographir :

Map ...

Office

113. 416. 417. 419. 420A. 503

438

453

44H

154

SOOA

24. 370

432 B

423

3S6A

423

. 371

27S. 276B. 28SA. 2IISB. 304B. 503

_ _ _ .. _ 204. 205

435

141

_ _ 499B

_ _ 31

2. S2A. S2B

42SA. 427 B

218

Hypotrnuir rectangle

_ 156
._ 156
_ 384

Illustration board. Wolman 421

llliislralions. prrparation ._ 417-422

Impo.ilion (S... aUo Rinding) 450. 4S2A

Ind.pendrnI variable _ „ 263.503

Index numbers 1 14R. 142. 301-309, 347B. 363, 364. 503

India ink . 371

Induslrinl & En^int'vrinf Ckrmittry _. 71

Industrial Mana^vmenl .^. ._ 63B

Ind-itlrial Tape Corporation .. 371

I nk 373

India . 371

Intrrit (>'<>«• aho Binding) 450

Inlaglio printing . 435. 437. 44IC

International Boundary Coniniiltion . _ - 156

International Businrst Machinrt Corp. 40. 7KA. 7HB. 79,

HOA. KOB. 377. 37K

Intrrnalional Printing Ink Corp 42S. 427B. 42HA

Intrrpolation 503

Inlerty pe :

Corporation 436

Machine 436

Inverse rrlalionahip 282A. 460C

Iron Age- i76A. 350

Isometric 356B

Paper 3S7B

Protractor

3S7A

Gantt chart
Cantt. Henry I.
Gardner Dinplai

Co.

Gelatine duplicating machine-

Grnrology chart

Grnrolngical charl theet

General Klertric Co. ___

General I. and Office

Genetici churl ._:

Geographic map

Geologic map

Geological Survey

Georgian Bay CanaL

Grrard. Dave __^_______

Glotiary _ _

Goldrn Gair Fxpoiilion

Coodyrar Tirr & Rubber Co..

GoTrrnmrnt mapi

Gradr chart, pencil

Grafa-lone Co. ..

Grain {Sfv alto Paper)

Graphic narralite __

Gravure printing
Gray. RumcII T.. Inc.

Grid

Guide map

Gulick. I.ulher .._-

Gun-thol chart

__ 256, 262, 502

262

...486. 487 A. 487 B

. 429

53-58. 502

56A. 57

472

156

S3-S8. 502

156

155

122

501-505

494

266A

_1SS. 1S6. 160

369B

419

444

2S-32. 455. 502

44 1 C

72. 471

_ 383. 386. 502
.161-169. 456. 503

62, 70

503

Jaeckrl Fur Storage-
Johnston. W. IJ.. Jr>.

Jonas. S. Theo ^

Jones. Victor O.

.3S6B. 3S7A. 469

29B

(;.

Kaplan. A. I).
KarMen. Karl
Kaufmann & Fabry Co..

Krisry Co.

KruflTel & F.iier

Krp .

Map -.

KIrppner. Otto

KnorpprI, Charlei E_

Kodachrome film

Kodak

Koh-I-Noor Pencil Co.-
Konig

325. 326

24. 263. 286. 343. 370

490B

. _ 376A

.156. 357B. 3S9A. 36HB, 372. 373

3028. 394. 503

155

421. 454

262

399

398

370

423

HackrInian. Charles W..

I.add-Franklin

lag

l.at.iiardia. Fiiirello H.

I.anslon Monotype Machine Co..

I.anlern slides ______^__

l.a Rose. K. S.

l.aughlin. Harry H.

Legend _______^__^____

__. 394

423

.276A. 503

499A

—437. 438
405-409

329A

356A

_302B. 503

INDEX

l.rttt :

Camrr*

Manual
I. rill. y.. lat. .- -
l.rrov trllrrinf prn*
l.rtlrr. Ilrnr* M.

IVni

I'halnirnphK

l.rllrrpmi prinlin(

l.rllrtt, riilniil

Lihrtly Maiiaiinr

Uima l.c»romolivr H orkt, Inr.

I.inhof mmrra

l.inolriint lilork

I.inolM''

l.tlrrary IttfrtI

l.ilhoKraphrri Nalional AMfxialion, Inr.

I.ilhniiraphir prinlinn

Lilhonraphir Trrliniral Koiindalton

i.ilhnprini Compant of Nrx York, Inr.

lor«.<. KawKond

l.anarilhtiiir tralr .^_^____,_

l.orrni rharl -_____^

l.orrni. M. O. _

Lo* Angrlri:

Timrt _^____^___^

I'nion Railroad SlalioB ^— ^____^_

l.uckirth. Malthrw _^____

Luminoui paini ^____

. J9:a

404

-IOTA

t::. \:\

404. 400

.riA

3H0

LIS. 44 1 A

375

2f>

4T0

4s:

.1<»7K

4IS

4.16

39A. :.w

437

436

437

433 B

4<»3A

S03

331 33H, S03

337

471

-402A. 40JR

42H

489

MarFlwrr & Crandall. In<

Marhinr labiilalion

Manaiinr of Ball Strrrt-

Magnilirr -

Manninic, barren H

Map:

Arrial

Air route .^_^^______

Ba>r

Chart {Sem mlto Statiatical map).

Contour

Crot>halche<l

Diilorted

Dot - .

Flow

131 B

.114A. 304A. 30IIB

- 41 1 A

171. 23S

Crographic
Crologic _
Cuidr - _
Hitlorical .
Hurricane

.160. 170. 177. SOI

1S6

1S4

S03

- _ 231-237. S02
_17»-1H6. 270. S02
-23H-242. 4SV, S02
_ 1K7-193. S02

216-230. S02

1S6

. 1S6

H«droKraphie

Information OBrt

Kr.

Mraturinic device „

Mechanical inlrnailjr ihadiiiC-

Navigation

Orangr-pecl

Pictorial

Pin . a_

Pro)rrlien (See Prajection.)

Proporlional . S04

Relief 170-177. 492B. SOS

Route 161-169. SOS

Statistical 1S3-242. SOS

Topographic . _ _ _ . „ 1S6. ISS. 233A

TralSr i02B. 219. 222. 223. 224A. 224B, 127. 229. SOS

« rather 216A. 216B. 217A. 21H. 232A. 232B.

233B. 234A. 236

161-169. 4S6. S03

204. 20S

218

1S6

ISS

1S6

182B

. 1S6

. 1S8

.167. 168. 169. 480B. S04
-187-193, 497. 499B. S04

With bar chart

Uilh circle chart

Hilh curre chart ——

Vilh lector chart ,

«ilh xmboli

Marchand Diorama ^'^

Market batkrt

Marki. Lionel S

Maitarhuietli inttiiiHa af Tccboalagy

Maswell

Mead Corp. ^_ _

Mechanical inlenaitjr (kadioc aap

Median _ _ .

Mcrcator, Ccrardaa

200-207

194-199

196. 197. 2t8-210. 263. 274

194-199

211 2IS

494

J65A. 26SB

39B

1S2

423

-443. 446. 44a. 4S3

IM2B

120. USA

ISS

Merralnr prnjeelion
Mrrediin I'uliliihin* « •

Mrlropniilan I ifr III. Ill

Mirrnfiln,

Mllr.. Kll..e1l \
Mllinn ll.a.llr. I n
Mlii.rnir.pl, ni.rhinr
Ml>l<eo.c..pe

Minite.ftia Mining and Maiiiifariiinitg (

Miniieatila \'alle% (ianning Lniiipati*

Mixioippi Hirer Conimiiiinn

Monol%pe

Mnnianin Chemiril < ■■

Moore, i Dnnfor.!

Morgan. « ilbr.l l>

MnlioM I'irli.rr S,rr.,.

Moving average

Moting loUl

Mlldgell. Briire I).

Mnllihlh

Multiple Atii eharl

Mulliplei Diiplat V,Mu{r Co

Miintell. A. II.

Mutual Rroailratling (^o.

National Aanociilinn nf (>i>l ArroiinlanI
National Amocialiun nf Motor Bui t)p

nf Com

4H. S9A, I9B,

!IN. 2Hb. 2HhB. 2H9, 2V|

rralori

ISS
I23B
S93B

4««

4)6

i:iR
<):a

43JA
171

■ ISA
IS6
437
3hH

l-.tB

1. 109

io:<;

B. S03
S03

IS. 16
411

10^ B

I9IA

;i. 427

4S9

329A

1H2A

2HIB. 286

I90A

4h:b

133B. 27S
480B
32IA

Nalinnal Anlnmnbile Chaiiih
Nalional Ca.h Kegiiler Cn.
Nalional Kdiiralional Aiinrialion
Nalinnal Ke*li\al Aiioeialinn
Nalinnal Kleelric Light Aiioeialinn
Nalinnal Induilrial Conference Bnard III. 119. 146. 117.

ISl. 107. 363. 364
Nalinnal Reinurrei Bnard {Sri- alio Ffd>-ral (hart

:S. 95. I27B. 110. 16t. 1(,S. l(.hA. 168.

174. 175. 1114. 1H5. 1»H. IW. JIO. 214.

219, 222, 234A. 267. 291B

Conwiiilire (Sv National Re-

Uook)

Nalinnal Reiniircei

iniircei Bnard.)
Nalinnal Machine Tool Buildrri Aitocialion 493B

Nalinnal Tube Co. 486

Naiion't Hutin.,, ._ 466A

Navigation map ^ _ 156

Na% igalinnal

rharl

1S6

New Jerse\ Deparlmenl of Indilulioni and Agencies 316

New Jeriev Stale Planning Bnard—. 179B

New York Building Congrei. 141

New York Cilv Tunnel Aulhnrily 404A. 404B

New Y'nrk l'!niplo«ing Prinleri Aiincialion. Inc. 43S

New York Federal Heierve lOhA. lUB. I32A, 132B. 112.

269A. 2H5A. 2K5B. 2«7B. 291A.

301A. 30IB. 309A. 36IB

New Ynrk H.rald Trihunr _ 41. 43. 1H3A. 2HSC. 46«,

488A. 499A

New Ynrk Journal & Amrriean 29A

New York Tim.-, 63A. 479B. 480A

New York K orldTvlrtram _ 469

New York World'i Fair. 1939 60. 1S9. 207. 279. 29JB.

330A. 492B. 49JA. 495B. 496

466B. 467A

423

3S6B. 3S7A

^7 IB

Nr'U- Yorker .

Newinn

Nnlan. T. V

Normal, deviation from

Nnrnial trend _ —

Norlh Jerie> Transit Coniniiitiaa

_ J27

OKre of Indian AITairt

Olfiel Gravure Corp.

OITiet :

Ink ^

Printing
Ogden. r. K.
Dgive rharl
I00<~^ band chart
I00<~( bar chart

453

436
26
331 33H, S03
.91. 297 8. S03
51. 88. 92 lOS. 123A. IJ«A. 132.
137A. 139A. 144B. USA. 152. 294.
297B. 4&4A. 560A. S04

Stamp
lOCf block chart
100<^ Kjuare chart , _ _
Opacil. (.See alto PaM^)-
Optical illuaion

9*
149. 152. S04
.149. IS2. 3*4
444

314

510

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

Orsn|tr-prrl map ^.

Organifilion rharl — .

Oring. Guy

Orthonraphic projeclion-

Orlhological Inilitule

Odwald

ISH

^9-67, 16S, S04

- 4S4

1S4

427

Projrrlart {Svv alio l.anlrrn tlidrt)

I'rnofrcadrr't niark> .

Proportional map „ ____________

I'rolrarlor

Itonirlric
Public Srrvicr Company of Norlhrrn lllinoit

49H. SOOB, 500C

442

S04

36«B

357A
4bOA

Pacific Cat I KIcclric Co. ______________ 3SSA

Paprr:

Colored 371

Croii-irclion (Sra alio Croi(>icclion paper) 367

Machine - 443

Prriturr bulkrr 444

Sclrclion of - 443-448

L'lilily - . . 367

Paragon Rrvolutr Corporation 411

Paiadrna, California, City Managrr 'i)>, 2<>H

Palton. AI«on C. „ _. _. .. . Jl

Paullin. Charlri O^ IS3, 204. 205

Pa^nr Fund _ 27

P»ai». C. v.. Co 430.431

Prdigrrr chart (Sur aUo Grneology and Cenetict
chartt) 43

Pencil lengthjti^r , J70

Pen. ruling 374B

Prrcrntagr chart

Band chart

Bar chart .

Curve chart „

Perfei camera

^94, 29HA

504

397 B

444

35H

_ 35 B

I'erkint. B. ¥., & Son*, Inc.

Peroiio. I.uigi _. .

Philadelphia Evi-ning Bullvlin .—

Photo-Kngraveri Board of Trade 416, 417

Photoengra\ ing _. __ „ - 421

Photograph, initrucliont for handling 412. 413

Photomontage 401A

Photoniural 498, 490B. 49H

Pica type ..376B

Piclogram 504

Pictorial chart n4A. 457. 461

Bar charl. 121-131.211.365,504

Map 167. 168. 169. 4H0B. 504

Pie chart 504

Pike, E. W.. ft Company 411 A

Pin 192B. 193

Map -- _ 187-193,497.4996.504

Planographic printing

Platet [Sff alto Printing). .-

Playfair. William

Plotting „

Plymouth Motor Corp.

Pneumatic Scale Corp., Ltd..

Pogue. Joieph E,

Polyconic projection

Potter Products. Inc.
Potleri. quanlilative-

Power

Prinler'§
Printing _

Cravure

Intaglio

/nik.

~43S. 436, 44 IB

504

81. 26bB

504

488A

490A

.2848, 330B, 332B. 340

- . 155

371. 375

_ 475-478

86B

..242. 259A

435-442

Letterpreii

Lithographic _J

OITiet

Planographic ._
Preii, portable-
Relief

Rologravure

Probability paper

Procedure rhmrt

Proceii chart ___________________

Product Enfinevring ______________

Production control chart _ ._.._.__._
Production Yearbook {Set Collen Preil.)

Profit graph _ ._.

Progreai chart .^_____.___

Progreitive «v»>«g«
Protection:

Aiiniuthal

Map

Mercator -_________^_____

437. 441C

_43S, 437. 441C

435. 441 A

436

. 436

_435. 436. 44 IB

- 376A

435, 441 A

437

333 B. 338

504

i69B

504

^56-262. 462, 504
_ 286, 288A, 504

Orthographic

Polyconic

Stercographic

176
171
155
154
155
1S4

Quantitative cartooni
Quantitative pottert

Rai«i, Krwin _

Rand McNally & Co„

Range bar chart —

Rank chart _ —
Rale-of-change chart-
Rating charl

Ratio chart _. ._..

Paper - — — _ — —

Reading, Kngland. County Borough of.-

Kediciit Letter Co.

Reducing glatft - .^-__«

Reference symbol _______

Regenaleinrr (]orp.

Re^ionul Plan .Association .^-___

Reiiiforcemrntt (St-e alto Binding).-—

Relationship charl _

Relative liar charl

464-474
475-478

.153. 231. 238
154

JMSA, 2fl5B. 361 B. 504

504

.3h:

129

375

410

, 305

Relief Map

Relief printing ____________

Reproduction, methodt

Rriifu of Wniru'j

Rhode.. Henri J.

Rice. John I

Richardson. Arthur H

Richmond, Leonard ______

Higgleman. John R

Risl, Charles ._ '

Roberts, Wridon, Rubber Co_

Rolleiflex camera —

Root-two

Ross, Charles *J., Co. _____ ___^

Rotogravure printing ____________

Route map

Royal Statistical Society of London..

Rubber cement

Ruling:
Horizontal ________________

_441A, 44IB. 44 1 C
184. 202B

450

68-72. 505

505

.170-177. 492B. 505

441A. 435

429 434

342 B

436

499A

381

475

24, 263. 292

283

^ 372

397 K

384

420A

.161-169. 505

358

368

Vertical

Salva \tnnnf(nntg»wai

Sampling

Sargent, Walter

Sasco Photo Products

Saturday t'.vtninft Pott

Scucheri, .Mario and Mabel-

Seale

Broken _ ______

382. 383. 389. 391

-127A, 135A. 173

178. 1H7

428

For area of circle

Time

407 B

483

404

385

387

194

392

41 IB

.320. 321A, 321B. 505

3SXB

505

Scaling copy _____

Scatter chart

Schairer. J. F ..

Schedule charl

Science Service, Inc.

Screen

Seattle Star .._______

Sector chart ..._______

('umulative

Made on typewriter-

On map .. 194-199

Senii-logarilhmic chart ^ 505

Shading (^rr ufso Halftone and Crosshatching)

98. 100. 116, 180. 186. 278A. 278B.
3S0, 380, 420B. 421. 422

Shading film 419

Shaw Blue Print Machine Co. 431

Shew hart. W. A 381

._271B. 409

505

_ 183B

-81-91, 363. 505

378

Shot-gun charl

Signature (.See alto PrinllBg).

Simondt, Frank __— _

Sinclair, Prior. — ___^_.^____

Slide rule

U20, SOS

SOS

_ . 206
_ . 328B
41 IB

INDEX

511

Smith, I.. C, T»pr»«rilrr Cu.

Smilh. «. II.

Stnilhrirwrtl l>lll<llli||

Sodrtalrniii. % alln

Soil Ciiiiarrvalian Srrtirr

South Mmirhiina H*il»a« Co

Sparinii divijrt

Sprrd l.taphir ranirra

Sprrdnat Maniirarliintif ^o.

Spridrl. Cliarlri « .. ( ».

SppiM-rr l.rni (!o.

Spiridlrr t Sauppr, Inr.

Spiral Hindinii Co.

Slahl. 4.iiilav K.

Stall rliarl

Slampinii I >•<• «/•<> Hindinii)

Standard Mailing Marliinr Co. .

Standard Matnlir.. Inr. SOR. l>ri4A.

Standardt (or tiraphir I'rrtrntati
IS,;- Timr Srrirt Charuj

Stanford I nivrrtil*

SlatitlK-al map

Slali»tirian** »«alr

Sirinrr I'aprr Co.

Strrrographir projrrtion

Strrrol* pr

Strvrni Holrl

Stroblilr Co.

Sunrav Srratrh board

Siirfarr rharl

S%nibol .

(In map -^^_

Hrfrrrnrr _^

376R

?f>2

I'.n
ii:

IhO
•<UH
\:il<

J"<Tlt

491B

JT2

insii

lOhA

IS I

JhIA

USB. ZMA. 2H7R, SOS

_ *%\

4]:h

JHIA. 2H2A. 2V2. .lOoU
Comniilirp

J22
IS3-242, SOS
JS3
422
IS4
421
45()

422
2'»4. 505

121

215
39S

.211
.382.

Tabirt S Tirkri C*>

Tabulation

MrrhanKal

Tackf

Tallf>. B. B.

Talhinn

, __ 375

33-42, 3V6, SOS

193

170

33. 34

Trl.buii. Arthur R. - 24

Trninomrroff. V. A, 24. 309B. 333B. 334. 33S, 370

Trttilr Kronomict Bureau, '"^ 117 B, 352

Trtiile It arid 27

r/iu U rrk 4738

Thorndikr. Chuck 464

Thrrr-dimrniional nirthodi 354-3S9. SOS

Timr >ralr 3'»2

Time Srrir, Chartt 113. 116. 264. 272. 2H0. 2<»H. 2<<'*.

3IH. 349. 3H 1-396. 440. 441

_ _ 1. 247

ISS. 15b. 2.13A

Tepiral indrx

Topoicraphir map _ -

Toronto Indutlrial ConimUtiaD.

Trar.. .M. K.

Traftr chart {Ser olio TraKr map)

TraSc map - 202B. 219. 222. 223. 224A

162B. 190B

_ _ . 125B

74A

4B. 227.

229. SOS

462

365

419. 4S3

32. 36H

Trantronlinrnlal and Wrslrrn Air. loc.

Traniil Jouiniil ^

Tranfograph Corporation -.^__^.— _-^���

Trantoxraph thadinn film .._^_— ^

TrantparrnI iiiatrrial _

Travrlrrt Insurance Company 32, 42, 319A. 47U

Trend lilB. 275. :H4B. 2KSC, 2S6. 292. 3H5. 463

Trroholm, J. T.. t Company . _ 3blA

TrianRlri '. 369A

TrianKular :

C»ardirtale papar 3S9A

Scale 3S3

Tricolor camera 398

Tricolor Hrvin camera - 398A

Tnlincar chart 1 JS9A. 3S9B

T-».|uarr 369A

Turntable 49IB. 4V2A

Two-directional bar '■'">« SOS

Two-. at bar chart 1 SOS

T.pc:

face 4S3

Siae 4*8. 4S3

Style 439

Typcvrilrr 377

Ucclric 379

Si; lea 176B

t'llra tinlrl paint

I ndrrxond Mli»t ( liber ( ompant

I moil l<ailrn.id station, l.oi Aniele

I ni>ri.il< »l < htrago I're.i

I niird state! (.n«ernnieiil :

Ariii«, Corpt n( V ngineeri

lliiirau o( Acririiltiiral Kronoiiiin

Bureau of (.hrniMlrt and Soili

Bureau of I'ublic Hoad.

Bureau of Kerlaiiiatinii

Citilian t~onter«ation Corp«

CoatI and t.endrlir Siirvet

llepnrtiiirnt of Aki iniltiire H4. Hii \ . m.i It.

Departiiiriil of Con

Intrtin
Jllatirr
labor

Adii

Departlnrlil
Itrparlmrnt
Drpartiiiriit

Kmpl. nl

(arm (redit
Krdrial linr.
federal l'o»
lederal lte.<
f'orenl Service

(ieneral I and Office

(ieologira! Surve>

I'nited States (.o\ ernnieni— Conlinucd
Map>

of IlltrtligMll
Board

489

476

402A. 402B

439

156

160

I'lU. I9SA

IS6

61A

'. ISH

. I > .H. IHI,

191. |><5. 202A. 27«. 277, 27HB,

2H«B. 7n'l. .'US. 302B, 313, 314,

.l.'lll. 321, 362. 422. 495 A

r 76. i:ilB, I.I9A, I39B, 271A,

29:A. JOJA. 32HA. JJ6. 33H

^ .. 44. 46. 69

. 499B

i7A. 67, 86L', t06B. UO. 308A

290

ion 2H4A

499 B

3SA, 97. i73B

SOOA

1S6

ISS

_ISS. 1S6, 160
National Kraourcet Board (jie« Nalional Kriourcet
Hoard)

Affair. 1$6

I Ser»icc liO

Office of liidi
Soil Conierva
Work. ProKrr

• Adiiiinitlralion 6IB, 82A, 96. 99, 102A.

lOIA. iniR. 104, 105, I07A, lOKA, 110.

IIJ. II3B. UO. IJJA. 134A. 136, 137A,

1.1:B, lllH, nil. 149, 177A, I7H, IHO,

III2B, 1117, IHIIA, IHHB, IH9. 211. 230.

2.HB. 2711. 290A. 300. 304B. 306A, 310.

311. 312. 315. 317,341, 342A, 343, 34S, 346

Slatet G>ptuni Company . . 477

I'n'ilrd Slatrs .\<'u«

tniled Slalei Steel Conipaoy-.

Utility paper

28A

-494. 49SB
367

Value (.Si'f n{jo Color)-

Van Cleef Broa

Variable _ .. ,

Dependent -^_»_».

Independent

VariTvper

.42SB. 427B

. 371

320

263. S02

Vioual caplioni

263. SOS

._ 379

_3HA. 3HB. 39, «. 129, 131A. 249,
263. 26SA, 265B. 266A. 267, 36S

\lalker Kngraving Corporation— 2S

Walker. Ileirn M. ^ _ 24,35

Ward. Robert _ ^ 231

Vlarren, 1- . I).. Company 440

Weather map 2I6A. 216B. 217A. 218. 232A. 232B,

233B. 234A. 236

Weber, Martin J. 380,4018

Welch, U. M., Mauiifacluring Company S2A, S2B

Uelp, (;eor|;c 427B

Wen.el, J. 343

Writinghouie Ktrelrie Manufarluring Campaajr 64

WheeUrigbt, William Bond 443

W biting- I'loter I'aper Company

Wirettllched binding

*ood block _-__-

Vood- Began Initrumrnt Compaa;

Horld'$ Uork .. _

\(olnian illuttration b*ar4_^_— _
U ricQ lettering pen ■

Wycr, S. S. —^-^^—.^—^.^

- 426

- 4S0

- 41S
. S74A
. 342B

- 411
. S74A

- IN

Young, Charle* M.

-332A. 423

Zee chart

Zeita, (Jarl. Inc.

Zero line

Zip-a-Tonc Compaay

Ml, 3M. 317. 4Sa

41t

512

GRAPHIC PRESENTATION

f\SVA\UG

Redrawn. Courtesy of Dave Gerard. Crawfordsville. Indiana

c/fn old
Cliinede

'On€ Picture IS Worth
TcN Thousand Words

to the present Year 1805.

Uniud %<«u

Afn«rtc •

llllliir

From Frontispiece of Book by WILLIAM PLAYFAIR. An Inquiry Into the
Permanent Causes of the Decline and Fall of Powerful and Wealthy Nations.

London, 1805.